Home

Warning

1. Carefully lift the IMAGING MODULE and gently set it on a flat working surface 22 ES 8100 111C 5 RearLoHalf Front View Rear View Figure 4 40 Removing the IMAGING MODULE 2005 J uly Rev 7F3318 4 45 Service Manual 4 11 2 SCANNER ASSEMBLY Disassembly 1 Remove the SUPPLY CARTRIDGE A Warning When the POWER CORD is plugged in hazardous voltages are present in some areas of the IMAGER These voltages can cause severe injury or death De energize the IMAGER and disconnect the POWER CORD Remove the IMAGING MODULE from the IMAGER 4 11 1 Unplug the flat CABLE from the SCANNER Figure 4 41 Loosen both ATTACHING SCREWS from the flat CABLE CLAMP closest to the looped end of the flat CABLE Then remove the CLAMP to free the looped end of the CABLE Disconnect the ELECTRICAL PLUG from the OPTICS HOME SENSOR Unclip and push down the ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR for the TRANSLATION MOTOR to free it from the PLATEN CONNECTOR PLATE 8 Remove the 2 SCANNER ASSEMBLY ATTACHING S
2. m Pickup Motor DCM2 Cartridge Presence Sensor S1 Film Surface Sensor S4 Film Out DE TD 5850 S5 j 1 Elevator Home Sensor S12 Elevator Motor Step 8 7 3318 2005 J Rev Section 8 QuickSheets The system was initialized and film if any was cleared from the 8150 before the following feeder tests occurred Pickup Assembly Tests Feeder Module diagnostics begin about 27 seconds after power on with the pickup assembly test This procedure first determines the current position of the pickup mechanism and then moves the pickup to the home position If the pickup does not position as commanded the process is retried If the problem remains after a total of three tries P921 is displayed Note This retest before error display a
3. Rear View Front View RemoveTransR ollers Figure 4 10 Removing the TRANSPORT ROLLER SET ASSEMBLIES 2005 July Rev 7F3318 Service Manual 4 4 DENSITOMETER ASSEMBLY 4 4 1 DENSITOMETER MODULE 1 De energize the IMAGER and disconnect the POWER CORD A Warning When the POWER CORD is plugged in hazardous voltages are present in some areas of the IMAGER These voltages can cause severe injury or death 2 Open the UPPER HOOD Remove 4 ATTACHING SCREWS Figure 4 11 4 Slide the DENSITOMETER MODULE out far enough to gain access to the RJ 45 PLUG on the right Side of the DENSITOMETER BOX Disconnect the RJ 45 PLUG from the DENSITOMETER BOX Remove the MODULE and setit on a work bench Two each side 8100 78A Figure 4 11 Removing the DENSITOMETER MODULE 7F 3318 2005 J uly Rev B Section 4 Disassembly Reassembl 4 4 2 DENSITOMETER EXIT SENSOR 59 1 Power down and remove the DENSITOMETER MODULE 4 4 1 A Warning When the POWER CORD is plugged in hazardous voltages are present in some areas of the IMAGER These voltages can cause severe injury or death 2 Remove the SCREW on the right side of the SENSOR COVER BOX F
4. Cartridge Open Sensor On Feeder MCS Yes ux Stop Rollback T Motor DCM1 Mee Stop Rollback Film Cartridge Failed to Open Figure 6 23 Front Door Close Operation 2005 July Rev B 7 3318 6 45 Service Manual RF Tag Cartridge Open Sequence Update Block 5 Read Tag ID Imager Serial Number Read and Validate Blocks 0 4 Model Number Update Blocks 6 10 Figure 6 24 RF Tag Open Cartridge Sequence ID RF TagOpen RF Tag Write Event Data Update New Header Location in Block 5 RF Tag Update Calibration Data Set CalSource to Source Code Value in Block 12 ID RF Tag Write Figure 6 25 RF Tag Write and Update Calibration Data 6 46 7 3318 2005 J uly Rev B Section 6 Theory of Operation 6 4 10 Special Service Mode Operations When the IMAGER is operating in service mode SERVICE SWITCH actuated the MCS always sees the FRONT DOOR as being closed Be familiar with the following operations for controlling film CARTRIDGE functions when in service mode e To close the film CARTRIDGE and open the FRONT DOOR Use the LOCAL PANEL Open Door key The CARTRIDGE will close the ELEVATOR will rise and the FRONT DOOR will open as normal But the LOCAL PANEL will indicate 20 208 Door Open Fail The FRONT DOOR still appears closed in service mode Tolowerthe ELEVATOR and open the film CARTRIDGE Setthe SERVICE SWITCH to normal mode The
5. 6 4 6 2 2 1 Digital Output Circuit 6 5 6 2 2 2 UART Circuit for Serial Communication with MCS 6 6 6 3 DRE SoftWare pirtee Rast uoc kate tence 6 6 6 3 1 General Software Functions 6 6 6 3 2 Main DRE Software 6 7 68 5 PACSEIDEMIM qi che te one ee E RM 6 7 6 3 3 1 MIM Delivery Interface 6 8 6 3 3 2 DICOM Modality Preferences Database MPDB 6 1 6 3 4 MCS Interface 5 6 10 6 3 4 1 6 10 6 3 4 2 MCS Image 6 10 6 3 4 3 MCS MIS Command 6 11 6 3 4 4 Service Providers 6 11 2005 J uly 7F3318 vii Service Manual 6 3 5 6 3 6 6 3 7 MCS Database Server Web SeNi svo nae po desta aed WR AER dae ees Browsers for SERVICE LAPTOP and LOCAL PANEL 6 3 7 1 Active Server Pages ASP for SERVICE LAPTOP and LOCAL PANEL REX 6 3 7 2 Data Formatters for Service Tool and LOCAL PANEL 6 4 Machine Control System 5 6 4 1 6 4 2 6 4 3 6 4 4 6 4 5 6 4 6 6 4 7 6 4 8 6 4 9 6 4 10 Master Slave
6. 4 46 4 11 3 PLATEN FILM SENSOR 50 sid ERR E RR 4 48 4 11 4 OPTICS HOME SENSOR 57 ERE ERE RR 4 49 4 11 5 Optics Translation MOTOR Step 4 and Capstan 4 50 4 11 6 FILM CENTERING ASSEMBLY and CENTERING MOTOR Step 7 4 51 4 11 7 PLATEN ROLLER MOTOR Step 2 4 52 4 11 8 PLATEN NIP ROLLER 1 4 53 4 11 9 PLATEN NIP and DRIVE ROLLERS 4 54 4 11 10 VIBRATION MOUNTS ssa 4 56 4 11 11 0PTICS MO DULE 5 Pes ces d Et 4 58 POWER ASSEMBLY Gearien Ea aiat 4 62 MCS ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 4 63 DICOM RASTER ENGINE DRE COMPUTER 4 66 4 14 1 DRE HARD DRIVE CD ROM DRIVE or FLOPPY DRIVE 4 71 4 14 2 Removing the FLOPPY DRIVE 4 72 4 14 3 Removing the PCIO BOARD Ethernet BOARD or LOCAL PANEL TRANSMITTER 4 73 4 14 4 Removing the DIMM MEMORY BOARDS 4 74 4 14 5 Removing the DRE POWER 4 75 7 3318 2005 J Rev B Table of Contents Section 5 Tools Preventive Maintenance Cleaning 5 1 5 1 Required ToolS Mus dO HUM NIMIRUM 5 1 5 2 TEMPERATURE METER and PROBE Calibration 5 2 5 3 Serial Number Location
7. 2 HARNESS PickUp 4 meis ase S EROR hd adonde Reha 1 VACUUM PUMP ASSEMBLY 1 TUBING 5 1 PAD Heel Film 1 1 RACK Film 1 PLUNGER Valve Film Pickup 1 SLIDER Top Film Pickup olay 3 SLIDER Bottom Film Pickup e Edd 3 CUP Round Film 1 3 PICKUP MOTOR ASSEMBLY DCM2 1 GEAR MOTOR PICKUP 1 SWITCH Optical Flag Film Surface S4 Film Out 55 2 SWITCH Optical Interrupt Pickup Position S3 Cups Engaged S10 2 TAPE VHB Acrylic Foam 1 SCREW Cup Film Pickup os Ex dee cede a 3 SPRING Film Cups P laten 5_ 3 VALVE Poppet Film Pickup 1 CABLE Filter Pickup Motor 1 9 9 Service Manual Figure 9 6 ROLLBACK ASSEMBLY RF TAG 7 3318 2005 J Rev B 9 10 Section 9 Illustrated Parts Breakdown Figure 9 6 ROLLBACK ASSEMBLY RF TAG Item No Part Number SP8F0688 SP E2882 SP 74 0401 6529 7 S P96 0000 4221 6 Donne S P96 0000 2669
8. 6 4 6 2 Sensor Control 6 4 6 3 Film Pickup and Feed Functions 6 4 6 4 Cartridge Elevator Functions 6 4 6 5 Cartridge Rollback Functions Processor interface Board Power Supply MCS Print Sequence of Operation Special Service Mode Operations 6 5 AOC and GSM specs ee deed urit dete 6 5 1 6 5 2 6 5 3 viii Purpose of AIOG ved eip tase EN Purpose of GSM Power up Calibration and Print Sequence 6 11 6 11 6 11 6 11 6 11 6 12 6 13 6 13 6 13 6 13 6 14 6 15 6 15 6 16 6 16 6 16 6 17 6 17 6 18 6 18 6 20 6 21 6 23 6 23 6 25 6 25 6 26 6 26 6 27 6 27 6 28 6 28 6 29 6 29 6 30 6 31 6 31 6 32 6 32 6 47 6 47 6 47 6 47 6 49 7 3318 2005 J Rev B Table of Contents Section 7 Troubleshooting een n n nn nnn 7 1 7 2 7 3 7 4 7 5 2005 July Rev B 7F3318 General Troubleshooting Using the Service Tool Service WebLink 7 2 1 7 2 2 7 2 3 7 2 4 7 2 5 7 2 6 7 2 7 7 2 8 7 2 9 7 2 10 7 2 11 7 2 12 7 2 13 7 2 1
9. Figure 9 4 DENSITOMETER Figure 9 5 FILM PICKUP ASSEMBLY Figure 9 6 ROLLBACK ASSEMBLY RF TAG Figure 9 7 ELEVATOR ASSEMBLY Figure 9 8 VERTICAL TRANSPORT ASSEMBLY Figure 9 9 FILM FEED ROLLER ASSEMBLY Figure 9 10 IMAGING EXPOSURE ASSEMBLY Figure 9 11 POWER ASSEMBLY Figure 9 12 ELECTRONICS gt iy eek re aoi te rri Y ee Figure 9 13 DICOM RASTER ENGINE DRE Figure 9 14 INTERNAL CABLING Section 10 Diagrams Ga e a Cara 10 1 2005 J uly Rev 7F3318 System Functional Diagrams 8 79 8 80 8 81 8 82 8 83 8 85 8 86 8 87 8 88 8 90 8 92 8 94 8 96 8 97 8 98 9 1 9 1 9 2 9 4 9 6 9 7 9 8 9 10 9 12 9 13 9 14 9 15 9 17 9 18 9 19 9 21 10 1 10 1 xiii Section 1 Specifications Section 1 Specifications 1 1 Dimensions Unpacked Height 116 8 cm 46 in Top Cover closed 158 1 cm 62 1 4 in Top Cover open Width 63 5 cm 25 in Depth 66 0 cm 26 in Front Door closed 124 5 cm 49 in Front Door open Weight 204 kg 450 16 Packed Height 145 cm 57 in Width 81 cm 32 in Depth 99 cm 39 in
10. Been A table or curve used in closed loop Kodak DryView LASER IMAGERS that relates each digital input value to a corresponding target value of perceived brightness TFT Set Asetof15 TFTs that represent 15 different curve shapes each of which is associated with a corresponding user selectable contrast selection 1 15 See paragraph 2 12 3 for descriptions of individual TFT Sets Contrast user selectable value from 1 15 that selects the correct TFT from the TFT Set for the current print Density A user selectable value that determines the maximum density Dmax used in printing Smoothing A user selectable value 1 15 that specifies a level of smoothness sharpness in transi Type tion between density differences on film PLUT Presentation LookUp Table GSDF Grayscale Standard Display Function 2 11 2 Selecting the Image Quality Parameters Appropriate to the MODALITY Use Tables 2 4 and 2 5 to selectthe Image Quality parameters The selections are based on MODALITY type They also depend on whether the MODALITY is GSDF compliant and whether it uses PLUTS fthe MODALITY is notDICOM GSDF compliant use the procedure in paragraph 2 12 3 e Ifthe MODALITY is DICOM GSDF compliant and does not PLUTs or uses PLUTS for only some images use the procedure in paragraph 2 12 4 fthe MODALITY is DICOM GSDF compliant and uses PLUTS for all images do not use either procedure Leave the Image Quality parameters atthe def
11. CABLE PCIO Digital Output SP5F2216 BOARD FastEthernet 3 Com Si Cds SP96 0000 4282 8 BOARD TO Ur rus SP7FTI33 o ves BOARD Local Panel Transmitter Db SPJF6023 CABLE Serial ae Ete Ewing T2 aes SP7F6024 5 I3 SP7E9764P POWER SUPPLY BOARD Memory 5 SP7E9781 HARD DRIVE SER EX uam ees CD ROM DRIVE TP errer nyte ae IN a vada FLOPPY DRIVE dcr seta hx xs sies dre a aa des FAN 9 20 7F 3318 2005 J uly Rev B Item No Part Number 5 7 1110 NotAvailable CODES NotAvailable NotAvailable DAS nce NotAvailable S P96 0000 2493 3 Odes ou SP96 0000 2846 2 Once SP96 0000 2401 6 10 NotAvailable T1 s NotAvailable 12 4 S P96 0000 2492 5 13 2554 S P96 0000 2496 6 14 SP96 0000 2518 7 TS 5 7 1114 16 SP 7F3357 eek E SN 5 7 1115 T8 SP96 0000 2864 5 ie 5 7 1194 20 5 7 1104 Zl 22 5 74 0401 9144 2 SP96 0000 2874 4 i eg SP96 0000 5354 4 25 4 sw SP96 0000 2510 4
12. Kodak DryView 8150 LASER IMAGER SERVICE MANUAL 1961259 7F 3318 07 05 Revision History The original issue and revisions of this Service Manual for the Kodak DryView 8150 LASER IMAGER are identified as follows Issue date 07 05 All pages are dated November 2004 in the initial issue Text Pages Changed in Current Rev Revision Title AS __ LL f eee 4 added callout 10 p7 deleted fourth bullet and added a new bullet p15 added step 9 p26 added Configuring SCP and added a Note p32 revised Note text and deleted steps 2 5 p38 added overview and replaced screen image p39 added step a p40 replaced screen image p41 replaced screen image p42 revised Note and added step 29 p43 moved Training Key Operators to after Editing Service History p44 deleted par 2 8 p1 revised temperature spec p4 revised steps 3 and 6 revised screen image OB B B p1 p45 revised Caution B p1 revised Note p5 added procedure B p3 added Problem Cause Remedy p25 revised step p31 added Re loading the MP DB p70 added Using PCAnywhere p71 revised head ing to Using filtering and added Using Scripts p17 added 10 x x x Problem p33 deleted Note p35 revised step 7 p50 added Other Possible Causes p51 revised Summary p63 added Other Possible Causes and Film Pickup Suction Cup procedure p69 added Other Possible Causes p73 revised step 2 p81 added Other Possi
13. gt of Local Panel micro system Does Local Panel respond No Display DryView 8100 Run Local Panel diagnostics IMS Do SCSI load from disk to CPU Memory 12 075 Transfer m control to Display S00 Turn on Heater and SO Self Test _ _ Processor Motor Step 5 NY 11 sec Turn on Motor turn on begins to clear Processor film if any from Processor Initialize ports RAM Drum file system Temperature No 28 506 OK Yes Mount disk volume Initialize MIB 16 sec Display P000 Clearing Film Transfer config data Receive to MCS config data from DRE Yes Next Film Clearing Wait for Page Process instructions 8100 224B A Figure 7 3 MCS Self Test Startup 7 36 7F3318 2005 J uly Rev B Section 7 Troubleshootin Prev Pag Film Clearing Process Film clearing begins at about Contact 11 seconds after power on with turn on of the Processor Motor ensitometer It clears any film that may be in the processor the vertical micro system transport area the platen or the film pickup area Micro respond This step is not performed in software versions 1 0 3 and 1 1 2 16sec Wait up to Is S9 Is S9 blocked
14. 1 HARNESS MDB Power Supply 1 HARNESS Rollback 1 HARNESS Sensors Platen 1 HARNESS MCS Cherokee Power Supply 1 CABLE Densitometer MicroComm 1 CABLE deceit nabbed bas a edes 1 CABLE MCS Si Dil ca eee eE acu eat a Beene tras 1 CABLE Transport Sensor 1 HARNESS Power Mod 1 CABLE Sensor Vertical 5 1 NETWORK PATCH CABLE straight through 1 9 21 Service Manual BLANK PAGE 7F 3318 2005 J uly Rev Section 10 Diagrams Section 10 Diagrams 10 1 System Functional Diagrams Block diagrams and wiring diagrams for the electronic components in the Kodak DryView 8150 LASER IMAGER are located on the Health Imaging Digital Output Service Collection CD set as a separate document Look for 8150 Functional Diagrams document 7F 6723 There are 2 diagram sheets The DICOM RASTER ENGINE DRE is shown on Sheet 1 and the Machine Control System MCS on Sheet 2 2005 J uly Rev 7F3318 10 1 Service Manual BLANK PAGE 7F 3318 2005 J uly Rev Kodak and DryView are trademarks Printed in U S A 7F 3318 Rev J uly 2005 EASTMAN KODAK
15. 24 00 738 2005 July Rev B Section 2 Installation 2 3 3 Removing the LASER IMAGER from the PALLET 1 Prepare the FRONT PANEL of the SHIPPING CRATE to be used as a RAMP a Detach the 2 RAMP SUPPORTS from the Velcro STRIPS b Hook the RAMP SUPPORTS in the upright position RAMP SUPPORTS FRONT PANEL RAMP Velcro STRIP OOK H200_0012BAA 2 Turn the RAMP over 3 Position the RAMP so the 2 BOLTS in the base of the RAMP insert into the holes in the METAL PLATE on the PALLET PALLET METAL PLATE H200_0013BAA 2005 July 7F3318 2 5 Service Manual 4 Check that the STOP is all the way up If not loosen the LOCKNUT and adjust the STOP up as far as possible b t STOP H200 0015BA 2 5 On each side of the IMAGER a Use the Allen WRENCH from the ACCESSORIES PACKAGE to remove 4 BOLTS from each L BRACKET b Discard the BOLTS and L BRACKETS H200 0014AAA Caution Stand in front of the IMAGER as you control its movement down the RAMP The force of the IMAGER down the RAMP is about 36 kg 80 Ib Be careful notto tip the IMAGER or allow it to roll off the side of the RAMP The IMAGER weighs 204 kg 450 Ib 6 Move the IMAGER slowly down the RAMP 2 6 7F3318 2005 uly Rev B Section 2 Installation H200_0031AAA 2 3 4 Checking the Accessory Materials Check that the following materials are included in the ACCESSORIES PACKAGE A bag of 5 VOL
16. 1 FB Film Orientation PORTRAIT from SEU MIM Network 6 8 2004 16 09 14 371 SCP 1 FB Image Display Format STANDARD 1 1 from SCU MIM Network 6 8 2004 16 03 14 431 SCP Assact FB Min Density 002 from SCU Network 6 8 2004 16 09 14 441 SCP 1 FB Max Density 2 5 from SCU Network 6 8 2004 16 09 14 461 SCP Assacttl FB Border Density BLACK from SCU MIM Network 6 8 2004 16 09 14 501 SCP 1 FB Trim NO from CU MIM Network 6 8 2004 16 09 14 521 SCP 1 FB Magnification Type CUBIC from SCU MIM Network 6 8 2004 16 09 14 521 SCP 1 FB Smoothing Type from DB 5 MIM Network 6 8 2004 16 09 14 521 SCP Assacttl FB Smoothing Type fror DB 5 MIM Network 6 8 2004 16 09 14 531 SCP 1 FB Magnification Type after interpolation CUBIC Network 6 8 2004 16 09 14 531 SCP 1 FB Smoothing Type after interpolation NOR MAL MIM Network 6 8 2004 16 09 14 551 SCP 1 Illumination missing defaulting to 2000 gt ERR_MSG Missing Network 6 8 2004 16 09 14 571 SCP Assac 1 FB Reflected Ambient Light missing defaulting to 10 gt MIM Network 5 8 2004 16 09 14 591 SCP Assac 1 Film Box Creation is Complete Network 6 8 2004 16 09 14 631 SCP 1 Create Film FB N CREATE Confirmation 5 ent MIM Network 5 8 2004 16 09 15 202 SCP 1 Setting Image IB 5 Indication Received MIM Network 6 8 2004 16 09 15 202 SCP
17. 5 2 5 4 Preventive 5 3 bsd l eoa i acs codi ete ad dated 5 3 5 4 2 Supplies Required for PM 5 3 5 4 3 Call Checklist ds ees 5 4 5 4 4 20 000 Cycle PM Checklist 5 5 5 4 5 Cleaning the EXPOSURE PLATEN 5 6 5 4 6 Replacing the FRONT DOOR AIR FILTER 5 7 5 4 7 Replacing the CHARCOAL FILTER 5 10 5 4 8 Removing and Checking the PROCESSOR DRUM 5 11 5 4 9 Cleaning the DRUM HEAT SHIELD and PROCESSOR ROLLERS 5 13 5 4 10 Cleaning the FILM DIVERTER ASSEMBLY 5 15 5 4 11 Replace the PROCESSOR GASKET 5 17 5 4 12 Installing the DRUM 5 17 5 4 13 Completing the PM 5 19 5 5 Cleaning the OPTICS MODULE cc cece cece eee eens 5 20 Section 6 Theory of Operation 6 1 bl cay aoeew iene RR ERR etus virt uictis 6 1 6 2 The DICOM RASTER ENGINE DRE 6 2 6 2 1 DRE Hardware 6 2 6 2 1 1 DRE Computer Hardware Components 6 2 6 2 1 2 LOCAL PANEL 6 3 6 2 1 3 Image Processing in Main Memory 6 4 6 2 2 PCIO
18. H200 0025BAA 2005 J uly 7F3318 Service Manual 3 Connect the selected POWER CORD first to the IMAGER then to the wall outlet 2 5 3 Connecting the IMAGER to the Network H200 0026BAA Use the INTERNET DROP CABLE supplied in the ACCESSORIES PACKAGE to connectthe IMAGER to the customer network 2 5 4 Securing the IMAGER in its Operating Position 1 Review the Location Requirements for the IMAGER Refer to the Site Readiness Checklist for the Kodak DryView 8150 Laser Imager document 7F 3336 2 Position the IMAGER precisely where it normally will be used H200 0015BAA 3 Secure the IMAGER in position a Rotate the STOP clockwise by hand until it touches the floor b Tighten the LOCK NUT finger tight against the BASE of the LASER IMAGER 7338 2005July Rev B Section 2 Installation 2 5 5 Applying Power 1 Check that the HOOD and FRONT DOOR are closed and the REAR PANEL is installed 2 Remove the protective plastic COVER from the LOCAL PANEL 3 Press the POWER SWITCH to the ON position 2 6 Configuring the IMAGER 1 Use a straight through INTERNET PATCH CABLE to connect your LAPTOP COMPUTER to the Service Port under the TOP HOOD 2 Setthe IP Address of your LAPTOP COMPUTER to 192 168 0 2 the IP address of the IMAGER service port is 192 168 0 1 INTERNET PATCH CABLE Figure 2 1 Connecting the LAPTOP COMPUTER to
19. L gt Note Be familiar with the following operations for controlling FILM CARTRIDGE functions in the Service mode To close the FILM CARTRIDGE and open the FRONT DOOR use the LOCAL PANEL Open Door key The LOCAL PANEL will indicate 20 208 Open Door Fail because the FRONT DOOR still appears closed to the MCS in Service mode Tolowerthe ELEVATOR and open the FILM CARTRIDGE setthe SERVICE SWITCH to the Normal position The MCS will see the FRONT DOOR as being open Then setthe SERVICE SWITCH back to the Service position The MCS will see the FRONT DOOR as being closed and will lower the ELEVATOR and close the CARTRIDGE The IMAGER can now transport film 7 6 2 Isolating the General Area where Scratches are Occurring 1 Remove the 4 ATTACHING SCREWS for the DENSITOMETER MODULE and slide the MODULE out far enough to expose the COVER for the DENSITOMETER EXIT SENSOR see Figure 7 23 Connect your LAPTOP COMPUTER to the service port on the IMAGER Use SecureLink to connectto the IMAGER Launch the Service WebLink Check that a CARTRIDGE of transport film is loaded Start a film cycle Au a Select Diagnostics gt Test Prints gt MCS Transport 7 64 7F 3318 2005 J uly Rev Section 7 Troubleshootin MCS Transport MCS Trans e sends film through film path without ex ing it Press Run to initiate the test Status windaw dis ES SUCCESS Dr Se af the proces Copies 5 gt Status Read
20. LANYARD ETOBEDODIS i ev Pe See bec ades ud ni de OPER ales erae 1 Bes SP7F1016 HINGE Front DOOF 34 cet es ees d desee te te id ae e RUE ond 1 TU sues SP7F1074 _ SCREW Stop oe 1 DD uu NotAvailable CASTER vede eei reta goto d Nt s o od Canet gae adt 2 12 ote eas NotAvailable CASTER Fixed cui vett dedii ARE MADE AUR RET eaves ane ded 2 l3 x3 NotAvailable GUIDE Prop Rod Hood 1 NotAvailable PROP ROD ASSEMBLY Hood 1 SP7F1094 BACK PANEL ASSEMBLY 1 15 SP8F0043 CABLE ASSEMBLY 1 SP96 0000 5190 2 FILTER KIT ER oO eda ERROR REX wee eae 1 18A SP26 1011 4940 4 POWER CORD U S UL CSA Rated only Notshown 1 18B SP78 8077 4272 7 POWER CORD International Not shown 1 9 3 Service Manual Figure 9 2 FILM PROCESSOR ASSEMBLY 9 4 7F3318 2005 J uly Rev B Section 9 Illustrated Parts Breakdown 00 0 1000000000000000 0000000000000000 4 1 Figure 9 2 FILM PROCESSOR ASSEMBLY Sheet 2
21. Modify 2 Check that Port number is 5040 Association Limit is 12 e Source 5 DICOM 3 If the values are not correct a Click Modify b Enter the correct values c Click Save Cancel 2005 July 7F3318 Service Manual 2 6 5 Setting up Service Tracking 1 From the main menu of the SERVICE TOOL select System Information gt Identification System Identification Identification Settings The following items are used to identify the product for service tracking Model Name Serial Number K Number 10000000000 Service Phone Number 1 200 322 2910 2 Windows OS ID 51273 270 461 1002 09620 Service Code Hospital Name Modify 2 Click Modify 3 Enter the correct information in the following fields Model Name Service Phone Number Phone Number L gt Note The K Number should match the decal on the machine Serial number changes require Level 5 certification 4 Click Save 2 6 6 Configuring SCP Services The Kodak DryView 8150 LASER IMAGER comes with a Modality Preferences Databse MP DB When a modality sends information to the 8150 the first time the software will look at the DICOM unique ID and check for a match in the MPDB table If it finds a match it willsend a TFT and contrast density settings L gt Note Before this configuration procedure can occur each MODALIT
22. RF READER BOARD This BOARD receives commands from the RF TAG INTERFACE BOARD It processes data for transmission to the RF ANTENNA receives RF data from the ANTENNA and responds to the RF TAG INTERFACE BOARD RF ANTENNA BOARD The ANTENNA transmits to and receives RF energy from the RF TAG ROLLBACK OPEN SENSOR S13 This SENSOR conducts high output whenever it is not blocked by the VANE on the bottom of the ROLLBACK CARRIAGE When the CARTRIDGE LID is fully opened rolled back the VANE blocks the SENSOR and it turns off ROLLBACK OPEN SENSOR RF TAG MicroComm RF TAG lt z_ ANTENNA Coax INTERFACE Channel MCS 2 BOARD DIP SWITCHES 6 4 5 2 RF TAG Commands The MICRO on the RF TAG INTERFACE BOARD receives and processes the following commands from the MCS 2005 J uly 7F3318 6 27 Service Manual e Report Status e Reset Software Execute Diagnostics Report Firmware Version Number i e the micro firmware on the RF Tag Interface Board e Read the ROLLBACK OPEN SENSOR Read a Block of Data from the TAG Write a Block of Data to the TAG e Lock a Block on the TAG i e do not allow writing to the block e Read RF TAG ID e Read the RF TAG Details i e read information about the number of blocks bytes per block etc Readthe Version Number of the RF READER BOARD 6 4 6 Feeder Control Board The Feeder Control Board is responsible for extracting fi
23. 21 178 ROLLBACK Failed to Leave Home 21 179 ROLLBACK Failed to Move from Open Position 21 515 Calibration Print Failed c utr Ee EY REFERRE 21 624 Bad DENSITOMETER Data 21 631 Dmin Not MOE pe ee ath VAN Se ied hed 21 632 Dmax NOE Met 21 921 FEEDER Diagnostics Failure 25 922 RF TAG SUBSYSTEM Diagnostics Failure 25 931 RF TAG SUBSYSTEM Communications Failure 25 932 RF TAG SUBSYSTEM Communications Retry 26 163 J Loading Exposure PLATEN 26 164 Jam Loading Exposure PLATEN 26 165 5 Error 26 166 Film Jam at VERTICAL TRANSPORT 26 169 Jam Unloading Exposure PLATEN 26 542 5 5 0 26 543 J Prior to 26 544 Jam atDENSITOMETER Error 27 121 ATTENUATOR Error Lodi c arcte do 27 123 SPINNER Efor occ 27 602 Invalid POWER MONITOR Range with ATTENUATOR Open G 27 603 Invalid ATTENUATOR Optical Density Range 27 604 Invalid Laser Dynamic 8 32 8 33 8 34 8 35 8 36 8 37 8 38 8 39 8 40 8 41 8 42 8 43 8 44 8 45 8 46 8 47 8 48 8 49 8 50 8 51 8 52 8 53 8 54 8 55 8 60 8
24. 7F 3318 2005 J uly Rev B Section 4 Disassembly Reassembl NIP ROLLER S Notched surfaces of BEARING BLOCK Figure 4 48 Removing the PLATEN ROLLERS 2005 J uly Rev B 7F3318 4 55 Service Manual 4 11 10 VIBRATION MOUNTS Preliminary 1 Remove the SUPPLY CARTRIDGE A Warning 2 When POWER CORD is plugged hazardous voltages are present some areas of the IMAGER These voltages can cause severe injury or death De energize the IMAGER and disconnect the POWER CORD Remove the IMAGING MODULE from the IMAGER 4 11 1 L gt Note While the IMAGING MODULE is outside the IMAGER cover the top to avoid introducing dust or debris that may affect image quality Disassembly 1 Remove 8 HEX NUTS 8 32 securing the VIBRATION MOUNTS to PLATEN SUPPORT ASSEMBLY see Figure 4 49 Disconnect the GROUND STRAP atone end Remove the 4 PLATEN SHOULDER SCREWS 6 from the corners of the PLATEN SUPPORT ASSEMBLY and remove the PLATEN SUPPORT ASSEMBLY from the PLATEN ASSEMBLY Unscrew the 8 VIBRATION MOUNTS from the ISOLATOR BRACKETS attached to the PLATEN CHASSIS Reassembly 1 Install the 8 replacement VIBRATION MOUNTS into the ISOLATOR BRACKETS Tighten them so they are snug Carefully place the PLATEN ASSEMBLY onto the SUPPORT ASSEMBLY while guiding the 8 VIBRATION MOUNTS into the holes of the SUPPORT ASSEMBLY Install the 4 SHOULDER SCREWS Se
25. Densitometer LE Read Step in Step T Wedge Continue with Densitometer Processor Operation Report Value of Step ID Processori Yes IN PROCESSOR Timeout Yes Film Jam on 26 642 Processor Drum Film Jam in Area 4 Processor AT DENSITOMETER timeout 26 543 Film Jam in Area 5 Processor Film jam between Processor Drum and Densitometer Calibration Film Read Step Wedge Arm Step Wedge Report Step Wedge ot z o Continue with Processor Operation Figure 6 21 Processor Operation Sheet 1 of 2 2005 J uly Rev B 7 3318 6 41 Service Manual Processor Operation Sheet 2 of 2 Time to wait depends on film size Wait until film is 1 from densitometer MCS Wait until Film Length 1 inch Densitometer MCS Return Status of Get Densitometer Exit Densitometer Exit Sensor S9 Status Sensor S9 Densitometer be een Exit Sensor Timeout 5 sec ensitometer S9 Off Turn on Kicker Motor Step9 at High Speed 26 544 Film Area 5 for 1 sec Densitometer Film jam at exit near Densitometer Skip Dpatch if Manua Manual Mode is on Mode On Densitometer MCS Report Dpatch 77777777 Report Dpatch ID Processor2 Figure 6 21 Processor Operation Sheet 2 of 2 6 42 7F3318 2005 uly Rev B Section 6 Theory of Operation rrontvoorupen Sheet 1 of 2 S
26. Figure 4 34 Replacing the FEED ROLLER OPEN MOTOR 2005 J uly Rev 7F3318 4 39 Service Manual 4 9 4 FEED ROLLER MOTOR PULLEY 1 Remove the SUPPLY CARTRIDGE A Warning When the POWER CORD is plugged in hazardous voltages are present in some areas of the IMAGER These voltages can cause severe injury or death 2 De energize the IMAGER and disconnect the POWER CORD Remove the FEED ROLLER MODULE 4 9 1 Remove the ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR for the FEED ROLLER MOTOR from the CHASSIS Figure 4 35 5 Remove 3 of the ATTACHING SCREWS fro the FEED ROLLER MOTOR and rotate the MOTOR down to loosen the DRIVE BELT Remove the DRIVE BELT Remove the E RING and remove the PULLEY and DOWEL PIN 8 Remove the remaining ATTACHING SCREW and remove the FEED ROLLER MOTOR Figure 4 35 Removing the FEED ROLLER MOTOR 7F 3318 2005 J uly Rev B gt Section 4 Disassembly Reassembl 4 9 5 Feed Roller Torsion Springs 1 Remove the SUPPLY CARTRIDGE A Warning When the POWER CORD is plugged in hazardous voltages are present in some areas of the IMAGER These voltages can cause severe injury or death 2 De energize the IMAGER and disconnect the POWER CORD 3 Remove the FEED ROLLER MODULE 4 9 1 L gt Note Be aware that the 2 TORSION SPRINGS are not identical For reference in reassembly note the configuration of the SPRINGS as you remove them 4 Foreach TORSION SPRING Remove the end of the SPRING fro
27. For continued protection against fire replace fuses only with fuses of the same type and fuse rating 1584010 2005 J uly Rev B Table of Contents PLEASE NOTE The information contained herein is based on the experience and knowledge relating to the subject matter gained by Eastman Kodak Company prior to publication No patent license is granted by this information Eastman Kodak Company reserves the right to change this information without notice and makes no warranty express or implied with respect to this information Kodak Shall not be liable for any loss or damage including consequential or special damages resulting from the use of this information even if loss or damage is caused by Kodak s negligence or other fault Caution To avoid damage to ESD sensitive ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS always wear an ANTI STATIC WRIST STRAP when handling CIRCUIT BOARDS or EPROMs Table of Contents Revision History Safety Regulatory EMC and CE Marking Compliance Section 1 Specifications 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 1 9 1 10 1 11 1 12 1 13 Section 2 Installation 2 1 2 2 2 3 2005 J uly Rev 7F3318 Dimensions Electrical P ower Storage Environment Operating Environment Altitude Floor Vib Floor Levelness Floor Load Environmental E ffects Film Size Film Throughput Image In Glossary Checklist of Installation Procedures Tools Required for Installation Uncrating an
28. Service Manual BLANK PAGE 1 6 318 2005 J uly REV B Section 2 Installation Section 2 Installation 2 1 Checklist of Installation Procedures Following is a checklist of the procedures required during installation of an IMAGER Uneratng and Initial Setup RARE nm PEE Ed Red nds Paragraph 2 3 zy rd RIRs esie eb etd Mo E stie cuius EOS Medici Ee urs Paragraph 2 4 Connecting to Electrical Power and the Network Paragraph 2 5 Contig ring th IMAGER sc cartes EIC ed nt Paragraph 2 6 Training Key Operators Cates RS Paragraph 2 7 Checking Temperature ofthe PROCESSOR Paragraph 2 8 Checking Image Quality Paragraph 2 9 Backing up the System Configuration aaa Paragraph 2 10 Editing the Service History Log Paragraph 2 11 2 2 Tools Required for Installation e VOLTMETER e LAPTOP COMPUTER e SERVICE TOOL Service WebLink software installed on your LAPTOP COMPUTER 2005 J uly Rev B 7F3318 2 1 Service Manual 2 3 Uncrating and Initial Setup 2 3 1 Opening the Shipping Crate Inspect the SHIPPING CRATE for damage Check the 2 Tip Tell SHIPPING MONITORS for possible mishandling during shipment If damage or mishandling is evident contact the shipper Remove the TOP PANEL 3
29. e Reads densitometer with the light source off and sets the dark offset to the raw value e Reads the densitometer with the light source on and sets the light offset e Compares the dark and light offsets If the difference between the two values is insufficient sets the Densitometer F ailure E rror bit e Reads the Exit Sensor every seconds and reports status Read Raw Densitometer Value This command reads the current raw value form the A D Converter every 16 ms and reports status on request Turn Light Source On Turns the light source on Turn Light Source Off Turns the light source off 6 4 5 RF TAG SUBSYSTEMS The RF TAG SUBSYSTEM installed on the ROLLBACK MODULE reads cartridge ID information from the RF TAG on the bottom of the FILM CARTRIDGE and reports itto the MCS It can also write data from the MCS onto the RF TAG Each TAG contains space for 2K bits of data which are divided into 62 blocks of 4 bytes each with 64 bits remaining for special use Blocks 0 4 bits 0 159 contain the following information sent from the factory with the FILM CARTRIDGE ATAG ID 5 bytes of TAG details indicating the number of blocks on the TAG and the number of bytes per block The number of sheets of film in the CARTRIDGE This number is decremented by the IMAGER as film is used The remaining blocks 5 62 on the TAG are used to store the following data written to the TAG by the IMAGER Mode
30. e The listed tools are a subset of the tools required for servicing the Kodak Dryview 8100 e Non Kodak service technicians are responsible for purchasing items 1 through 3 1 LAPTOP COMPUTER with the following minimum requirements e Pentium class IBM compatible with Windows 95 98 or higher Operating System 24 Megabytes of RAM 1 2 Gigabyte internal HARD DISK Internal MODEM 28 8 Kbps transmission rate NETWORK CARD 10BaseT or 100BaseTX TCP IP PCMCIA CARD VIDEO SCREEN 800 x 600 pixels 256 colors MOUSE orPOINTING DEVICE e Web browser software Internet Explorer 4 0 L gt Note These specifications are the minimum configuration needed to use the SERVICE TOOL configuration and diagnostic tools built into the LASER IMAGER software For information on the SERVICE TOOL see Section 7 2 FLUKE DVM Model 87 or equivalent 3 Dual trace OSCILLOSCOPE Band Width 0 to 100 MHz Sensitivity 0 5 mv Accuracy 3 4 CABLE Serial Port 26 1011 4592 3 5 CABLE 10BaseT Crossover 96 0000 3918 8 6 CABLE 10BaseT Straight Through PATCH CABLE TL5576 7 TEMPERATURE METER KIT 78 8099 9500 0 PROBE P N 26 1011 8560 6 includes Minco TEMPERATURE METER and 11 inch bar type PROBE factory calibrated as a pair gt Note Ifa new PROBE is ordered the PROBE and METER must be sent in for calibration See paragraph 5 2 8 BLOCK used with PROBE 78 8064 5583 4 9 STATIC PROTECTION KIT 780ST8501 includes a static
31. 2005 J uly 7F3318 7 39 Service Manual blocked off Is 812 Rollback Assembly Test This routine begins about 40 seconds after power on It exercises components of the Rollback Assembly and ensures that the cartridge is closed and the rollback mechanism is at home Go to Elevator Diagnostics on Sheet 2 Elevator Sensor Yes Elevator must be home before Rollback Diagnostics begin Is Is S2 Run DCM1 blocked off in closing direction See Rollback 7 A Sensor Yes Run one revolution _________ Rollback in closing Motor direction Is S2 off within 21 921 6 75 sec Rollback is home Stop DCM1 Run DCMe to Cups Engaged Sensor Test This routine begins Pickup __ move pickup about 50 seconds after power on It runs the pickup Motor down almost assembly all the way down to the film to check operation to film of the Cups Engaged Sensor Is 10 blocked 21 921 off Cups Engaged Sensor Yes Run DCN2 to return pickup to home position Pickup Position Sensor 8100 228A Figure 7 5 FILM FEEDER MODULE Diagnostics Sheet 3 7 40 7F 3318 2005 J uly Rev Section 7 Troubleshootin Prev Page RF Tag Subsystem Test This test begins about 60 seconds after power on
32. 4 Ifthe RJ 45 CONNECTORS and cabling are OK use the SERVICE TOOL to check out the RF TAG SUBSYSTEM as instructed in paragraph 7 2 5 L gt Note Before the RF TAG self test diagramed on the next page occurs after power on the following self test functions have already taken place The system has been initialized Film if any has been cleared from the IMAGER The FILM FEED SYSTEM has been tested see 21 921 Quicksheet 8 60 7F3318 2005 J uly Rev B 2005 J uly Rev Section 8 QuickSheets From Film Feeder Module Test RF Tag Subsystem Test Y MCS sends an execute diagnostics command to the Contact micro on the RF Tag Interface Board which in turn builds RF Tag I F and sends a Read Version command to the RF Reader Board micro Board The micro checks the response for errors and oa reports back to the MCS The test does not check the RF Antenna or read the RF tag Micro respond MCS sends E xecute Diagnostics To RF Tag Interface Board command RF Tag micro builds and sends Read To RF Reader Board Transceiver Version com mand Y RF Reader Board RF Tag Interface Board responds RF Tag micro checks for errors in response Y RF Tag micro reports to MCS Error reported To Densitometer Module Test Figure 8 2 RF TAG SUBSYSTEM Diagnostics 7F3318 8 61
33. 7 78 7 3318 2005 J uly Rev B Section 7 Troubleshootin 13 Note in the retrieved data that only 5 associations are shown as down 3 Local Log Viewer C Documents and Settings 4870505 Desktop Duke AssocLog xml Microsoft Internet Explorer provi File Edit Favorites Tools Help Back mp o amp jFavorites EM a 2 B Address C Program Files Kadak W ebLink Local Log viewer htm Links Best of the Web ChannelGuide JCustomize Links 4 Free HotMail Internet Start lt Microsoft Product New z Stop Options Load 5 Find Find Next 2 Displayed 5 of 4276 records Text as s kext contains scp assoc and Text as text 7 7 2003 16 20 45 095 scp 1 down Network INFO 7 7 2003 16 21 27 075 scp assoctt2 down MIM Network INFO 71 1 2003 16 22 27 692 sep assoctt3 down MIM Network F 2003 16 23 05 096 scp assoctt4 down Network 7 7 2003 16 33 15 974 scp assoc down Network L gt Note A comparison of the scp assoc up and down logs indicate that the leonardo modality continued to add associations without closing down associations until apparently the limit of 12 associations was reached This prevented new associations from occurring 7 10 2 4 Contents of the Log Each line of the log documents an event Each event is divided into 16 columns of information Only 4 or 5 of these columns are useful to the FE These ar
34. 7 8 2 pcAnywhere Level 2 Purpose Used to access Internet Explorer RMS Grouping To access log on to level 1 log off log on with username and password provided below Username pcanywhere Password Netware28900 7 8 3 pcanywhere Level 3 Purpose Used to access DV8150 DRE Desktop Need to use extreme caution when accessing the desktop because with this username and password you have administrative capabilities To access log on as level 1 log off log on with username and password provided below Username RNIservicemanager Password mliHxe597An 2005 J uly Rev 7F3318 7 69 Service Manual 7 9 Using Scripts Scripts can be accessed using the Service Tool Diagnostics Scripts can be either Local residing on your laptop or Remote residing in the software of the DV8150 7 9 1 Remote Scripts SetFacettoStretch2 vbs sets the facet to stretch optics parameter to factory setting SetPixelStretch2 vbs sets the pixel stretch optics parameter to factory setting SetSOSDelay2 vbs sets the SOS Delay optics parameter to factory setting DisableComputerBrowserService vbs used to disable Computer Browser Service to reduce network traffic on the customer s network TriggerMPDB vbs used to tell the DV8150 to look for the Modality Preferences Database when the MPDB has been downloaded by Remote Management Services ListRMSServices vbs lists the status of the Remote Management Services what is running Co
35. BJ Start Pickup Motor No Start Pickup Motor DCM2 Down from Home Film Surface Sensor S4 Feeder Film Prestaged No PICKUP DOWN Start Pickup Motor Timeout DCM2 Down Yes 21 119 Film Contact Failure Feeder Film Film Out No No A left in Sensor S5 Cartridge Engaged Status Film Out Feeder Local Panel 4 L8 Stop Pickup DCM2 Return Pickup Arm to Home 21 134 Cartridge Empty Local Panel Attention Sound Beeps Retry Pickup LA ID Pickup2 Start Pickup DCM2 Up Wait FILMOUT RETRY TIME Stop Pickup Motor Continue with Pickup Figure 6 17 Pickup Operation Sheet 2 of 3 2005 July Rev B 7 3318 6 35 Service Manual No Feeder Cups Engaged Sensor S10 UB ROTATE_CUPS Timeout Feeder Cups Engaged Sensor S10 B ROTATE_CUPS Timeout Cups to Film Bend Position LM BEND TIMEOUT Position 10 B gt UB gt B TIMEOUT Double Yes pump to separate film Cups to Film Bend Position S10 B gt UB gt B ILM_BEND TIMEOUT Start Maximum Bend Timer for MAX_BEND sec 21 120 Internal Hardware Failure Film Pickup Override door open Pickup Operation Sheet 3 of 3 Pickup at Feed Nip Transfer position S3 B Feeder Local Panel Stop P
36. Initialization and Self Test Sequence Flow Charts Functions of System SENSORS 7 4 1 Testing the SENSORS Using LEDS 7 4 1 1 Testing Film Feed SENSORS 51 55 and 510 512 Via LED SEET ence eue Meh ad E SEES A EE 7 4 1 2 Testing ROLLBACK COMPLETE SENSOR S13 WIHT EE DS Liege Evo ox E Ven eR ba PO ER age 7 4 1 3 Testing SENSORS 56 59 Via LEDs Troubleshooting Film Transport Problems 7 5 1 7 5 2 7 5 3 7 5 4 Troubleshooting Basics Troubleshooting Sequence Interviewing the Preliminary 1 lt 7 5 4 1 Preparation 7 5 4 2 Checking the ROLLBACK MODULE for Problems 7 5 4 3 Checking the FILM PICKUP MODULE for Problems 7 1 7 1 7 3 7 4 7 5 7 6 7 7 7 8 7 9 71 12 7 15 7 17 7 18 7 19 7 20 7 20 7 21 7 21 7 23 7 24 7 28 7 29 7 30 7 31 7 33 7 33 7 33 7 43 7 44 7 45 7 45 7 47 7 48 7 48 7 49 7 49 7 49 7 49 7 50 7 51 Service Manual 7 5 5 Cycling Film and Observing the Film Transport Process 7 51 7 5 5 1 Preliminary Setup 7 5 5 2 Checking the ROLLBACK MODULE 7 5 5 3 Checking the FILM PICKUP MODULE 7 5 5 4 Checking the FEED ROLLER
37. OFF when ROLLERS are open 512 ELEVATOR HOME ELEVATOR U type Low OFF when ELEVATOR is down home 513 ROLLBACK ROLLBACK U type Low OFF when CARTRIDGE LID is COMPLETE opened ATTENUATOR HOME SCANNER Not observable in OPTICS MODULE SHAFT INDEX SCANNER Notobservable in OPTICS MODULE A blocked SENSOR low OFF not conducting CARTRIDGE PRESENCE SENSOR 51 is identical physically and electronically to the other flag type SENSORS except it has a bidirectional ACTUATOR flag PLATEN FILM SENSOR 56 is identical physically and electronically to the other flag type SENSORS except it has a longer ACTUATOR flag OPTICS HOME SENSOR S7 is the only U type SENSOR that is screw mounted Note in Figure 7 10 that S7 has a different pinout from the other SENSORS 2005 J uly Rev 7F3318 7 45 Service Manual Flag Type U Type Output is low when switch Output is low when switch Single Screw Mounting is blocked arm is at rest is blocked interrupted Output is low when switch is blocked interrupted V Out To Microprocessor Typical Schematic 8100 1144 Figure 7 10 SENSOR Types 7 4 1 Testing the SENSORS Using LEDs SENSORS S1 S13 are tied to LEDs which can be used in a test mode to monitor the operation of the SENSORS The SENSORS report to MICROS on several different CIRCUIT BOARDS SENSORS 51 55 and 510 12 monitor film feed functions and report to the slave MICRO on F
38. QuickSheets 8 5 22 Error 13 003 SERVICE TOOL Script Error LOCAL PANEL Message Log Message DICOM Message Service Tool Script Error NORMAL 3 Notify Summary This error can be caused by a Script with the following line sysLog log my user comment Result of Error Service operations may not work correctly The DRE should be functional but may not respond correctly to the service function being run or the service function may fail User Action None FE Action 2005 J uly Rev 7F3318 8 25 Service Manual 8 5 23 20 137 Open DOOR Requested LOCAL PANEL Message Log Message DICOM Message Severity Wait for Door Open Open Door Requested NORMAL 3 Notify Alarm sounds Summary The user has pressed the Open Door Key but the IMAGER is printing and will not allow the DOOR to open The IMAGER is unable to start another print cycle Otherwise it can operate as normal acquiring queuing prints completing processing in progress etc Result of Error The SYSTEM will not allow the user to open the FRONT DOOR while film is in process in the bottom of the IMAGER User Action 1 Wait until the films have entered the EXIT TRAY and the DOOR opens 2 Ifthe DOOR does not open a Shut down the IMAGER b Use the MANUAL OVERRIDE to open the DOOR c Manually clear films from the machine FE Action This is an informational message only 8 26 7F 3318 2005 J uly Rev B Section 8 QuickSheets 8 5 24 20 202
39. See Figure 7 22 not the bearing block SCREWS 2 each must be loosened and the BLOCKS must be repositioned Reference procedure 4 11 9 L gt Note If jams atthe PLATEN SUPPORT TABS occur even when the BEARING BLOCKS are correctly installed the PLATEN FRAME is probably out of spec and the PLATEN ASSEMBLY must be replaced Figure 7 21 Support Tab at Entry to PLATEN ASSEMBLY 7 62 7F3318 2005 J uly Rev B Section 7 Troubleshootin Notched face of block must be flush with imaging cylinder Bearing Block gt p z mening Cylinder Figure 7 22 Bearing Block Position 7 5 7 Replace the Repaired MODULE and Cycle Film to Confirm Repair After repairing the suspect MODULE s cycle film as instructed in paragraph 7 5 5 1 and observe transport operation to confirm that the problem has been resolved 2005 J uly Rev B 7 3318 Service Manual 7 6 Troubleshooting the Sources of Film Scratches This procedure provides a logical sequence for locating the causes of film scratches in the MACHINE starting from the DENSITOMETER TURNAROUND Area 5 and working down to the PLATEN Area 3 The areas where film scratches can most likely occur are e DENSITOMETER TURNAROUND PROCESSOR FELT PAD PROCESSOR FILM DIVERTER STRIPPER e PLATEN ASSEMBLY 7 6 1 Preparation for Transporting Film in the Service Mode 1 Setthe SERVICE SWITCH in Service Mode 2 Open the UPPER HOOD and the PROCESSOR DRUM COVER
40. Service Manual 8 5 54 25 931 RF TAG SUBSYSTEM Communications Failure LOCAL PANEL Message Log Message DICOM Message Internal Communications MCS failed to communicate to RF Tag ELEC DOWN 0 F atal Failure RF Tag Alarm reader after 5 attempts sounds Summary The RF TAG SUBSYSTEM passed its diagnostic self test but failed to respond to the MCS after 5 attempts Result of Error The IMAGER is unable to print It can still accept and queue new jobs but new films will not be initiated User Action 1 Restart the IMAGER 2 Ifthe error persists call Service FE Action 8 62 7F 3318 2005 J uly Rev B Section 8 QuickSheets 8 5 55 25 932 RF TAG SUBSYSTEM Communications Retry LOCAL PANEL Message Log Message DICOM Message Severity MCS failed to communicate with RF ELEC DOWN 0 Fatal Tag Summary This notification to the LOG occurs when the MCS tries to communicate with the RF TAG SUBSYSTEM but receives no response After 5 unsuccessful attempts error 25 931 is declared Result of Error The system will function normally User Action None FE Action None 2005 J uly Rev B 7F3318 8 63 Service Manual 8 5 56 26 163 J am Loading Exposure PLATEN LOCAL PANEL Message Log Message DICOM Message Film J am in Area 3 Platen Film Jam Loading Exposure Platen FILM JAM 1 Alert Alarm sounds Film at Platen Sensor S6 failed to detect film leading edge Summary After film pickup the leading edge
41. Start film cycling see paragraph 7 5 5 1 above 1 Does film occasionally hang up at the entrance to the PLATEN just beneath the DRIVE ROLLERS If itdoes the PLATEN DRIVE ROLLER BEARING BLOCKS may not be installed correctly or the PLATEN support tabs may be out of spec See paragraph 7 5 6 4 1 2 Does film hit the end of the PLATEN FILM SENSOR upon entry No part of the radiused end of the SENSOR flag should extend out of the curved INNER GUIDE 4 Is the film pushed at least 1 mm by the film CENTERING PIN See Note in paragraph 7 5 6 4 5 If any of the above problems is apparent advance to paragraph 7 5 6 4 to remove and inspect the PLATEN MODULE 2005 J uly Rev 7F3318 7 55 Service Manual 7 5 6 Remove and Inspect Suspect MODULES 7 5 6 1 Removing and Inspecting the ROLLBACK MODULE 1 2 Remove the ASSEMBLY as instructed in procedure 4 7 1 Inspect the FILM GUARD Is the entire top surface flat or has the CAM ARM been bent upward as result of manually closing the FILM CARTRIDGE with a jam in Area 2 If the FILM GUARD is bent replace it Inspect the SEPARATOR TABS Are they bent down as the result of the ROLLBACK ROLLER rolling over the tops of the TABS If they are bent down replace them Check that the FILM GUARD pivots freely with no noticeable friction from the TRAY If it does not replace it Check that the CARTRIDGE PRESENT SENSOR the ROLLBACK HOME SENSOR and the ROLLBACK OPEN SENSOR
42. 1 more time Yes No 26 169 Film Jam in Area 3 Platen eaving aten No MCSFilmTrayStatusChange callback fires w sheet count of 0 RFTag sheetcount is not set to O RFTag sheetcount always uses counted sheet count Vertical Transport Sensor PLATEN UNLOAD 1 58 On Li Film jam in Transport Area between Platen Yes mcs Yes and Processor 26 166 Set Platen Roller Motor Film Jam 4 Step2 and Transport Transport Roller Motor Step6 to Close and Raise Processor Speed 0 478 ips Cartridge No MCS Did all film Platen Film Sensor PLATEN UNLOAD 2 clear Platen S6 off timeout 7 MCS Yes Yes Stop Platen Roller Motor Step2 21 165 Film Jam in Area 3 ID Unload Platen Transport Go to Processor Film jam in Transport area Operation Figure 6 20 Unload Platen Operation 6 40 7F3318 2005 J uly Rev B Section 6 Theory of Operation Processor Operation Sheet 1 of 2 Film out of Vertical Transport Area and Transport Sensor on Drum S8 Off Yes MCS Stop Transport Roller Motor Step6 Densitometer MCS Return Densitometer Exit Get Densitometer Exit Sensor S9 Status Sensor 9 Status Film at Densitometer Densitometer Exit Sensor S9 On Yes Turn Kicker Motor Step9 on at Processor Speed Clinical film Yes Manual No Calibration Mode On Sheet No Densitometer Arm Dpatch 4 Read Dpatch
43. 15 If steps 12 13 or 14 need to be changed do the following a Access the Service Tool Diagnostics S cripts b Click on the Local tab C Locate the correct script on your laptop and click OPEN d In the script screen change the value It is usually the last line e Click on RUN f Click on the Script RunTime tab and wait for PASS to be displayed 16 Print an internal SMPTE and check the image 2005 J uly Rev B 7F3318 8 85 Service Manual 8 5 73 27 923 Optics Diagnostics Failed LOCAL PANEL Message Log Message DICOM Message Severity Optics Diagnostics Failed Optics Calibration Failed Power ELEC DOWN 0 F atal Alarm sounds up diagnostics failed Summary The OPTICS BOARD failed its power up self test At power up the OPTICS BOARD is commanded to self test If it fails the test after 3 tries this error is declared See the flow chart on the next page for the test sequence Result of Error The IMAGER will not operate User Action 1 Restart the IMAGER 2 Ifthe error persists call Service FE Action 1 Is the MicroComm CABLE from the MCS BOARD to the OPTICS MODULE seated properly 2 Is the flat CABLE in the EXPOSURE ASSEMBLY seated properly Check that the CONNECTOR STANDOFFS are not too long preventing solid connection L gt Note As shown in the flow chart on the next page this error can be caused only by failure of the MicroComm CABLE from the MCS BOARD to the optics or by a component inte
44. 4 AA NU LOCAL PANEL TRANSMITTER BOARD SCREW PCIO BOARD E Ethernet BOARD f Figure 4 58 Removing CIRCUIT BOARDS Caution Weara WRIST STRAP when handling CIRCUITS BOARDS e CIRCUIT BOARDS contain lead Any BOARD that is replaced must be returned to Kodak or disposed of properly 4 Forany ofthe 3 CIRCUIT BOARDS a Disconnect CABLES from the CIRCUIT BOARD if any b Remove 1 SCREW c Pull the CIRCUIT BOARD straight up from its SOCKET 5 Install the new CIRCUIT BOARD in reverse order of disassembly 4 74 7F3318 2005 J uly Rev B Section 4 Disassembly Reassembl 4 14 4 Removing the DIMM MEMORY BOARDS 1 Remove the SUPPLY CARTRIDGE A Warning When the POWER CORD is plugged in hazardous voltages are present in some areas of the IMAGER These voltages can cause severe injury or death 2 De energize the IMAGER and disconnect the POWER CORD 3 Remove the DRE COMPUTER from the IMAGER and remove the COVER of the COMPUTER see procedure 4 14 4 Remove the assembly of 3 DRIVES see procedure 4 14 1 A gt 25 S l2 27 1 Wi LLU LATCH DIMM BOARDS Figure 4 59 Removing the DIMM BOARDS Caution Weara WRIST STRAP when handling CIRCUITS BOARDS e CIRCUIT BOARDS contain lead Any BOARD that is replaced must be returned to Kodak or disposed of properly 5 Release the 2 LATCHES for each BOARD 6 Remove the DIMM BO
45. Actuate the SERVICE SWITCH by unscrewing the ACTUATOR BOLT Rear View in Figure 4 22 5 Energize the IMAGER while observing the ELEVATOR from the front of the IMAGER The ELEVATOR will begin moving to its down position Front View This will take a few minutes A Warning When the POWER CORD is plugged in hazardous voltages are present in some areas of the IMAGER These voltages can cause severe injury or death 6 When the ELEVATOR is all the way down SENSOR blocked de energize the IMAGER and disconnect the POWER CORD 7 Disconnect the ELECTRICAL PLUG for the ROLLBACK MOTOR Rear View 8 Disconnect the PLUG for the ROLLBACK SENSORS Rear View 9 Manually turn the ROLLBACK KNOB to move the ROLLBACK ROLLER to about the middle of the CARTRIDGE TRAY 10 Remove the 2 SCREWS attaching the base of the ROLLBACK MODULE Front View 11 Remove 3 SCREWS attaching the TOP BRACKET of the ROLLBACK MODULE Front View 12 Disconnect the MicroComm CABLE from the RF TAG INTERFACE BOARD Front View Service Switch 3 Screws 4 p Elevator M CY As a must be NS T down m Track 10 One Screw Each Side Rear View Front View 8100 1064 Figure 4 22 Removing the ROLLBACK MODULE Continue on next page 2005 J uly Rev 7F3318 4 25 Service Manual Caution Do not to damage wiring when y
46. Any BOARD that is replaced must be returned to Kodak or disposed of properly L gt Note If you replace the DRE COMPUTER with a new preprogrammed COMPUTER you must download the configuration files from the HARD DRIVE to a FLOPPY DISK before removing the old DRE This is because a new HARD DRIVE will be installed with the DRE and will require the configuration files from the old DRIVE which are unique to this site See the Configuration Backup procedure 7 2 18 in Troubleshooting If you cannot download from the old DRE HARD DRIVE you will have to use the configuration FLOPPY DISK that should be stored in the IMAGER to restore the configuration to the new DRE HARD DRIVE Disassembly 1 Remove the SUPPLY CARTRIDGE A Warning Ur ee pa ID eo When the POWER CORD is plugged in hazardous voltages are present in some areas of the IMAGER These voltages can cause severe injury or death De energize the IMAGER and disconnect the POWER CORD Disconnect the NETWORK CABLE from the back of the IMAGER Remove the REAR PANEL Disconnect the Ethernet CONNECTOR from the COVER PLATE forthe DRE COMPUTER and push it inside the COVER PLATE Remove 4 SCREWS Remove the COVER PLATE 2005 July Rev 7F3318 4 67 Service Manual 3SCREWS Ethernet CONNECTOR COVER PLATE Figure 4 52 Gaining Access to the DRE COMPUTER 7F 3318 2005 J Rev B Section 4 Disassembly Reassembl i pm E fF d
47. CONNECTOR CABLE RAIL PINS IMAGING ASSEMBLY gt Note Do not disconnect the FLAT CABLE 6 Liftthe PLATE and FLAT CABLE outside of the IMAGING ASSEMBLY 7 Remove e 2SCREWS from the end of the IMAGING ASSEMBLY by the FLYWHEEL 2SCREWS the other end of the IMAGING ASSEMBLY e 2BLOCKS gt Note Keep the HOME SENSOR CABLE with the IMAGING ASSEMBLY 8 Disconnect END CABLE CONNECTOR HOME SENSOR CABLE 9 Liftthe TRANSLATION ASSEMBLY from the IMAGING ASSEMBLY and set it down 10 Remove the OPTICS MODULE 2005 J uly Rev B 7F3318 4 59 Service Manual Reassembly 1 Place the new OPTICS MODULE in the IMAGING ASSEMBLY 2 Install the TRANSLATION ASSEMBLY Seatthe RAIL PINS in the end of the IMAGING ASSEMBLY Hold the RAIL PINS in position when you do Step 3 FLYWHEEL FLAT FLANGE 3 SCREWS CABLE NN ix E kl a as 2 BLOCKS L4 e 2SCREWS TRANSLATION ASSEMBLY HOME OPTICS 2ALIGNMENT END CABLE CONNECTOR SENSOR MODULE SCREWS 3 Install 2SCREWS the end by the FLYWHEEL 2BLOCKS e 2SCREWS 4 Liftthe OPTICS MODULE into position on the TRANSLATION ASSEMBLY Hold the OPTICS MODULE againstthe FLANGE and install WASHER from Step 3 of Disassembly if necessary 2ALIGNMENT SCREWS SCREW END CABLE CONNECTOR HOME SENSOR CABLE PLATE 3SCREWS LATCH 4 60 7F3318 2005 J uly Rev B Section 4 Disassembly Reassembl
48. Close Alarm sounds failed to activate in specified time MGZ Summary The IMAGER could not close the supply CARTRIDGE and is unable to print This problem occurs when the rollback mechanism leaves the LID open position as indicated by ROLLBACK COMPLETE SENSOR 5 13 but does not reach the home position as indicated by ROLLBACK HOME SENSOR 52 The error is cleared when the FRONT DOOR is closed or power is cycled A film jam or a defective SENSOR can cause this error Result of Error The IMAGER is unable to print It still can accept and queue print jobs User Action Touch the Play Video button to view the error video Press the Open Door button and hold for 5 seconds to open the FRONT DOOR Clear any jammed film Close the CARTRIDGE manually See note below Close the FRONT DOOR Run test prints to clear fogged film from the IMAGER Ifthe error persists use new CARTRIDGE Caution The user should not attempt to close the CARTRIDGE while this error state is in effect If a jammed film is caught by the ROLLBACK as the CARTRIDGE is closed it will damage the FILM GUARD De OY MUS cb FE Action The problem is usually caused by a film pickup failure If you cannot find loose film in Area 2 1 Check the MCS Log to try to determine the point at which the error occurred This may help isolate the problem 2 Use the SERVICE TOOL to check ROLLBACK HOME SENSOR S2 and ROLLBACK MOTOR DCMI 8 48 7F3318 200
49. DENSITOMETER did not find the precise number of steps in the calibration wedge The most likely cause is fogged or old film The error clears when a new calibration is requested or the FRONT DOOR is closed Result of Error The IMAGER is unable to print but itcan accept and queue new print jobs User Action 1 Try a different film CARTRIDGE The film may be defective 2 Ifthe problem persists call Service L gt Note Manual mode is not usable with this error FE Action 1 First check for fogged film 2 Check the expiration date on the film packaging 3 Check the MCS Log 8 52 7F 3318 2005 J uly Rev B Section 8 QuickSheets 8 5 50 21 631 Dmin Not Met LOCAL PANEL Message Log Message DICOM Message Calibration Failed Film Drawer Calibration Failed Dmin not CALIBRATION Dmin Outside Target Alarm met ERR sounds Summary The Dmin requirement was not met on a calibration print The error is detected when the Gray Scale Manager software receives the DENSITOMETER readings from a calibration sheet that has just been processed An error is declared if the calibration sheet does not have a wedge with the required Dmin value The most likely cause is fogged or old film The error clears when another calibration is requested or when the FRONT DOOR 1515 closed Result of Error The IMAGER is unable to print but can accept and queue new print jobs User Action The operator should try a different FILM CARTRIDGE If t
50. Heb EA E Aga tpe dique adden 1 is The page cannot be displayed Tha sae wou xk looking faris uas The Wab ote rmah pe techn esl Afines o you mas need to adjust your browser settings Please try the fol owites gt Chick the B amp etresh button try again tiyoo typed the page eddress in the Gd ress bar make sure thet itis spelled correctly Te check pou cormedoot settbn dick the Tools mons aid Wen clek lalerhet Options 2 Nie Connections tab dick Settings The settings should mali those pro vided fey your local area network LAN adimristrator or Internet service Orovider ISP e f r oor Network Administrator fas enables Microsoft 1 noe Astar JConnot find server M Eka o E 1 1i00 9 the address field type https 127 0 0 1 4433 10 Click Go 11 Click OK 12 Atthe Security Alert screen click Yes 13 Atthe Agent Console screen a In User Name field enter fe b In the Password field enter FE 123 Note Passwords are case sensitive 14 Click Log In 15 Click Status The following screen appears 2 42 7F3318 2005 uly Rev B 16 17 18 Section 2 Installation amp DYELSU pcAnywhere Fie tdt wes Favorites Toos arch aj Fieeten Sf theta d LER Nik
51. In the IP Address window enter the IP Address of a device on the network In the Count window enter the number of pings you wish to be sent In the Time Out window enter the number of milliseconds to allow for a response before failing the test Click Run Check for Status and Summary of the test L gt Note You can also run a Ping test from the Service menu of the LOCAL PANEL 2005 J uly Rev 7 3318 Service Manual 3 To run a DICOM Echo test select DICOM Echo from the Network Diagnostics screen r DICOM Echo This runs a DICOM echo test to verify a connection to another DICOM device on the network g IP Address 14592 199 151 3 Port puo m AE Title MIM DRE E Run r Status Complete Pass Summary Final Results Test DicomEcho executed at 2004 24 05T13 52 16 Status Pass Echo Result Reply received from 149 968 199 151 4 Enterthe IP Address Port Number and AE Title of the device 5 Click Run 6 Check for Status and a Summary of the test 7 2 17 Troubleshooting the Source of Image Problems If you are experiencing image problems you can use the SERVICE TOOL to save and display both the raw image from the MODALITY and the same image rendered in the DRE These images can be compared with the image printed on film This will help you to determine the source ofthe problem MODALITY DRE or PCI
52. Item No Part Number Description Qty ORE SP8E5626 DRUM ASSEMBLY KIT 1g ZA aui SP7F1084 LATCH PLATE ASSEMBLY 1 NotAvailable GUIDE Left Vertical Processor 1355 21 bre wed 1 SP96 0000 1368 8 INSULATOR 0 1 SP74 0500 5501 6 PROCESSOR COVER ASSEMBLY KIT Includes items 6 through Qand 19 ex Six Sette 1 SP96 0000 0403 4 SPRING Processor Roller 28 dag SP74 0401 8359 7 ROLLER Processor Aluminum 14 8 cusa SP96 0000 0404 2 BEARING Pressure Roller 28 9 uius SP96 0000 3026 0 INSULATION Cover 50 1 TO uus SPTEI215 MOTOR PfOCeSSOE recuerde iem C dee tdt caa 1 SP7F1078 BELT TENSIONER ASSEMBLY 1 12 22045 SP5RI223 iude Pkt PE E Ed 1 SP96 0000 3585 5 PROCESSOR INTERFACE BOARD ASSEMBLY 1 14 SP96 0000 0989 2 PLATE Cooling Post Processor 1 192 52 SP78 8075 4070 9 DIVERTER AND FELT ASSEMBLY KIT includes items 16 and 17a 1 16 255 SP74 0401 8269 8 FELT PAD ue FIN S A SOON b ace os alah Mn E Seton a
53. RTD timed out while communicating PROCESSOR temperature to MCS 28 509 PROCESSOR Warmup Failure Desired temperature level was not reached within set time 18 20 minutes e 28 551 PROCESSOR DRUM HEATER Failure HEATERS did not warm up at the desired rate of 1 5 C every 30 seconds User Action 1 Restart the IMAGER 2 If the error persists call Service FE Action Check for a possible short in HEATER wiring as follows 1 Power down and open the TOP HOOD 2 Remove the 3 SCREWS from the END CAP of the HEATER Or remove 2 SCREWS and pivot the END CAP out of the way 3 Check the THERMAL BREAKER BUTTON inside the DRUM If it has popped out use a SCREWDRIVER to pop it back in 4 Apply power and check to see if the BREAKER BUTTON pops back out If it does there is probably a Short in the HEATER wiring and the DRUM should be replaced 5 With a multimeter connected to TP8 on the MCS BOARD monitor the voltage as the drum warms up Normally during warmup the voltage increases steadily in small increments about 0 1V and the green LED on the PIB is constantly illuminated When the PROCESSOR reaches temperature the LED flashes on and off If there is a sudden voltage spike up to 5V during warmup suspect a failed RTD Replace the DRUM and monitor again Check for other possible causes Low ambient room temperature where the IMAGER is located Low AC supply at the RECEPTACLE AC supply below spec 2005 J
54. SERVICE OVERRIDE SWITCH Out LOCAL PANEL Message Log Message DICOM Message Severity Override Switch Engaged Override Switch Engaged ELEC DOWN 1 Alert Alarm sounds Summary The SERVICE OVERRIDE SWITCH has been enabled i e placed in Service position When this SWITCH is enabled the SYSTEM does not recognize that the REAR PANEL is removed or the FRONT DOOR is opened Thus the IMAGER will transport film since MOTORS and SENSORS will operate However the laser is powered off so film is not imaged Result of Error MOTORS and SENSORS will operate since dc power both hazard and nonhazard is available But RELAY K2 disables 12 volt dc laser drive power User Action None FE Action The message is informational only 2005 J uly Rev B 7F3318 8 27 Service Manual 8 5 25 20 208 DOOR Fail Open LOCAL PANEL Message Log Message DICOM Message Severity Front Door Failed to Open Front Door Failed to Open when NORMAL 1 Alert Alarm sounds Requested Summary The FRONT DOOR failed to open after the user pressed the Open Door key The status of the door is monitored by the FRONT DOOR INTERLOCK SWITCH After the FRONT DOOR is manually opened and closed the SYSTEM will resume normal operation Result of Error The SYSTEM is unable to print Otherwise it can operate as normal acquiring queueing prints completing processing etc New films will not be initiated User Action 1 Open the DOOR manually 2 I
55. Select Run ta show the current state of all sensors Black background indicates sensor output is high 2 Feeder Sensors S11 Feed Roller Open Sensor 510 Cup Engaged Sensor 51 Cartridge Presence Sensor Feed Roller Home S12 Elevator Home S2 RollbackHome 33 Pickup Position Sensor 35 Film Out Sensor 813 Cartridge at full open Pickup Home 34 Film Surface Sensor Film Transport 38 Film at upper transport 36 Film at platen entry 39 Film at exit 514 Optice Attenuator Home 57 Optics Transport at Home Interlocks Front Door Open 2 Hood Open 3 Service Switch engaged 2 To check the current state of all SENSORS the IMAGER click Run on the Monitor Sensors screen 2005 J uly Rev 7 3318 7 17 Service Manual L gt Note A black background indicates that the SENSOR state is high or the INTERLOCK is closed Monitor Sensors Select Run to show the current state of all sensors Black background indicates sensor output is high Feeder Sensors 11 Feed Roller Open Sensor 210 Cup Engaged Sensor 81 Cartridge Presense Sensor Feed Roller Home 512 Elevator Home 52 RollbackHoime 53 Pickup Position Sensor 35 Out Sensor 513 Cartridge at full open Pickup Home 34 Film Surface Sensor rFilm Transport 58 Film at upper transport S6 Film at platen entry 59 Film at exit 514 Optics Attenuator Home
56. The Contact MCS sends an execute diagnostics command to the RF Tag I F micro on the RF Tag Interface Board which in turn builds Board micro and sends a Read Version command to the RF Reader Board The micro checks the response for errors and reports back to the MCS The test does not check the RF Antenna or read the RF tag Micro respond MCS sends Execute Diagnostics To RF Tag Interface Board command RF Tag micro builds and sends Read To RF Reader Board Transceiver Version com mand Y RF Reader Board RF Tag Interface Board responds RF Tag micro checks for errors in response Y RF Tag micro reports to MCS Error reported Figure 7 6 RF Tag Subsystem Diagnostics 2005 J uly Rev 7F3318 7 41 Service Manual 7 42 Prev Page Densitometer Module Tests This routine begins about 63 seconds Contact Densitometer micro system Micro respond after power on It checks outputs of the Densitometer with the light source off then on and confirms that the difference in outputs is within established limits Note Test failure can be the result of open imager door or rear panel If an error occurs repeat power on self test with the door closed and the rear panel installed Covers will have to be closed for the last test in the self test seri
57. The Dmin is measured at the last monotonic step Some non monotonic behavior is allowable around the Dmin as long as itis nottoo far up the curve pushing the last monotonic value above the allowable Dmin Result of Error The IMAGER is unable to print Otherwise it can operate as normal acquiring queueing prints completing processing etc User Action 1 Restart the system 2 If the problem persists try a different film CARTRIDGE The film may be defective 3 Ifthe problem still persists call Service FE Action 1 First check for fogged or old film 2 Then check MCS Log for a Level 6 message Look for the 26 density readings from the calibration film Raw Wedge 0 1 3 3980 1 2 3 3290 etc 3 Also check the GSM Log for a Level 6 message StepWedge wedge 0 0 212523 If any of the density readings is negative the DENSITOMETER is out of adjustment Refer to paragraph 3 5 Other Possible Causes Of This Error Processor temperature requires adjustment Processor drum RTD requires adjustment see Section 3 Adjustments 2005 J uly Rev 7F3318 8 51 Service Manual 8 5 49 21 624 Bad DENSITOMETER Data LOCAL PANEL Message Log Message DICOM Message Calibration Failed Film Drawer Calibration Failed CALIBRATION Density Readings not Densitometer readings not monotonic ERR Monotonic Alarm sounds Summary The DENSITOMETER data from a calibration print is not increasing monotonically or the
58. These voltages can cause severe injury or death 2 De energize the IMAGER and disconnect the POWER CORD 3 Remove the FEED ROLLER MODULE 4 9 1 and the FEED ROLLER OPEN MOTOR 4 9 3 Disassembly 1 Disconnect the ELECTRICAL PLUG INSERT from the CONNECTOR on the FEED ROLLER OPEN SENSOR Caution If the same SENSOR is to be re installed be careful not to damage the MOUNTING CLIPS during removal 2 Gently rock the FEED ROLLER OPEN SENSOR back and forth to disengage the MOUNTING CLIPS Figure 4 29 3 When installing the FEED ROLLER OPEN SENSOR make sure that the SENSOR CLIPS are properly seated in the sheet metal ul SS 8100 89A Figure 4 33 Removing the FEED ROLLER OPEN SENSOR 2005 J uly Rev 7F3318 4 37 Service Manual 4 9 3 FEED ROLLER OPEN MOTOR Special Tools 9 volt DRY CELL BATTERY Preliminary 1 Remove the SUPPLY CARTRIDGE A Warning When the POWER CORD is plugged in hazardous voltages are present in some areas of the IMAGER These voltages can cause severe injury or death 2 De energize the IMAGER and disconnect the POWER CORD 3 Remove the FEED ROLLER MODULE 4 9 1 Disassembly 1 Move the VANE out of the SENSOR Use a 9 volt DRY CELL BATTERY to operate the FILM FEED MOTOR to drive the VANE out of the SENSOR See positions of the SENSOR VANE in
59. To store a backup of the configuration parameters on the DRE HARD DISK click the Backup button L gt Note When the backup is completed the Summary window will display results 3 To download the configuration backup to a FLOPPY DISKETTE a Click Download Backup b When the Save Copy As screen appears selecta folder on a FLOPPY DISKETTE in your LAPTOP COMPUTER c Click Save 4 Store the FLOPPY DISKETTE in the IMAGER 7 30 7F3318 2005 J uly Rev B Section 7 Troubleshooting 7 2 19 Configuration Restore 1 From the main menu of the SERVICE TOOL select Utilities gt Backup Restore System Backup and Restore Backup Restore Restore Restore archived configuration data from product By default the configuration will be restored check the Upload Configuration File checkbox and click the Browse button to select file Upload Configuration File Configuration File Browse Restore Status Ready Summary 2 Select Restore atthe top of the screen 3 Click the Restore button 4 To upload the stored configuration data from a FLOPPY DISKETTE to the DRE a Place a check in the Upload Configuration File box b Click Browse c When the Choose File screen appears load the backup FLOPPY DISKETTE into your SERVICE LAPTOP d Select e 3 1 2 Floppy The file name of the backup file Click Open e Restore 2005 July Rev B 7 3318 7
60. Weight 268 kg 590 Ibs 1 2 Electrical Power Line matching is accomplished by the use of VOLTAGE SELECTION PLUGS inserted at the primary of the POWER TRANSFORMER Input Voltage e 100 VAC 10 50 60 3 Hz 120 VAC 10 60 3Hz e 230 VAC 10 50 3 Hz Input Current Draw e Less than 12 Amps at 100 VAC input voltage e Less than 10 Amps at 120 VAC input voltage Less than 5 3 Amps at 230 VAC input voltage Power Consumption 700 watts maximum 1 3 Storage Environment Temperature 35 to 60 C 31 to 140 F Humidity 10 to 90 RH Noncondensing 1 4 Operating Environment Temperature 15 to 35 C 59 to 95 F Humidity 15 to 85 RH Noncondensing Magnetic Field 50 Gauss maximum 2005 July Rev B 7F3318 1 1 Service Manual 1 5 Altitude 30 5 m 100 ft below sea level to 3 050 m 10 000 ft above sea level 1 6 Floor Vibration The IMAGER shall operate with no image degradation with floor vibration levels up to e 1x 10 7 G2 Hz ata frequency range of 1 50 Hz in the vertical or horizontal direction e 6x10 G2 Hz ata frequency range of 50 200 Hz in the vertical or horizontal direction e 5x 10 6 G2 Hz ata frequency range of 200 650 Hz in the vertical or horizontal direction e 1x 10 6 G2 Hz ata frequency range of 650 1000 Hz in the vertical or horizontal direction 1 7 FloorLevelness The floor must be level within 1 with respect to gravity vector direction 1 8 FloorLoad 100 Ib sq in calcul
61. either by failure of the DC POWER SUPPLY oras a result of an open or failed INTERLOCK will deactivate the optics 8 78 7F3318 2005 J uly Rev B Section 8 QuickSheets 8 5 68 27 604 Invalid Laser Dynamic Range LOCAL PANEL Message Log Message DICOM Message Severity Calibration Failed Optics Optics calibration failed to Adjust ELEC DOWN 0 Fatal Alarm sounds Laser Dynamic Range within limits Summary Optics calibration and diagnostics detected that the calculated laser dynamic range was outside the predefined valid range Optics calibration and diagnostics are performed at power up and before every calibration print During this process the ATTENUATOR is calibrated and laser power is checked and calibrated During laser checks the laser dynamic range is tested Dynamic range is defined as the ratio of the POWER MONITOR reading at maximum laser power to the reading at minimum laser power If this ratio is outside the set limit error 27 604 is declared L gt Note This error can occur after the MCS BOARD or SCANNER MODULE has been replaced and the laser dynamic range adjustment is not performed The adjustment uses software to tune an offset value in an EE POT on the MCS BOARD This in effect matches the MCS BOARD to the optics Result of Error The IMAGER is unable to print film It can accept and queue new jobs but it will not initiate new films Films downstream from the P LATEN will be completed All other films will be
62. in the service manual After maintenance prints until PM should be reset via the SERVICE TOOL FE Action This is an informational message only 2005 J uly Rev B 7F3318 8 29 Service Manual 8 5 27 20 912 Image Data Transfer Parity Error Detected LOCAL PANEL Message Log Message DICOM Message Severity None Parity error detected in the image data NORMAL 3 Notify transfer from the PCIO Card to Optics Summary The MCS has detected a parity error in the data transfer from the DRE The DRE will immediately try to reprint A clear vertical stripe about 1 mm wide will be printed across the 17 inch dimension of the film each time the error occurs The error can be generated either by software or hardware Result of Error The IMAGER may be able to continue printing normally Affected films will be visibly marked as described above User Action The error sometimes spontaneously clears itself If it does not the operator should restart the IMAGER If this does not clear the error a service call is required FE Action Following are possible causes for this problem listed in probable order of occurrence Bad RIBBON CABLE or CABLE connection between the DRE and MCS Failed PCIO BOARD Failed MCS BOARD e Malfunctioning DRE 8 30 7F3318 2005 J uly Rev B Section 8 QuickSheets 8 5 28 20 913 Data Transfer Count Error Detected LOCAL PANEL Message Log Message DICOM Message Internal Image Transfer Image transf
63. off still blocked 26 544 2 Densitometer turn on Exit Sensor Wait up to Is S8 Is S8 Y blocked off 72 28 55 seconds still blocked 2 Vertical turn on Transport Sensor Is S6 Turn on Step 2 blocked off Yes to drive film Yes an into platen p2 Platen Film r Sensor 1 1 Turn on Step 2 to drive film if ________ RaT any from platen Motor to processor Y Run Step 1 l Feed Roller d d Motor ilm in fee rollers into Y Is S6 Turn on Step 2 Y US Y blocked off gt to drive film es Dum y into platen p 2 Platen Film Sensor No Turn on Step 2 to drive film if any from platen to processor y Turn off sb se Step 2 Film is cleared Next Pag 8100 225A Figure 7 4 Film Clearing Process 2005 J uly 7 3318 Service Manual Prev Pag Pickup Assembly Tests Feeder Module diagnostics begin about 27 seconds after power on with the pickup assembly test This procedure first determines the current position of the pickup mechanism and then moves the pickup to the home position If the pickup does not position as commanded the process is retried If the problem remains after a total of three tries P921 is displayed Note This retest before error display applies to all power on diagnostics Is film cleared from imager Yes Contact Feeder Module micro sy
64. sNewIP InputBox sPrompt Enter new IP address e g 172 16 254 1 If sNewIP Then MsgBox No changes made 2005 J uly Rev 7F3318 8 17 Service Manual Else Set oS hell CreateO bject WS cript S hell Set oExec oShell Exec cmd _ amp Chr 34 amp c DV8150 Utils S etMcsP pp amp Chr 34 _ amp conn MCS1 ip amp sNewIP Do While Not oExec StdO ut ndOfStream sLine sLine amp oExec StdOut R eadline Loop If sLine setmcsppp help conn connection name gt ip ip address gt version Then MsgBox Bad input Make sure the IP is x x x x where x is unique between 1 255 Else addArray SplitsNewlP 1 1 addStr addArray 0 amp amp addArray 1 amp amp addArray 2 amp amp addArray 3 1 oS hell RegWrite HKLM SOFTWARE KHID F astball MIBUpAddress addStr REG SZ Script Trace MCS SNMP agent amp oShell RegRead HKLM SOFTWARE KHID F astball MIB lpAddress Script Trace Power cycle the machine to make setting effect MsgBox sLine End If End If 5 Select RUN and enter 192 168 1 150 as the new PPP IP address 6 Power cycle the machine and then both the DRE and MCS will work on the new subnet Loading Updated Modality Preferences Database via Kodak REMOTE MANAGEMENT SERVICES For DRE version 1 0 1 603 when the MPDB file is downloaded via the Kodak REMOTE MANAGEMENT SERVICES the 8150 LASER IMAGER has to be
65. 0 8150 MCS 6 8 2004 14 46 07 071 pm ttenC alib 293 1502 0 8150 MCS 6 8 2004 14 46 07 097 pmAttenCalib 325 1258 09150 MCS 6 8 2004 14 46 08 081 pmAttenCalib 358 1062 0 8150 MCS 6 8 2004 14 46 08 281 pm ttenC alib 390 896 0 8150 MCS 6 8 2004 14 46 08 501 pmAttenCalib 423 750 0 8150 MCS 6 8 2004 14 46 08 692 pmAttenCalib 455 644 DY8150 MCS 6 8 2004 14 46 08 812 pm ttenC alib 488 549 0 8150 MCS 6 8 2004 14 46 09 022 pmAttenCalib 520 469 DVv8150 MCS 6 8 2004 14 46 09 232 pmAttenCalib 553 402 DY8150 MCS 6 8 2004 14 46 09 433 pm ttenC alib 585 345 0 8150 MCS 6 8 2004 14 46 09 633 pm ttenC alib 618 294 0 8150 MCS 6 8 2004 14 46 09 853 pmAttenCalib 650 255 08150 MCS 6 8 2004 14 46 10 063 aodCalib 0 000000 0 8150 MCS 2005 July Rev B 7F3318 7 87 Service Manual 7 10 8 NT Event Log App This is a log of all Windows events related to software applications 5 8 2004 14 41 51 2103 KPDFrmPre Deactivate Forced thread termination gt MIM Dv8150Em 5 8 2004 14 41 51 No error occurred RNlAppsrc Dv81S 0Em 5 8 2004 14 42 08 The description for Event ID 156 Source RNIServiceManager cannot ANIServiceMe Dv8150Em 5 8 2004 14 42 08 The description for Event ID 0 Source systemcontrol cannot be found systemcontrol Dyv8150Em 5 8 2004 14 42 03 The service manager successfully initiated a system shut down ANIServiceMe Dy8150Em 5 8 2004 14 42 09 The service manager successfully stopped RNIServic
66. 1000 500 PTET Input 95 zae SSS F3318 2005July Rev Section 2 Installation SIEFC969 Designed to satisfy the requirements of Siemens for use with the Fluorospot COMPACT modality The t values in this TFT SET are similar to the values defined for the SFH301A4 TFT SET but the SIEFC969 values have been adjusted to optimally meet the needs of the Fluorscope COMPACT The t value plots below indicate a shape that is approximately linear in brightness with the different minimum t values corresponding to the different selectable Dmax values 4000 3500 3000 2500 2000 1500 1000 son 0 20 40 60 80 100 Input 5 SIEFL87B A slight modification to the SFH301A4 TFT SET designed to match as closely as possible the Siemens requirements for Fluorospot DSA The t value plots below indicate a shape that is approximately linear in brightness with the different minimum t values corresponding to the different selectable Dmax values 4000 3500 3000 2500 2000 1500 1000 son Input 55 2005 July 7F3318 2 63 Service Manual SIEFL87C A slight modification to the SIEFL87B TFT SET designed to match as closely as possible the latest Siemens requirements for the Fluorospot DSA 4000 3500 3000 2500 2000 1500 1000 500 0 20 40 60 80 100 Input 55 SIEFLTOP A slight modification to the SIEWS87B TFT SET desi
67. 11 Use the METER to check the temperature of the DRUM again The temperature must be 123 5 124 5 C 254 3 256 F 2005 July Rev B 7F3318 3 3 Service Manual 3 2 PROCESSOR DRUM RTD Caution The following calibration procedure is done at the manufacturing site and should rarely have to be performed in the field It is included here for reference DO NOT perform this procedure unless directed to do so by Service Engineering Misadjustment can cause additional machine problems Specification Output of the Voltage to Frequency Converter on the MCS BOARD TP1 is 99 5 to 100 5 Khz Special Tools Calibrated DIGITAL MULTIMETER with frequency measurement capability e g Fluke 87 or an OSCILLOSCOPE PORT ADJUSTMENT TOOL Adjustment 1 Remove the REAR PANEL and setthe SERVICE SWITCH in the Service position 2 With power off remove the CONNECTOR PLUG from 17 on the MCS BOARD This disconnects the RTD from the circuit 3 Attach a JUMPER to pins 1 and 2 Calibrate 4 Connectthe DIGITAL MULTIMETER setto measure frequency or an OSCILLOSCOPE to TPI lead and AGNDI lead 5 Adjust POT VR1 on the MCS BOARD so the measured frequency is 99 5 to 100 5 KHz 6 Power off Remove J UMPER reconnect the RTD CONNECTOR PLUG to J17 set SERVICE SWITCH to its normal operating position and replace the REAR PANEL NEM eee eee gt 2 JP1 J umper in calibrate position Figure
68. 127 0 0 1 771 EKService S OAPS erver SOAPServices WSDL 6 8 2004 14 51 57 GET 304 127 0 0 1 D EkService scripts menuS cripts js 6 8 2004 14 51 57 GET 200 127 0 0 1 250 EkService pages F4D 90319 757F 4444 9D 32 1469710 ann 17170604 COT TV C euism m IC emm ICO m nmm T rng 2005 July Rev B 7 3318 7 85 Service Manual 7 10 6 Local Panel Log This is a subsystem log that includes all events for the LOCAL PANEL filtered from an Application Log Note that the Subsystem column includes only LocalP anel 6 8 2004 16 31 18 765 User pressed FrmMain btnSyslnfo 06 8150 LocalPanel 5 8 2004 16 31 20 297 User pressed FrmSysinfoMenu btn Yersioninfo 08150 LocalPanel 6 8 2004 16 31 24 844 User pressed Fim ersion nfo btnB ack DY8150 LocalPanel 6 8 2004 16 31 26 055 User pressed FrmSuyslnfoMenu btnB ack 0 8150 LocalPanel 5 8 2004 16 31 27 367 User pressed FrmMain btnBack 08150 LocalPanel 6 8 2004 16 33 27 037 Screen Timeout occurred 0 8150 LocalPanel 6 8 2004 16 33 27 064 Backlight Timeout occurred Screen set to idle intensity DY8150 LocalPanel 5 8 2004 16 37 45 741 User pressed FrmStatus btnM enu DV8150 LocalPanel 5 8 2004 16 37 48 485 User answered No to PromptT oU selnstallation amp ssistant DV8150 LocalPanel 6 8 2004 16 37 48 525 User pressed FrmMain btnSetuplmager DY8150 LocalPanel 6 8 2004 16 37 52 972 User selected listModalityContiguration Modality SCU config 0 8150 LocalPanel 6 8 2004 16 37 55 946 U
69. 15mm Clear Border Final Fiducial 48 pixeis 3 75 mm 127 1 5 3240 pixels 253 125 mm Step 19 plus Fiducial Step 18 plus Fiducial 168 pixels 13 125 mm Step 17 plus Fiducial 14 x 17 Film Size Step 2 plus Fiducial Step 1 plus Fiducial Clear Border 9 375 mm 13 125 mm E 4 120 pixels 0 12 pixels Figure 6 13 14 by 17 Inch Calibration Sheet 7F3318 2005 uly Rev B Section 6 Theory of Operation 6 4 4 2 Reading the Dpatch The Dpatch is an option for use only on 14 x 17 inch film The Dpatch is an area on the sheet of film that is exposed and processed to provide a reference for quality control of optical density Itis a patch of density 1 0 on the top border of the film see Figure 6 14 The density of the Dpatch is measured to provide feedback to the AIQC system AIQC then adjusts the optics attenuator as necessary to control the intensity of the laser beam to achieve the target density Film Notch On 11 x 14 film the notch is atthe bottom of the right edge of the film Edge of Film Dpatch density of 1 0 4 Dpatch border fiducial 32 0 3 0 mm Image Area Figure 6 14 The Dpatch 6 4 4 3 Using Test Calibration Data to Create the Film Model Once a successful calibration is achieved the AIQC system and GSM use the data to create a Film Model and Media Lookup Table which tell the optics module how mu
70. 2 These two channels control direction of the Centering Motor by generating two square waves that are 90 degrees out of phase If Phase 1 leads the motor operates in the home direction If phase 2 leads it operates in the centering direction e Vertical On When low turns on the Transport Roller Motor e Vertical Clk This is a pulse width modulated signal that controls the stepping rate of the Transport Roller Motor 6 14 7F3318 2005 J uly Rev B Section 6 Theory of Operation Kicker On When low turns on the Kicker motor Kicker Clk This is a pulse width modulated signal that controls the stepping rate of the Kicker Motor Processor Heater Control Controls the duty cycle of the Processor Heater Translate Clk This is a pulse width modulated signal that controls the stepping rate of the Optics Translation Stepper Motor e Processor Clk This is a pulse width modulated signal that controls the stepping rate of the Processor Stepper Motor 6 4 2 2 Film Processor Control The MCS Master CPU and Address Decoder FPGA control the temperature of the Processor heater as follows A 1 000 ohm RTD is used to sense heater temperature The RTD output is converted to a frequency modulated signal on the MCS board This signal PROC TEMP FREQUENCY IN is sentto the CPU where the proper duty cycle for the application of 120 vac heater power is determined The CPU sends a PROC HEATER CONTROL signal to the Address Decoder FPGA which
71. 2 3 Using Advanced filtering 7 76 7 8 2 4 Contents of the Log 7 79 7 8 2 9 Log Levels ov cat noa ado s 7 81 DICOM LOO ce os ra od Oe one dr eg ob P s inis 7 82 728 4 EtrtorTally p as 7 83 SL G vic asta tid NEP SEDE NC Md Mot 7 85 1 8 6 Pere te D pete 7 86 Words MOS LOG gd ad 7 87 7 8 8 NT Event Log 7 88 7 8 9 NT Event Log System 7 89 7 8 10 Print Delivery Log _ 7 90 Section 8 QuickSheets wii ice cei nm cee nice D RR 8 1 9 1 OVGMIEW nine cutee dew E XS E yen wed ERA TE eee 8 1 7F 3318 2005 J uly Rev B 8 2 8 3 8 4 8 5 2005 July Rev B 7F3318 DICOM Status Messages LOCAL PANEL Status Messages Error Codes Subsystems in the 8150 LASER IMAGER everity 8 4 1 8 4 2 Error Code QuickS heets Error 00 099 through 00 530 Error Notification in General PACS Subsystem 8 5 1 8 5 2 8 5 3 8 5 4 8 5 5 8 5 6 8 5 7 8 5 8 8 5 9 8 5 10 8 5 11 8 5 12 8 5 13 8 5 14 8 5 15 8 5 16 8 5 17 8 5 18 8 5 19 8 5 20 8 5 21 8 5 22 8 5 23 8 5 24 8 5 25 8 5 26 8 5 27 8 5 28 Error S Table of Contents Error 01 001 through 01 910 Error Notification in Service
72. 20 s SP96 0000 2851 2 2 asa 5 7 1116 28 NotAvailable 2043545 SP7F1098 30 SP74 0401 9156 6 Ji usus T L5570 2 vv en 2005 J uly Rev 7F3318 Figure 9 14 INTERNAL CABLING Section 9 Illustrated Parts Breakdown Description Qty HARNESS AC Power 1 CABLE Interlock 205i Taur IPEA SUD IS AO Ey 1 CABLE Interlock Rear 1 CABLE Interlock e eMe e EE ES 1 CABLE Service Switch 1 CABLE Pickup FCB beaten bte eee et ones uke eet 1 HARNESS 1 cries hexane EDI EMI 1 HARNESS Rollback Elevator 1 CABLE Transport S MCS 1 CABLE Feeder POW 1 HARNESS FCB Feed 1 CABLE Feeder 1 CABLE Barcode 1 HARNESS Vertical lt 1 CABLE Ribbon DRE Cr AEA 1 CABLE SPBIBSMES asd entes Cex en mils eons BP RO dens 1 CABLE Ribbon Platen Optics Module 1 CABLE Ribbon 5 Optics 1 HARNESS MCS Platen
73. 21 MIM 165 49 2004 06 08 MIM 250 1 2004 05 26 MIM 300 48 2004 06 08 MIM 1503 2 2004 05 26 MIM 1505 2 2004 05 26 MIM 1551 2 2004 05 26 1904 1 2004 05 26 MIM 2058 1 2004 05 24 MIM 2064 1 2004 05 24 3 To save a Current or Lifetime E rror Tally a Click Save on the bottom of the Error Tally screen b In the Save Copy As window select the File Name of the folder on yourLAPTOP where you wish to save the Tally c Click Save gt Note Your LAPTOP must contain Local Log Viewer software to view the saved log 7 84 7F3318 2005 J uly Rev B Section 7 Troubleshooting 7 10 5 IIS Log This Internet Information System log records all attempts to connect to the web server In addition to the time of each event the information in the log columns includes Method e Protocol Time Taken e URI Stem e Client IP Time Method Protocol Client IP Time Taken URI Stem 5 8 2004 14 41 53 POST 200 127 0 0 1 10 EKService 5 O4PS erver SO4PServices WSDL 5 8 2004 14 51 45 GET 200 127 0 0 1 381 fekservice default asp 5 8 2004 14 51 45 GET 304 127 0 0 1 30 fekservice scripts plathormG lab als js 6 8 2004 14 51 45 GET 200 127 0 0 1 130 ekservice default asp 6 8 2004 14 51 45 GET 304 127 0 0 1 D EkService objects spControls Ipk 5 8 2004 14 51 45 GET 304 127 0 0 1 D fekservice serpts soapS cripts js 6 6 2004 14 51 46 GET 304 127 0 0 1 20 ekservice banner html 6 6 2004 14 51 46 GE
74. 3 3 Calibrating the PROCESSOR DRUM RTD 3 4 7F3318 2005 J uly Rev B Section 3 Adjustments 3 3 PROCESSOR FILM DIVERTER ASSEMBLY STRIPPER Specification Gap between DIVERTER BLADE and DRUM END CAPS must be 0 38 to 0 50 mm 0 015 to 0 020 in The DRUM must be at operating temperature for valid check and adjustment Required Tools FEELER GAUGES M2 5 ALLEN WRENCH Measurement 1 Raise the UPPER HOOD 2 Release the 2 DRUM COVER LATCHES and open the DRUM COVER Caution The HEAT SHIELD and the surface of the PROCESSOR DRUM are hot Take care in handling 3 Use a FEELER GAUGE to check the gap between the DIVERTER and END CAPS of the DRUM It must be 0 38 to 0 50 mm 0 015 to 0 020 in 4 Rotate the DRUM and check gap consistency around the DRUM Adjustment 1 Close the DRUM COVER 2 Carefully remove and set aside the HEAT SHIELD 3 Loosen the 2 DIVERTER ATTACHING SCREWS see Figure 3 4 4 Setthe gap between the DIVERTER and END CAPS of the DRUM to the specification You will have to open the DRUM COVER to check the gap L gt Note To avoid having to open and close the DRUM COVER for check and adjustment you may wish to remove the DRUM COVER Use a 2 5 ALLEN WRENCH 5 Tighten the 2 DIVERTER ATTACHING SCREWS and recheck the gap Readjust as necessary 6 Replace the HEAT SHIELD and close and latch the DRUM COVER Attaching Screw and Washer Felt Pad Diverter Figure 3 4 Adjustin
75. 3 6 Section 2 Installation Checking Site Readiness Check that the site is ready for installation of the IMAGER Site Requirements are specified in the SITE READINESS CHECKLIST for the Kodak DryView 8150 LASER IMAGER 7F 3336 The requirements include 2 3 7 Location Requirements One of the following AC power sources within 2 5 m 8 ft of the left rear corner of the IMAGER 100V AC 10 50 60 Hz 3 Hz 120VAC 10 60 Hz 3 Hz 230V AC 10 50 Hz 3 Hz A network connection for a single modular RJ 45 plug within 8 m 26 ft of the right rear corner of the IMAGER Film of the correct size and type supplied by the customer Required Configuration Information Check that the following customer information is available for configuration of the IMAGER The Network Host Name for the IMAGER The Network Address for the IMAGER including IP Address Subnet Mask Gateway The DICOM Port Number for the IMAGER A list of all MODALITIES that will connect to the IMAGER For each MODALITY the list should include Manufacturer Modality Type CR DR etc Model Name Film type to be used Film size to be used The following information is required for installation of RMS Customer Name The following are the same as provided for the Customer Department Network Configuration Region Node name Country IP Address Location SubnetMask Gateway Continued 2005 J uly Rev B
76. 57 Optics Transport at Home Interlocks Front Door Open 12 Hood Open Service Switch engaged gt Note The screen above shows the normal state of the SENSORS in the IMAGER while film is not in transit 3 If you wish to temporarily stop monitoring Click Pause to stop monitoring Click Resume to resume monitoring 4 To discontinue monitoring the SENSORS click Stop 5 To monitor the SENSORS while film is moving through the IMAGER a From the main menu of the SERVICE TOOL select Diagnostics gt Test Prints gt MCS Transport b Return quickly to the Monitor Sensors screen and click Run c Observe the Monitor Sensors screen to see changes in the state of the SENSORS 6 To see a plotted graph of the operation of up to 3 selected SENSORS a To Starta test print select Diagnostics gt Test Prints gt MCS Transport b Return quickly to the Monitor Sensors screen and select by checking the SENSOR or SENSORS you wish to monitor c Click the Graph Sensors tab d Click Run 7 18 7F 3318 2005 J uly Rev B Section 7 Troubleshooting e Observe the screen Graph Sensors Monitor Sensors Feeder Sensors Pickup Home R1 R2 R3 R4 R RG Ra R9 R10 milliseconds passed from midnight Feeder Sensors Feed Roller Home R1 R2 R3 R4 RS RG R7 RS Rg R10 milliseconds passed from midnight 7 2 9 Obtaining Film Data This procedure obtains information from the RF T
77. 61 8 62 8 63 8 64 8 65 8 66 8 67 8 68 8 69 8 70 8 71 8 72 8 73 8 75 8 77 7F 3318 2005 J Rev B 8 5 69 8 5 70 8 5 71 8 5 72 8 5 73 8 5 74 8 5 75 8 5 76 8 5 77 8 5 78 8 5 79 8 5 80 8 5 81 8 5 82 8 5 83 Table of Contents 27 605 POWER MONITOR is Saturated 27 606 ATTENUATOR Calibration Failed 27 640 Optics Translation Home Failure 27 641 Optics NVRAM Failure 27 923 Optics Diagnostics Failed 27 931 Optics Communications Failed 27 932 Optics Communications Retry 28 506 MCS Cannot Read PROCESSOR Temperature 28 509 PROCESSOR Warmup Failure 28 551 PROCESSOR DRUM HEATER Failure 28 554 PROCESSOR Over Temperature Error 29 924 DENSITOMETER Offset Failure with Light Source Off 29 925 DENSITOMETER Offset Failure with Light Source On 29 931 MCS Cannot Communicate with DENSITOMETER 29 932 MCS Cannot Communicate with DENSITOMETER NotiflCatOni 4 eevee pone teri bans Section 9 Illustrated Parts Breakdown Figure 9 0 SYSTEM Figure 9 1 CABINETRY WITH LOCAL Figure 9 2 FILM PROCESSOR ASSEMBLY Figure 9 3 ROLLER SET ASSEMBLIES
78. 8 98 7F 3318 2005 J uly Rev B Section 8 QuickSheets 8 5 81 29 925 DENSITOMETER Offset Failure with Light Source On LOCAL PANEL Message Log Message DICOM Message Severity Internal Diagnostic Failure Densitometer offset reading outof ELEC DOWN 0 Fatal Densitometer Alarm sounds range with light source on Summary Before every print and during diagnostics a reading of the Density Sensor is taken with the Light Source turned on If this reading is outside the specified range this error is declared Result of Error The IMAGER is unable to print film It can accept and queue new jobs but it will not initiate new films All films in the IMAGER will be reprinted The error can be cleared only by restarting the IMAGER User Action 1 Restart the IMAGER 2 Ifthe error persists call Service FE Action Perform the DENSITOMETER reference level adjustment paragraph 3 5 2005 J uly Rev 7F3318 8 99 Service Manual 8 5 82 29 931 MCS Cannot Communicate with DENSITOMETER LOCAL PANEL Message Log Message DICOM Message Internal Communications MCS failed to communicate with ELEC DOWN 0 F atal Failure Densitometer Alarm Densitometer after 5 attempts sounds Summary This error occurs if the MCS tries to communicate with the DENSITOMETER MICRO but receives no response after 5 attempts Result of Error The IMAGER is unable to print film It can accept and queue new jobs but it will not initiate new fil
79. A RECEIVER BOARD which includes a BACKLIGHT INVERTER and a SPEAKER 2005 J uly Rev B 7 3318 6 3 Service Manual 6 2 1 3 Image Processing in Main Memory Because the IMAGER scans the long way on the page the acquired image has to be rotated to accommodate it to the 14 by 17 inch page see Figure 6 3 The image is also scaled to convert 8 bit pixels to 13 bits 12 bits data plus 1 bit parity These processes occur in MAIN MEMORY After this initial processing the image is transferred to the temporary storage area on the HARD DISK When print request is received the image data is retrieved from DISK and placed in buffers in MAIN MEMORY There the image is processed on the fly to customize it per user requests contrast and density and film characteristics measured in calibration The page format 15 set up and images are sized interpolated as requested by the user Then the image data 15 rasterized and sent out scan line by scan line to the PCIO BOARD which sends it to the MCS for printing Acquired Exposed Image Image 256 Pixels 512 Pixels 8100 154A i 256 Pixels Figure 6 3 Image Rotation 6 2 2 PCIO BOARD The PCIO BOARD plugs into the PCI Bus ofthe MOTHERBOARD Thus itis on line with the CPU DIMM MEMORY and HARD DISK of the COMPUTER The image cable from the DRE to the MCS plugs into the output side of the BOARD The PCIO BOARD provides the following interfaces for image data and serial co
80. AE Title Media Types Page Formatting r AE Title The AE Title device logical name is provided for information only Logical Name Modify L gt Note The AE Title on the 8150 cannot be changed The 8150 does not care what the modality uses for an AE Title for the PMA destination 2 To select the film types to be used in the IMAGER select Media Types Printer Configuration AE Title Media Types Page Formatting Media Types For each film size specify the Media Type and maximum size in pixels r 35 x 43 cm Blue Clear 7 Any Blue or Clear W Image Width Image Height Image Height with Annotation gt Note A Media Types screen will display for each of the 3 film sizes The example above is for 35 by 34 cm 14 by 17 in film 2005 J uly 7 3318 Service Manual 3 For all film sizes that will be used select Any Blue or Clear for the Media Type L gt Note Do not change the default values shown for Image Width and Image Height These values select the maximum number of pixel positions for a 1 up portrait image on the page The Image Height is reduced for pages with annotation For page formats other than 1 up the following applies In any column of images on the page the sum of all Image Heights plus all separations between images cannot exceed the Image Height pixel value In any row of i
81. Assac 1 Setting Image IB for Position 1 N SET MIM Network 6 8 2004 16 09 15 202 SCP Assac 1 IB Rows 512 from SCU Network 6 3 2004 15 09 15 202 SCP 1 IB Columns 512 from SCU MIM Network 5 8 2004 16 09 15 202 SCP Assac 1 IB Bits Allocated 16 from SCU MIM Network 6 8 2004 16 09 15 212 SCP Assac 1 IB Bits Per Pixel stored 12 from SCU MIM Network 6 9 2004 16 09 15 212 SCP 1 IB High Bit 11 from SCU MIM Network 5 8 2004 16 09 15 212 SCP 1 using Aspect ratio 1 1 gt ERR_MSG Missing attribute MIM Network 6 8 2004 16 09 15 222 SCP 1 IB Photometric Interpretation MONOCHROME2 from SCU Network 6 8 2004 16 03 15 302 SCP 1 IB Polarity Defaults to NORMAL MIM Network 5 8 2004 16 09 15 302 SCP Assac 1 IB Smoothing Type from FB CUBIC MIM Network 7 82 7 3318 2005 J Rev B Section 7 Troubleshooting 7 10 4 Error Tally The logs include 2 Error Tallies or lists of machine errors ACurrent Tally which lists the number of errors that have occurred since the count for the errors was reset to 0 ALifetime Tally which lists the total count of all errors that have occurred during the lifetime of the machine 1 To access the Error Tallies connect your LAPTOP to the SERVICE TOOL via SecureLink and select Logs gt Error Tally The Current Error Tally will display Error Tally Information Current Lifetime r Current The current error ta
82. COMPANY Rochester NY 14650 HEALTH IMAGING
83. Caution ISOPROPYL ALCOHOL is highly flammable Follow the manufacturer s instructions for safe use and handling 6 Use ISOPROPYL ALCOHOL and a LINT FREE CLOTH to clean e RAILS on the TRANSLATION ASSEMBLY DRIVE surface of the FLYWHEEL 7 Remove the film from the bottom of the IMAGING ASSEMBLY 8 Install the IMAGING ASSEMBLY See procedure 4 11 1 9 Move the TRANSLATION ASSEMBLY to the front of the IMAGER 10 From the front of the IMAGER open the COVER ofthe IMAGER ASSEMBLY OPTICS MODULE SLIT COVER 11 Remove the SLIT COVER from the new OPTICS MODULE Check that double back tape is still attached to slit cover 12 Install the SLIT COVER on the old OPTICS MODULE for shipment Checkout Install a SUPPLY CARTRIDGE and energize the LASER IMAGER Make a print of a flat field inspection film Check for horizontal banding If horizontal banding occurs clean LENS L3 See procedure 5 5 Make a print of a clinical image and check for artifacts en wu cec E Check the quality of the clinical image with the customer 2005 J uly Rev B 7F3318 4 61 Service Manual 7 Troubleshoot image problems if necessary See Section 7 4 62 7F 3318 2005 J uly Rev Section 4 Disassembly Reassembl 4 12 POWER ASSEMBLY 1 Remove the SUPPLY CARTRIDGE A Warning When the POWER CORD is plugged in hazardous voltages are present in some areas of the IMAGER These voltages can cause severe injury or death De energ
84. Close Cartridge Closed Note Film may prevent Raise Cartridge cartridge from closing Note Once defined will change to come from MIM DRE Release Door with ID DoorOpen2 Cartridge Open Door Override Figure 6 22 Front Door Open Operation Sheet 2 of 2 6 44 7 3318 2005 J uly Rev B Section 6 Theory of Operation Front Door Close C Start Move Elevator Motor Step8 ee eee Down ELEVATOR MOVE COUNT Elevator did not lower to Home Position No Cartridge Presence Sensor 51 On No Elevator Home Sensor S12 On 21 132 No Cartridge Yes E M Retry Elevator Did Elevator Feeder Yes Elevator Success Feeder Elevator Failure MCS L S2 Off 21 139 H Feeder Move Elevator Down over i travel ELEVATOR_ i HOME COUNT 1 time Home Success lower s 2 3 MCS No Yes 21 131 Tray Feeder Elevator Jammed pass Open Cartridge RF Tag Reader MCS Start Rollback Motor Read Tag a Read Cartridge Info 3 DCM1 ata s Did Cartridge i start opening mcs Feeds Rollback Cartridge Info Yes Home Sensor Error MCS Unable to Identify Tem e MCS Open Cartridge H
85. DATA FORMATTERS 1 5 DICOM PRINT SCP WEB SERVER MIM DRE MIM PART10 PACS LINK Customer 10 100 BaseT Ethernet Network ASTU BROWSER MODALITY LAPTOP SCU COJPUTER Figure 6 5 DRE Software Components 6 3 3 PACSLink MIM The PACSLink MIM software used in the DRE is a subset of the standard Print Server control software used in previous Kodak MIM products The standard PACS Link software has been modified to include a Delivery Interface component which treats the 8150 IMAGER as a Special destination Also the software has been extended to incorporate into the Connection Database and Print SCP functions the new DICOM Modality Preferences Database to support customer installation of the 8150 IMAGER General functions of the PACSLink MIM software include 2005 J uly 7F3318 6 7 Service Manual Provide software interfaces between PACSLink and the LOCAL PANEL and SERVICE LAPTOP to allow the DRE to communicate with the LOCAL PANEL and the SERVICE LAPTOP and to deliver jobs from an SCU to the MIM Delivery Interface for rendering Handle setup and configuration of the SCUs identified in the Connection Database Support controlled startup and shutdown of the DRE e Acceptor reject print requests from DICOM depending on the usability of S CU specified parameters for the print job e Accept and queue valid print jobs from an SCU for transmission to the MIM Delivery Interface component of the PAC
86. Dmax recommended for this type of MODALITY If there is a range of densities Selectthe density value indicated in bold if there is one fthere is no bold value select the middle value For example if the range is 2 7 to 3 1 select 2 9 fthere are only 2 density values select either one Refer to Table 2 5 and selectthe Table No contrast setting that corresponds to the chosen Density Dmax value Refer to Table 2 4 and select the Smoothing Type for the selected type of MODALITY Enter the selected parameter values on the Image Optimization screen in the SERVICE TOOL 2005 J uly Rev B 7F3318 2 49 Service Manual Table 2 4 Recommended TFT Sets for MODALITIES Type of MODALITY TFT Set Table No Density Smoothing Con Dmax Type trast Kodak and other CR WRKSTN2A 1 Select Table number Computed Radiogra 2 contrast Dmax in phy and DR Digital he pairs shown Do not Radiography Systems 3 use with Fuji CR See Also Workstations and 4 Fuji CR below imaging devices that output data to a linear in density contrast curve 5 Table number contrast and Dmax must be cho sen in the pairs shown The contrast curves are approximately linear in density for most of the pixel value range but become relatively flat at high bright pixel val ues Designed for use with Fuji CR only DSA Digital Subtrac VER713C0 tion Angiography in Alternative 1 cluding C Arm and Digital
87. Film Models If the TAG data matches an existing Film Model and the date of creation of the Film Model is 7 days old or less the Media LUT is built from this Film Model Otherwise a calibration print is requested and a new Film Model is built Hardware Media Linear LUT This LUT exists in firmware on the MCS Board In earlier IMAGERS this LUT performed the same functions as the Media LUT in the DRE software In the 8150 IMAGER the sole purpose of the Media Linear LUT is to convert 12 bit image data to 14 bit data for the D A CONVERTER that feeds the Laser control circuits 6 48 7 3318 2005 J uly Rev B Section 6 Theory of Operation 6 5 3 Power up Calibration and Print Sequence Figure 6 27 illustrates the sequence of power up initialization diagnostics calibration and printing that involves the AIQC components and GSM 1 Initialize At power up a series of self tests is run on the OPTICS DENSITOMETER and RF TAG 2 Perform optics calibration and diagnostics 3 Read the RF TAG When a CARTRIDGE is loaded and opened the RF TAG on the bottom of the CARTRIDGE is read The TAG data includes emulsion jumbo band film type blue or clear version number and CARTRIDGE ID The slave micro on the RF TAG BOARD passes the emulsion jumbo band and type information to the GSM This information is called the sensi data 4 Loadthe Film Model After receiving the sensi data read from the RF TAG GSM searches for the appropria
88. IMAGER is unable to print film It can accept and queue new jobs but it will not initiate new films All films in the IMAGER will be reprinted The error can be cleared by only by restarting the IMAGER User Action 1 Restart the IMAGER 2 Ifthe error persists call Service FE Action 1 Is the DRUM warm at all If not turn off IMAGER power open the TOP HOOD and check for a short in the DRUM HEATER circuit as follows a Remove 3 SCREWS from the END CAP of the HEATER Or remove 2 SCREWS and pivot the END CAP out of the way b Check the THERMAL BREAKER BUTTON inside the DRUM If ithas popped out use a SCREWDRIVER to pop it back in c Apply power and check to see if the BREAKER BUTTON pops back out If it does there is probably a short in the HEATER wiring and the DRUM should be replaced Otherwise proceed as follows 2 Power off and check resistance of the HEATER ELEMENT through the SLIP RINGS Resistance should be about 30 ohms If the HEATER ELEMENT is open replace the DRUM 3 Check that the RTD CABLE is plugged into the MCS BOARD J 17 on the upper right corner of the BOARD Also check that calibration J UMPER PLUG JP7 is plugged into the NORM position on the BOARD 4 Check for other possible problems in the following order e Loss of 120 vac Check at CONNECTOR J 1 of the PIB Pins 1 and 4 are Line Pins 3 and 6 are Neutral Low ac voltage i e 120 vac supply is below spec Defective TOP HO
89. Ifthe error persists call Service FE Action 1 Check the MCS Log to determine the point at which the error occurred This error may be the result of a reset triggered by noise ora CABLE problem This can happen even if the RF TAG SUBSYSTEM passed its power up test 2 Use the SERVICE TOOL to check the RF TAG SUBSYSTEM as instructed in paragraph 7 2 5 2005 J uly Rev 7F3318 8 43 Service Manual 8 5 41 21 145 Unsupported Media Type LOCAL PANEL Message Log Message DICOM Message Severity Unsupported Media Type Media Type located in Drawer is not BAD SUPPLY 1 Alert Alarm sounds Supported MGZ Summary The RF TAG information indicates that the type of media in the CARTRIDGE is incompatible with the IMAGER Whenever a new CARTRIDGE is loaded or the IMAGER is powered on the software reads the RF TAG on the bottom of the CARTRIDGE to identify the media type size CE mark and CR mark information This error occurs if the media type is wrong It can also occur if the IMAGER has been configured to reject the CE CR mark Result of Error The IMAGER is unable to print It can still accept and queue print jobs User Action 1 Try anew film CARTRIDGE 2 Ifthe error persists call Service FE Action This is an informational message only 8 44 7F 3318 2005 J uly Rev B Section 8 QuickSheets 8 5 42 21 146 Wrong Media Size LOCAL PANEL Message Log Message DICOM Message Severity Unsupported Media Size Media Ty
90. Imager The connection icon indicates that the Secure Link connection to the Imager has been completed Launch the WebLink 8150 Service Tool Select Diagnostics Scripts On the Scripts page click Local Browse to the local copy of the TriggerMP DB vbs file and highlight the file This file is provided on your laptop to enable you to perform this process Click Open and click Run Select the Scripts RunTime tab A Pass message appears when the file has been copied to trigger enca If the ACMS Query did not provide the required modality parameters configure the Imager by manually entering the parameters using the Modality Parameter Values Capture process 7 34 7F3318 2005 J uly Rev B Section 7 Troubleshooting 7 3 Using Power On Self Test as a Troubleshooting Tool Each time power is applied to the IMAGER a Self test of major MCS functions occurs followed by calibration of the LASER OPTICS A knowledge of the sequence and timing of this process can be a valuable aid in trouble analysis Self test occurs normally without user intervention However as described in the following paragraph you can open the IMAGER before applying power so that you can observe the self test process in the MACHINE The following pages provide flow charts of the major self test functions and indicate the timing of individual tests with respect to application of power to the SYSTEM 7 3 1 Setting up for Observation of Self Test With power removed and
91. J uly Rev 7F3318 8 33 Service Manual 8 5 31 Error 21 116 Film Pickup Failure LOCAL PANEL Message Log Message DICOM Message Film J am in Area 1 Film Pickup Position Sensor S3 failed FILM TRANSP Pickup Alarm sounds indicate that pickup has reached ERROR feeder nip transfer position Summary The FEEDER BOARD has returned a pickup fail message after being commanded by the MCS BOARD to pick up film The error is declared if after 2 tries the PICKUP ASSEMBLY has not been able to pick up up and place a film in the feed area as indicated by PICKUP POSITION SENSOR S3 All other steps of the pickup operation must have completed successfully Otherwise the error associated with the failed step will be indicated instead of this error Result of Error The system is unable to print Otherwise it can operate as normal acquiring queueing prints completing processing etc User Action 1 Touch the Video button to view the error video 2 Touch the Door button to open the FRONT DOOR 3 Clear any jammed film 4 Close the CARTRIDGE manually 5 Close the FRONT DOOR 6 Run test prints to clear fogged film from the IMAGER FE Action 1 Use the SERVICE TOOL to check PICKUP POSITION SENSOR 53 2 Remove the customer FILM CARTRIDGE and load a CARTRIDGE of transport film Then cycle film and observe the film pickup operation see paragraph 7 5 5 3 3 Remove and inspect the FILM PICKUP ASSEMBLY as necessary se
92. MCS log for indications of Door open without CARTRIDGE closed This could indicate an interlock problem 2 If there appears to be no INTERLOCK problems replace the SCANNER MODULE 2005 J uly Rev 7F3318 8 81 Service Manual 8 5 70 27 606 ATTENUATOR Calibration Failed LOCAL PANEL Message Log Message DICOM Message Calibration Failed Optics Optics Calibration Failed Power ELEC DOWN 0 F atal Alarm sounds Monitor readings not monotonic Summary ATTENUATOR calibration failed during optics calibration and diagnostics The POWER MONITOR readings were not monotonic Optics calibration and diagnostics are performed at power up and before every calibration print During this process the ATTENUATOR is calibrated and laser power is checked and calibrated At the beginning of the sequence POWER MONITOR offset is measured and beam POWER MONITOR range is checked Then the ATTENUATOR is calibrated Calibration consists of measuring ATTENUATOR optical density using POWER MONITOR readings taken at 21 different ATTENUATOR settings This should create a smooth monotonic curve of ATTENUATOR setting vs optical density If spikes occur on the curve error 27 606 is declared This may indicate scratches or dirt in the optics Result of Error The IMAGER is unable to print film It can accept and queue new jobs but it will not initiate new films Films downstream from the PLATEN will be completed All other films will be reprinted The err
93. Micro System 6 4 1 1 Serial Communication Protocol 6 4 1 2 Physical Interface MES BOSEU 6 4 2 1 Master CPU 6 4 2 2 Film Processor Control 6 4 2 3 Stepper Motor Drive 6 4 2 4 Media Lookup Table Linear LUT 6 4 2 5 Laser Scanning Characteristics 6 4 2 6 General Pixel Flow Control Functions Laser Optics lt 6 4 3 1 6 4 3 2 Film 6 4 3 3 Optics Module 6 4 3 4 Optics Translation Assembly 6 4 3 5 Optics Module Control Board Densitometer Module 6 4 4 1 Step Wedge 6 4 4 2 Reading the Dpatch 6 4 4 3 Using Test Calibration Data to Create the Film Model 6 4 4 4 Densitometer Control Functions RF TAG SUBS Y bes eis t dn 6 4 5 1 RF TAG SUBSYSTEM COMPONENTS 6 4 5 2 RF TAG CommandS Feeder Control Board 6 4 6 1
94. OK either the MOTOR is bad or the MOTOR DRIVER CHIP on the FEEDER CONTROL BOARD has failed 2005 J uly 7F3318 8 39 Service Manual 8 5 37 21 132 No Supply CARTRIDGE LOCAL PANEL Message Log Message DICOM Message No Cartridge Alarm sounds No cartridge in supply drawer NORMAL Summary The presence of a CARTRIDGE has not been detected by CARTRIDGE PRESENT SENSOR S1 Thus either a CARTRIDGE is not loaded or the SENSOR is defective When a CARTRIDGE is inserted it contacts the flag ACTUATOR of CARTRIDGE PRESENT SENSOR S1 causing the SENSOR to conduct The SENSOR signal indicates thata CARTRIDGE is installed A defective SENSOR will result in a false error indication Result of Error The IMAGER is unable to print Otherwise it can operate as normal acquiring queueing prints completing processing etc User Action The operator should open the FRONT DOOR and load another CARTRIDGE FE Action Normally this is a routine message that FILM CARTRIDGE is not loaded However if this error occurs with a CARTRIDGE loaded you can assume that there is a problem with CARTRIDGE PRESENT SENSOR 51 Use the SERVICE TOOL to check SENSOR S1 paragraph 7 4 1 1 8 40 7F 3318 2005 J uly Rev B Section 8 QuickSheets 8 5 38 21 134 Supply CARTRIDGE Empty LOCAL PANEL Message Log Message DICOM Message Severity Cartridge Empty Alarm Cartridge is empty EMPTY MEDIA 1 Alert sounds Size and Type Summary The sup
95. PAD L gt Note When you replace a FILM DIVERTER ASSEMBLY see the adjustment procedure paragraph 3 3 in Section 3 Heat Shield Attaching Screws B Diverter 7 Felt Pad 8100 203A Figure 4 9 Removing the PROCESSOR DIVERTER and FELT PAD 2005 J uly Rev 7F3318 4 11 Service Manual 4 3 ROLLER SET ASSEMBLIES 1 Open the FRONT DOOR to close the FILM CARTRIDGE Then remove power and disconnect the POWER CORD A Warning When the POWER CORD is plugged in hazardous voltages are present in some areas of the IMAGER These voltages can cause severe injury or death 2 Open the UPPER HOOD and remove the REAR PANEL paragraph 4 1 2 3 Liftthe BELT TENSIONER and remove the TRANSPORT PROCESSOR DRIVE BELT Rear View in Figure 4 10 4 Forthe TRANSPORT ROLLER ASSEMBLY located at the REAR BASE of the PROCESSOR only a Open the 2 LATCHES and remove 2 SCREWS under the LATCHES b Remove the BACK LATCH PLATE Rear View 5 ForEXIT ROLLER SET ASSEMBLY a Remove the EXIT BELT b Remove 1 ATTACHING SCREW from each end of the ASSEMBLY Rear View and Front View ROLLER ASSEMBLY out of its SLOT Front View 6 Forthe other 2 ROLLER SET ASSEMBLIES a Remove 1 ATTACHING SCREW from each end of the ASSEMBLY Rear View and Front View b Pullthe ROLLER ASSEMBLY out of its SLOT Front View 4 12 7F 3318 2005 J uly Rev Section 4 Disassembly Reassembl DRIVE BELT
96. PLASTIC CLAMPS 11 METAL CLAMPS Remove RIGHT SIDE PANEL 4 PLASTIC CLAMPS 8 METAL CLAMPS Remove the top FOAM PACKING Remove the PLASTIC BAG containing the printed Kodak DryView 8150 LASER IMAGER SAFETY MANUAL and the Kodak DryView 8150 LASER IMAGER USER DOCUMENTATION CD 8 Read the SAFETY MANUAL pt cado apo iS 7338 2005 July Rev B Section 2 Installation 2 3 2 Completing the Uncrating ao Important Before completing the uncrating check that there is an unobstructed space of 3 m 10 ft in front of the crate GU es UE SS x H200_0041DA Use aSCREWDRIVER to pry out and remove the PLASTIC CLAMPS remaining on the FRONT PANEL Lay the FRONT PANEL on the floor in front of the IMAGER Remove the METAL CLAMPS from the bottom of the SIDE PANEL Remove the METAL CLAMPS from the bottom of the REAR PANEL Place a chair or similar item against the SIDE PANEL to keep it from falling Hold the REAR PANEL so it does not fall Remove the METAL CLAMPS from the edge of the REAR PANEL Remove the REAR PANEL and set it aside Remove the SIDE PANEL and set aside Remove the FOAM PACKING 2005 J uly 7F3318 2 3 Service Manual 10 With SCISSORS cut the FOIL BAG all around the base of the IMAGER 11 Remove the FOIL BAG gt Note The bottom of the FOIL BAG under the Imager will remain in place 12 Remove the ACCESSORIES package See page 2 7 for contents
97. PROCESSOR COVER and check the DRUM for damage If the DRUM is damaged replace it Do step 3 before installing the new DRUM Caution ISOPROPYL ALCOHOL is highly flammable Follow the manufacturer s instructions for safe use and handling 1 3 Clean the PROCESSOR ROLLERS without disassembly Use ALCOHOL SATURATED WIPES to wipe the ROLLERS clean L 4 If you installed a new DRUM calibrate DRUM temperature see paragraph 3 1 in Adjustments 5 4 7F3318 2005 J uly Rev B Section 5 Tools Preventive Maintenance Cleaning 5 4 4 20 000 Cycle PM Checklist Every 20 000 MACHINE cycles perform all of the following procedures in the order listed 1 Printa flat field inspection FILM i e gray out to compare against the film after PM is complete 2 De energize the IMAGER and open the PROCESSOR COVER 3 Cool the PROCESSOR for 30 minutes before cleaning the DRUM and ROLLERS 1 4 Clean the EXPOSURE PLATEN Procedure 5 4 5 5 Replace the AIR FILTER on the FRONT DOOR Procedure 5 4 6 1 6 Replace the CHARCOAL FILTER Procedure 5 4 7 L 7 Remove and check the DRUM Procedure 5 4 8 8 Clean the DRUM Procedure 5 4 9 9 Clean the HEAT SHIELD and PROCESSOR ROLLERS Procedure 5 4 9 10 Clean or replace the FILM DIVERTER ASSEMBLY Procedure 5 4 10 11 Replace PROCESSOR GASKET Procedure 5 4 11 12 Install the DRUM Procedure 5 4 12 L gt Note After cleaning place the used LINT FREE CL
98. Removing the ROLLBACK MOTOR 2005 J uly Rev 7F3318 4 27 Service Manual 4 7 3 CARTRIDGE PRESENT SENSOR S1 1 Remove the SUPPLY CARTRIDGE de energize the IMAGER and remove the ROLLBACK MODULE 4 7 1 A Warning When the POWER CORD is plugged in hazardous voltages are present in some areas of the IMAGER These voltages can cause severe injury or death 2 Disconnectthe ELECTRICAL PLUG from the CARTRIDGE PRESENT SENSOR Figure 4 24 Caution If the same SENSOR is to be re installed be careful notto damage the MOUNTING CLIPS during removal 3 Gently rock the CARTRIDGE PRESENT SENSOR back and forth to disengage the MOUNTING CLIPS 4 When replacing the CARTRIDGE PRESENT SENSOR make sure that the MOUNTING CLIPS are securely seated in the sheet metal 5 Reassembly is the reverse of disassembly Caution Do not damage the wiring when you install the ROLLBACK MODULE in the IMAGER Make sure CABLES are routed properly after reassembly Cartrid ge Present Sensor Figure 4 24 Removing the CARTRIDGE PRESENT SENSOR 4 28 7F 3318 2005 J uly Rev B Section 4 Disassembly Reassembl 4 7 4 ROLLBACK HOME SENSOR 52 1 Remove the SUPPLY CARTRIDGE de energize the IMAGER and remove the ROLLBACK MODULE 4 7 1 A Warning When the POWER CORD is plugged in hazardous voltages are present in some areas of the IMAGER These voltages can cause severe injury or death 2 Disconnect the ELECTRICA
99. SENSOR and MOTOR operations The sequence of machine operations will halt then restart when an error occurs rather than proceeding to the next test 21 921 is declared on the third cycle but the test keeps on cycling after 21 921 is displayed Check the last thing that occurred before 21 921 3 Test suspected SENSORS as instructed in paragraph 7 4 4 Ifthe 21 921 error is generated but the self test MOTOR SENSOR sequence does not even start though the PICKUP ASSEMBLY may move slightly the problem may be in the FEEDER BOARD or a CABLE In this case proceed as follows a Check the RJ 45 connectors and the cabling between the MCS BOARD and FEEDER BOARD b Swap RJ 45 connectors on the MCS BOARD as follows 1 Power off 2 Swap the FEEDER BOARD RJ 45 with the RJ 45 for any other MicroComm peripheral 3 Power up and check whether the other MicroComm peripheral failed If it did the RJ 45 or cabling is bad 2005 J uly Rev 7F3318 8 55 Service Manual Cups Engaged Sensor 5 10 Pickup Position Sensor S3 Vertical Transport Sensor S8 Feed Roller Motor Step1 Feed Roller Open Motor DCM4 Feed Roller Open Sensor 511 Rollback Motor DCM1 Rollback Home Sensor S2 Platen Film Sensor S6
100. Sensor Yes End of Film Feeder Module Diagnostics Self Test continues with RF Tag Subsystem diagnostics see Figure 8 2 8100 228A Figure 8 1 Film Feeder Module Diagnostics Sheet 3 2005 J uly 7F3318 8 59 Service Manual 8 5 53 25 922 RF TAG SUBSYSTEM Diagnostics Failure LOCAL PANEL Message Log Message DICOM Message Severity Internal Diagnostics Failure RF Tag Reader failed self diagnostics ELEC DOWN 0 F atal RF Tag Alarm sounds Summary The RF TAG SUBSYSTEM failed its diagnostic self test At power up the MICRO on the RF TAG INTERFACE BOARD is commanded to self test the RF TAG SUBSYSTEM If it fails the test after 3 tries this error is declared See the flow chart on the next page for test sequence details Result of Error The IMAGER is unable to print It can still accept and queue new jobs but new films will not be initiated User Action 1 Restart the IMAGER 2 Ifthe error persists call Service FE Action 1 Check the MCS Log for the message CARTRIDGE ID reader diag failed 2 Check the RJ 45 CONNECTORS and the cabling between the MCS BOARD and RF TAG INTERFACE BOARD 3 Swap 45 CONNECTORS the MCS BOARD as follows a Power off b Swap the 45 forthe RF TAG INTERFACE BOARD with the RJ 45 CONNECTOR for any of the other MicroComm peripherals c Power up d Check whether the other MicroComm peripheral failed If it did the RJ 45 or cabling is bad
101. TFT SET designed to match as closely as possible the Siemens requirements for installations of the Siemens Polytron 8700 4000 3500 3000 2500 2000 1500 1000 500 Input SIEWS 87B slight modification to the WRKSTN2A TFT SET designed to match as closely as possible the Siemens requirements for the Sienet WORKSTATION 4000 3500 3000 2500 2000 eat 1500 1000 Ses ia za 8 ex let Es Lec pma ERE E d St em 1 47 TERT Be BS ET SN Leti ER Te aes 500 ee eS ee ee ee ee mE em poem ee pem ee m en 0 20 40 60 80 100 Input HEBER TF3318 2005July Rev B Section 2 Installation TLII Created for use with the Toshiba LASER IMAGER INTERFACE for Nuclear Medicine applications It provides several linear in density curves 5 with increasing density plus 5 with decreasing density It also provides 5 approximately linear in brightness curves similar to some of the VER693C0 curves for an MR MODALITY Toshiba FLEXART The combination of diverse curve shapes in this TFT SET for different MODALITIES makes it an example of a hybrid TFT SET 4000 3500 3000 ff 2500 44 2000 1500 1000 500 Input VER693CO A popular gen
102. Wu Rear View Figure 4 39 Removing the UPPER VERTICAL TRANSPORT MOTOR 4 44 7F3318 2005 J uly Rev B Section 4 Disassembly Reassembl 4 11 IMAGING EXPOSURE ASSEMBLY 4 11 1 IMAGING MODULE 1 Remove the SUPPLY CARTRIDGE A Warning uM cM ey ee 10 When the POWER CORD is plugged in hazardous voltages are present in some areas of the IMAGER These voltages can cause severe injury or death De energize the IMAGER and disconnect the POWER CORD Open the FRONT DOOR Remove the REAR PANEL of the IMAGER At the front of the IMAGER remove 2 ATTACHING SCREWS Front View At the rear of the IMAGER remove 2 ATTACHING SCREWS Rear View Slide the end of IMAGING MODULE about 4 inches outside the rear of the IMAGER as shown in Figure 4 40 Loosen the 2 SCREWS attaching the connector and disconnect the flat CABLE Rear View Disconnect the 4 CABLE PLUGS from the right side Rear View Carefully slide the IMAGING MODULE most of the way out of the IMAGER and lower the end to the floor while the other end remains in the IMAGER Caution 11 The IMAGING MODULE weighs 22 27 kg 50 60 lbs
103. a FILM CARTRIDGE loaded 1 Open the FRONT DOOR and remove the REAR PANEL This will allow you to observe self test operations 2 Setthe SERVICE OVERRIDE SWITCH in the Service position L gt Note The last procedure in the self test sequence the OPTICS AIQC calibration and test cannot occur with the SERVICE OVERRIDE SWITCH set in the Service position The program will skip this test and change to a Ready state after performing the rest of the tests At this point you should turn off SYSTEM power setthe Service Override to the Normal position replace the REAR PANEL close the FRONT DOOR and energize the IMAGER to repeatthe sequence This time all tests will sequence 7 3 2 Initialization and Self Test Sequence Flow Charts The following flow charts illustrate the sequence of initialization and self test Figure 7 3 MCS Initialization and Self Test Startup Figure 7 4 Film Clearing Process Figure 7 5 FILM FEEDER MODULE Diagnostics including PICKUP ASSEMBLY Checks Sheet 1 FILM FEED ROLLER FILM FEED MOTOR VACUUM PUMP and ELEVATOR Checks Sheet 2 ROLLBACK and CUPS ENGAGED SENSOR Checks Sheet 3 Figure 7 6 RF TAG SUBSYSTEM Diagnostics Figure 7 7 DENSITOMETER MODULE Diagnostics Figure 7 8 OPTICS MODULE Diagnostics Figure 7 9 OPTICS AIQC Calibration and Testing 2005 J uly Rev 7F3318 7 35 Service Manual MCS Master CPU initializes MCS Happy light blinks Check status 7 sec
104. are securely seated with their snap feet extending through the cutouts If snap feet are broken replace the SENSOR 7 56 7F 3318 2005 J uly Rev B Section 7 Troubleshootin 7 5 6 2 Removing and Inspecting the FILM PICKUP MODULE 1 Remove the MODULE as instructed in procedure 4 6 1 See Figure 7 15 below for identification of components referenced in the following procedures Film Out Sensor S6 Cup Plate Assembly Heel Assembly Driver Assembly Frame Figure 7 15 FILM PICKUP MODULE COMPONENTS 2 Check the CUP PLATE ASSEMBLY as follows see Figure 7 16 a Do the CUPS slide back and forth freely in their slots If not check alignment of the VACUUM HOSES attached to the cups If they are impeding movement of the CUPS reposition the hoses b Are the CUPS finger tight It not tighten them Are the CUP SPRINGS overextended If so replace them d Does the CUP PLATE ASSEMBLY rotate freely on its pivots If not check and bend the pivot flanges as necessary to align them Cup Plate Pivot Figure 7 16 Components of the CUP PLATE ASSEMBLY 2005 J uly Rev 7F3318 Service Manual 3 Check the PICKUP MOTOR DRIVE PINION as follows see Figure 7 17 Grasp the plastic PINION and attempt to rotate it back and forth relative to its HUB If there is any play the PINION is sheared and the MOTOR ASSEMBLY must be replaced Figure 7 17 Components of the FILM PICKUP MOTOR 4 Check
105. by PICKUP POSITION SENSOR S3 Result of Error The system is unable to print Otherwise it can operate as normal acquiring queueing prints completing processing etc 7 Ifthe error persists call Service See Error 21 117 User Action FE Action Use the SERVICE TOOL to check PICKUP POSITION SENSOR S3 8 36 7F3318 2005 J uly Rev B Section 8 QuickSheets 8 5 34 Error 21 119 Pickup Did Not Contact Film LOCAL PANEL Message Log Message DICOM Message Internal Hardware Failure Film Film Surface Sensor S4 failed to FILM TRANSP Pickup Alarm sounds confirm that pickup arm assy ERROR lowered and contacted film Summary The FILM SURFACE SENSOR did not change from unblocked to blocked after the pickup arm left the home position Result of Error The IMAGER is unable to pick up film and print Otherwise it can operate as normal acquiring queueing prints completing processing etc User Action 1 Restart the IMAGER 2 Ifthe error persists call Service FE Action 2005 J uly Rev 7F3318 8 37 Service Manual 8 5 35 Error 21 120 VACUUM CUPS Did Not Engage Film LOCAL PANEL Message Log Message DICOM Message Internal Hardware Failure Arm Position Sensor S10 failed FILM TRANSP Film Pickup Alarm to confirm proper completion of a ERROR sounds vacuum cup arm movement Summary The CUPS ENGAGED SENSOR did not change from blocked to unblocked after the pickup arm contacted the f
106. cables called a quad cable mounted on two pulleys a drive pulley and an idler The drive pulley is mounted on and coaxial with a circular flywheel The flywheel is friction driven by a polyurethane tire mounted on the shaft of Optics Translation Motor STEP 4 6 20 7F3318 2005 J uly Rev B Section 6 Theory of Operation Flywheel and Drive Pulley Tensioner Rail Idler Pulley Translation Motorand Tire priv Qd bles Optics Module Mounts Here 8200 14XT Figure 6 10 Optics Translation Module 6 4 3 5 Optics Module Control Board This board located in the laser enclosure routes the analog drive signal and 9 volts dc from the MCS Board to the drive circuits that operate the laser diode see Sheet 2 of the system diagrams in Section 10 In addition it contains a slave micro and auxiliary circuits that control the Optics S pinner Motor and Attenuator Motor and report status to the Master CPU on the MCS Board It also houses the SOS Detector and Beam Power Monitor circuits Parameter EEPROM The EEPROM forthe Slave Micro contains the following information which is loaded during manufacturing Serial number for the Optics Module which can be in the range from 0 to 65535 Startof Scan SOS Delay Time which can be in the range of 0 to 255 pixels Identification of the polygon mirror facet 0 or 1 to which the pixel stretch value must be applied The value for pixel stretch in the range of 1500
107. copiers 3 Click Run 7F3318 2005 J uly Rev B Section 7 Troubleshooting 7 2 14 Running an MCS Transport Test This procedure runs film through the MCS without exposing it It can be used to check operation of the film transport 1 From the main menu of the SERVICE TOOL select Diagnostics gt Test Prints gt MCS Transport MCS Transport ate gt Transport sends film through film path without exposing it Press Run to initiate the test Status Ready Click to show Result Data 2 Use the Copies dropdown window to select the number of sheets of film you wish to run 3 Click Run 4 If you wish to stop the process before all sheets are run click Stop 7 2 15 Obtaining a Diagnostics Summary This procedure will provide status of any diagnostic currently running in the IMAGER It will also show the results of any diagnostic that has been run recently 1 From the main menu of the SERVICE TOOL select Diagnostics gt Diag Summary to display Current Status of the diagnostics Diagnostics Summary Information Current Status Test Results Current Status This status displays any currently executing diagnostic and the user who is executing the test A test may be aborted by pressing Stop Diagnostic MCSDensitometerDiagnastics RunDiag Service User 10020909230 Note If a Diagnostic is currently running the name of the test and the insurance number of the user who requested
108. detect film trailing edge Summary The film is jammed on the PROCESSOR DRUM After exposure the film is driven from the PLATEN by the PLATEN ROLLER MOTOR through PLATEN FILM SENSOR S6 continuing up through the VERTICAL TRANSPORT area At the top of the VERTICAL TRANSPORT area the film passes through VERTICAL TRANSPORT SENSOR S8 turning it on If the SENSOR does not turn off within 46 seconds indicating that the film has passed entirely through the SENSOR 26 542 is declared The PROCESSOR stops rotating and turns off heat when the error occurs All films in the IMAGER are marked as bad and will have to be reprinted After the jammed film is removed and the TOP HOOD is closed the error is reset and the PROCESSOR is restarted The PROCESSOR may need to warm up before printing will continue Result of Error The IMAGER is unable to print It can still accept and queue new jobs But new print jobs will not be initiated Removing the jam clears the error when the TOP HOOD is closed User Action A Warning The PROCESSOR is hot Open the TOP HOOD Open the PROCESSOR COVER Remove jammed film Close the PROCESSOR COVER and HOOD FE Action Normally this message simply indicates that a jam has occurred and the error will be cleared when the jam has been removed and the TOP HOOD closed However the error could be generated by a defective VERTICAL TRANSPORT SENSOR S8 J WN 8 70 7F3318 2005 J uly Rev B Secti
109. filtered from the Application Log The Network Subsystem is part of the DRE application e Error Tally This log records all error events in 2 separate tallies a Current Tally which counts and lists errors that have occurred since the last reset of this tally and a Lifetime Tally which counts all errors since installation of the system IIS Internet Information Server Log This log records all attempts to connect to the web server Local Panel Log This is a log of events in the Local Panel Subsystem filtered from the Application Log The Local Panel Subsystem is part of the DRE application MCS Log This is a log of MCS Subsystem events filtered from the Application Log The log records all transactions between the peripheral MICROS and the MCS Master CPU that are transferred to the DRE application over the communications link between the MCS and DRE NT Event Log App This log records Windows events in the software applications e NT Event Log System This log records Windows events in the system software e Print Delivery Log This is a log of all Delivery Subsystem events filtered from the Application Log The Delivery Subsystem is part of the DRE Application 7 10 2 The Application Log 7 10 2 1 Using the Application Log The Application Log and the subsystem logs which can be filtered from it are important troubleshooting resources When an error occurs you can search the logs to help locate the probl
110. foot against the outside bottom edge of the DOOR Push outward away from the FRAME on the top of the DOOR Hold the DOOR in position and tighten the 3 FILTER COVER SCREWS Close the DOOR Check for a uniform gap around the DOOR Repeatthe adjustment if the gap is not uniform Push FILTER COVER SCREWS Place DOOR Foot oer Against COVER DOOR b DoorGapAdj Figure 5 5 Adjust DOOR Gap Caution FILTERS can be disposed of as non hazardous waste You should discard FILTERS in a landfill or incinerator with energy recovery in a municipal commercial or industry facility Contact your state or local government to determine if additional disposal requirements apply 2005 J uly Rev B 7F3318 5 9 Service Manual 5 4 7 Replacing the CHARCOAL FILTER Supplies and Tools Required New CHARCOAL FILTER Procedure 1 2 3 4 Open the FRONT DOOR Push the RETAINING CLIP on the top front of the FILTER back and up and pull out the old FILTER Slide in the new FILTER all the way to the back stop Pull the RETAINING CLIP forward and down to lock the FILTER in position Then close the FRONT DOOR Caution FILTERS can be disposed of as non hazardous waste Discard FILTERS in a landfill or incinerator with energy recovery in a municipal commercial or industry facility Contact your state or local government to determine if additional disposal requirements apply RETA
111. generates the PROC SSR DRIVE signal This pulse width modulated signal low going active energizes the solid state relay on the Processor Interface Board that routes ac power to the heater 6 4 2 3 Stepper Motor Drive Two types of drive circuits are used on the MCS to operate the four stepper motors that are directly controlled by the MCS Board Film Centering Stepper and Platen Roller Stepper Drivers for these motors require an enable signal and two phase signals square waves spaced 90 degrees apart The phase signals determine the direction of current through the motors and the direction of rotation as shown in Table 6 1 Table 6 1 Stepper Motor Phase Direction Relationship Stepper Motor Driver Leading Phase Motor Direction Platen Roller Stepper Motor Phase 1 Load Direction Phase 2 Unload Direction Film Centering Stepper Motor Phase 1 Home Direction Phase 2 Centering Direction To start a motor the CPU configures the phasing channels for the appropriate direction and sends the required enabling signal PLATEN ON or CENTERING ON active low To stop the motor the enabling signal is driven high It is not necessary to stop the phasing signals to stop the motor The Film Centering Stepper Motor is driven at 12 volts dc The Platen Roller Stepper uses 24 volts dc because it requires high rotational speed and needs higher power to overcome motor winding inductance Optics Translation Stepper Processor Stepper Vertical Transpo
112. if Dpatch is used For each image printed the density of the Dpatch on the trailing edge of the film is measured The density read is used to adjustthe OPTICS ATTENUATOR as follows e If Target Dpatch Dpatch Moving Average no ATTENUATOR correction is required e fTarget Dpatch Dpatch Moving Average lt or 0 7 the ATTENUATOR must be adjusted e fTarget Dpatch Dpatch Moving Average gt 1 3 a calibration print must be scheduled 10 Build a new Film Model and Adjustthe ATTENUATOR if necessary The ATTENUATOR setting is adjusted to obtain corrected density readings on ensuing Dpatches 2005 J uly Rev 7F3318 6 49 Service Manual NO Print Requested fol loaded film size Print Film Ready to Print Manual Mode Create Media LUT or not 14x17 Set Attenuator or no Dpatch requested Power On Reset Self tests RF Tag Reader Load Saved Film Build Manual Build and Save Model Mode film model Film Model Processor Densitometer Optics Read Dpatch Operator select Manual Mode Perform Optics Dpatch OD in 0 7 1 3 Diagnostics and Calibration Report 21 631 Dmin not Met Wait for Imager Door Closed and Cartridge Present Report Detect Calibration 21 632 Request from Dmax not Met Local Panel WebLink Read RF Tag Roll Report 21 624 Bad Densitometer Data Start calibration Valid Film Mode Found An ail in process m E prints so the
113. it indicates which mirror is currently scanning When the speed sense pulse is detected Mirror 1 is currently scanning 2005 J uly 7F3318 6 19 Service Manual Scanner speed is controlled by a digital feedback loop on the Optics Module Control Board OMCB The time interval between two adjacent scanner speed pulses is measured by a counter using a 16 MHz clock An error signal determined by the timing measurement is calculated by the microprocessor on the OMBC and sent to the DAC which feeds a correction voltage to the Spinner Motor Start of Scan Sensing and Beam Power Monitoring Start of Scan Detector PD1 on the OMCB serves as both SOS detector and laser beam power monitor The laser is turned off after completion of a scan line to avoid light scattering Turn on of the beam is timed so that it will reflect onto PD1 at the beginning of scan generating the SOS pulse This pulse is fed back to the MCS Board Pixel Clock Generator to synchronize startup of the pixel clock To measure laser power the laser is turned on constantly at a set driver level and PD1 performs peak detection for a number of scans The power value is measured by an A D Converter to provide a laser power reading Laser Driver The laser driver housed in the box which contains the laser diode provides current to run the laser The current level is determined by the voltage present at the driver input A feedback loop is formed by reflection of the beam fr
114. of maximum laser power minus power monitor offset to minimum laser power minus power monitor offset Max power Offset Min power Offset Power monitor offset is the power monitor output value measured when the LASER is turned off A laser dynamic range failure can be caused by a bad power monitor offset value Caution Do not perform this procedure unless you are sure it is required It should be performed only when an MCS BOARD or the SCANNER ASSEMBLY has been replaced or error 27 604 has occurred Unnecessary adjustment can degrade image quality L gt Note This procedure cannot be run while the IMAGER is in Service mode With the IMAGER in Service mode the laser dynamic range is 1 If the IMAGER has been in Service mode set the SERVICE SWITCH to User mode and cycle power before performing the procedure Also the UPPER HOOD FRONT DOOR and REAR PANEL must be closed for the adjustment to work Specification Laser dynamic range is 100 to 200 Desired value is 150 Values between 140 and 160 are acceptable Required Tools LAPTOP COMPUTER with Internet Explorer 5 5 or higher SERVICE TOOL Ethernet PATCH CABLE Check and Measurement Use a PATCH CABLE to connect your LAPTOP COMPUTER to the IMAGER Service Port Energize the IMAGER Use SecureLink to connect to the IMAGER Use WebLink to display the main menu of the SERVICE TOOL S elect Diagnostics gt MCS gt Optics gt Adjust Laser Dynamic Range Click Run The SERVICE TOO
115. of the film was not detected by PLATEN FILM SENSOR 56 Film is jammed between the between the FEED ROLLERS and the entrance to the PLATEN The error indication is cleared by opening the FRONT DOOR as indicated by Result of Error The IMAGER is unable to print film It can accept and queue new jobs but will not initiate a new print Films downstream from the PLATEN will be completed Any other films will be reprinted User Action 1 Open the FRONT DOOR 2 Remove jammed film 3 Close the FRONT DOOR FE Action Normally this message simply indicates that a jam has occurred and the error will be cleared when the jam has been removed and the FRONT DOOR closed However the error could be generated by a problem with PLATEN FILM SENSOR S6 preventing the SENSOR from turning on as the film actuates the SENSOR FLAG Other Possible Causes Of This Error Vacuum release requires adjustment Film pickup assembly is bent Film pickup suction cup is sticking see the procedure below Film Pickup Suction Cup Sticking This problem occurred because the Suction Cup Plate the metal to which the Suction Cups attach was manufactured too long When the Heel Pad was attached the Shoulder Screws were too tight causing the Suction Cup Plate to bend toward the Heel Pad This caused a mechanical bind in this assembly Manufacturing fixed this problem starting with machine serial number 81501384 and Film Pickup Assembly serial number PUA01943 I
116. of the image It should measure 334 8 mm for 14x14 inch film or 346 7 mm for 14x17 inch film 9 Measure the width of the image The width should be equal to the height If itis not adjust the Transport Motor Speed until width height 7 5 counts approximately 1 mm Increasing the speed will make the image wider Decreasing the speed will make the image narrower 10 When width and height are equal measure the left and right borders and determine how far the image must be shifted to center the Image on the film 11 Adjust the SOP Delay to make the right and left borders equal approximately 4 mm Changing the SOP Delay 0 1 second shifts the image 1mm left or right on the film L gt Note There is no height adjustment for the image that can be done in the field 2005 July Rev B 7F3318 3 7 Service Manual 3 5 Reference Level for DENSITOMETER Ifthe DENSITOMETER BOARD or the LIGHT SOURCE BOARD is replaced the light source reference level must be checked and adjusted Specification Reference level must be within the range shown on the Densitometer Configuration graph in the SERVICE TOOL Target values are Offset 4096 Reference 197888 214272 Special Tools LAPTOP COMPUTER with Internet Explorer 5 5 or higher SERVICE TOOL Ethernet PATCH CABLE POT ADJ USTMENT TOOL Preliminary L gt Note The following procedure should be performed in subdued lighting Make the area as dark as possible Also do n
117. parameter is measured during optics manufacturing and stored in the Optics Control Board EEPROM 6 4 2 6 General Pixel Flow Control Functions The Pixel Clock Generator and FIFO FPGAs on the MCS Board work together to control the flow of image data from the host to the laser for printing They perform the following functions without intervention by the CPU 6 16 7F3318 2005 J uly Rev B Section 6 Theory of Operation 1 Synchronize pixel generation with the SOS detector in the Optics Module 2 Position the image in the vertical direction on the film under CPU control 3 Adjust for the nonsymmetric axis of the Spinner Motor mount by varying the length of some pixels on one of the two optics mirror facets See Pixel Stretch Correction on preceding page 4 Turn the laser off during part of each rotation to prevent light scattering as the end of the mirror rotates through the beam axis See Laser Dead Time on preceding page Present the same data for scanning by both optics mirror facets consecutively Send SOL Start of Line signals to the IMS Accept image data from the IMS in high speed bursts of up to 5 Mpixels per second Allow simultaneous output of pixel data during these high speed bursts ou Do parity checking of the pixel data and generate clearly visible artifacts if an error is detected 10 Count clocks received from the IMS and written to the page If the counts do not match the programmed numbers generat
118. performing its start up self test Please wait Service Mode The SERVICE OVERRIDE Switch has been enabled Shutdown Initiated PRINTER DOWN The IMAGER is shutting down No more associations will be accepted Shutdown PRINTER DOWN Shutdown has been requested Prints in progress will Requested complete No more associations are accepted Existing ones are aborted Stopped See QuickSheets error condition has caused the IMAGER to stop Re fer to the error message on line 2 of the display System Shutting PRINTER DOWN The system is shutting down New associations are not Down accepted Warming xx PROC INIT The IMAGER is warming up xx the number of min utes until the IMAGER will be ready to operate Film Tray Status Calibrating Please A calibration is in progress Wait s No Not Calbrate Open Opening Please pec FILM CARTRIDGE is opening Wait Open Requested N A A requestto open the FILM CARTRIDGE has occurred Please Wait Job Manager Status The IMAGER will not accept any DICOM job requests A Active N A The IMAGER is accepting DICOM job requests and film is available No Media N A The IMAGER is accepting DICOM job requests but film is not available for at least one current job 8 2 7F3318 2005 J uly Rev B Section 8 QuickSheets 8 4 Error Codes 8 4 l Subsystems in the 8150 LASER IMAGER Each subsystem in the IMAGER has an identification number ID which allows error histor
119. processor heater Solid State Relay K1 This relay is controlled by the PROC SSR DRIVE signal from the MCS Board This pulse width modulated signal provides a low ground that actuates the solid state relay for duty cycles controlled by the Master CPU on the MCS Board When the relay is actuated 120 vac is applied to the processor heater via the Load 2 terminal of the relay LED1 lights when the solid state relay is energized 2005 J uly Rev B 7F3318 6 31 Service Manual 6 4 8 DC Power Supply The DC Power Supply receives 120 volts ac from the secondary of Power Transformer T1 when Circuit Breaker CB1 and the Power Switch are closed The power supply provides the following outputs to the MCS Board which distributes dc power to the remainder of the MCS e 24 volts 5 96 e 12 volts 5 e 12 volts 5 e 5 volts VCC 5 96 The Service Switch and interlocks on the front door rear panel and top hood can interrupt 12 volt and or 24 volt dc power to certain circuits as shown on sheet 2 of the functional diagrams in Section 10 6 4 9 MCS Print Sequence of Operation The MCS is involved in six basic operations in the normal course of printing a sheet of film These described in Figure 6 16 are the following e Power up and self test For details of the process see Figures 7 1 through 7 7 in the Troubleshooting section of this manual Pickup film See Figure 6 17 e Load the exposure platen See Figure 6 18
120. reprinted The error can be cleared by requesting another calibration or by restarting the IMAGER User Action 1 Restart the IMAGER 2 Ifthe error persists call Service FE Action This error can be the result of any of the following problems listed in most likely order of occurrence Open or failed INTERLOCK or SERVICE OVERRIDE SWITCH set in Service position at power on Mismatched Optics and MCS BOARD laser dynamic range adjustment needed Failed OPTICS MODULE Loss of 12 vdc power Check the MCS and GSM logs for indications of the error Sample error logs are shown on the next page The laser dynamic range value must be between 140 and 160 a If the dynamic range value is 1 0 or close to 1 0 suspect an open interlock or that the Service S witch was in User position at power on b If the dynamic range value is way off perform the laser dynamic range adjustment paragraph 3 6 3 Note the following precautions about the laser dynamic range adjustment Make sure the SERVICE SWITCH is setto normal User position before the adjustment e Cycle power and allow the IMAGER to warm up fully before performing the adjustment You may have to perform the adjustment 2 or 3 times before it succeeds 2005 J uly Rev 7F3318 8 79 Service Manual Too many SCANNER MODULES are being replaced unnecessarily in the field DO NOT replace the SCANNER MODULE if P604 appears after you replaced the MCS BOARD or SCANNER MODUL
121. test of the IMAGER Also you can run this same test from the Mechanical Diagnostics screen in the SERVICE TOOL b Check the Summary box for test results 3 To display a summary of optics data from the last calibration select Display Optics Data a Click Run Adjust Laser Dynamic Range Zero SOS Level Micro Controller Diagnostic Display Optics Data Export Optics Data Test Optics Motors r Display Optics Data Select Run to display optics data gj Run Status Complete Pass Summary Final Results Test getCurrentCalData executed at 2004 20 05T12 12 44 Status Pass PixelStretch 215z8 FacetToStretch 0 SosDelay 162 LaserDeadTime 51z2 SosLevel 3300 b Check the Status and Summary boxes on the screen 2005 J uly Rev B 7 3318 Service Manual 4 To export the optics data to a file on your LAPTOP COMPUTER select Export Optics Data a Click Run to display the optics data Adjust Laser Dynamic Range Zero SOS Level Micro Controller Diagnostic Display Optics Data Export Optics Data Test Optics Motors Export Optics Data Select Run to format the Optics Data for export Use Diag Summary to export data to Run Status Complete Pass Summary Final Results Test ExportCalData executed at 2004 20 05T12 27 2Z Status Pass PixelStretch FacetToStretch SosDelay LaserDeadTime SosLevel 21528 0 162 5122 3300 b From the main menu of the SER
122. tests basic functionality of the LOCAL PANEL by activating its Alarm beeper This checks whether the Alarm works and also whether the DRE can communicate with the LOCAL PANEL 1 From the main menu of the SERVICE TOOL select Diagnostics gt MIS gt Local Panel Diagnostic Local Panel Diagnostic in to activate Local Panel Alarm Results will be displayed in Pass or Fall window Press R Pass 0 Fail 0 Run 221 Status Ready 2 Click Run 3 Check that the Alarm sounds and that Pass is indicated 7 2 13 Running a DRE Test Print 1 From the main menu of the SERVICE TOOL select Diagnostics Test Prints gt DRE Test Print DRE Test Print Diagnostic t of Test Print modify parameters as desired and press Run ta initiate test print of process verify film successfully printed and zd atus window indicates success or failure ra settings were In nplemented t Study Label Test Print 2 Test Print 6 2 TFT Airis2aw87 Density 320 2 Smoothing Default gt 2 Contrast Contrast Print E 1 Up bd 19 Copies 185 T o Format Status Ready Glick to show Result Data 2 Selectthe parameters for the desired test print a In the Study Label window type a name up to 20 characters for the print b From the Test Print dropdown menu select the type of test print C Use the other dropdown menus to configure the test print image and select the number of
123. the Host Name and the IP 5 2 6 2 Checking the Port Number of the Secure Tunnel 2 6 3 Setting the System 2 6 4 Checking the Values for DICOM Source Communications 2 6 5 Setting up Service 2 6 6 Configuring SCP lt 2 6 7 Configuring the IMAGER to be a Destination 2 6 8 Configuring the LOCAL PANEL 2 6 9 Selecting the Type of FilM 2 6 10 Setting up Remote Monitoring RMS 2 6 11 RMS Grouping Ja esu Checking Image Backing up the System Configuration Training Key Operators Editing the Service History Guidelines for Selecting the Correct TFT Set and Related Parameters 2 121 DGTBIBOLIS niihi roe eed Pact PEOR edes EP Tt DUC 2 12 2 Selecting the Image Quality Parameters Appropriate to the MODALITY stor oie sais Ua pr edd Du ages eave Stale 2 12 3 Selecting Parameters for MODALITIES that are not DICOM GSDF Compliant 2 12 4 Selecting Parameters for DICOM GSDF Compliant MODALITIES 2 einig 2 12 5
124. the ATTENUATOR setting that achieved this density value Dpatch density must be between 0 7 and 1 3 The values are zero in the above example because the film did not use a Dpatch 7F3318 2005 J uly Rev B Section 7 Troubleshooting 7 2 11 Plotting Film Calibration Data This procedure plots a DLogE curve of the characteristics of the film from data stored from the last calibration of the film 1 From the main menu of the SERVICE TOOL select Diagnostics gt MIS gt Film Calibration Plot Film Calibration Data DlogE Curve Press GetRecords to get the calibration data Press Plot to plot a DlogE curve using the data fror the last film calibration Press Export Data to save B data to a file Current Cartridge Only Get Records Cartridge ID 2038 Film ID Sheet ID 3 Pet P D LogE Curve Export Data Ei LLL LL IL LI TL LL ILLI es oe EE ER ES ES ES E D d DES Ed Ud ER Ee ast S 43901 HEH HH ef eee ae 0 018 0 38 0 54 0 72 0 9 1 08 4 26 1 44 1 52 1 8 1 98 216 2 34 2 52 2 7 2 88 3 06 3 24 3 42 3 6 Log Exposure complete Pass 2 Click Get Records The Cartridge ID and Film ID will display 3 Click Plot to display a DLogE curve of characteristics of the film 4 Click Export Data if you wish to save the DLogE curve to a folder in your LAPTOP COMPUTER 2005 July Rev B 7 3318 7 21 Service Manual 7 2 12 Testing the LOCAL PANEL This procedure
125. the IMAGER 3 Energize the LAPTOP COMPUTER 4 Use SecureLink to connect to the IMAGER 2005 J uly Rev 7F3318 2 21 Service Manual 5 Launch Service WebLink to display the main menu of the SERVICE TOOL 6 Expand the Configuration menu items DryView 8150 Click to expand collapse S Configuration DICOM SCP Communications Cropping SCP Services mcs Film Type LP Optics Processor a System Clock Disk Management Log Level Network Remote Monitoring 2 6 1 Setting the Host Name and the IP Address 1 Obtain from the customer the Host Name IP Address Subnet Mask and Gateway that will identify this IMAGER on the network 2 From the main menu select Configuration gt S ystem gt Network 3 Click Modify L gt Note The Host Name is the network name for this IMAGER It can be a maximum of 14 characters and a minimum of one The first character must be a letter Other characters can be a letter number or a 4 Enter HostName PP Address subnet Mask Default Gateway 5 Click Save 6 Restart the IMAGER from the LOCAL PANEL to enter the network data into the system L gt Note The Host Name and IP Address data can also be entered from the LOCAL PANEL Main Menu gt Setup Imager gt Network Setup IMAGER must be restarted zz I 7338 2005 July Rev Section 2 Installation 2 6 2 Checking the Port Number of the Secure T
126. the IMAGER and the Internet to ensure security and provide administrative control It is associated with the gateway server that separates the customer network from outside networks and the firewall server that secures the customer network from intrusion 5 Click Save 6 Click Start Service 7 Setup Remote Monitoring Grouping Go on to procedure 2 6 11 2 6 11 RMS Grouping Perform this procedure after you have set up Remote Monitoring in procedure 2 6 10 1 Using Symantec pcAnywhere remote access software access the Imager Atthe Logon screen a In the User Name Field enter pcanywhere b In the Password field enter Netware28900 Note passwords are case sensitive Click OK 2 Click the SEND Ctrl Alt Del to Host button SEND Ctrl Alt Del to Host amen 3 Log off the system a Click Log Off b Click Yes IF 3318 2005July Rev 4 Atthe Microsoft Windows Logon screen a In User Name field enter pcanywhere b In the Password field enter Netware28900 Note passwords are case sensitive c Click OK You will be prompted for a Secure Link Session ID 5 Starta Secure Link Session to obtain an ID 6 In the pcAnywhere screen type in the Session ID 7 Click OK The desktop of the IMAGER will appear 2005July Rev 7 3318 Section 2 Installation Service Manual 8 Click on the Microsoft Internet E xplorer icon Fin
127. the MOUNTING BRACKET 18 Setthe DRE COMPUTER on its BASE 19 If you are going to service the DRE COMPUTER a Loosen the CAPTIVE SCREW fastening the COVER b Remove the COVER Reassembly 1 Reassemble in reverse order of disassembly 2 Ifyou installed a new DRE COMPUTER energize the IMAGER and check the version of DRE software via the LOCAL PANEL 3 Ifthe software is not up to date ghost the current version of software onto the HARD DRIVE See procedure 7 2 20 in Section 7 4 After ghosting upload the system configuration file from the backup FLOPPY DISK to the HARD DRIVE 2005 J uly Rev B 7F3318 4 71 Service Manual 4 14 1 DRE HARD DRIVE CD ROM DRIVE or FLOPPY DRIVE Preliminary Disassembly L gt Note If you are going to installa new HARD DRIVE back up the system configuration to a FLOPPY DISKETTE in your LAPTOP COMPUTER before proceeding See procedure 7 2 18 in Troubleshooting 1 Remove the SUPPLY CARTRIDGE A Warning When the POWER CORD is plugged in hazardous voltages are present in some areas of the IMAGER These voltages can cause severe injury or death 2 De energize the IMAGER and disconnect the POWER CORD 3 Remove the DRE COMPUTER from the IMAGER and remove the COVER of the COMPUTER see procedure 4 14 Removing the HARD DRIVE CD ROM DRIVE HARDDRIVE JUMPER 4SCREWS Di EENAP Lad SIGNAL CABLE POWER c CABLE Figure 4 56 Removin
128. the following adjustments Optics Translation Speed and SOP Delay Adjustment paragraph 3 4 Laser Dynamic Range Adjustment paragraph 3 6 0 dp A fete g s H i 8 H T IT S J HK Red Line Group WIRES and tie wrap to POST L5 f 8100 103C Mod Figure 4 41 Removing the SCANNER ASSEMBLY 2005 J uly Rev 7F3318 4 47 Service Manual 4 11 3 PLATEN FILM SENSOR S6 Disassembly 1 Remove the SUPPLY CARTRIDGE A Warning When the POWER CORD is plugged in hazardous voltages are present in some areas of the IMAGER These voltages can cause severe injury or death 2 De energize the IMAGER and disconnect the POWER CORD 3 Remove the IMAGING MODULE from the IMAGER 4 11 1 4 Disconnectthe ELECTRICAL PLUG from the SENSOR Figure 4 42 Caution If the
129. the log of an event as it occurs select View Active Log 3 Click OK The retrieved log will display Application Log Microsoft Internet Explorer provided by Eastman Kodak Start Stop Options Load Save Find Find Ner EM Display Fiter El Displayed 387 records 6 8 2004 14 41 09 031 12000 User pressed FrmStatus btnMenu 0 8150 LocalPanel INFO 6 8 2004 14 41 18 735 12000 User pressed FrmMain btnSystemFunctions DVv81 50 LocalPanel INFO 6 8 2004 14 41 25 064 12000 User answered OK to NotLoggedOn DY8150 LocalPanel INFO 6 8 2004 14 41 25 084 12000 User pressed FrmSysF unction btnLogoff 0 8150 LocalPanel INFO 6 8 2004 14 41 28 078 12000 User pressed FrmSysF unction btnMenu 0 8150 LocalPanel INFO 6 8 2004 14 41 30 422 12000 User pressed FrmMain btnSvyslnfo Dv amp 8150 LocalPanel INFO 6 8 2004 14 41 33 056 12000 User pressed FrmSyslnfoMenu btnHome 0 8150 LocalPanel INFO 6 8 2004 14 41 37 282 12000 User answered Yes to PromptT oShutdown 0 8150 LocalPanel INFO 6 8 2004 14 41 37 312 Synergy Shutdownt Test Shutdown Event Set Keypad INFO 6 8 2004 14 41 37 322 SYSTEM IS SHUTTING DOWN ALL KEYPADS MIM Keypad INFO 6 8 2004 14 41 37 332 12000 User pressed FrmStatus btnShutdown 0 8150 LocalPanel DIAG 6 8 2004 14 41 41 097 NotifyKeypadShutdown 1 bForceShutdown 0 MIM Import INFO 6 8 2004 14 41 41 148 got the shut down event MIM General INFO 6 8 2004 14 41 41 198 Shutdown T ype 1 MIM General 4 Cl
130. the tabs will cause double feeds The problem could be bent SEPARATOR TABS see paragraph 7 5 6 1 3 3 Ifthese or other problems are apparent go to paragraph 7 5 6 1 to remove and inspect the ROLLBACK MODULE 7 5 5 3 Checking the FILM PICKUP MODULE Start film cycling see paragraph 7 5 5 1 above 1 Doesthe DRIVER ARM hesitate as it moves up and down except for the 3 second pause after pickup If it does the PICKUP MOTOR PINION might be partially sheared S ee paragraph 7 5 6 2 3 2 Can you hearthe VACUUM MOTOR turn on and off during the cycle It should turn on when the cups squash down on the film and turn off when the film is at feed position If the MOTOR does not turn on and off at the right time feed problems will occur If it remains on constantly feed problems and film quality problems will also occur and the MOTOR will fail prematurely 3 Does the HEEL stay down on the film while the ASSEMBLY is atthe 3 second maximum bend position If it does not there is an alignment problem between the CUPS ENGAGED SENSOR on the HEEL ASSEMBLY and the corresponding ACTUATOR flag on the DRIVER ASSEMBLY Replace the FILM PICKUP MODULE 4 Does the leading edge of the film hitthe FEED ROLLER as film is lifted to feed position This can be caused by failure of the CUP PLATE to pivot freely relative to the HEEL S ee paragraph 7 5 6 2 2 5 Check the position of the film when it is inside the FEED ROLLERS after
131. uly 7F3318 8 95 Service Manual POWER MODULE J UMPERS tapped incorrectly Loose RTD CABLE on the MCS BOARD J 17 at the top of the BOARD Worn or defective SLIP RING Defective TOP HOOD INTERLOCK Work Around Power cycle to start the warming sequence from the current PROCESSOR temperature e Ifthe room temperature is set back during non working hours try bringing the room temperature up early so the IMAGER has more time to recover e installa STEP UP TRANSFORMER 8 96 7F3318 2005 J uly Rev B Section 8 QuickSheets 8 5 80 29 924 DENSITOMETER Offset Failure with Light Source Off LOCAL PANEL Message Log Message DICOM Message Severity Internal Diagnostic Failure Densitometer offset reading outof ELEC DOWN 0 Fatal Densitometer Alarm Sounds range with light source off Summary Before every print and during diagnostics a reading of the Density Sensor is taken with the Light Source turned off If this reading is outside the specified range this error is declared Result of Error The IMAGER is unable to print film It can accept and queue new jobs but it will not initiate new films All films in the IMAGER will be reprinted The error can be cleared only by restarting the IMAGER User Action 1 Restart the IMAGER 2 Ifthe error persists call Service FE Action 1 Perform the DENSITOMETER reference level adjustment paragraph 3 5 2 Check the MCS Log for the message DENSITOMETER diag fa
132. uly Rev B Section 4 Disassembly Reassembl 4 4 4 DENSITOMETER BOARD Caution Any CIRCUIT BOARD that is replaced in the IMAGER must be returned to Kodak for rework or disposed of properly PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS contain lead 1 Power down and remove the DENSITOMETER MODULE 4 4 1 A Warning When the POWER CORD is plugged in hazardous voltages are present in some areas of the IMAGER These voltages can cause severe injury or death Remove 4 HEX NUTS and WASHERS and remove the BOX from the DENSITOMETER Figure 4 14 Disconnect the RJ 45 CONNECTOR from the DENSITOMETER Remove 5 ATTACHING SCREWS and remove the DENSITOMETER BOARD After reassembly and reinstallation of the DENSITOMETER MODULE adjust the light source reference level for the DENSITOMETER as described in paragraph 3 5 in Adjustments oO B 2 Co OU ey ipaa ZA me Re P Vs 8100 73L Figure 4 14 Removing the DENSITOMETER 2005 July Rev 7F3318 4 17 Service Manual 4 5 LOCAL PANEL ASSEMBLY Caution Any CIRCUIT BOARD that is replaced in the IMAGER must be returned to Kodak for rework or disposed of properly PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS contain lead 1 De energize the IMAGER and disconnect the POWER CORD When the POWER CORD is plugged in hazardous voltages are present in some areas of the IMAGER These voltages can cause severe injury or death 2 Open UPPER HOOD 3 Disconnect CO
133. which the error occurred This may help isolate the problem 2 The components involved are the OPTICS ATTENUATOR MOTOR and the ATTENUATOR SENSOR Since these parts are in the SCANNER MODULE the complete SCANNER MODULE must be replaced 2005 J uly Rev 7F3318 8 73 Service Manual 8 5 65 27 123 SPINNER Error LOCAL PANEL Message Log Message DICOM Message Severity Internal Hardware Failure S pinner fails to rotate at desired ELEC DOWN 0 F atal Alarm sounds speed Summary The OPTICS MODULE SPINNER is not rotating or is not rotating consistently at the correct speed The SPINNER MOTOR scans the laser across the film as the beam is reflected successively from the two MIRROR facets in the double scan process Turn on and speed of the MOTOR are controlled by the SLAVE MICRO on the OPTICS MODULE CONTROL BOARD Refer to sheet 2 of the SYSTEM functional diagrams The speed control signal SERIAL CLK from the SLAVE MICRO is fed to a DAC The analog output of the DAC is amplified and used as a drive signal for the SPINNER MOTOR During each revolution of the SCANNER a PHOTODETECTOR SHAFT INDEX SENSOR is activated by the laser beam reflecting off a shiny area on the ADAPTER that secures the MIRROR to the SHAFT of the SPINNER MOTOR The resultant signal is used to track speed of the SPINNER MOTOR If the speed of the MOTOR goes out of spec 27 123 is declared Result of Error The IMAGER is unable to print film It can accept a
134. 09 13 479 Media for current delivery job Size 8 Base 2 Delivery 6 6 2004 16 09 13 479 Chosen Media Size 8 Base 2 Delivery 6 8 2004 16 09 14 031 Media for current delivery job Size 8 Base 1 Delivery 6 8 2004 16 09 14 321 Chosen Media Size 8 Base 1 Delivery 6 8 2004 16 09 14 371 Set a Pivot Density to aDRYVIEW type the action is complete but has no effect Delivery 6 8 2004 16 09 15 572 Page Closed Delivery 6 8 2004 16 09 15 582 PrintPages Delivery 6 8 2004 16 09 15 592 1 res 02 2 Images tored Delivery 6 8 2004 16 09 15 652 1 rcs 1 1 0 PageClosed Delivery 6 8 2004 16 09 15 662 1 rcs 1 4 15 DocumentClosed Delivery 6 8 2004 16 09 15 672 NetworkArbiter Queueddd DV8150 is activating Delivery 6 8 2004 16 09 15 672 ACS NextState READY JOBREADY 3 PRINTING MIM Delivery 6 8 2004 16 09 15 963 init Delivery 6 8 2004 16 09 15 983 SetStandardFormat SetlmageDisplayFormat failed Delivery 6 9 2004 16 09 16 023 sendDocument start MIM Delivery 6 8 2004 16 09 16 023 8150 Job 1 START Delivery 6 8 2004 16 09 16 023 sendDocument pageCount 1 Delivery 6 6 2004 16 03 16 023 sendDocument numCopies 1 Delivery 6 8 2004 16 09 16 033 sendDocument CopiesFinished 0 Delivery 6 8 2004 16 09 16 033 sendDocument numCopies this Delivery will do 1 Delivery 6 6 2004 16 09 16 033 sendDocument UnCollated Printing Delivery 6 8 2004 16 09 16 03
135. 0Em 5 8 2004 14 45 00 SuperSocket info SpnRegister Error 1355 MSSOLServer Dv8150Em 6 8 2004 14 45 00 19013 SQL server listening on TCP Shared Memory N amed Pipes MSSQLSERVE Dv8150Em 6 8 2004 14 45 00 17126 SQL Server is ready for client connections MSSQLSERVE Dv8150Em 6 8 2004 14 45 01 17052 Recovery complete MSSQLSERVE Dv8150Em 6 8 2004 14 45 21 The description for Event ID 160 in Source cannot ANIServiceMe Dv8150Em 6 9 2004 14 45 21 The service manager successfully started ANIServiceMe Dy8150Em 5 8 2004 14 45 21 The description for Event ID 161 Source RNIServiceManager cannot RNIServiceMe Dv8150Em 6 8 2004 14 45 21 The service manager successfully started the MIM application RANIServiceMe Dv8150Em 6 9 2004 14 45 21 Starting Kodak Secure Tunnel Logger version v 1 0 0 0 Ports Web Browser Kodak Dy8150Em 5 8 2004 14 45 21 Kodak SecureLink Server is ready to accept secure connections on port 443 Kodak Dyv 150Em 5 8 2004 14 45 29 The service manager failed to start Error 1056 RANIServiceMe Dv8150Em 6 8 2004 14 45 42 Software Licensing Failure ANIAppSrc Dv8150Em 678 2004 14 45 42 165 AUTHORIZATION NOT PRESENT gt ERR MSG Software Licensing MIM Dv8150Em 7 88 7 3318 2005 J Rev B Section 7 Troubleshooting 7 10 9 NT Event Log System This is a log of Windows events related to system software Time Text App 5 8 2004 14 41 48 The connection to MCS1 made by use
136. 1 4 SP96 0000 2906 4 LATCH AND SOLENOID ASSEMBLY 1 SP96 0000 2506 2 0 1 SP96 0000 5190 2 FAN Charcoal Filter 1 7 SP74 0401 7748 2 INTERLOCK Front Door is esie ere ene nee 1 ID oP 26 1011 6202 2 SWITCH Front DOOr Sau ehe e ta We 1 5 943601 SWITCH SENICE 1 SP26 1011 6202 7 SWITCH Rear Panel 1 10 5 7 1152 BOARD 1 9 18 7F 3318 2005 J uly Rev B Section 9 Illustrated Parts Breakdown Figure 9 13 DICOM RASTER ENGINE DRE ar EM PR 15 16 17 2005 July Rev B 7 3318 9 19 Service Manual Figure 9 13 DICOM RASTER ENGINE DRE Item No Part Number Description I he 5 7 8814 Diea CA NotAvailable SCREW PAN sems M5x0 8x10 T 5 7 1117 CABLE d es NotAvailable DUCT BRE 2 ERE P EE ENG NotAvailable BRACKET Mount es SP7F1140 DRE AY Includes items 7 through 18 Jj su 5 7 1130
137. 2 27 Sy ai 7 Fs e EH rh j E ee e W AO C3 Hg j Sr j i e a fehl ORME c T x PAKS er 3 St ES TPP PE 2 DUCT SCREWS zu 9 E DIDA Figure 4 53 Gaining Access to the CABLES 8 Remove UPPER and LOWER SCREWS 9 Disconnect the POWER CABLE 10 Pull the DRE COMPUTER forward slightly then move it to the right to avoid the CABLE BUNDLE 11 Pull the DRE COMPUTER forward far enough to access the SCREWS fastening the DUCT 12 Remove the 2 DUCT SCREWS 13 Remove the DUCT 2005 J uly Rev B 7F3318 4 69 Service Manual 14 Disconnect Ethernet CABLE COM1 LOCAL To PANEL IMAGE CABLE to MCS BOARD L To SERVICE TOOL Port Figure 4 54 Removing the DRE COMPUTER Ethernet CABLE CABLE to SERVICE TOOL Port IMAGE CABLE to MCS BOARD CABLE to LOCAL PANEL COM1 CABLE to end of LOCAL PANEL CABLE Caution Avoid damage to the CABLE BUNDLE when removing the DRE COMPUTER 15 Carefully pull the DRE COMPUTER all the way out of the IMAGER 7F 3318 2005 J Rev Section 4 Disassembly Reassembl Removed previously MOUNT BRACKET Pcr N 4 SCREWS DRE COMPUTER Figure 4 55 Removing the MOUNTING BRACKET 16 Remove 4 SCREWS 17 Remove
138. 2 or 20 913 Assumptions Optics is in Home position Optics Spinner Motor is On Film is in the Platen ID Expose Section 6 Theory of Operation No EXPOSE TIME timeout Yes Log Error in Log File Simultaneously homes Optics and starts unloading Platen uU To to Unload Platen Home the Optics Start Optics Translator Motor Step4 home direction Set to Faster Speed No Optics Home Sensor HOME TIME S7 Blocked timeout Yes Yes MCS Stop Optics Translate Motor Step4 27 040 Internal Hardware Failure Optics Figure 6 19 Expose Operation 2005 J uly Rev 7 3318 6 39 Service Manual Unload Platen Wait until previous film clears Vertical Transport Sensor No All film clear of Transport Area MCS Vertical Transport Sensor 58 Off IN_PROCESSOR timeout Yes Stop Platen Roller Motor Step 2 Ho Pane Start Platen Roller Motor Step2 Unload Direction Set Platen Roller Motor Speed to 10 ips 26 542 Film Jam in Area 4 Processor Platen Exposed Film Flin Sansor Leaving Platen TART UNLOAD 56 Timeout Yes Simultaneously returns to Pickup to Pre load Film Yes Print Another Film Did film get started off the platen Start Transport Roller Motor Step6 Unload Direction Set Transport Roller Motor Speed to 10 ips Yes Retry
139. 2005 J uly Rev 7F3318 6 17 Service Manual Scan Line Rotating Mirror Scanner Beam Power Optics Attenuator Beam Translation hapin pies 9 8100 140L Figure 6 8 Laser Optics Schematic 6 4 3 2 Film Platen The optics system of the 8150 IMAGER is an internal drum scanning system which focuses a scanning laser beam onto the internal surface of a semi cylindrical drum Film is held stationary in the platen during imaging The scanning angle for film in the platen is 180 degrees covering a nominal distance of 17 inches for line scanning The optics module is translated down the page while scanning occurs to image the complete page The nominal travel distance of the optics module at specified translation speed is 14 inches This method of scanning generates an image on 14 by 17 inch film with the scan line in the vertical 17 inch direction as opposed to the typical horizontal direction 6 4 3 3 Optics Module Functions of the optics module are described in the following paragraphs Locations of the optics lenses are shown in Figure 6 9 6 18 7F3318 2005 J uly Rev B Section 6 Theory of Operation Lens L3 Lens L2 Lens L1 Attenuator L gt Note Bottom view with Optics Module Drive Board removed Laser Module 8100 142L Figure 6 9 Laser Module Positions of Lenses and Attenuator Scanner The scanner is a 2 sided mirror mounted on an adapter that is installed on the shaft of a d
140. 25 Reload the MPDB Modality P references Data Base See the procedure below 7 2 21 Reloading the MPDB through RMS This process is used at sites with RMS to install the MPDB update after the update has been downloaded from ACMS 1 Launch the RMS Main Screen and log in https qss kodak com qss login jsp 2 Under Groups expand Remote S ystem Managers 3 Locate the region area country and hospital 4 Click the hospital folder 5 The devices located atthe selected hospital will display on the screen 6 Click the device SA e g K8150xxx USA 8150xxx SA 7 Click the Device Explorer Popup icon to display two screens 8 UnderFile Transfer click Upload 9 Click Local 10 Next to the Select File box click Browse to locate the MPDB update file on your hard drive The file will be atthe location where it was downloaded from ACMS Refer to ACMS Query 11 Select the file 12 Click Open 13 The file name appears in the SelectFile box 2005 J uly Rev 7F3318 7 33 Service Manual 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 Click Upload The progress bar at the bottom of the screen indicates the uploading progress A new screen displays the selected file name and path in the Systems File F ilter window Under File Transfer click Download In the System File Name window locate the file Check the box in front of the file name Scrol
141. 3 505 5 DSP 0 Film Oxf fff Page Instantiated DY 8150 SDSServer 6 8 2004 16 09 16 043 CSDSServer CreatePage Created page 0 08150 SDSServer 6 8 2004 16 09 16 043 Bind bound to film Trav D 8150 SDSServer 5 8 2004 16 09 16 053 ClmageBufferM gr Allocate Buffer SMBuf 740 0 allocated Dv8150 SDSServer 6 8 2004 16 09 16 053 CLocal StageFilm Calling m PrinterStageable w ait DY 8150 SDSServer 6 8 2004 16 09 16 333 CLocal StageFilm sucess Filmld 050 04 8150 SDSServer 6 8 2004 16 09 16 333 505 5 0 Stage started DY 8150 SDSServer 6 8 2004 16 09 16 333 CMCSInterfaceClientLocal CB StatusFilm Film Id 0 0 Change StateChanged State DY 8150 SDSServer 6 8 2004 16 09 16 343 CLocal MESCBStatusFilm Film Change StateChanged State MovingToEspose 0 8150 SDSServer 6 8 2004 16 09 16 343 CMCSInterfaceClientLocal CB StatusFilm Film Id 0 0 Change StateChanaed State DY8150 SDSServer 7 90 7 3318 2005 J Rev B Section 8 QuickSheets Section 8 QuickSheets 8 1 Overview This section provides information about three types of error messages e DICOM status messages from the IMAGER to the SCU IMAGER status messages displayed on the LOCAL PANEL MAGER error codes displayed on the LOCAL PANEL 8 2 DICOM Status Messages In response to an N GET message from a MODALITY the IMAGER returns a status message along with a status information message to the MODALITY If there is no system problem the I
142. 3 Notify Delivery Error Summary An error has occurred in the job handling software of the Routing Delivery Subsystem The job will be retried Result of Error The DRE is functional but this job will fail User Action None FE Action None 8 8 7F 3318 2005 J uly Rev B Section 8 QuickSheets 8 5 6 Error 04 004 through 04 215 Error Notification in DICOM Network Subsystem LOCAL PANEL Message Log Message DICOM Message None No alarm DICOM Network Subsystem Error NORMAL 3 Notify L gt Note For Error Codes 04 201 and 04 205 see the following two QuickSheets paragraphs 8 5 7 and 8 5 8 Summary All of the error codes in this range indicate a software error in the DICOM Network Subsystem The cause of the error can be such things as object creation failure a system call failure connection refused resource limitations and invalid data Result of Error Error 04 004 may cause the association to abort unexpectedly Otherwise the system will function normally User Action None FE Action None 2005 J uly 7F3318 8 9 Service Manual 8 5 7 Error 04 201 Maximum Number of DICOM Associations has been Exceeded LOCAL PANEL Message Log Message DICOM Message None No alarm DICOM Associations Exceeded NORMAL 3 Notify Summary The allowed number of DICOM associations 12 has been exceeded L gt Note When the system is shutting down the maximum number is set to zero Thus this error will o
143. 31 Service Manual 7 2 20 Upgrading the DRE Software Ghosting This generic procedure is provided only for reference The ghosting procedure will vary with each new software upgrade and will be provided in a MOD KIT which also may contain firmware chips for upgrading the MCS firmware For this procedure you will need ACD containing the DRE software the ghost CD ACD containing the LOCAL PANEL videos Connect your LAPTOP COMPUTER to the Service Port on the IMAGER Use SecureLink to connect to the IMAGER Open the Service Tool Service WebLink Back up the Configuration Files to a FLOPPY DISKETTE as instructed in procedure 7 2 18 Open the FRONT DOOR ofthe IMAGER Remove the FILM CARTRIDGE Open the DRE DOOR Insert the DRE software CD into the CD ROM DRIVE of the IMAGER Shutdown the IMAGER and turn off the POWER SWITCH on the back of the IMAGER 10 Turn on the POWER SWITCH to restart the IMAGER S oftware loading ghosting starts after the IMAGER boots up from the CD ROM DRIVE and lasts for about 8 minutes A message will appear on the LOCAL PANEL when software loading is complete L gt Note In the ghosting process the language selection is reset to English and the Service Passcode reverts to the factory setting 123456 1097 OO 11 Remove the DRE software CD from the CD ROM DRIVE 12 off the IMAGER using the POWER SWITCH 13 Turn on the POWER SWITCH The
144. 31 Optics Communications Failed LOCAL PANEL Message Log Message DICOM Message Internal Communications MCS failed to communicate with ELEC DOWN 0 F atal Failure Optics Optics Module after 5 attempts Alarm sounds Summary The MCS tried to communicate with the OPTICS MICRO but received no response after 5 attempts Result of Error The IMAGER is unable to print film It can accept and queue new jobs but it will not initiate new films Films downstream from the PLATEN will be completed All other films will be reprinted The error can be Cleared by only by restarting the IMAGER User Action 1 Restart the IMAGER 2 Ifthe error persists call Service FE Action This error can be caused only by failure of the MicroComm CABLE from the MCS BOARD to the optics or by the OPTICS CONTROL BOARD 1 Is the MicroComm CABLE from the MCS BOARD to the OPTICS MODULE seated properly 8 88 7F3318 2005 J uly Rev B Section 8 QuickSheets 8 5 75 27 932 Optics Communications Retry LOCAL PANEL Message Log Message DICOM Message Severity MCS failed to communicate with NORMAL Optics Summary This notification to the Log occurs when the MCS tries to communicate with the OPTICS MICRO but receives no response If the failure occurs 5 times in succession error 27 931 is declared Result of Error None The IMAGER will function normally User Action None FE Action None 2005 J uly Rev 7F3318 8 89 Service Manual
145. 3318 8 31 Service Manual 8 5 29 Error 21 114 Film Pickup Failure before Opening or Closing a CARTRIDGE LOCAL PANEL Message Log Message DICOM Message Severity Pickup Fail during Rollback Pickup diagnostics failed while FILM TRANSP 1 Alert opening or closing a cartridge ERROR Summary A pickup problem occurred just before the CARTRIDGE was to be either opened or closed Each time the CARTRIDGE is to be opened or closed the pickup mechanism cycles to make sure it is positioned so it will not interfere with the LID of the CARTRIDGE If the pickup cycle fails this error is declared It usually indicates that PICKUP MOTOR DCM2 or PICKUP POSITION SENSOR S3 failed Result of Error The IMAGER is unable to print from the CARTRIDGE but it is able to accept and queue print jobs User Action 1 Restart the IMAGER 2 If the problem persists call Service FE Action Use the SERVICE TOOL to check the PICKUP MOTOR and PICKUP POSITION SENSOR 8 32 7F 3318 2005 J uly Rev B Section 8 QuickSheets 8 5 30 Error 21 115 Film Pickup Retry Notification LOCAL PANEL Message Log Message DICOM Message Film Pickup Retry NORMAL 3 Notify Summary This is a notification to the Log that the PICKUP ASSEMBLY has failed to pickup a film and place it into the feed area If the problem remains after 2 attempts error 21 116 is declared Result of Error None The system will function normally User Action None FE Action None 2005
146. 4 7 2 15 7 2 16 7 2 17 7 2 18 7 2 19 7 2 20 7 2 21 Setting Active Controls Network Settings for Service Accessing the SERVICE TOOL Testing the DENSITOMETER 5 teria t pcr ees Running FRU Diagnostics Running the Mechanical Diagnostics Running Tests ofthe OPTICS Testing the SENSORS seams acetone acids pee ened Obtaining Film Obtaining Dpatch Data Plotting Film Calibration Data Testing the LOCAL PANEL Running DRE lt Running an MCS Transport lt Obtaining a Diagnostics Testing Communication the Network Troubleshooting the Source of Image Problems Configuration Backup Configuration Upgrading the DRE Software Reloading the MPDB through RMS Using Power On Self Test as a Troubleshooting Tool 7 3 1 7 3 2 Setting up for Observation of Self Test
147. 5 00 The server time zone Central Daylight Time View Log with time range StartTime 2004 06 08 14 25 00 EndTime 2004 06 08 15 25 00 C ViewActive Log maximum 1000 events DK Cancel e fyou know the approximate time at which an error occurred select View Log with time range and enter a Start Time and End Time which will include the time of the event you wish to review Then click OK e Ifyou wish to view the log being written while an event occurs select View Active Log and click OK 2 Stop Click Stop at any time while a log is loading to stop the loading process 3 Options Click Options to display a screen for selection of the log columns you wish to display Options x n EE a a the Log Viewer then click OK to continue App Classld Code EventType File Instanceld Level Line Module Name Severity Source Subsystem Text Time Usn Version Other Fields OK Cancel Leave a checkmark next to the name of each column you wish to display in the log The columns shown with checks above are the most useful for your purposes See the next paragraph for descriptions of the functions of the columns Click OK to display the log 7 74 7 3318 2005 J Rev B Section 7 Troubleshootin 4 Find Click Find to search for an area in the log that you can identify by words or numbers such as an error
148. 5 J uly 7F3318 2 29 Service Manual r Other Options Send N Event Reports Send Warnings Print Priority Always Apply Print Priority Border Type Always Apply Border Type 2mm Border Film Clip Border Film Base Always Apply Film Base Film Size Always Apply Film Size Include print date in annotation Include print time in annotation Include page number in annotation Include modality ID in annotation Modality ID Annotation Override Density Patch Image Resizing Always Apply Image Resizing Text Box Location Source ID Modify Bave Cancel 6 Check each parameter 2 30 SCP options such as reporting and status Always Apply Send N Event Reports Include hospital name in annotation Reset 12 NORMAL aj El mi no mi wo E mi 14INX17IN aj wo rmt mi mi xo xo vo Ed mi 74 mi vo E gl 7F3318 2005 uly Rev B Section 2 Installation 7 See Table 2 2 for descriptions of the Other Options The default values shown on the screen have been selected from the Modality Preferences Database in the DRE 8 Change parameters only if necessary 9 To change a parameter a Select Modify b Select the new parameter value from the dropdown menu for that parameter c Click Save Table 2 2 Selecting Other Options Parameters Recommended Setting Send N E
149. 5 J uly Rev B Section 8 QuickSheets 8 5 46 21 178 ROLLBACK Failed to Leave Home LOCAL PANEL Message Log Message DICOM Message Severity Film Cartridge Failed to Rollback Home Sensor S2 in Tray BAD SUPPLY 1 Alert Open Alarm sounds failed to deactivate in specified time MGZ Summary The IMAGER could not open the CARTRIDGE LID so that film could be picked up The ROLLBACK ROLLER failed to leave the Home position as indicated by ROLLBACK HOME SENSOR S2 The problem cold be a faulty S2 or ROLLBACK MOTOR DCM1 or possibly the operator inserted the FILM CARTRIDGE backward Result of Error The IMAGER is unable to print It is still able to accept and queue print jobs User Action l Trya new film CARTRIDGE 2 Ifthe error persists call Service FE Action 1 Check the Application Log to try to determine the point at which the error occurred This may help isolate the problem 2 Use the SERVICE TOOL to check ROLLBACK HOME SENSOR 52 ROLLBACK MOTOR DCMI 2005 J uly Rev B 7F3318 8 49 Service Manual 8 5 47 21 179 ROLLBACK Failed to Move from Open Position LOCAL PANEL Message Log Message DICOM Message Severity Film Cartridge Failed to Rollback Home Sensor S2 in Tray BAD SUPPLY 1 Alert Close Alarm sounds failed to deactivate in specified time MGZ Summary The IMAGER could not close the CARTRIDGE LID The ROLLBACK ROLLER failed to leave the full open position as indicated by ROLLBACK COMPLETE SE
150. 50 1 2 840 113564 3 8150 1 2 840 113564 3 150 MCSLog144545 txt MCSLog165207 tx t c Rendered Images 1 2 840 113564 3 8150 1 2 840 113564 3 8150 1 2 840 113564 3 8150t E 3 Compare the raw and the rendered versions of the same image L gt Note The images should look the same except for the border around the rendered image 4 Compare the raw and rendered versions of the image to the print produced by the MCS If problems exist with printed images use the following basic guidelines to determine the source of the error e Ifthe raw image is bad suspect the MODALITY the network or the DICOM network subsystem of the DRE If the raw image is good and the rendered image is bad suspect the Delivery Interface subsystem of the DRE Ifthe raw and rendered images are good but the print from the IMAGER is bad suspect the PCIO BOARD the MCS BOARD or the OPTICS 2005 J uly Rev 7F3318 7 29 Service Manual 7 2 18 Configuration Backup 1 From the main menu of the SERVICE TOOL select Utilities gt Backup Restore System Backup and Restore Backup Restore Backup Select the Backup button to archive the configuration data to the product Download copy of the most recent backup data by selecting the Download Backup button The downloaded file will be placed in the selected location on the Service PC Backup Download Backup r Status Ready Summary 2
151. 500 Input C3B5AX4 Allows moderate to strong departures from the basic VER693CO curves Curves 7 through 9 cover roughly the span of VER693CO0 and the remaining curves provide more choices of mid tone brightness Curves 1 through 3 the brightest and curves 13 through 15 the darkest In all there are 3 mid tone contrast choices for each of 5 mid tone brightness choices The plots on the chart indicate the two dimensional brightness contrast combinations provided by this TFT SET The numbering of the TFTs in the SET is such that when a 3 horizontally x 5 vertically contrast test film is printed the printed images are of decreasing brightness going from top to bottom and decreasing mid tone contrast going from left to right on the film JF3318 2005July Rev B Section 2 Installation 3500 a Fs 300 EEE ass hE Bs 2500 Bee Be DS SS Se aa 2000 e 1500 pese pated 1000 V EH A 500 ee eS a Input 30 FCR302C4 Created specifically for use with the 3M Model 2210 CREIB INTERFACE to a Fuji COMPUTED RADIOGRAPHY SYSTEM This TFT SET should not be used for any other application The 15 TFTs in this SET are designed to be used in correspondence with the 15 Dmax choices of the IMAGER using Contrast 1 when the first Dmax value is used etc The plots in the chart below indicate a sagging shape which is characterist
152. 7 3318 2 9 Service Manual Proxy Server Address Proxy Server Port Authentication Type Proxy Server Username Proxy Server Password 1 Required if used at location The following are obtained from the Imager during installation K number found on Local Panel System Information screen Serial Number under the hood on the front of the Imager 7F 3318 2005 J uly Rev B Section 2 Installation 2 4 Unpacking 2 4 1 Removing the Packing Materials from the Back of the IMAGER 1 Remove and save 9 SCREWS circled in the diagram from the REAR PANEL SCREWS 9 2 Remove the REAR PANEL 2005 J uly Rev 7 3318 2 11 Service Manual Caution e OT uw CABLE TIES were installed in the IMAGER to restrain movable assemblies during shipment When instructed to cut and remove a CABLE TIE make sure that you remove the entire plastic CABLE TIE to avoid damage to the IMAGER Take care not to cut any WIRES or damage any mechanical parts or assemblies Cut and remove 2 CABLE TIES and TAGS from the FILM PICKUP AY Cut and remove the CABLE TIE and TAG from the TRANSLATION MOTOR Remove the TAPE and FOAM from the top of the PLATEN AY Pull outthe 2 PLASTIC TUBES FILM PICKUP A MOTOR E pas 200_0020 7 3318 2005 J uly Rev B Section 2 Installation 2 4 2 Removing the Packing Materials from the Front of the IMAGER Caution Whenever you raise or lower
153. 8 Boso SP7F1069 SP74 0401 9144 2 i PRSE S P96 0000 3591 3 9 S P96 0000 2476 8 TU osi SP7E2883 DL ue S P96 0000 0482 8 De ite SP96 0000 1371 2 SP8E5834 T4 sias SP3E T7300 15 5 No Number 16 No Number Lf zw SP8E7082 I9 SP 96 0000 5208 2 2005 J uly Rev B 7F3318 Description ROLLBACK ASSEMBLY Includes items 2 through 18 TEETH ROLLER Rollback FILM GUARD ASSEMBLY TAB SEPARATOR Film SPRING External 30 D x 037 W x 1 75 Long SPRING Rollback HARNESS Rollback Sensor COUPLER Roller Rollback MOTOR DC Rollback DCM 1 SWITCH Optical Flag Cartridge Present 51 SWITCH Optical Interrupt Rollback Home S2 Rollback Open S13 2 MOUNT Sensor Home Rollback RF TAG ANTENNA BOARD RF TAG ASSEMBLY Includes items 15 and 16 RF TAG INTERFACE BOARD RF READER BOARD TRANSCEIVER ROLLER Rollback LOCATOR Cartridge Service Manual Figure 9 7 ELEVATOR ASSEMBLY Figure 9 7 ELEVATOR ASSEMBLY Item No Part Number Description Qty EE SPSF0278 ELEVATOR ASSEMBLY Includes items 2 through 4 1 25 sus SP96 0000 5407 0 ELEVATOR MOTOR ASSEMBLY Step8 1 om SP96 0000 0482 8 SWITCH Interrupt Optical Elevator Home 512 1 4 NotAvailable MOTOR MOUNT Elevator 1 9 12 7F 3318 2005 J uly Rev Sectio
154. 8 5 76 28 506 MCS Cannot Read PROCESSOR Temperature LOCAL PANEL Message Log Message DICOM Message Internal Communication MCS cannot read Processor PROC DOWN 0 F atal Failure Processor Alarm temp sounds Summary The PROCESSOR RTD timed out while measuring PROCESSOR temperature and communicating it to the MCS Refer to sheet 2 of the SYSTEM Functional Block Wiring Diagram The PROCESSOR RTD changes resistance with changes in DRUM temperature An AMPLIFIER senses the resistance changes on the MCS BOARD as voltage changes A voltage to frequency circuit then converts the RTD input to a square wave frequency signal This signal PROC TEMP FREQ IN represents DRUM temperature to the CPU of the MCS The CPU samples this signal once a second counting the pulses for 100ms If the square wave pulse goes to steady state DC for longer than a second error 28 506 is declared Power is applied to the processor HEATER and MOTOR 11 seconds into the power on cycle Refer to Figure 7 3 MCS Self Test Startup Result of Error The IMAGER is unable to print film It can accept and queue new jobs but it will not initiate new films All films in the IMAGER will be reprinted The error can be cleared by only by restarting the IMAGER User Action 1 Restart the IMAGER 2 Ifthe error persists call Service FE Action 1 De energize the IMAGER and check CONNECTORS and wiring between the MCS BOARD J 17 and the RTD 2 Use an OHMMETER to chec
155. 8 TFT is designed to provide dry prints which match the Contrast 6 wet prints made using VER693CO on an HQ with Dmax 3 0 for both prints The plots of this TFT SET indicate that all 15 of the tables have the same mid tone brightness with varying degrees of an S shape curve which gives the strongest end point contrast or slope to Table 12 and the strongest mid tone contrast to Table 15 Note thatthis TFT SET provides a narrower range of curves than the VER693CO 4000 3500 3000 2500 2000 1500 1000 500 Input 2005 July 7F3318 2 53 Service Manual B3C5AX4 Allows moderate departures from the basic VER693CO curves Curves 2 5 8 11 and 14 roughly cover the span of VER693CO The remaining curves provide more mid tone brightness choices Curves 1 4 7 10 and 13 the brightest and curves 3 6 9 12 and 15 the darkest In all there are 5 mid tone contrast choices for each of 3 mid tone brightness choices The plots on the chart indicate the two dimensional brightness contrast combinations provided by this TFT SET The numbering of the TFTs in the set is such that when a 3 horizontally x 5 vertically contrast test film is printed the printed images are of decreasing brightness going from left to right and increasing mid tone contrast going from top to bottom on the film 3500 3000 2500 2000 1500 a 2 1000
156. 98 2 SP96 0000 2852 0 SP96 0000 2510 4 2005 J uly Rev B 7 3318 Figure 9 4 DENSITOMETER ASSEMBLY Illustrated Parts Breakdown Description Qty SWITCH Optical Flag Densitometer Exit S9 1 PC BOARD ASSEMBLY Densitometer Light Source 1 TURNAROUND Includes 1 2 4 and 5 1 DENSITOMETER BOARD ASSEMBLY 1 CABLE LightSource nr evo eric ok bre a ossi le ode deni unies arp pend 1 CABLE Densitometer MicroComm notshown 1 9 7 Service Manual Figure 9 5 FILM PICKUP ASSEMBLY 7F 3318 2005 J uly Rev B 9 8 Item No Part Number SP8F0279 2 nanus S P74 0500 4076 0 SP96 0000 2846 2 SP8E9184 SP7F1208 Bosse SP7F1214 NotAvailable Dore S P96 0000 1388 6 9 SP96 0000 4219 0 TU 2235 SP 96 0000 4220 8 DL SP78 8094 5694 6 12 4545 SP7F1219 12 20 T3522 S P96 0000 0486 9 co 6 S P96 0000 0482 8 1545254 SP 96 0000 4233 1 16 SP8E4919 TI sies SP 96 0000 1328 2 19 5 v SP5F0626 19 SP70 0701 4519 1 2005 J uly Rev B 7 3318 Section 9 Illustrated Parts Breakdown Figure 9 5 FILM PICKUP ASSEMBLY Description Qty PICKUP ASSEMBLY Includes items 2 through 19 1 SPRING Plate Film Pickup
157. A Warning When the POWER CORD is plugged in hazardous voltages are present in some areas of the IMAGER These voltages can cause severe injury or death 2 De energize the IMAGER and disconnect the POWER CORD 3 Remove the VERTICAL TRANSPORT MODULE 4 10 1 4 Disconnect the ELECTRICAL PLUG from the SENSOR Figure 4 38 Caution If the same SENSOR is to be replaced do not damage the MOUNTING CLIPS during removal 5 Gently rock the SENSOR back and forth to disengage the MOUNTING CLIPS 6 When replacing a SENSOR check that the sensor CLIPS are properly seated in the sheet metal Figure 4 38 Removing the Vertical Transport Sensor 2005 J uly Rev B 7F3318 4 43 Service Manual 4 10 3 VERTICAL TRANSPORT MOTOR Step 6 1 Remove the SUPPLY CARTRIDGE A Warning When the POWER CORD is plugged in hazardous voltages are present in some areas of the IMAGER These voltages can cause severe injury or death De energize the IMAGER and disconnect the POWER CORD Remove the UPPER VERTICAL TRANSPORT MODULE see paragraph 4 10 1 Disconnect the ELECTRICAL PLUG from the MOTOR see Figure 4 39 While supporting the MOTOR with 1 hand remove 4 SCREWS from the MOTOR MOUNTING PLATE Slightly lower the MOTOR to provide slack in the BELT and remove the BELT from the MOTOR SPROCKET Remove the MOTOR and SPROCKET with MOUNTING PLATE Remove 4 SCREWS to separate the MOUNTING PLATE from the MOTOR and SPROCKET ASSEMBLY Oy Uu
158. AG about the film loaded in the IMAGER 1 From the main menu of the SERVICE TOOL select Diagnostics gt MIS gt C artridge Info FILM Cartridge Information This page shows film cartridge information selectable by Lot Select Lot 2828 2 28 Current Parameter alue Film Type Film Size heet Count 1 12 Mark Date Last Film Used 5 2 1 2004 2 13 06 2 To display information about the film currently loaded in the IMAGER check the Current box 3 To display information about film previously loaded in the IMAGER 2005 July Rev B 7 3318 7 19 Service Manual a Uncheck the Current box b Select Lot Number of the film from the Select Lotz dropdown menu 7 2 10 Obtaining Dpatch Data This procedure obtains the density of the Dpatch from the last film calibration if the film contained a Dpatch 1 From the main menu of the SERVICE TOOL select Diagnostics gt MIS gt Dpatch 2 Click Run Current Dpatch Density Data r Dpatch Data Press Run to display Dpatch Density values from last calibration Run r Status Complete Pass Summary Final Results Test GetDpatchData executed at 2004 21 05T16 24 12 Status Pass RecordCount 1 Record 1 Density 0 000000 attenuator 0 000000 3 Check Status Pass or Fail and the Summary L gt Note The Summary will include the Density of the Dpatch and
159. AGER energized 2 Reach in through the open FRONT DOOR and set the left DIP SWITCH on the RF TAG INTERFACE BOARD to up 3 Check the LED on the RF TAG INTERFACE BOARD on the bottom of the CARTRIDGE TRAY The LED should be off SENSOR not blocked by ACTUATOR Block the SENSOR LED should turn on 4 Setthe left DIP SWITCH down 2005 J uly 7F3318 7 47 Service Manual RefDes SENSOR Assy LED State on FEEDER CONTROL BOARD 51 CARTRIDGE ROLLBACK Flag LED1 On with no CARTRIDGE Off with PRESENCE CARTRIDGE loaded ROLLBACK ROLLBACK LED2 Off with lid open On with LID closed HOME S3 PICKUP PICKUP U type LED4 Off in feed position On in top position POSITION FILM SURFACE PICKUP LED5 Off when touching film On when not FILM OUT PICKUP LED6 Off with film On with no film CUPS ENGAGED PICKUP LED7 On when squashed Off when not 511 FEED ROLLER FEED U type LED8 On when open Off when closed OPEN ROLLER 512 ELEVATOR ELEVATOR LED3 On when down Off when not HOME 513 ROLLBACK ROLLBACK U type LED9 On when DIP SWITCH is up and OPEN CARTRIDGE LID is opened The SWITCH and LED are located on RF TAG INTERFACE BOARD FEEDER CONTROL BOARD CART DETECT RED2BACK HOME EEBBATOR HOME 5 NORM O O O O O 9 PIKDQUP TOP SURFAC
160. AND ROLLBACK ASSEMBLIES CPU PROCESSING ben WDC 24 VDC IMAGING ASSEMBLY POWER SUPPLY 120 240 Images 120 VAC VAC Source I touchscreen control LOCAL ORE PANEL COMPUTER speaker 12 i L s o c s s a o o s s m s s am o u mom oie 9 3 n S 9 o athens jet Siu mda ee aa D TR DICOM S gt Customer Network Modality Figure 6 1 LASER IMAGER Block Diagram 2005 July Rev B 7F3318 6 1 Service Manual 6 2 The DICOM RASTER ENGINE DRE The DRE running on Microsoft WINDOWS 2000 O S is essentially a Kodak MIM 200 PRINT SERVER with software modified to treat the 8150 IMAGER as a special destination Providing DICOM Grayscale Print Class Service for the IMAGER the DRE performs the following basic functions e tformats renders and rasterizes images received in DICOM format from the network for delivery to the OPTICS MODULE ofthe IMAGER e It provides Web Server interfaces for communication between the user or Field Engineer and the DRE MCS e tsupplies 12 VDC power and drive circuits for graphics and touch screen control of the LOCAL PANEL 6 2 1 DRE Hardware The DRE system consists of the DRE COMPUTER and the LOCAL PANEL In the 8100 and 8200 IMAGERS the LOCAL PANEL was implemented as a MicroComm Bus peripheral to the
161. ARDS 7 Assemble in the reverse order of disassembly 2005July Rev 7F3318 4 75 Service Manual 4 14 5 Removing the DRE POWER SUPPLY 1 Remove the SUPPLY CARTRIDGE A Warning When the POWER CORD is plugged in hazardous voltages are present in some areas of the IMAGER These voltages can cause severe injury or death 2 De energize the IMAGER and disconnect the POWER CORD 3 Remove the DRE COMPUTER from the IMAGER and remove the COVER of the COMPUTER see procedure 4 14 4 Remove the assembly of 3 DRIVES see procedure 4 14 1 2 POWER CABLE CONNECTORS cx 2 vaa Wc wey Zl 2SCREWS A 27 lt 2 d all BRACKET SCREW Figure 4 60 Removing the DRE POWER SUPPLY 5 Disconnect 2 POWER CABLE CONNECTORS L gt Note The other POWER CABLE PLUGS were disconnected when the DRIVES were removed Remove 2 SCREWS from the end of the POWER SUPPLY Remove 1 BRACKET SCREW Remove the POWER SUPPLY Install the new POWER SUPPLY in reverse order of disassembly Or Usb cn 4 76 7F3318 2005 J uly Rev B Section 4 Disassembly Reassembly BLANK PAGE 2005 July Rev B 7F3318 4 77 Section 5 Tools Preventive Maintenance Cleaning Section 5 Tools Preventive Maintenance Cleaning 5 1 Required Tools In addition to standard hand tools SCREWDRIVERS WRENCHES etc the following tools are needed to service the IMAGER L gt Note
162. ASKET and clean the surface 2 Install the new GASKET There is pressure sensitive adhesive on one side of the GASKET PROCESSOR GASKET Sk 5 4 12 Installing the DRUM Supplies Required Protective GLOVES Procedure 1 Install the DRUM in the PROCESSOR 2 Connect the POWER CORD and energize the IMAGER Allow the DRUM to warm up about 5 minutes 3 Ifthe FILM DIVERTER ASSEMBLY was replaced adjust the DIVERTER position as follows a With the 2 SCREWS loosened slide the DIVERTER BLADE toward the DRUM b Set the gap between the DIVERTER and DRUM end caps at 0 38 0 50 mm 0 015 0 020 in c Tighten the 2 ATTACHING SCREWS d Verify the gap and readjust as necessary 4 Close and latch the DRUM COVER 2005 J uly 7F3318 Service Manual Attaching Screws Diverter Figure 5 11 Adjusting the DIVERTER 5 18 7F 3318 2005 J uly Rev Section 5 Tools Preventive Maintenance Cleaning 5 4 13 Completing the PM 1 Load a CARTRIDGE of good film and print a flat field inspection film 2 Compare the flat field inspection film with the film printed before the PM and check that it does not show any image quality problems 3 Make a print of a clinical image 4 Confirm with the customer that image quality is acceptable Perform the following procedure to remove the current message on the LOCAL PANEL prompting the user to schedule preventive maintenance and reset th
163. B Section 1 Specifications PCIO Peripheral Component Input O utput PLL Phase Locked Loop PPP oint to P oint P rotocol PTADR Pass through Address PTATN Pass through Attention PTDONE Pass through Done PTGNT Pass through Grant RAM Random Access Memory RDFIFO Read FIFO REQ Request RET Retransmit RF Radio Frequency RSET Register Set The set of registers in the API Library software that stores video parameters RTD Resistive Thermal Device RXD The receive signal line as defined by the RS232 and RS422 communication specifications TFT Transfer Function Table TTL Transistor to Transistor Logic TXD The transmit signal line as defined by the RS232 and RS422 communication specifications SMPTE Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers SOL Start of Line SOS Start of Scan SSR Solid State Relay STP Shielded Twisted P air Subnet Mask A 32 bit value in the format of an IP address that specifies which bits of an IP address specify the host For example 255 255 0 0 masks the network portion of the address 255 all 1 s See IP Address for a description of address formats TCP IP Transmission Control P rotocol Internet P rotocol TPU Time Processing Unit UART Universal Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter URL Uniform Resource Locator A web address that locates a particular page on the web UTP Unshielded Twisted P air WR Write WRFIFO Write FIFO WWW World Wide Web 2005 J uly Rev B 7F3318 1 5
164. CREWS are removed 7 Remove the MOTOR Ug ders ub 8100 82C Figure 4 20 Replacing the PICKUP MOTOR 2005 J uly Rev 7F3318 4 23 Service Manual 4 6 6 FILM PICKUP VACUUM PUMP Disassembly 1 Remove the SUPPLY CARTRIDGE A Warning When the POWER CORD is plugged in hazardous voltages are present in some areas of the IMAGER These voltages can cause severe injury or death Remove power and disconnect the POWER CORD Remove the FILM PICKUP MODULE 4 6 1 Disconnect the VACUUM HOSE from the PUMP see Figure 4 21 Remove the ATTACHING SCREW securing the LOOP CLAMP and remove the PUMP and ADHESIVE FOAM PAD gr ome p m Adhesive Foam Pad 8100 83C Figure 4 21 Removing the FILM PICKUP VACUUM PUMP Reassembly l Before replacing a PUMP remove any foam residue from the mounting location and clean the surface 2 With the LOOP CLAMP on the PUMP position the PUMP with FOAM PAD to establish the mounting location 3 Peelthe PROTECTIVE COVER from the FOAM and press down to adhere the FOAM and PUMP to the mounting surface Then complete reassembly 4 Attach the LOOP CLAMP with its MOUNTING SCREW 4 24 7F3318 2005 J uly Rev B Section 4 Disassembly Reassembly 4 7 Rollback Assembly 4 7 1 ROLLBACK MODULE Disassembly 1 Remove the SUPPLY CARTRIDGE 2 De energize the IMAGER but do not disconnect the POWER CORD yet 3 Open the FRONT DOOR and remove the REAR PANEL of the IMAGER 4
165. CREWS from the end of the IMAGING MODULE 9 Loosen the 2 ATTACHING SCREWS and remove the 2 blocks securing the other end of the SCANNER ASSEMBLY 10 With the SCANNER slid back to the approximate position shown in Figure 4 41 carefully lift the SCANNER ASSEMBLY from the PLATEN ASSEMBLY and place it on a work bench UE mean Reassembly Reassembly is the reverse of disassembly 1 Check the following precautions Caution The FLAT CABLE must be clamped and positioned straight as shown in Figure 4 41 Clamp positions are marked on the CABLE The looped end must have a 180 degree twist where it PLUGS into the SCANNER as shown in the illustration Caution Route all WIRES away from the OPTICS HOME SENSOR and secure the WIRES to the POST in the SCANNER MODULE with TIE WRAPS See Figure 4 41 If the WIRES are not tie wrapped they can get caught in the SENSOR causing damage to the WIRES and spreading debris throughout the LASER IMAGER 2 After the cable is positioned manually run the SCANNER ASSEMBLY all the way forward and then all the way back to check that there is enough slack in the flat CABLE Caution ISOPROPYL ALCOHOL is highly flammable Follow the manufacturer s instructions for safe use and handling 4 46 7F 3318 2005 J uly Rev B Section 4 Disassembly Reassembl 3 After reassembly use ISOPROPYL ALCOHOL and a CLEANING PAD to clean the surfaces of the RAILS and the FLYWHEEL 4 After reassembly do
166. E PEDGUP EMPTY PEDNUP BOTTOM NEDOPEN 8 16 OJO OJO OJO OJO OJO OJO 19 9 18 OJO OJO OJO OJO OJO OJO OJO OJO OJO 1 10 JP1 2 4 FilmF eedS ensors Figure 7 11 FILM FEED SENSORS and LEDs 7 48 7F3318 2005 J uly Rev B Section 7 Troubleshooting 7 4 1 3 Testing SENSORS S6 S9 Via LEDs The LEDs for S6 through S8 are located on the MCS BOARD see Figure 7 12 The LED for S9 is located on the DENSITOMETER LIGHT SOURCE BOARD Use the LEDs to test these SENSORS as follows 1 Check that the IMAGER is in the Preliminary state described in paragraph 7 4 1 1 except Setthe J P1 LEDs JUMPER on the MCS BOARD to short pins 1 and 2 see Figure 7 12 This will enable the LEDs b Setthe 5 JUMPER SENSORS to short pins 1 and 2 This will enable the SENSORS 2 Testthe 4SENSORS a Check the state of the LED for the SENSOR b Load a CARTRIDGE of transport waste film Set the SERVICE OVERRIDE SWITCH to the Normal position then back to the Service position Allow time for the CARTRIDGE to close c Runa print sequence and check that the LED toggles 3 After completing the test reset the J UMPERS and remove the CARTRIDGE of transport film SENSOR Description ASSEMBLY LED State on MCS BOARD PLATEN FILM IMAGING LED1 Off when film contac
167. E an ab uL unde dan Mes Figure 6 7 Master Slave Physical Interface 6 4 2 MCS Board The MCS Board contains the Master CPU and auxiliary circuits that control the electromechanical components of the laser imager See sheet 2 of the 8150 Functional Diagrams Functional Diagrams are on the Kodak Health Imaging User and Service Documentation Library CD set The MCS Board also provides a pixel data path from the DRE to the laser and includes a Media Lookup Table LUT and associated AIQC circuits Direct control functions of the MCS Board include 1 Interprets and controls serial communications 2005 J uly 7F3318 6 13 Service Manual 2 Controls machine subsystems through the MicroComm interface 3 Controls the following devices which are not on the MicroComm bus e Processor Drum Motor speed e Processor Drum temperature Optics Translation Motor speed and direction e Platen Feed Motor e Platen Centering Motor e Front Door Solenoid Safety interlocks 4 Reads the state of the Optics Home Sensor Platen Film Sensor and Transport Sensor 6 4 2 1 Master CPU The Master CPU has general control of all MCS functions The main resident serial port on the CPU chip is programmed to talk to 4 slave units on the 9 bit Microcom Interface as described in paragraph 6 3 1 A special feature of the CPU allows the creation of UARTs Universal Asynchronous Receiver Transmitters on its TPU Time P
168. E that is if the error code did not originally cause the replacement of the assembly Perform the dynamic range adjustment paragraph 3 6 8 80 7F 3318 2005 J uly Rev B Section 8 QuickSheets 8 5 69 27 605 POWER MONITOR is Saturated LOCAL PANEL Message Log Message DICOM Message Severity Calibration Failed Optics Optics calibration detected Power ELEC DOWN 0 Fatal Alarm sounds Monitor saturation Summary The POWER MONITOR is saturated with the laser set at maximum power Optics calibration and diagnostics are performed at power up and before every calibration print During this process the ATTENUATOR is calibrated and laser power is checked and calibrated During laser diagnostics maximum laser power is applied with the ATTENUATOR ata minimum setting If the BEAM POWER MONITOR is saturated the ATTENUATOR is adjusted to add density and lower the POWER MONITOR reading If after adjustment the POWER MONITOR reading is still too high a 27 605 error is declared The problem is probably with the ATTENUATOR in the OPTICS MODULE Result of Error The IMAGER is unable to print film It can accept and queue new jobs but it will not initiate new films Films downstream from the PLATEN will be completed All other films will be reprinted The error can be cleared by requesting another calibration or by restarting the IMAGER User Action 1 Restart the IMAGER 2 Ifthe error persists call Service FE Action 1 Check the
169. EEDER CONTROL BOARD The LEDs for these SENSORS are also on the FEEDER CONTROL BOARD SENSOR locations in the IMAGER and locations of the corresponding LEDs are shown in Figure 7 11 See paragraph 7 4 1 1 for testing procedure SENSOR 513 ROLLBACK OPEN reports to the slave MICRO on the RF TAG INTERFACE BOARD The LED for the SENSOR is located under the ROLLBACK TRAY near the RF Tag electronics See paragraph 7 4 1 2 SENSORS S6 PLATEN FILM S7 OPTICS Home and S8 VERTICAL TRANSPORT report to the master MICRO on the MCS BOARD The LEDs for these SENSORS are located on the MCS BOARD SENSOR locations in the 8100 LASER IMAGER and locations of the corresponding LEDs are shown in Figure 7 10 See paragraph 7 4 1 3 SENSOR S9 DENSITOMETER EXIT reports to the slave MICRO on the DENSITOMETER BOARD The LED for this SENSOR is on the LIGHT SOURCE BOARD in the DENSITOMETER MODULE See paragraph 7 4 1 3 L gt Note All SENSORS can also be checked via Service WebLink See paragraph 7 2 8 7 46 7F3318 2005 J uly Rev B Section 7 Troubleshooting 7 4 1 1 Testing Film Feed SENSORS 51 55 510 512 Via LEDs Preliminary 1 Remove the FILM CARTRIDGE from the IMAGER and leave the FRONT DOOR open 2 De energize the IMAGER 3 Remove the REAR PANEL 4 Setthe SERVICE OVERRIDE SWITCH in the Service position 5 Setthe 2 JUMPER LEDs the FEEDER CONTROL BOARD to short pins 1 and 2 see Figure 7 11 This will enab
170. ER HANDLE 5 Latch the COVER 6 Allow the temperature reading on the METER to stabilize This should take about 90 15 seconds 7 Check that the METER indicates 123 5 to 124 5 C If it does not perform the following adjustment Cover To Temperature Meter 8100 126A Figure 3 2 Positioning the TEMPERATURE PROBE 3 2 7F3318 2005 J uly Rev B Section 3 Adjustments Adjustment 1 Use a PATCH CABLE to connect your LAPTOP COMPUTER to the Service Port under the TOP HOOD Energize the LAPTOP COMPUTER Connectto the SERVICE TOOL through SecureLink Access the SERVICE TOOL main menu through the WebLink S elect Configuration MC S Processor IM EW Processor Temperature Configuration r Set Temperature Enter measured temperatures Measured and Displayed temperatures are Celsius Note All measurement in degrees celsius Measured Temperature 0 00 Gurrent Temperature 12400 Et Current offset 0 00 Ej Gurrent setpoint 0 00 fg 6 Click Modify 7 In the Measured Temperature window type the temperature value measured by the METER gt Note The Current offset window indicates the offset between the Current Temperature value in the PROCESSOR MICRO and the Measured Temperature 8 Click Save 9 Close the Processor Temperature Configuration window 10 Allow approximately 10 minutes for the temperature of the DRUM to stabilize
171. Error in LOCAL PANEL LOCAL PANEL Message Log Message DICOM Message Local Panel Database Error NORMAL Summary The database software of the LOCAL PANEL has a problem The error can be caused by a number of problems such as failure in database read write or update operations Result of Error The DRE is not functional User Action None FE Action 8 20 7F 3318 2005 J uly Rev B Section 8 QuickSheets 8 5 18 Error 12 003 Internal Software Error in LOCAL PANEL LOCAL PANEL Message Log Message DICOM Message Local Panel Presentation Error NORMAL 3 Notify Summary The internal software of the LOCAL PANEL subsystem has a problem The error can be caused by a number of problems such as persistent memory failures object creation failure or system call failures Result of Error The DRE is not functional User Action None FE Action 2005 J uly Rev 7F3318 8 21 Service Manual 8 5 19 Error 12 075 Error LOCAL PANEL Software LOCAL PANEL Message Log Message DICOM Message Local Panel Err NORMAL 3 Notify Summary An internal error has been detected in the software of the LOCAL PANEL The log message will contain additional details The error can be caused by a number of problems such as initialization register unregister observers or registry access failures Result of Error The operation of the LOCAL PANEL may be affected Usually it will continue to operate after the error but a specific functi
172. Expose Return Home 8100 126L Figure 6 16 MCS Basic Operations 2005 J uly Rev 7F3318 6 33 Service Manual Pickup Operation Sheet 1 of 3 MCS Receive Print Command Feeder Module starts pickup MCS 000090 Start Pickup E Optics Spi cs Spinner Prep Exposure penen Motor DCM3 Feeder Module MCS No Spinner START_SPINNER up to Timeout Pickup Fail 1 Speed Override door open Optics Optics Home No 27 123 already Sensor S7 Internal Hardware home Blocked MCS Yes Start Opti Home the Optics No print command required Retry pickup or preload film EEE ESSE EE Failure Optics ics Translate Motor Step4 home direction Load Platen Optics home Notes 1 Pickup Fail is one of 21 118 Pickup Failed to Go Home 21 119 Film Contact Failure 21 120 Cups Engaged Failure MCS Stop Optics Translate Motor Step4 Assumptions Pickup Arm is at Home Cartridge is Open Platen is Unloaded Unloading No Scanning Optics Home Sensor S7 Blocked Load Platen Set to Faster Speed No OPTICS_HOME Timeout Yes Yes 27 640 Internal Hardware Failure Optics ID Pickupt Figure 6 17 Pickup Operation Sheet 1 of 3 6 34 7F3318 2005 uly Rev B Section 6 Theory of Operation Pickup Operation Sheet 2 of 3
173. Expose the film See Figure 6 19 e Unload the platen See Figure 6 20 Process the film See Figure 6 21 In addition to the basic printing operations the folloiwng operations are flowcharted e Front door close See Figure 6 22 e Front door open See Figure 6 23 RF Tag Sequence at Cartridge Opening See Figure 6 24 RF Tag Write and Calibration Count See Figure 6 25 L gt Note Dotted lines between components the flowcharts indicate that the function is a subsystem operation 6 32 7F3318 2005 J uly Rev B Section 6 Theory of Operation Power Up e Initialize Display Self Test Turn on Processor Clear film e Open cartridge and test all machine functions Idle Ready Not Printing Cartridge Open See Figures 7 1 through 7 7 in Troubleshooting Pick Up Processor e Print Command Film at Entrance Received See Figure 6 17 Transport Rollers to Film to Feed Rollers Processor Drum Close Feed Rollers Figure 6 21 Processor to Cooling Prep Optics Cooling to Exit Rollers Start Spinner Densitometer Optics Home Densitometer to Exit Prestage 4 aFilm Load Platen See Figure 6 20 e Feed Rollers to Unload Platen Platen Rollers See Figure 6 18 Platen Rollers to Platen Rollers to Transport R ollers Platen See Figure 6 19 Expose e Start Expose Data Sent From DRE e Stop
174. F3318 3 1 3 1 3 4 3 5 3 6 Service Manual vi 4 8 4 9 4 10 4 11 4 12 4 13 4 14 4 7 5 Rollback Open lt 513 4 30 4 7 6 RF Tag Assembly RF Tag interface Board and RF Reader Board 4 31 4 7 7 RF Antenna 4 32 Elevator Assembly caress ites px ERE 4 33 4 8 1 4 33 4 8 2 Elevator Home 512 4 34 4 8 3 Elevator Motor and Hub Assembly Step 8 4 35 FEED ROLLER ASSEMBLY e ERE RACE SACS le 4 36 4 9 1 FEED ROLLER MODULE 4 36 4 9 2 Feed Roller Open 511 4 37 4 9 3 Feed Roller Open Motor DCM4 4 38 4 9 4 Feed Roller Motor and Pulley 4 40 4 9 5 Feed Roller Torsion 5 5 4 41 Vertical Transport ASSEMBLY 4 42 4 10 1 Vertical Transport MODULE 4 42 4 10 2 Vertical Transport Sensor S8 4 43 4 10 3 VERTICAL TRANSPORT MOTOR Step 6 4 44 IMAGING EXPOSURE ASSEMBLY 4 45 4 11 1 IMAGING MODULE ead pa itis 4 45 4 11 2 SCANNER ASSEMBLY
175. Figure 4 34 gt Note Inserta PAPER CLIP in each of the 2 PIN SOCKETS of the MOTOR CONNECTOR Figure 4 34 and place the BATTERY TERMINALS across the 2 PAPER CLIPS to apply power to the FILM FEED MOTOR b When the VANE has moved out of the SENSOR remove the BATTERY and PAPER CLIPS 2 Loosen the SETSCREW that attaches the VANE and CAM to the MOTOR SHAFT Figure 4 34 3 Pullthe VANE and CAM from the MOTOR SHAFT 4 Remove the MOTOR ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR from the CHASSIS 5 Remove 3 ATTACHING SCREWS and remove the FILM FEED MOTOR Reassembly 1 Position the FILM FEED MOTOR as shown in Figure 4 34 and attach it with the 3 SCREWS 2 Make sure that the flaton the MOTOR SHAFT is positioned so that the FEED ROLLER OPEN SENSOR will not interfere with installation of the CAM and VANE on the MOTOR SHAFT L gt Note If you have to reposition the MOTOR SHAFT use a 9 volt BATTERY to drive the FILM FEED MOTOR as described in step 1 in Disassembly above 3 Install the CAM and VANE on the MOTOR SHAFT and secure it by tightening the SETSCREW against the flat of the MOTOR SHAFT 4 Installthe MOTOR ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR the CHASSIS and replace the MOTOR DRIVE BELT 4 38 7F3318 2005 J uly Rev B Section 4 Disassembly Reassembl Motor Connector Motor Sensor Vane mu Sensor Home Position Vane Rotated 180 9 4 CONNECTOR Position Ku c
176. Fluoro VER713C0 provides brighter image back ground than VER693CO Lower table numbers have less mid tone contrast Higher have more VER693CO provides darker image back ground than VER713CO Lower Table numbers have less mid tone contrast Higher have more Note The number in bold should be the first choice when you are selecting parameter values VER693C0 Alternative 2 CT Computed VER693C30 0 3 15 Table 7 provides good Tomography or MRI grayscale range in all Magnetic Resonance CT and MRI studies Table 5 has less mid tone contrast Table 8 has more mid tone con trast 7338 2005July Rev Seti 2 Installation Phillips Medical Sys PMSV3K 3 0 3 1 Check with the PMS tems PMS EasyVi service engineer On sion and other PMS mo some PMS MODALI dalities TIES image quality cal ibration must be run from the PMS control console Type of MODALITY TFT Set Table Density Smoothing Con Dmax Type trast 12 Nuclear Medicine VER713CO 5 7 10 2 2 2 3 Table 7 is popular Table Alternative 1 PMSV3K 10 14 Alternative 2 5 has less mid tone contrast and shows more isotope takeup Table 10 has more mid tone contrast and re duces takeup visibility on film Start with Table 10 Higher tables have in creased brightness and reduce isotope takeup visibility on film Lower tables show more takeup Table number choices vary with manufacturer and radiologist Lo
177. HOME SENSOR S12 1 Remove the SUPPLY CARTRIDGE A Warning When the POWER CORD is plugged in hazardous voltages are present in some areas of the IMAGER These voltages can cause severe injury or death 2 De energize the IMAGER and disconnect the POWER CORD 3 Open the FRONT DOOR L gt Note The ELEVATOR HOME SENSOR can be removed and installed without removing the ELEVATOR MODULE from the IMAGER However you can gain easier access to the ELEVATOR HOME SENSOR by removing the ELEVATOR MODULE 4 8 1 4 Disconnect the ELECTRICAL PLUG INSERT from the CONNECTOR on the SENSOR Figure 4 30 Caution If the same SENSOR is to be replaced be careful not to damage the MOUNTING CLIPS during removal 5 Gently rock the ELEVATOR HOME SENSOR back and forth to disengage the MOUNTING CLIPS 6 When installing the ELECTRICAL PLUG INSERT make sure that the SENSOR CLIPS are properly seated in the sheet metal Figure 4 30 Removing the ELEVATOR HOME SENSOR 4 34 7F 3318 2005 J uly Rev Section 4 Disassembly Reassembl 4 8 3 ELEVATOR MOTOR AND HUB ASSEMBLY Step 8 1 Remove the SUPPLY CARTRIDGE de energize the IMAGER and remove the ELEVATOR MODULE 4 8 1 A Warning When the POWER CORD is plugged in hazardous voltages are present in some areas of the IMAGER These voltages can cause severe injury or death 2 Disconnect the ELECTRICAL PLUG from the ELEVATOR CHASSIS Figure 4 31 3 Free the MOTOR ELECTRICAL WIRES fr
178. HT BULBS and flames e After cleaning place used ALCOHOL SATURATED WIPES in BAG 78 9998 2868 0 TIE WRAP the BAG and dispose of properly e The DRUM and ROLLERS must be allowed to cool for 30 minutes prior to cleaning in a well ventilated room and with no sources of ignition e Do notapply SILICONE OIL to the DRUM surface e fthe DRUM is damaged replace the DRUM do not continue cleaning it Continue cleaning the other components in the PROCESSOR Procedure 1 Remove the DRUM from the IMAGER and place iton the DRUM STAND 2 Take one ALCOHOL SATURATED WIPE and begin to wipe down the surface of the DRUM as itis rotated 3 Continue to rotate and wipe the DRUM down with new WIPES as needed using one WIPE ata time 4 Use multiple WIPES to ensure that the entire DRUM surface is clean Typically several WIPES will be necessary for DRUM cleaning 5 Leave the ROLLERS in the PROCESSOR FRAME 6 Clean the ROLLERS with the WIPES Rotate to clean the full surface On some occasions it may be necessary to remove the ROLLERS and use the LINT FREE CLOTHS with ALCOHOL to clean the ROLLERS 7 Remove the HEAT SHIELD 8 Clean the HEAT SHIELD with ALCOHOL SATURATED WIPES 0 Install the HEAT SHIELD 2005 J uly 7F3318 5 13 Service Manual Roller Bearing Wipe insulation clean with alcohol and a pad Cover Heat Shield Figure 5 9 Cleaning the HEAT SHIELD and ROLLERS 7F 3318 2005 J uly Rev S
179. IDGE If this fails the attempt is repeated once If the CARTRIDGE will not close the error is declared Result of Error The IMAGER is unable to print It can still accept and queue jobs User Action 1 Touch the Video button to view the error video 2 Touch the Door button to open the FRONT DOOR This will clear the error 3 Close the CARTRIDGE manually See note below Caution The user should not attempt to close the CARTRIDGE while this error state is in effect If a jammed film is caught by the ROLLBACK as the CARTRIDGE is closed it will damage the FILM GUARD 4 Close the FRONT DOOR 5 Run test prints to clear fogged film from the IMAGER 6 If the error persists use a new CARTRIDGE FE Action This is an informational message only 8 42 7F3318 2005 J uly Rev B Section 8 QuickSheets 8 5 40 21 139 Bad CARTRIDGE ID LOCAL PANEL Message Log Message DICOM Message Severity Unable to Identify F ilm RF Tag Reader failed to Read or BAD SUPPLY 1 Alert Alarm sounds Write RF Tag data on film cartridge MGZ Summary The IMAGER is unable to read the ID information on the supply CARTRIDGE The IMAGER attempts to read the RF Tag in the CARTRIDGE whenever the front door is closed and at power up If after 5 attempts itis unsuccessful it declares the error and closes the CARTRIDGE Result of Error The IMAGER is unable to print It can still accept and queue jobs User Action 1 Try anew film CARTRIDGE 2
180. IGITAL VOLTMETER POT ADJ USTMENT TOOL Measurement 1 2 3 4 5 On the MCS BOARD connect the positive lead of the DIGITAL VOLTMETER to TP2 and the negative De energize the IMAGER Remove the REAR PANEL and defeat the REAR PANEL INTERLOCK E nergize the IMAGER and wait for error 27 602 to occur Set the DIGITAL VOLTMETER to read DC Volts lead to AGND1 Figure 3 6 Optics Laser Adjustment on MCS BOARD 3 12 7F 3318 2005 J uly Rev B Section 3 Adjustments 6 Use a PATCH CABLE to connect your LAPTOP COMPUTER to the IMAGER Service Port 7 Energize the IMAGER 8 Use SecureLink to connectto the IMAGER 9 Use WebLink to display the main menu of the SERVICE TOOL 10 Select Diagnostics gt MCS gt Optics gt Zero SOS Level Optics Adjustment and Diagnostics Adjust Laser Dynamic Range Zero SOS Level Micro Controller Diagnostic Display Optics Data Export Optics Data Test Optics Motors Zero SOS Level ero so that the laser power voltage can be tested r Status Re ady Summary 11 Click Run to set the SOS Level to zero 12 Check the DIGITAL VOLTMETER It should indicate 2 0 volts dc If it does not do the following adjustment Adjustment 1 Adjust VR2 OPTICS on the MCS BOARD so the DIGITAL VOLTMETER indicates 2 0 volts dc 2 De energize the IMAGER Then energize the IMAGER and check whether error 27 602 occurs e f 27 602 does not occur do a calibration e If 27 602 occ
181. IMAGER should start up normally and display the Select Language screen on the LOCAL PANEL 14 Select the desired language for your location Refer to paragraph 2 6 8 in Section 2 of this manual 15 Change the Service Passcode from the factory setting 123456 Refer to paragraph 2 6 8 in Section 2 of this manual 16 Restore the configuration parameters Follow procedure 7 2 19 on page 7 31 17 Load LOCAL PANEL videos Insert the video CD in the CD ROM DRIVE of the IMAGER Close the DRE DOOR Close the FRONT DOOR Reconnect to the Service WebLink From the Main Menu of the SERVICE TOOL select Diagnostics gt Scripts Select Remote Highlight CopyLP Videos vbs and select Run 7 32 7F 3318 2005 J uly Rev Section 7 Troubleshooting h Select the ScriptR unTime tab Loading will take about 4 to 5 minutes When loading is complete the word Pass is displayed in the Service WebLink window 18 Open the FRONT DOOR 19 Open the DRE DOOR 20 Remove the video CD and close the DRE DOOR 21 Insert a FILM CARTRIDGE 22 Close the FRONT DOOR 23 If RMS was enabled on this IMAGER you will need to restart RMS a In the Service Weblink select Configuration System Remote Monitoring b Click Modify c Click Save d Click Start Service 24 Verify RMS registration e Referto paragraph 2 6 11 in Section 2 e Perform steps 1 through16 of the RMS Grouping procedure
182. INING Pull Out i C LIP Filter change FILTER Figure 5 6 Replacing the CHARCOAL FILTER 5 10 7F3318 2005 J uly Rev B Section 5 Tools Preventive Maintenance Cleanin 5 4 8 Removing and Checking the PROCESSOR DRUM Supplies Required DRUM STAND Tools Required Phillips SCREWDRIVER Procedure Warning Dangerous Voltage Remove the FILM CARTRIDGE de energize the IMAGER and disconnect the POWER CORD Raise the upper HOOD Remove 9 SCREWS and remove the REAR PANEL Disconnect the 2 electrical CABLES extending from the DRUM Lift the TENSIONER to provide slack and remove the BELT from the DRUM PULLEY oe NE SES DRUM CABLES BELT TENSIONER Figure 5 7 Disconnecting the CABLES and BELT on the DRUM Caution Hot Surface Ay When the IMAGER is de energized the DRUM and PROCESSOR ROLLERS are hot Take care while working in this area 2005 J uly Rev 7F3318 5 11 Service Manual 6 Release the CLAMPS on the PROCESSOR COVER and open the PROCESSOR COVER Caution The DRUM and PROCESSOR ROLLERS are still warm Handle with care The surface of the DRUM is easily damaged by fingernails and jewelry Before handling the DRUM remove any jewelry rings bracelets watches etc that could accidentally conta
183. INTERFACE BOARD 1 PLUG and 4 SCREWS 3 Remove 4 SCREWS and disconnect the WIRES to free the INTERLOCK MCS BOARD Figure 4 51 Rear View 1 Remove the REAR PANEL and disconnect all ELECTRICAL PLUGS from the BOARD 2 Remove 8 ATTACHING SCREWS and remove the BOARD 3 Make sure that UMPER J P1 the upper right area of the BOARD is in the Normal position on the left 2 pins See Figure 3 3 in Adjustments 4 After installing a new BOARD do the PROCESSOR DRUM Temperature Adjustment paragraph 3 1 and the LASER Dynamic Range Adjustment paragraph 3 6 FEEDER BOARD Figure 4 51 Rear View 1 Remove the REAR PANEL and disconnect all ELECTRICAL PLUGS from the BOARD 2 Remove 4 ATTACHING SCREWS and remove the BOARD SERVICE OVERRIDE SWITCH Figure 4 51 Rear View 1 Remove the REAR PANEL 2 Remove the SWITCH ACTUATOR SCREW from the PROCESSOR INTERFACE BOARD COVER BOX Then remove the PIB COVER BOX 1 plug and 4 SCREWS 3 Squeeze together the CLIPS on the base of the SWITCH to disconnect it from its MOUNTING BRACKET Remove the WIRES from the SWITCH TERMINALS to free the SWITCH Replace the SWITCH and reconnect the WIRES Replace and secure the PIB COVER BOX 4 SCREWS and 1 ELECTRICAL PLUG Energize the IMAGER Lift the UPPER HOOD and check that the PROCESSOR MOTOR is operating SERVICE OVERRIDE SWITCH is in service position defeating the TOP HOOD INTERLOCK 9 Insert the actuator SCREW in the COVE
184. ITOMETER OPTICS RF TAG and TRAY Feeder Three operations can be run on each Micro Controller Micro Controller Diagnostics This is the same test as the diagnostic run at power Micro Controller Reset This operation resets the selected Micro Controller Micro Communications The operation tests whether the MCS CPU can communicate with the selected Micro Controller 1 From the main menu of the SERVICE TOOL select Diagnostics gt MCS gt FRU Diagnostics FRU Diagnostics This page allows running FRU diagnostics Select Diagnostic Micra Controller Diagnostics Select FRU Densitometer 2 Pass fo Fail fo stop Status Re ady Click to show Result Data 2 To run a test operation a Select the type of Diagnostic operation Micro Controller Diagnostics Micro Controller Reset or Micro Communications b Select the desired Micro Controller Densitometer Optics RF Tag or Tray L gt Note For the Micro Communications test or the Reset operation you can also select the MCS Micro Controller c Click Run to start the test operation Micro Controller Diagnostics will run once and display Pass or Fail Micro Communications tests will continue to cycle until you click Stop A Pass or Fail will be displayed for each test e If you select Micro Controller Reset you will lose your connection to the LOCAL PANEL and a 10 910 error will display You will have to shut down and resta
185. Inspect the INNER GUIDE of the PLATEN for debris or burrs 3 Use an ALCOHOL PAD to wipe down the INNER GUIDE 4 See paragraph 7 6 5 for recommendations for removing the causes of scratches 5 If you are unable to eliminate the cause of scratching in the PLATEN any other way replace the INNER GUIDE 7 6 5 Guidelines for Removing the Causes of Scratches The location of the scratches on film is the best guideline for locating the problem area precisely in the IMAGER Observe the following suggestions 1 Lightly rub the tips of your fingers over the suspected area When you locate a burr or dirt clean or polish to remove it 2 Turn several sheets of film upside down in a CARTRIDGE and transport them through the IMAGER L gt Note The back side of the film is more abrasive than the emulsion side and sometimes cleans off debris that is hard to locate a Under Proxy Server uncheck Use a proxy server 3 After disabling the Proxy Server connect to MPC again using the web browser 4 f you cannot connect to MPC advance to Step 1 Message 2 2005 J uly Rev 7F3318 7 67 Service Manual 7 7 Monitoring the MCS Via a Direct CABLE Connection to the MCS BOARD Use this procedure to monitor activity in the MCS and display the same types of information that are written to the logs For example if you suspect that the MCS is not booting correctly you can setup a session de energize and energize the IMAGER and observe the b
186. L PLUG from the ROLLBACK HOME SENSOR Figure 4 25 Caution If the same SENSOR is to be re installed be careful not to damage the MOUNTING CLIPS during removal 3 Gently rock the SENSOR back and forth to disengage the MOUNTING CLIPS 4 When replacing a ROLLBACK HOME SENSOR make sure that the MOUNTING CLIPS are securely seated in the sheet metal 5 Reassembly is essentially the reverse of disassembly Caution Do not damage the wiring when you install the ROLLBACK MODULE in the IMAGER Make sure all CABLES are routed properly after reassembly 8100 97C Figure 4 25 Removing the ROLLBACK HOME SENSOR 2005 July Rev 7F3318 4 29 Service Manual 4 7 5 ROLLBACK OPEN SENSOR S13 1 Remove the SUPPLY CARTRIDGE de energize the IMAGER and remove the ROLLBACK MODULE 4 7 1 A Warning When the POWER CORD is plugged in hazardous voltages are present in some areas of the IMAGER These voltages can cause Severe injury or death 2 Carefully turn the ROLLBACK MODULE upside down 3 Disconnect the ELECTRICAL PLUG from the ROLLBACK OPEN SENSOR Figure 4 26 Caution If the same SENSOR is to be replaced be careful not to damage the MOUNTING CLIPS during removal 4 Gently rock the ROLLBACK OPEN SENSOR back and forth to disengage the MOUNTING CLIPS 5 When replacing ROLLBACK OPEN SENSOR make sure that the MOUNTING CLIPS are securely seated in the sheet metal Reassembly is the reverse of disassembly A Cau
187. L will perform an adjustment automatically QM HE COS ups SES 3 10 7F3318 2005 J uly Rev B Section 3 Adjustments Optics Adjustment and Diagnostics Adjust Laser Dynamic Range Zero SOS Level Micro Controller Diagnostic Display Optics Data Export Optics Data Test Optics Motors r Adjust Laser Dynamic Range Da not perform this procedure unless you are sure it is required It should be performed only when an MCS BOARD or the SCANNER ASSEMBLY has been replaced or P604 has occurred 4l Run Status Complete Pass Summary Final Results Test AdjustLaserDynamicRange executed at z004 13 05T11 02 00 Status Pass Laser Dynamic Range 154121 7 Check that Status is Pass and that the laser dynamic range is between 140 and 160 L gt Note In some cases you will have to repeat the adjustment several times As you do note whether the measured values are improving 8 After the adjustment is completed run a calibration print before running any other print Caution If a print is initiated before calibration 27 622 Media LUT Non Monotonic will occur 2005 July 7F3318 3 11 Service Manual 3 7 OPTICS LASER POWER Do this procedure only if 27 602 errors occur indicating invalid POWER MONITOR range Specification TP2 on the MCS BOARD must indicate 2 volts dc Special Tools LAPTOP COMPUTER with Internet Explorer 5 5 or higher SERVICE TOOL Ethernet PATCH CABLE D
188. LE Diagnostics 2005 J uly Rev 7F3318 7 43 Service Manual Is Service Sw in Service Position Yes Turn Optics Spinner on Is Spinner on Read beam power with laser off to check offset Is offset within set limit Read beam power with laser on and attenuator wide open Y Subtract offset from read beam powerand compare result to set limits Range within set limits Check attenuator optical calibration by reading beam power at 21 attenuator settings Optics AIQC Calibration and Diagnostics This procedure begins about 68 seconds after power on It performs full attenuator calibration and a laser power test and calibration For this process to occur the Service Override Switch must be in the normal position and front door top cover and rear panel must be closed Check power monitor offset Check power monitor range _ Attenuator calibration Are readings monotonic smooth 27 606 Is AOD range within limits Still saturated Apply maximum laser power Calibrate at minimum laser beam attenuator power setting Is beam Adjust beam power monitor eS power by saturated Increasing attenuation Compute ratio of max beam __ Check laser power to min
189. LERS 1 Remove the SUPPLY CARTRIDGE A Warning CD Ops s When the POWER CORD is plugged in hazardous voltages are present in some areas of the IMAGER These voltages can cause severe injury or death De energize the IMAGER and disconnect the POWER CORD Remove the IMAGING MODULE from the IMAGER 4 11 1 Remove the NIP ROLLER BELT paragraph 4 11 8 Remove the following parts atthe rear of the IMAGING MODULE a Remove 2 ATTACHING SCREWS from the outside BEARING BLOCK see Figure 4 48 b Remove E RING c Remove BEARING on the end of the DRIVE ROLLER next to the outside BEARING BLOCK not visible in Figure 4 48 d Remove SPRING e Remove outside BEARING BLOCK from the PLATEN CHASSIS Remove the following parts from the inside end of the DRIVE ROLLER E RING MAIN SPROCKET SHAFT PIN NIP ROLLER DRIVE GEAR SHAFT PIN E RING BEARING not shown Remove the following parts from the inside end of the NIP ROLLER a E RING not shown b GEAR not shown Pull the DRIVE ROLLER NIP ROLLER out from the rear of PLATEN ASSEMBLY Note It is not necessary to remove the inside BEARING BLOCK Remove the E RING and pull the SPROCKET from the DRIVE ROLLER Caution In reassembly check that the notched surfaces of the BEARING BLOCKS see inset in Figure 4 48 are pushed in all the way against the IMAGING CYLINDER The ROLLER set must be pushed in as close to the OPTICS MODULE as possible
190. MAGER and disconnect the POWER CORD Remove the FILM PICKUP MODULE 4 6 1 Position the FILM CARRIAGE as necessary to gain clear access to the SENSOR Figure 4 19 Remove the desired SENSOR as follows a Disconnect the ELECTRICAL PLUG from the SENSOR Caution If the removed SENSOR is to be reinstalled be very careful not to damage the MOUNTING CLIPS during removal Also be careful not to damage the fragile ACTUATORS of FILM SURFACE SENSOR S4 and FILM OUT SENSOR S5 during disassembly and reassembly OU hs I b Gently rock the SENSOR back and forth to disengage its MOUNTING CLIPS from the chassis sheet metal 6 When replacing a SENSOR make sure that the SENSOR CLIPS are properly seated in the sheet metal Film Out Sensor S5 Film Surface Sensor S4 Pickup Position Sensor 53 Cups Engaged Sensor 10 8100 81 Figure 4 19 Locations of OPTICAL SENSORS 4 22 7F 3318 2005 J uly Rev B Section 4 Disassembly Reassembl 4 6 5 FILM PICKUP MOTOR DCM2 1 Remove the supply cartridge A Warning When the POWER CORD is plugged in hazardous voltages are present in some areas of the IMAGER These voltages can cause severe injury or death De energize the IMAGER and disconnect the POWER CORD Remove the FILM PICKUP MODULE 4 6 1 Disconnect the ELECTRICAL PLUG Figure 4 20 Remove the SPRING from the MOTOR BRACKET Remove 2 SHOULDER SCREWS and WASHERS The WASHERS may fall off after the SHOULDER S
191. MAGER returns the message NORMAL If the IMAGER is in an error condition it returns a FAILURE or WARNING message along with one of the 12 status information messages shown in the table below If more than one error exists only the highest priority information message is sent The information messages are listed in priority order in the table below Since the messages are few they define only a general category of problems A DICOM status information message is associated with each of the 5 digit error codes that identify specific problems in the IMAGER DICOM PRINTER DICOM PRINTER Status Status Message Information Message FAILURE Condition PRINTER DOWN ELEC DOWN PROC DOWN WARNING Condition CALIBRATION ERR BAD SUPPLY MGZ COVER OPEN FILM JAM FILM TRANSP ERR EMPTY media size media type PROC INIT PRINTER INIT PRINTER OFFLINE 8 3 LOCAL PANEL Status Messages DICOM Status MCS Printer Status Door Open COVER OPEN The FRONT DOOR is open orthe REAR PANEL is off or both Door Open Reques N A The IMAGER is completing prints in process before ted opening the FRONT DOOR Drawer O pen The FILM CARTRIDGE is open Hood Open COVER OPEN The UPPER HOOD is open Printer Offline Printing has been suspended Printing The IMAGER is printing an image Ready NORMAL The IMAGER is on line and the PROCESSOR is at op erating temperature 2005 J uly Rev B 7 3318 8 1 Service Manual Self Test PRINTER INIT The IMAGER is
192. MCS In the 8150 IMAGER as in the 8900 IMAGER the LOCAL PANEL communicates only with the DRE and is thus considered a DRE component 6 2 1 Cl DRE Computer Hardware Components LOCAL PANEL TRANSMITTER CUSTOMER NETWORK Figure 6 2 DRE Hardware Components 6 2 7F3318 2005 J Rev B Section 6 Theory of Operation The DRE COMPUTER includes MOTHERBOARD Single Board COMPUTER The MOTHERBOARD together with a HARD DISK and MAIN MEMORY formats the images from the MODALITY before they are sent to the MCS for printing The images are received on the PCI Bus of the MOTHERBOARD from the customer network via the DICOM message exchange protocol The MOTHERBOARD formats the images in MEMORY and on the HARD DISK DRIVE then returns them on the PCI Bus to the output circuits of the PCIO BOARD for transmission to the MCS See paragraph 6 2 1 The MOTHERBOARD CPU is a 1 2 GHz Intel Celeron The MOTHERBOARD works with 256 MB of RAM and an 80 GB HARD DISK The MOTHERBOARD has 2 Serial ports COM1 is not used COM2 is used for control of the LOCAL PANEL TOUCH SCREEN e MAIN MEMORY 256 MB of SDRAM are contained in 2 DIMM modules which plug into sockets on the MOTHERBOARD In these memory modules the images received from the MODALITY are rotated scaled to desired size and then transferred to the HARD DISK for further formatting When a print request is received the images are sent from DISK back to MAIN MEMORY wher
193. MCS will see the FRONT DOOR as being open Setthe SERVICE SWITCH back at service mode The MCS will see the FRONT DOOR as closed and will lower the ELEVATOR and open the CARTRIDGE The IMAGER will now be prepared to transport film 6 5 AIQC and GSM The AIQC Automatic Image Quality Control system and GSM Gray Scale Manager software work together to provide image quality control 6 5 1 Purpose of AIQC AIQC includes the entire subsystem of OPTICS DENSITOMETER PROCESSOR RF TAG READER and LUTs Lookup Tables that ensures consistent density from image to image To provide consistency in density on printed film AIQC musttake into account Film characteristics Variations in OPTICS MODULES Feedback from the DENSITOMETER which monitors density To achieve its goal AIQC generates Film Models The functions of these is to map image digital vales to the required film densities AIQC determines when film calibration must occur and then processes the density step wedges on the calibration film to create the Film Models 6 5 2 Purpose of GSM GSM is the software that receives information from the DENSITOMETER OPTICS and RF TAG READER creates the LUTs and defines the ATTENUATOR setting for OPTICS Software components of GSM are shown in Figure 6 26 2005 J uly Rev 7F3318 6 47 Service Manual TFT Modified for __ User Dmax Film Model Attenuator User Contrast Created From Setting Film D
194. MODULE 7 5 5 5 Checking the PLATEN MODULE 7 5 6 Remove and Inspect Suspect MODULES 7 5 6 1 Removing and Inspecting the ROLLBAC K MODULE 7 54 7 5 6 2 Removing and Inspecting the FILM PICKUP MODULE 7 55 7 5 6 3 Removing and Inspecting the FEED ROLLER MODULE 7 60 7 5 6 4 Removing and Inspecting the FILM PLATEN MODULE 7 60 7 5 7 Replace the Repaired MODULE and Cycle Film to Confirm Repair 7 61 7 6 Troubleshooting the Sources of Film Scratches 7 62 7 6 1 Preparation for Transporting Film the Service Mode 7 62 7 6 2 Isolating the General Area where Scratches are Occurring 7 62 7 6 3 Locating the Cause of Scratching in the PROCESSOR DENSITOMETER Area 7 64 7 6 4 Locating the Cause of Scratching the FILM PLATEN 7 65 7 6 5 Guidelines for Removing the Causes of Scratches 7 65 7 7 Monitoring the MCS Via a Direct CABLE Connection to the MCS BOARD A nice od e E ER A 7 66 7 8 Using 7 69 ps9 MUSING SCIPS es Ge Go 7 70 7 10 USING the 095 Cin een Lex yee 7 71 1 8 1 Types ERST E E Yero End died 7 71 7 8 2 The Application Log 7 71 7 8 2 1 Using the Application Log 7 71 7 8 2 2 Log Keying Functions 7 73 7 8
195. NNA BOARD Remove the SUPPLY CARTRIDGE de energize the IMAGER and remove the ROLLBACK MODULE 4 7 1 A Warning ur ae e When the POWER CORD is plugged in hazardous voltages are present in some areas of the IMAGER These voltages can cause severe injury or death Turn the ROLLBACK KNOB to position the ROLLBACK CARRIAGE at about the center of the ROLLBACK MODULE Carefully turn the ROLLBACK MODULE upside down Remove 4 SCREWS to free the RF ANTENNA BOARD Figure 4 26 Disconnect the ANTENNA PLUG from the RF TAG INTERFACE BOARD Tie a STRING or small WIRE to the ANTENNA CABLE just below the PLUG During reassembly this STRING or WIRE can be used to pull the ANTENNA CABLE back through the ROLLBACK ASSEMBLY and up through the HOLE in the BASE for reconnection to the RF TAG INTERFACE BOARD While holding the attached STRING drop the CABLE PLUG down through the HOLE in the BASE of the ROLLBACK MODULE Then carefully pull the RF ANTENNA BOARD with CABLE from the ROLLBACK MODULE Do not pull the STRING or WIRE through Untie the STRING from the CABLE and connect it to the CABLE of the new ANTENNA BOARD 9 After installing a new ANTENNA BOARD in the BASE of the ROLLBACK MODULE use the STRING to pull the CABLE through and out the HOLE in the BASE Then connect the PLUG to the appropriate CONNECTOR on the RF TAG INTERFACE BOARD Drop cable plug 7 WN x SN tied to string or P ia ees wire th
196. NNECTOR 4 Remove 4SCREWS and remove the PANEL Figure 4 15 LocalP anelBack Figure 4 15 Removing the LOCAL PANEL 4 18 7F3318 2005 J uly Rev B Section 4 Disassembly Reassembl 4 6 FILM PICKUP ASSEMBLY 4 6 1 Film Pickup Module 1 Remove the SUPPLY CARTRIDGE A Warning GU ee OS When the POWER CORD is plugged in hazardous voltages are present in some areas of the IMAGER These voltages can cause severe injury or death De energize and disconnect the POWER CORD Open the FRONT DOOR and remove the REAR PANEL Remove the FEED ROLLER MODULE see procedure 4 9 1 Check that the FILM PICKUP CARRIAGE is in the home retracted position SUCKER CUPS are up If itis not proceed as follows While holding the FILM PICKUP CARRIAGE from the bottom to keep it from dropping pry the release tab out see Rear View to disengage the MOTOR DRIVE GEAR Then lift the CARRIAGE up to the retracted home position and let go of the RELEASE TAB Remove 2 ATTACHING SCREWS from the front Front View in Figure 4 16 Disconnect 2 ELECTRICAL CABLES Rear View in Figure 4 16 One plugs into the Film Pickup Assembly The other is the cable to the ROLLBACK MOTOR which should be disconnected to avoid damage to it Remove 2 ATTACHING SCREWS from the back side The FILM PICKUP ASSEMBLY is hanging by hooks from a ROD With 1 hand under the heel of the PICKUP MODULE and the other supporting the TOP carefully lift up to remo
197. NSOR S13 The problem could be caused by a faulty 13 or ROLLBACK MOTOR DCM 1 or by a film jam on the CARTRIDGE Result of Error The IMAGER is unable to print It is still able to accept and queue print jobs User Action Touch the Play Video button to view the error video Press the Open Door button and hold for 5 seconds to open the FRONT DOOR Clear any jammed film Close the CARTRIDGE manually Close the FRONT DOOR Run test prints to clear fogged film from the IMAGER If the error persists use a new CARTRIDGE FE Action 1 Check the Application Log to try to determine the point at which the error occurred This may help isolate the problem 2 Use the ROLLBACK KNOB to check that ROLLER moves freely 3 Use the SERVICE TOOL to check ROLLBACK COMPLETE SENSOR S13 and ROLLBACK MOTOR DCM1 Oy sspe Ue Be 8 50 7F 3318 2005 J uly Rev B Section 8 QuickSheets 8 5 48 21 515 Calibration Print Failed LOCAL PANEL Message Log Message DICOM Message Severity Calibrate Failure Alarm Calibration Failure non monotonic CALIBRATION 0 F atal sounds near Dmax ERR Summary The calibration print failed This error occurs during the process of building the film model when wedge data fails one of the following detailed checks of monotonicity The3 step wedge values used to calculate the Dmax density are not monotonic causing an error in the calibration calculations is not monotonic
198. Network DIAG 71712003 16 20 05 788 scp assacH scu implement uid 1 3 1 2 2 1107 5 9 20000101 MIM Network DIAG 741772003 16 20 05 808 scp 80 basic grayscale print meta sop negotiated MIM Network Display Filter 7 Note that the search retrieved only log entries that include the words scp assoc Also note that the log still includes 1 688 records which is too much data to analyze We need to filter further to decrease the data 8 Again click Display Filter but this time select the Advanced tab Display Filter B 21 xl Basic Advanced Enable 4dvanced filter Field Text as text r contains jul Field as text Field zj as test Field as test Field at text Y Field as text Field 2005 JulyRev B 7F3318 7 77 Service Manual 9 Check Enable Advanced filter and fill in the first Field boxes as shown above This adds the word up to the original search words scp assoc 10 Click OK to retrieve all the scp associations that were up running during the time that we selected Local Log Viewer C Documents and Settings I487050 Desktop DukeAssocLog xml Microsoft Internet Explorer prov File Edit Favorites Tools Help Back mp o A Search amp jFaverites zI By a B Address C Program Files Kodak WebLink Local Log Wiewer htm Links Best of the Web Channel G
199. O BOARD or MCS 1 To setup the SERVICE TOOL for viewing images a From the main menu of the SERVICE TOOL select Diagnostics gt C onfigure Image Viewer DY 8150 Image Viewer Image Gache Configuration Sets the Image Cache configuration parameters sd NO 7 26 7 3318 2005 J Rev B Section 7 Troubleshooting b Click Modify c In the Cache Enabled window select YES DY 8150 Image Viewer Image Cache Configuration Sets the Image Cache configuration parameters Cache Enabled YES All locations are at the Printer Input Cache Location efemp Rendered Cache Location pwinnftemp Number of Images 100 18 Max Cache Size 500 m Cancel Reset d In the Input Cache Location window type the file location on the DRE HARD DISK C temp for storage of the raw image e In the Rendered Cache Location window type the file location on the DRE HARD DISK C winnt temp for storage of the rendered image f In the Max Number of Images window type the maximum number of images you wish to view minimum value is 10 maximum value is 100 g In the Max Cache Size MB window type a size in megabytes for the storage area on DISK minimum value is 100 MB maximum is 200 MB default is 500 MB h Click Save gt Note The Image Cache area on the DRE HARD DISK is now set up for storage of images sent down from the MODALIT
200. OD INTERLOCK e Worn SLIP RINGS 2005 J uly Rev 7F3318 8 93 Service Manual e Defective RELAY K1 or K2 on the PIB Replace the BOARD Bad MCS BOARD monitors DRUM temperature and turns on HEATER as required e If the room temperature is set back during non working hours try bringing the room temperature up early so the IMAGER has more time to recover 8 94 7F 3318 2005 J uly Rev B Section 8 QuickSheets 8 5 79 28 554 PROCESSOR Over Temperature Error LOCAL PANEL Message Log Message DICOM Message Severity Processor Over Temperature Processor over temperature PROC DOWN 0 Fatal Alarm sounds Summary The DRUM temperature is too high and the PROCESSOR HEATER has been turned off When power is applied to the IMAGER and the TOP HOOD is closed 120 volts ac is applied to the PROCESSOR HEATER through a RELAY on the PROCESSOR INTERFACE BOARD under control of the MASTER CPU on the MCS Board The PROCESSOR RTD senses changes in HEATER temperature and reports them to the MASTER CPU Failure to control temperature probably indicates that the RTD is open there is a short in the DRUM wiring or a control circuit on the MCS BOARD is defective Result of Error The IMAGER is unable to print film It can accept and queue new jobs but it will not initiate new films All films in the IMAGER will be reprinted The error can be cleared only by restarting the IMAGER Related Errors 28 506 PROCESSOR Communication Failure
201. OTHS and ALCOHOL SATURATED WIPES ina BAG 78 9998 2868 0 TIE WRAP the BAG and dispose of it properly 13 Complete the PM procedures Procedure 5 4 13 2005 J uly Rev B 7 3318 5 5 Service Manual 5 4 5 Cleaning the EXPOSURE PLATEN Supplies Required 3M Auto Pak TACK CLOTH Cleaning 1 De energize the IMAGER 2 Open FRONT DOOR 3 Open the PLATEN ACCESS DOOR by sliding the INSERT HANDLE to the left and pulling out Caution The anti reflective surface of the PLATEN is easily damaged by fingernails and jewelry Before cleaning the PLATEN remove any jewelry rings bracelets watches etc that might come in contact with the PLATEN Do not snag the CLEANING CLOTH on the CENTERING ARM at the bottom of the PLATEN If the 3M Auto Pak CLOTH catches on parts inside the PLATEN do not damage the parts when removing the CLOTH Check for and remove any torn pieces of CLOTH 4 Reach through the DOOR on the PLATEN and use a 3M Auto Pak TACK CLOTH to clean the inside of the PLATEN Completely clean the curved bottom surface of the PLATEN ASSEMBLY gt Note The Auto Pak CLOTH will not remove large particles Use a FLASHLIGHT and remove large particles with your fingers 5 After cleaning close and latch the PLATEN ACCESS DOOR and close the FRONT DOOR H200_0034DAA PLATEN ACCESS DOOR Figure 5 2 Cleaning the PLATEN 5 6 7F 3318 2005 J uly Rev Section 5 Tools
202. OTOR are e Optics Motors You can select the Optics Attenuator Motor or the Optics Translation Motor for testing Or you can choose to command the Translation Motor to move the OPTICS to the shipping position e Platen Motors You can select the Feed Platen Roller Motor or the Film Centering Motor 2005 J uly Rev 7F3318 7 11 Service Manual Tray Motors You can choose to exercise any of the following motors Rollback Motor to Open or Close the FILM CARTRIDGE PIckup Motor Feed Roller Motor Feed Roller Open Motor to either Open or Close the FEED ROLLERS and Elevator Motor to either move the ELEVATOR Up or Down 5 To start the test click Run When the test is completed either Pass or Fail will display 6 Click the bottom line of the screen to display test results data 7 After completing the test set the SERVICE SWITCH to the User position and restart the IMAGER Table 7 2 Functions of MOTORS Ref MOTOR ASSEMBLY Drive Circuit Des DCM1 ROLLBACK ROLLBACK Haz 12 DC DRIVE CHIP on FEEDER CONTROL vdc BOARD DCM2 PICKUP PICKUP Haz 412 DC DRIVE CHIP on FEEDER CONTROL vdc BOARD DCM3 OPTICS SPINNER SCANNER DAC and driver on OPTICS Mod Bd DCM4 FEED ROLLER FEED Haz 12 DC DRIVE CHIP on FEEDER CONTROL OPEN ROLLER DCM5 VACUUM PUMP PICKUP EM a BOARD vdc Step1 FEED ROLLER FEED Haz 424 STEPPER DRIVE CHIP on FEEDER ROLLER vdc CONTROL BOARD ES ROLLER IMAGING MEER DRIVE CHI
203. P on MCS BOARD vdc Step3 OPTICS SCANNER 412 vdc STEPPER DRIVE CHIP on OPTICS ATTENUATOR MODULE BOARD Step4 OPTICS SCANNER Haz 12 MICRO STEPPER DRIVE CHIP on MCS TRANSLATION ERAT PROCESSOR ee eee BOARD Step6 VERTICAL TRANSPORT TRANSPORT a CENTERING IMAGING ne peer DRIVE CHIP on MCS BOARD Step 8 ELEVATOR ELEVATOR Haz 12 STEPPER DRIVE CHIP on FEEDER vdc CONTROL BOARD step 9 KICKER pRocessoR gt Note Hazard 12 and 24 vdc power is applied through RELAY K1 on the MCS BOARD When the REAR PANEL is removed or the FRONT DOOR is opened this RELAY opens disabling power to all MOTORS that use hazard power 7 12 7F3318 2005 J uly Rev B Section 7 Troubleshootin Processor Motor E Y Feed Roller Motor Feed Roller Open Motor DCM4 Rollback Motor DCM1 Platen Roller Motor Film Centering Motor Figure 7 2 Locations of MOTORS 2005 J uly Rev 7F3318 Top Hood Interlock 12 Kicker Motor
204. PER HOOD and remove the REAR PANEL 3 Remove 4SCREWS and remove the KICKER MOTOR from the BRACKET 4 Remove 4SCREWS and remove the COVER L gt Note The cover is difficult to remove N 1 ls AS l a s T 8 FLA rae Figure 4 7 Removing the KICKER MOTOR Continue on next page 2005 July Rev 7F3318 4 9 Service Manual 5 Remove the STRAIN RELIEF BLOCK 2 SCREWS 6 Cutthe CABLE TIE 7 Remove the spiral CABLE WRAP around the cable harness not shown 8 Follow the MOTOR CABLE down to the IN LINE CONNECTOR 9 Disconnect the IN LINE CONNECTOR 10 Remove MOTOR and CABLE Figure 4 8 Removing the KICKER MOTOR 4 10 7F 3318 2005 J uly Rev Section 4 Disassembly Reassembl 4 2 6 PROCESSOR FILM DIVERTER ASSEMBLY 1 De energize the IMAGER and disconnect the POWER CORD A Warning When the POWER CORD is plugged in hazardous voltages are present in some areas of the IMAGER These voltages can cause severe injury or death 2 Open the UPPER HOOD Caution Hot Surface A When the IMAGER is initially de energized the PROCESSOR DRUM and ROLLERS are hot Take care when working in the area of the PROCESSOR 3 Liftup the HEAT SHIELD Figure 4 9 4 Remove 2 SCREWS and remove the FILM DIVERTER ASSEMBLY including stripper and FELT
205. Pickup Motor Optics Translation Motor Elevator Motor Optics Spinner Motor DCM3 Optics Attenuator Motor Service Manual 7 2 7 Running Tests of the OPTICS The procedures on the Optics Service menu include both adjustments and diagnostics To adjust Laser Dynamic Range see paragraph 3 6 To Zero SOS Level see paragraph 3 7 The other procedures on this menu are described below 1 From the main menu of the SERVICE TOOL select Diagnostics gt MCS gt Optics Optics Adjustment and Diagnostics Adjust Laser Dynamic Range Zero SOS Level Micro Controller Diagnostic Display Optics Data Export Optics Data Test Optics Motors Adjust Laser Dynamic Range Do not perform this procedure unless you are sure it is required t should be performed only when MCS BOARD or the SCANNER ASSEMBLY has been replaced or P604 has occurred gg Run Status Ready Summary 2 To testthe OPTICS Micro Controller select Micro Controller Diagnostic Adjust Laser Dynamic Range Zero SOS Level Micro Controller Diagnostic Display Optics Data Export Optics Data Test Optics Motors Micro Controller Diagnostic Run the Micro Controller Diagnostic paj Run Status Ready Summary I zl a Click Run to run the diagnostic for the Optics Micro Controller 7 14 7 3318 2005 J Rev B Section 7 Troubleshooting L gt Note This is the same diagnostic as that run during the power on self
206. Preventive Maintenance Cleanin 5 4 6 Replacing the FRONT DOOR AIR FILTER Supplies Required New FILTER Phillips SCREWDRIVER Procedure 1 From the LOCAL PANEL Open the FRONT DOOR Warning When the FRONT DOOR is open all MOTORS and the LASER are disabled but the SYSTEM is stil energized Remove 6 SCREWS Pull off the FILTER COVER with GASKET and FILTER RETAINER Remove and discard the old FILTER Install the new FILTER Install the FILTER COVER and the 6 SCREWS Close the FRONT DOOR pu v ea Od H200_008AD 6 SCREWS Figure 5 3 Replacing the AIR FILTER in the FRONT DOOR 2005 J uly 7F3318 5 7 Service Manual 8 Check the gap between the edge of the DOOR and and the FRAME The gap should be uniform along the unhinged edge of the door Often the door gap is wider toward the bottom of the DOOR L gt Note The purpose of aligning the FRONT DOOR is make sure that the EMC GASKET on the DOOR contacts the FRAME all around the DOOR e Ifthe DOOR gap is uniform this procedure is complete Go on to the next PM procedure e Ifthe DOOR GAP is not uniform continue with step 9 DoorGap Figure 5 4 Check DOOR Gap Continued on next page 5 8 7F 3318 2005 J uly Rev Section 5 Tools Preventive Maintenance Cleaning 9 Adjust the DOOR gap see Figure 5 5 Open the DOOR Loosen the 3 FILTER COVER SCREWS shown in Figure 5 5 Place your
207. R View A to provide slack in the BELT and remove the BELT from the DRUM PULLEY Caution Hot Surface A When the IMAGER is initially de energized the PROCESSOR DRUM and ROLLERS are hot Take care when removing the DRUM VU pec por 6 Release the clamps View B from the cover of the processor and open the processor cover Caution The surface of the DRUM is easily damaged by fingernails and jewelry Handle the DRUM with 1 hand on the large PULLEY and the other hand on the opposite ENDCAP Do nottouch the silicone surface of the DRUM 7 Liftthe DRUM from the PROCESSOR and lay iton a flat stable surface The PULLEY will prevent the silicone surface of the DRUM from touching the flat surface As an option you can place the DRUM in the CRADLE made by the PROCESSOR COVER ASSEMBLY L gt Note Whenever a new DRUM is installed the temperature adjustment for the PROCESSOR must be performed procedure 3 1 in Adjustments 4 4 7F3318 2005 J uly Rev B Section 4 Disassembly Reassembl View A Rear View B Front 8100 70A Figure 4 3 Removing the Processor Drum 2005 July 7F3318 4 5 Service Manual 4 2 3 PROCESSOR ROLLERS and Related Parts Disassembly 1 Remov
208. R BOX and lower it to the user position The PROCESSOR MOTOR should stop turning Oe OS 2005 July Rev B 7F3318 4 65 Service Manual POWER SWITCH TOP HOOD INTERLOCK v SCREW 4 Ve DOOR RELEASE Y _ FEEDER Za A pr s SOLENOID Nile BOARD i OY d OA L a MCS REAR m x I BOARD PANEL ENG rwr PLUG DUCK Front Door Interlock Switch FrontBackF ull FRONT REAR Figure 4 51 Replacing ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 7F3318 2005 J uly Rev B Section 4 Disassembly Reassembl 4 14 DICOM RASTER ENGINE DRE COMPUTER Caution The DRE COMPUTER includes a LITHIUM BATTERY This type of BATTERY requires proper disposal and cannot be discarded with ordinary trash The DRE COMPUTER is a controlled part and if itis replaced it must be returned to Kodak for rework CIRCUIT BOARDS contain lead
209. R S6 and the SENSOR turns off indicating to the SYSTEM software that the film is ready for exposure If SENSOR S6 does not turn off within 5 seconds after turn on this jam error is declared 5 seconds 17 inches of film travel at 4 inches per second plus tolerance Result of Error The IMAGER is unable to print Otherwise it can operate as normal acquiring queueing prints completing processing etc Films downstream from the PLATEN will be completed All other films will be reprinted Removing the jam clears the error when the FRONT DOOR is closed User Action 1 Open the FRONT DOOR 2 Remove jammed film 3 Close the FRONT DOOR FE Action Normally this message simply indicates that a jam has occurred and the error will be cleared when the jam has been removed and the FRONT DOOR closed However the error could be generated by hangup of the flag of PLATEN FILM SENSOR S6 preventing the SENSOR from turning off after the film passed through Check the MCS Log for 26 164 and trace backwards from the error looking for PLATEN FILM SENSOR 56 functionality 8 66 7F 3318 2005 J uly Rev B Section 8 QuickSheets 8 5 58 26 165 J am at TRANSPORT LOCAL PANEL Message Log Message DICOM Message Film J am in Area 3 Film J am Exiting Platen Film at FILM JAM 1 Alert Transport Alarm sounds Platen Sensor S6 failed to detect film trailing edge Summary The film has jammed between the PLATEN and the PROCESSOR As the film begi
210. RLOCK Worn SLIP RINGS Defective RELAY K1 or K2 on the PIB Replace the BOARD Bad MCS BOARD monitors DRUM temperature and turns on HEATER as required 7 3318 2005 J uly Rev B Section 8 QuickSheets 8 5 78 28 551 PROCESSOR DRUM HEATER Failure LOCAL PANEL Message Log Message DICOM Message Severity Processor Heater Failure Processor failed to warm up when PROC DOWN 0 Fatal Alarm sounds heater turned on Summary The HEATER has been turned on butthe expected temperature rise did not occur Refer to sheet 2 of the SYSTEM Functional Block Wiring Diagram When power is applied to the IMAGER the PROCESSOR DRUM turns on controlled by the SSR DRUM PROC signal from the MCS Board This pulse width modulated signal remains low active until the PROCESSOR DRUM RTD indicates that the DRUM is atoperating temperature See 28 506 for a description of RTD functions The normal warmup process takes from 18 20 minutes The HEATERS warm up ata rate of about 1 5 degrees C every 30 seconds when power is continuously applied As long as the SSR DRUM PROC signal is low the K1 SOLID STATE RELAY on the PROCESSOR INTERFACE BOARD PIB routes 120 vac to the DRUM HEATER Note that the DRUM HEATER element circuit includes a resettable THERMAL BREAKER The 120 vac is applied through RELAY K2 on the PIB The ac power should be present at the J 1 CONNECTOR of the PIB as long as the TOP HOOD INTERLOCK is closed HOOD down Result of Error The
211. ROBE with a BAR TYPE ELEMENT must be used to perform this procedure PROBES with CIRCULAR TYPE ELEMENTS will not provide accurate readings The TEMPERATURE METER and PROBE must be calibrated together as a pair at least once per year If the PROBE breaks a new PROBE and the METER must be sent in for calibration See paragraph 5 2 for details gt Note The TEMPERATURE METER must be at room temperature when performing this procedure If the METER has been brought in from a hot or cold vehicle allow it to acclimate to room temperature Measurement Setup 1 Energize the IMAGER and allow it to warm to operating temperature READY 2 Prepare the TEMPERATURE METER for use a Install the BLOCK on the TEMPERATURE METER PROBE as Shown in Figure 3 1 b Clean the PROBE with alcohol c Setthe TEMPERATURE METER to display in Celsius C BLOCK SENSOR PROBE 138 5 mm 5 45 in Figure 3 1 Positioning the TEMPERATURE PROBE BLOCK 2005 July Rev B 7F3318 3 1 Service Manual 3 Liftthe UPPER HOOD and set the SERVICE SWITCH in the Service position Measurement 1 Release the CLAMPS PROCESSOR COVER 2 Open the PROCESSOR COVER P E Hot Surface Ay The PROCESSOR DRUM and ROLLERS are hot Take care when working in the area of the PROCESSOR Lay the PROBE across the top of the DRUM at the center of the DRUM 4 Close the COVER with the BLOCK positioned against the BACK PLATE and just below the COV
212. RS clamp If the gap is out of spec the PICKUP MODULE must be replaced 7F3318 2005 J uly Rev B Section 7 Troubleshootin Heel Assy Driver Assy Frame Me Mis a Driver Slides m we U d Heel slides Figure 7 18 DRIVER and HEEL ASSEMBLIES 0 030 to 0 070 in gap Tab half into sensor Figure 7 19 VACUUM RELEASE VALVE Gap 5 Check that the HEEL PAD is securely attached to the HEEL ASSEMBLY from end to end and side to side If itis not replace the PAD See paragraph 4 6 3 L gt Note Alignment of the HEEL ASSEMBLY with respectto the DRIVER ASSEMBEY and the FRAME is checked in paragraph 7 5 6 2 4 2005 J uly Rev B 7 3318 Service Manual 6 Check that all4 SENSORS the FILM PICKUP MODULE are securely mounted with their snap legs protruding through the metal mounting BASE 7 Check that the large CUP PLATE SPRINGS are mounted properly in the grooves of the PINS on the driver BASE Also check that the 2 CABLES are in the grooves of the PULLEY 7 60 7F 3318 2005 J uly Rev Section 7 Troubleshooting 7 5 6 3 Removing and Inspecting the FEED ROLLER MODULE 1 Remove the MODULE as instructed in procedure 4 9 1 2 Use a 9 volt dry cell BATTERY to close the IDLER ROLLER on DRIVE ROLLER as follows e Insert a paper clip in each of the 2 pin sockets of the CONNECTOR for the FEED ROLLER OPEN MOTOR e Place the BATTERY poles across the 2 paper clips to drive the IDLER ROLLER up a
213. Repeat Count to 0 zero 4 Adjust POT R3 on the LIGHT SOURCE BOARD fully CCW see figure 3 5 until it clicks Caution In the following procedure DO NOT allow the reference bar to move past the center of the gauge Also itis critical that the reference bar never moves from right to left If it does the A D CONVERTER is overdriven and will produce negative readings from a cal film resulting in a failed calibration 5 While observing the reference level gauge on the screen slowly adjust R3 CW so the reference bar begins to move toward the center of the gauge It will require several turns of the POT L gt Note It will take up to a minute for the reference bar to complete moving in the adjustment 6 Center the reference level bar in the green and yellow areas on the gauge 2005 July Rev B 7F3318 3 9 Service Manual 7 Close the UPPER HOOD and verify that the reading does not change significantly 8 Open the HOOD and reattach the DENSITOMETER MODULE to the FRAME 4 SCREWS 9 Return the Repeat Count to 1 one 10 Close the Densitometer S elf Test screen Caution If the Densitometer Configuration Screen is active any time during calibration or normal printing Dpatch timeouts or calibration errors will occur resulting in calibrations and job reprints 3 6 Dynamic Range of the LASER Dynamic range of the LASER is automatically tested at power up and whenever a test calibration occurs Itis defined as the ratio
214. S Link software and maintain maximum throughput of the jobs to achieve printing of 1xx sheets per hour for 35 by 43 cm FILM Support requests from the LOCAL PANEL or SERVICE TOOL to generate test prints take the spooler off line and then on line do queue management retrieve jobs delete jobs reprint jobs and display status and error conditions Handle error reporting and job recovery and support N EVENT reporting to the SCU When the PACSLink receives images from an SCU it writes them into the image cache partition of the HARD DISK as Microsoft WINDOWS files PACSLink retains the job information and connections to the images but not the images themselves The available space in the image cache partition is monitored by PACSLink with reference to 2 configurable set points a high water mark and a low water mark If the cache is filled to the high water mark successfully delivered jobs images are deleted oldest first until either the low water mark is reached in disk space or there are no more delivered jobs images available to delete If sufficient disk space cannot be made available no jobs will be accepted from an SCU Images from the cache are rendered in memory SDRAM in global memory mapped files The process of rendering is controlled by the MIM Delivery Interface 6 3 3 1 MIM Delivery Interface The MIM Delivery Interface receives the print job Information Model then processes and renders the image data stored on t
215. Section 7 Troubleshooting 7 2 4 Testing the DENSITOMETER This is the same test as the test of the DENSITOMETER run automatically at power on The test ends with a Pass or Fail indication and displays diagnostic data 1 From the main menu of the SERVICE TOOL select Diagnostics gt MCS gt Densitometer 2 If you wish to display the results of the last DENSITOMETER click Current Diagnostic Data Densitometer Self Test Densitometer Microcontroller Diagnostic Select Run to initiate test and display test results Density Offset 4096 rPass Fail Count Repeat Count Density Reference 197663 Pas Current Diagnostic Data zi T _ s 2 Fa NEN Export Data z zi Pause Resume m Re 3 To run the DENSITOMETER test click Run The test sequence Turns off the Light Source LAMP then reads A D counts representing the Density Offset light value 8 times and calculates an average This value must be 4096 400 Turns on the Light Source LAMP then reads the A D counts for Density Reference 8 times and averages the values If the average A D count is not between 750 000 and 850 000 software attempts to adjust the count 4 To save the test results to a file on your LAPTOP COMPUTER click Export Data 2005 J uly 7F3318 7 9 Service Manual 7 2 5 Running the FRU Diagnostics These diagnostics test the 4 peripheral Micro Controllers on the MCS MicroComm Bus DENS
216. Subsystem Error 03 111 Rendering Error in Delivery Subsystem Error 03 381 through 03 912 Error Notification in Routing Delivery Subsystem Error 03 650 Delivery Error Notification in Routing Delivery Subsystem Error 04 004 through 04 215 Error Notification in DICOM Network Subsystem Error 04 201 Maximum Number of DICOM Associations has been Exceeded Error 04 205 Resource Limitation Error in Network Subsystem Error 05 000 Error in Storage Subsystem Error 05 039 Unable to Reach Low Watermark Error 05 044 Low Watermark Has Been Reached Error 10 001 Delivery Subsystem Internal Software Error Error 10 003 Image Datapath Error in Delivery Server Subsystem No Communication with the MCS 10 x x x Problem Error 12 001 Error 12 002 Error 12 003 Error 12 075 Error 13 001 Error 13 002 10 910 Error 13 003 SERVICE TOOL Script Error 20 137 20 202 20 208 20 550 20 912 20 913 Open DOOR Requested SERVICE OVERRIDE SWITCH Out DOOR Fail Software Error in LOCAL PANEL Database Error in LOCAL PANEL Internal Software Error in LOCAL PANEL Error in LOCAL PANEL Software Error SERVICE TOOL Software Database Error in SERVICE TOOL Software Preventive Maintenance is Recommended Image Data Transfer Parity Error Detected Data T
217. System Configuration 1 From the main menu of the SERVICE TOOL select Utilities gt Backup Restore System Backup and Restore Backup Restore r Backup Select the Backup button to archive the configuration data to the product Download a copy of the most recent backup data by selecting the Download Backup button The downlaaded file will be placed in the selected location on the Service PC Backup Download Backup cs ady Summary NENNT tatus 2 To store a backup of the configuration parameters on the DRE HARD DISK click the Backup button L gt Note When the backup is completed the Summary window will display results 3 To download the configuration backup to a FLOPPY DISKETTE a Inserta FLOPPY DISKETTE in your LAPTOP COMPUTER b Click Download Backup d When the Save Copy As screen appears select the A drive and enter a file name for the backup file Click Save 4 Store the FLOPPY DISKETTE in the IMAGER Note Do not leave the backup DISKETTE in the IMAGER FLOPPY DRIVE 7 3318 2005 J uly Rev B Section 2 Installation 2 9 Training Key Operators Prepare key operators to use the IMAGER as follows 1 Refer to the USER GUIDE for the Kodak DryView 8150 LASER IMAGER and train the operators in the basic machine functions 2 If you did not assign operator passcodes while configuring the LOCAL PANEL do so now See par
218. T 304 127 0 0 1 D Aekservice basemenu html 6 8 2004 14 51 46 GET 304 127 0 0 1 10 Aekservice intro html 6 8 2004 14 51 46 GET 304 127001 0 ekservice footer html 6 8 2004 14 51 46 GET 304 127 0 0 1 31 EkService styles 5 ervicePlatform css 5 8 2004 14 51 46 GET 304 127 0 0 1 D EkServicescripts saapScripts js 5 8 2004 14 51 46 GET 304 127 0 0 1 D EkService styles 5 ervicePlatform css 5 8 2004 14 51 46 GET 304 127 0 0 1 0 EkService styles menu css 5 8 2004 14 51 48 GET 304 127 0 0 1 D EkService styles 5 ervicePlatform css 6 8 2004 14 51 48 GET 304 127 0 0 1 D EkService styles 5 erviceFlatform css 6 8 2004 14 51 48 GET 304 127 0 0 1 0 EkService scripts banner js 6 6 2004 14 51 48 GET 304 127 0 0 1 10 EkSaervice images D evicel con oi 6 6 2004 14 51 49 GET 200 127 0 0 1 270 fekservice SOAPServer S OAPServices wsdl 6 8 2004 14 51 51 POST 200 127 0 0 1 882 EKSernvice S OAPS erver SOAPServices WSDL 6 8 2004 14 51 51 200 127 0 0 1 100 ekservice SOAPS erver S OAPServices wsdl 6 8 2004 14 51 52 GET 200 127 0 0 1 100 ekservice SOAPServer S OAP Services wsdl 5 8 2004 14 51 53 GET 200 127 0 0 1 30 Aekservice SOAPServer S OAP Services wedl 66 2004 14 51 54 GET 200 127 0 0 1 100 ekservice SOAPServer S OAP Services wsdl 5 8 2004 14 51 54 GET 200 127 0 0 1 90 fekservice SOAPServer S O4P Services wadl 5 8 2004 14 51 56 GET 200 127 0 0 1 90 fekservice SOAPServer S OAP Services wedl 5 8 2004 14 51 57 POST 200
219. TAGE SELECTION PLUGS You will install one of the PLUGS in the IMAGER POWER SUPPLY to adaptthe IMAGER to the AC source power atthis customer site 3POWER CORDS You will select the required CORD from the following A North American CORD SET with 3 prong PLUG AChinese CORD SET with PLUG A universal POWER CORD An appropriate PLUG must be connected on this CORD before it can be used e TwoRJ 45 INTERNET DROP CABLEs You will use one of these cables to connect the IMAGER to the DICOM network There is a long CABLE and and a short CABLE You can use either one Software and publication CDs including the user documentation CD the DRE software CD the Local Panel videos CD L gt Note You have already removed and used the Allen WRENCH supplied in the ACCESSORIES PACKAGE The USER DOCUMENTATION COMPACT DISK CD contains translated versions of the following manuals many languages SITE READINESS CHECKLIST USER GUIDE INSTALLATION GUIDE and SAFETY MANUAL o aa Important You should have read the SAFETY MANUAL by now If not please read it now 2005 July Rev B 7F3318 2 7 Service Manual 2 3 5 Moving the IMAGER to the Installation Site 1 Move the IMAGER and accessories to the installation area Im 39 in 2 Position the IMAGER temporarily so there is a space of a least 1 m 39 in in the front and at the back of the machine for removal of packing materials 738 2005 J uly Rev B 2
220. TER EXIT Area 5 PROCESSOR DRUM and SENSOR 59 DENSITOMETER 26 544 J Film jammed between Film skew faulty DENSITOMETER EXIT Area 5 DENSITOMETER and EXIT SENSOR 59 TRAY 7 50 7F 3318 2005 J uly Rev Section 7 Troubleshooting 7 5 2 Troubleshooting Sequence Ata service call involving film jam problems it is recommended that you perform the following trouble analysis procedures in order It is not necessary to perform every procedure on each service call Simply proceed until you find and correct the IMAGER problem 1 Question the operator about IMAGER problems See paragraph 7 5 3 2 Visually inspect the components of the FILM TRANSPORT See paragraph 7 5 4 3 Setthe IMAGER in transport cycle mode and observe the IMAGER for problems as film is transported through the system See paragraph 7 5 5 4 As indicated by the checks performed in 2 and 3 above remove suspect MODULES from the IMAGER and perform detailed checks and repair See paragraph 7 5 6 5 After correcting the problem set the IMAGER in transport cycle mode again and confirm transport operation See paragraph 7 5 7 7 5 3 Interviewing the Operator Question the operator if possible about 1 Frequency of particular error codes or jams 2 Any recent unusual sounds from MACHINE for example bangs etc that could indicate PICKUP MOTOR PINION damage 3 Did the operator have to frequently close or open the FILM CARTRIDGE manually v
221. TET SeCDSSCHDUODS sendu S ep 2 7 2 8 2 9 2 9 2 11 2 11 2 13 2 16 2 17 2 17 DAT 2 19 2 20 2 20 2 21 2 03 2 22 2 23 2 24 2 25 2 26 2 26 2 33 2 36 2 38 2 39 2 40 2 43 2 44 2 44 2 47 2 48 2 48 2 48 2 49 2 49 2 53 7 3318 2005 J Rev B Table of Contents Section 3 Adjustments iis bs isis hr XX ew EAE EROR 3 1 Setting Temperature of the PROCESSOR DRUM 3 2 Processor PE ee te hed soe Ed tS 3 3 Processor Film Diverter Assembly Stripper 3 4 Optics Translation Speed and SOP Delay 3 5 Reference Level DENSITOMETER 3 6 Dynamic Range of ne LASER Bt Optics Laser POWE Lo wee nes hop eerie Section 4 Disassembly Reassembly 4 1 FrontDoor and Rear Panel Assemblies 4 1 1 Front Door Fite bk os cu its been keels 4132 RearPanel nec nek 4 2 Film lt lt 55 4 2 1 Processor Interface 4 2 2 5 4 2 3 Processor Rollers and Related Parts 4 2 4 Processor Motor 0 ccc ec cect tee
222. Transport Sensor 5 8 failed to detect film leading edge Summary The film has jammed between the PLATEN and the PROCESSOR When film drives up through the vertical transport area VERTICAL TRANSPORT SENSOR S8 should detect the leading edge of the film and turn on 58 does not turn on as expected a jam has occurred in the VERTICAL TRANSPORT Result of Error The IMAGER is unable to print Otherwise it can operate as normal acquiring queueing prints completing processing etc New print jobs will not be initiated Films downstream from the VERTICAL TRANSPORT will be completed All other films will be reprinted Removing the jam clears the error when the FRONT DOOR is closed User Action 1 Open the FRONT DOOR 2 Remove jammed film 3 Close the FRONT DOOR FE Action Normally this message simply indicates that a jam has occurred and the error will be cleared when the user removes the jam and closes the FRONT DOOR However the error can also be caused by problems with either VERTICAL TRANSPORT SENSOR 58 or TRANSPORT ROLLER MOTOR Step6 Check the MCS Log for 26 166 and trace backwards from the error looking for VERTICAL TRANSPORT SENSOR S8 functionality 8 68 7F 3318 2005 J uly Rev B Section 8 QuickSheets 8 5 60 26 169 J am Unloading Exposure PLATEN LOCAL PANEL Message Log Message DICOM Message Film J am in Area 3 Platen Film J am Unloading P laten FILM JAM 1 Alert Alarm sounds Platen Film Sensor S6 faile
223. UATOR Open LOCAL PANEL Message Log Message DICOM Message Calibration Failed Optics Optics calibration failed Power ELEC DOWN 0 Fatal Alarm sounds Monitor value with Atten open outside valid range Summary Optics calibration and diagnostics detected that a POWER MONITOR reading with the ATTENUATOR wide open was outside the predefined valid range The measured laser power is either too high or too low Optics calibration and diagnostics are performed at power up and before every calibration print During this process the ATTENUATOR is calibrated and laser power is checked and calibrated At the beginning of the sequence the POWER MONITOR offset value is measured and then the range of the POWER MONITOR is checked with the ATTENUATOR wide open no attenuation POWER MONITOR offset is subtracted from this value If the range value is outside set limits error 27 602 is declared Result of Error The IMAGER is unable to print film It can accept and queue new jobs but it will not initiate new films Films downstream from the PLATEN will be completed All other films will be reprinted The error can be cleared by requesting another calibration or by restarting the IMAGER User Action 1 Restart the IMAGER 2 Ifthe error persists call Service FE Action This error can be the result of any of the following problems listed in most likely order of occurrence Open or failed interlock or SERVICE OVERRIDE SWITCH Set in Service p
224. VICE TOOL select Diagnostics gt Diag Summary to export the optics data to yourLAPTOP COMPUTER See paragraph 7 2 15 5 To test the Optics Motors select Test Optics Motors This test can also be run from the Mechanical Diagnostics screen in the SERVICE TOOL Adjust Laser Dynamic Range Zero 505 Level Micro Controller Diagnostic Display Optics Data Export Optics Data Test Optics Motors Test Optics Motors This test must be run with printer in Service Made Select Motor to test and press Run ta initiate test Assembly Name attenuator 2 Run Status Re ady Summary a Setthe SERVICE SWITCH in the Service position 7 3318 2005 J uly Rev B Section 7 Troubleshooting b Select the MOTOR you wish to test from the Assembly Name dropdown menu The selections include e Attenuator Motor Translation Motor Move Translation to Ship This operation moves the OPTICS MODULE into the shipping position c Click Run to test the selected motor d Check the Status and Summary boxes on the screen e After completing the test set the SERVICE SWITCH in the User position 7 2 8 Testing the SENSORS gt Note The system SENSORS can also be tested by means of LEDs and J UMPERS on the CIRCUIT BOARDS See paragraph 7 5 1 From the main menu of the SERVICE TOOL select Diagnostics MCS Sensor State to test the SENSORS in the IMAGER Sensor Diagnostics Graph Sensors Monitor Sensors
225. Y The storage area will remain enabled for 2 hours and will capture all images received into the DRE The raw image is the DICOM image received into the PACS Link from the network The rendered image is captured after rendering in the PACS Link Delivery Interface 2 To view the images in the Image Cache a On the main menu of the SERVICE TOOL select Monitoring gt lmage Viewer 2005 J uly Rev 7F3318 7 27 Service Manual 2 Image Yiewer Microsoft Internet Explorer provided by Eastman Kodak E 1 x 8150 Image Viewer Click to expand collapse Gi Tools Rendered Images b To view a raw image from the MODALITY select Input Images c Select click the desired image from the Input Images list d Select Tools from the menu and click Zoom Out until the image is reduced to the screen size DY 8150 Image Viewer Click to expand collapse Sl Tools Zoom In i Zoom Out Input Images 1 2 840 113564 3 815 1 2 840 113564 3 815 i 1 2 840 113564 3 815 MCSLog144545 tut MCSLog165207 tut Rendered Images 7 3318 2005 J uly Rev B Section 7 Troubleshooting e To view the rendered version of the same image select Rendered Images from the menu and repeat the procedures of steps c and d 8150 Image Viewer Click to expand collapse 8 Tools zoom In Zoom Out Input Images 1 2 840 113564 3 81
226. Y that will use this IMAGER must send an image to it 1 From the main menu of the SERVICE TOOL select Configuration gt DICOM SCP gt SCP Services 7F3318 2005 uly Rev B Section 2 Installation gt Note The SERVICE TOOL will display a screen of Image Optimization parameters with default parameter values selected from the Modality Preferences Database in the DRE SCU 127 0 0 1 Service Platform 3 ANY Service PAN TOL1 Remove Expor SCP Services Configuration Image Optimization Other Options Image Optimization Please specify the image optimization settings Negotiate Presentation LUT Negotiate Color Print NO E TFT Set Name V ir cll wk Always Apply TFT Set 2 Gontrast 2 ro m Always Apply Contrast Smoothing Type Always Apply Smoothing Type Image DMin Always Apply Image DMin Image Dax Always Apply Image DMax Image Polarity Always Apply Image Polarity Yu Modify Save Canc L gt Note 21 HO No Ej Reset The parameter default values on the screen apply to the MODALITY identified in the SCU window at the top of the screen 2005 J uly 7F3318 Service Manual The information in the S CU window includes in order IP Address and AE Title of the SCU sender and AE Title of the destination e You can open the SCU window to display a dropdown list of all SCUs conne
227. across the film at about 1 4 PLATEN ASSEMBLY is out of round inch intervals Broad light band across the film horizontal banding 7 2 Power line noise or electrical noise in the CONNECTOR or CABLE entering the SCANNER MODULE The RIBBON CABLE in the PLATEN is bad when flexed at some positions If kinked the CABLE will fail within 100 prints Use caution when handling the RIBBON CABLE The OPTICS MODULE hesitates during translation across the film because of interference caused by 1 OPTICS MODULE hits SENSOR WIRES on side of PLATEN 2 Flat RIBBON CABLE 3 Debris on TRANSLATION RAILS or FLYWHEEL The CAPSTAN ROLLER in the worn or has flattened after a period of non use This can occur if the SYSTEM is run with the LOCK SCREWS forthe SCANNER ASSEMBLY in place if the IMAGER was shipped without the CAPSTAN MOTOR being tied away from the FLYWHEEL or if the CAPSTAN is defective Do notreplace the SCANNER MODULE Instruct the user not to touch the IMAGER during a print cycle Do not replace the SCANNER MODULE Try the following in the order listed 1 Disconnect then reconnect flat RIBBON CABLE in PLATEN Connection must be tight 2 Disconnect then reconnect CABLE from MCS to PLATEN Connection must be tight 3 Replace flat RIBBON CABLE 4 Install a POWER LINE CONDITIONER Replace the RIBBON CABLE Remove sources of interference Clean RAILS and FLYWHEEL with ISOPROPYL ALCOHOL Check tha
228. agraph 2 6 8 There are 3 levels of operator access to the IMAGER see Table 2 3 Ordinary operators no passcode required e Key operators User ID 0 10 Passcode required assigned by FE or customer installer Customer Installer User ID 99 Passcode required changed at installation L gt Note If the customer has a Customer First technician this person is assigned a special passcode required for resetting the PM count Table 2 3 Levels of Customer Access to IMAGER Operators ID 0 10 Passcode ID 99 Passcode No Passcode p Mewpanteount p View current errors Change ofLOCAL PAWEL xX Kid Log off Delete queued print jobs pou Delete waiting for media print jobs Deeteunabeghs I E Adjust backightng ofLOCAL PAWEL X Wdwstauiiesam phone number i gt lt X X x gt gt gt gt lt gt lt gt x lt gt x lt x x gt x lt 2005 J uly 7F3318 2 45 Service Manual Date format Date Time format Time Network name IP Address Subnet mask Gateway Ping fomneworkseupscrwen _ peoo C Restore configuration gt Note e Kodak Level 4 FEs a
229. all SUCTION CUPS are spring loaded and slide back and forth freely in their slots 1 2 Check that the SUCTION CUPS are finger tight L 3 Check the HEEL PAD for adhesion to the HEEL 4 If your inspection reveals problems advance to paragraph 7 5 6 2 to remove and inspect the FILM PICKUP MODULE 7 5 5 Cycling Film and Observing the Film Transport Process 7 5 5 1 Preliminary Setup 1 Connect yourLAPTOP COMPUTER to the IMAGER see procedure 7 2 3 Set the SERVICE SWITCH in the Service position and power up the SYSTEM Use SecureLink to connect to the IMAGER Launch Service WebLink M C ee When instructed to in the following procedures start film cycling as follows a Select Diagnostics gt Test Prints MCS Transport MCS Transport MCS Transport sends film through film path without exp posing it Press Run to initiate the test Status window displays success or failure of the process Copies gt Stop Run Status Ready Click to show Result Data b Setthe Copies window at 5 c Click Run to cycle film 2005 J uly Rev 7F3318 Service Manual 7 5 5 2 Checking the ROLLBACK MODULE Start film cycling see paragraph 7 5 5 1 above L 1 Does the ROLLBACK open far enough to allow room for film pickup 2 Does the film slip off the SEPARATOR TABS at maximum bend position L gt Note Maximum bend is the CUP and film position during the 3 second pause Slippage from
230. ally this message simply indicates that a jam has occurred and the error will be cleared when the jam has been removed and the TOP HOOD closed However the error could be generated by a defective DENSITOMETER EXIT SENSOR S9 Other Possible Causes Of This Error Felt pad assembly requires adjustment 2005 J uly Rev 7F3318 8 71 Service Manual 8 5 63 26 544 Jam at DENSITOMETER LOCAL PANEL Message Log Message DICOM Message Film J am in Area 5 Film J am at Densitometer FILM JAM 1 Alert Alarm sounds Densitometer E xit Sensor S9 failed to detect film trailing edge Summary The film is jammed between the DENSITOMETER and the EXIT TRAY The developed film from the DRUM turns on PROCESSOR EXIT SENSOR S9 as it enters the DENSITOMETER If SENSOR S9 does not turn off within 5 seconds indicating that the film has passed through the SENSOR error 26 544 is declared This error signals that the film has jammed in the DENSITOMETER before reaching the EXIT TRAY The PROCESSOR stops rotating and turns off heat when the error occurs All films in the IMAGER are marked as bad and will have to be reprinted After the jammed film is removed and the TOP HOOD is closed the error is reset and the PROCESSOR is restarted The PROCESSOR may need to warm up before printing will continue Result of Error The IMAGER is unable to print It can still accept and queue new jobs But new print jobs will not be initiated Removing the jam clears th
231. aragraph 2 12 You may from the set of 15 will be used need to run contrast test prints at various settings to select the cor rect contrast value For Always Apply select NO S moothing Type A smoothing value 0 15 specifies a level of See paragraph 2 12 smoothness sharpness in transitions between For Always Apply select NO density levels on the image Image Dmin Minimum density of the image 0 0 For Always Apply select NO Image Dmax Maximum density of the image Cannot be higher See paragraph 2 12 than border density For Always Apply select NO Image Polarity The polarity of the printed image with respectto POSITIVE for most SCUs NEG the image from the SCU NORMAL default ATIVE for Nuclear Medicine specifies same polarity REVERSE the opposite For Always Apply select NO 4 To change a parameter value if necessary Click Modify Selectthe desired parameter from the dropdown menu for the parameter Click Save 238 aaa F3318 2005July Rev B Section 2 Installation L gt Note For some parameters you have the option to Always Apply If you select YES the parameter on the screen will override the parameter that the SCU sends If you select NO the SCU parameter will apply Normally you should allow the SCU to override 5 After checking and modifying if necessary the Image Optimization parameters select Other Options from the top of the screen 200
232. are designed to conform to the NEMA Grayscale Standard Display Function as applied to the case of transmissive film media under certain typical conditions For optimum conformity with the standard select the contrast value in this TFT SET based upon the Dmax value in the following table Dmax Optimum Contrast Value 1 IS eee BE Rv 2 M 3 4 y paani 5 Zub 6 P EET 7 exe 8 9 ZO 10 Zl reer dci 11 2 8 12 13 3 0 cess avait 14 15 4000 3500 Se 3000 4 2500 2000 1500 1000 Input 2005 July 7F3318 2 57 Service Manual HYB60516 A hybrid TFT SET that supports the diverse needs of several imaging MODALITIES that might be operating within a Lockheed formerly Loral network These MODALITIES include Fuji COMPUTED RADIOGRAPHY CR Digital Subtraction Angiography DSA or 051 C ARM applications CT MR Ultrasound and Nuclear Medicine The following table defines how these 15 individual TFTs can best be applied to the needs of various imaging MODALITIES supported by this TFT SET Imaging Suitable Preferred Suitable TFT Preferred TFT MODALITY Dmax Range Dmax Contrast Value Contrast Value Fuji CR 2 7 3 0 3 0 2 2 DSI DSA 3 0 3 0 4 7 4 C Arm 3 0 3 0 1 4 1 ET 3 0 3 0 2 7 2 MR 3 0 3 0 1 7 2 Ultrasound 2 5 2 5 3 5 7 11 15 9 Nuclear Medicine 2 3 2 3 12 4000 3500 3000 a ay a m 2500 E
233. are varying degrees of an S shape contribution which gives the strongest end points contrast or slope to Table 1 and the strongest mid tone contrast or slope to Table 15 3500 3000 2500 2000 Qipao 1500 1000 500 Input 7338 2005 July Rev Section 2 Installation VER713CO Nearly as popular as the VER693CO SET with a lower mid tone density than the VER693CO SET This SET is similar to the VER693CO0 TFT SET but with a slight increase in brightness i e the VER713CO TFT SET can be characterized as having slightly lower mid tone density than the VER693CO TFT SET All 15 of these tables have the same mid tone brightness which is brighter than the mid tone brightness of the VER693CO tables As with the VER693CO TFT SET there are varying degrees of an S shape contribution which gives the strongest end points contrast or slope to Table 1 and the strongest mid tone contrast or slope to Table 15 3500 3000 2500 2000 1500 1000 500 0 Eb DP ES 0 20 40 60 80 100 Input 55 VER723CO Designed to offer another choice of curves similar to the S shaped curves of VER713C0 but ata brightness higher than VER713CO which is brighter than VER703CO which is brighter than VER693CO This choice is necessary at certain customer sites e g at GE CT I sites where higher brightness is de
234. assembly Access Holes for SCREWDRIVER CENTERING MOTOR Figure 4 45 Replacing the FILM CENTERING ASSEMBLY and MOTOR 2005 J uly Rev B 7F3318 4 51 Service Manual 4 11 7 PLATEN ROLLER MOTOR Step 2 1 Remove the SUPPLY CARTRIDGE A Warning When the POWER CORD is plugged in hazardous voltages are present in some areas of the IMAGER These voltages can cause severe injury or death De energize the IMAGER and disconnect the POWER CORD Remove the IMAGING MODULE from the IMAGER 4 11 1 Disconnect the MOTOR ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR from its slot in the CHASSIS Remove the 3 SCREWS attaching the MOTOR Remove the BELT Remove the MOTOR 2s ONT dm eds xP9 A WA 8100 104C Figure 4 46 Removing the PLATEN ROLLER MOTOR 4 52 7F 3318 2005 J uly Rev Section 4 Disassembly Reassembl 4 11 8 PLATEN NIP ROLLER BELT 1 Remove the SUPPLY CARTRIDGE A Warning When the POWER CORD is plugged in hazardous voltages are present in some areas of the IMAGER These voltages can cause severe injury or death De energize the IMAGER and disconnect the POWER CORD Remove the IMAGING MODULE from the IMAGER 4 11 1 Loosen the 3 ATTACHING SCREWS for the PLATEN ROLLER MOTOR Remove the BELT Or eke 8100 110C Figure 4 47 Removing the PLATEN NIP ROLLER BELT 2005 July Rev 7F3318 4 53 Service Manual 4 11 9 PLATEN NIP and DRIVE ROL
235. assembly of the 3 DRIVES slightly back from the front of the COMPUTER and carefully lift to remove the assembly with CABLES still attached to the CD ROM DRIVE and FLOPPY DRIVE 5 Disconnectthe SIGNAL CABLE from the CD ROM DRIVE 6 Remove 2 SCREWS fastening the CD ROM DRIVE to the BRACKET 7 Slide the CD ROM DRIVE outof the BRACKET 8 Check thatthe J UMPER on the new CD ROM DRIVE is setatthe MASTER position gt Note Fold CABLES neatly under the DRIVES during reassembly 9 Install the new DRIVE in reverse order of the disassembly procedure 4 14 2 Removing the FLOPPY DRIVE 1 Repeat steps 1 through 5 of Removing the CD ROM DRIVE Disconnect the POWER CABLE and SIGNAL CABLE from the FLOPPY DRIVE 2 3 Remove 2 SCREWS fastening the FLOPPY DRIVE to the BRACKET 4 Slide the FLOPPY DRIVE outof the BRACKET L gt Note Fold CABLES neatly under the DRIVES during reassembly 2005 July Rev 7F3318 4 73 Service Manual 5 Install a new DRIVE in reverse order of the disassembly procedure 4 14 3 Removing the PCIO BOARD Ethemet BOARD or LOCAL PANEL TRANSMITTER BOARD 1 Remove the SUPPLY CARTRIDGE A Warning When the POWER CORD is plugged in hazardous voltages are present in some areas of the IMAGER These voltages can cause severe injury or death 2 De energize the IMAGER and disconnect the POWER CORD 3 Remove the DRE COMPUTER from the IMAGER and remove the COVER of the COMPUTER see procedure 4 14 To
236. ated by dividing machine weight by machine floor foot print 450 Ib 4 5 sq ft 1 9 Environmental Effects Heat Dissipation 3000 BTU Hr average Acoustical Noise Less than 55 dB A at 1 meter less than 70 dB momentarily Less than 80 dB A at 1 meter for non repetitive tasks such as door open close 1 10 Film Size The Kodak DryView 8150 LASER IMAGER will process Kodak DryView LASER IMAGING FILM in the following sizes e 35x43 cm e 35x35cm 11x14 in 1 11 Film Throughput Up to 70 films per hour 1 12 Image Input Options DICOM Network Interface 12 318 2005 J uly REV Section 1 Specifications 1 13 Glossary Following are definitions of abbreviations and technical terms used in this manual ACK Acknowledge A hardware signal response that indicates reception of a signal A D Analog to Digital The conversion of an analog signal to digital format ADC Analog to Digital Converter The hardware circuit that converts analog to digital format AIQC Automatic Image Quality Control The subsystem in the laser imager consisting of hardware and software that ensures consistent image quality API Application P rogramming Interface The Library and Tools software that handles video parameters and mediates differences between CHP file parameters and MIB video variables BOM Beginning of Message Browser A computer program that accesses and displays information from the web It contains multiple application programs a
237. ault values set by the Modality Preferences Database F3318 2005 July Rev B Section 2 Installation 2 11 3 Selecting Parameters for MODALITIES that are not DICOM GSDF Compliant 1 2 Refer to Table 2 4 and find the type of MODALITY for which the IMAGER is being configured Select the TFT Set recommended in Table 2 4 for this type of MODALITY If more than one set is listed read the notes in the table for guidance in selecting the appropriate set Select the Table No contrast setting recommended for the chosen TFT Set If a number is in bold select this number first You may have to try more than one Table No during the configuration process Select the Image Density associated with the Table No you chose If there is a range of densities Select the density value indicated in bold if there is one If there is no bold value select the middle value For example if the range is 2 7 to 3 1 select 2 9 fthere are only 2 density values select either one S elect the Smoothing Type recommended in Table 2 4 Enter the selected parameter values on the Image Optimization screen in the SERVICE TOOL 2 11 4 Selecting Parameters for DICOM GSDF Compliant MODALITIES L gt Note This procedure does not apply to GSDF Compliant MODALITIES that use PLUTs for all images Use TFT Set GSDF0 87 Refer to Table 2 4 and find the type of MODALITY for which the IMAGER is being configured S elect the Density
238. ble Causes p82 added step 3 p87 revised procedure p88 re vised procedure p90 deleted Note p92 deleted Note p94 revised step 1 7 p3 revised part number 16 p8 added callout 20 p9 added item 20 p10 p18 revised part number 6 p20 revised part number 13 WIL ONE OE ee eee New and revised text is marked by a change bar in the page margin Service Manual Safety Regulatory EMC and CE Marking Compliance All Installation and User related safety information Warnings and Cautions regulatory EMC and CE marking information may be found in the Safety Manual for this device Specific service related warnings and cautions are included in this manual This device contains a 50 milliwatt LASER The following label visible when the REAR PANEL is removed warns of danger if the LASER is energized when the rear panel is removed DANGER ER A iw Bee EARE Bypassing tenues other the ice int ill allow ASE IAT system to run wit cHSELEY L 3X 3EBI BERET At TRS AME RESETS ARETE A Exposure to laser light may result L A BRS in permanent eye and skin damage Service Interlock A E Mi al O
239. by only by restarting the IMAGER User Action 1 Restart the IMAGER 2 Ifthe error persists call Service FE Action 1 Check the MCS Log to try to determine the point at which the error occurred This may help isolate the problem 2 Use the SERVICE TOOL paragraph 7 2 8 or LED2 on the MCS BOARD paragraph 7 4 1 3 to check the OPTICS HOME SENSOR 57 3 Use SERVICE TOOL paragraph 7 2 6 to check operation of the OPTICS TRANSLATION MOTOR 4 Check the PLATEN ASSEMBLY for possible obstructions to optics translation motion Other Possible Causes Of This Error Optics translation home sensor actuator bent 2005 J uly Rev 7F3318 8 83 Service Manual 8 5 72 27 641 Optics NVRAM Failure LOCAL PANEL Message Log Message DICOM Message Severity Optics NVRAM Fail Optics NVRAM ELEC DOWN 0 Fatal Alarm sounds Summary The OPTICS MODULE setup parameters cannot be read from NVRAM At power on the SYSTEM attempts to read the OPTICS MODULE setup parameters from the NVRAM eePROM on the OPTICS MODULE CONTROL BOARD If it fails after 5 tries 27 641 is declared and the system stops Result of Error The IMAGER will not operate User Action 1 Restart the IMAGER 2 Ifthe error persists call Service FE Action 1 Check the MCS Log to try to determine the point at which the error occurred 2 Check that the MicroComm CABLE to the OPTICS MODULE is securely connected 3 Reload parameters using local scripts see the pr
240. c brushless motor Spinner Motor DCM3 The two sided mirror is mounted so precisely on the adapter and motor shaft that the discrepancy in the pointing angle between the two mirrors is insignificantly small As the motor rotates the laser beam is reflected downward radially in an approximately conical shape Flexible lens L3 is placed at half distance between the scanner mirror and the film platen surface In the DryView 8150 IMAGER application an image line is scanned twice with the same data once by each of the two sides of the mirror during a single rotation of the motor shaft Double scanning improves image sharpness and makes scanning lines invisible under normal viewing conditions Pixel Stretch Despite precise mounting of the two sided mirror some radial centering offset of the mirror can occur This results in a slight difference of velocity between the two mirrors If a constant pixel clock is used for placing pixels on the film the scan line length will vary for the two mirrors To avoid this problem a variable pixel clock is implemented For the mirror side that has a lower scanning speed an extra clock is inserted periodically to lengthen pixel exposure time This process is called pixel stretching Scanner Speed Sensing and Control The Shaft Index optical sensor triggered by a shiny area on the adapter that secures the two sided mirror to the Spinner Motor shaft provides a shaft speed indication to the MCS At same time
241. ccur if an SCU tries to connect when the IMAGER is shutting down Result of Error The DRE is functional but DICOM clients are not able to connect User Action None FE Action None 8 10 7F 3318 2005 J uly Rev B Section 8 QuickSheets 8 5 8 Error 04 205 Resource Limitation Error in Network Subsystem LOCAL PANEL Message Log Message DICOM Message None No alarm Resource Limitation Error in DICOM NORMAL 3 Notify Summary The internal software of the Network Subsystem has a problem The error can be caused by a number of problems such as an object creation failure or a system call failure Result of Error The DRE is functional but DICOM clients may not be able to connect User Action None FE Action 2005 J uly Rev B 7F3318 8 11 Service Manual 8 5 9 Error 05 000 Error Storage Subsystem LOCAL PANEL Message Log Message DICOM Message None No alarm Storage Subsystem Error NORMAL 3 Notify Summary The internal software of the Storage Subsystem has a problem but the IMAGER should be able to function normally Result of Error None The system will function normally User Action None FE Action None 8 12 7F 3318 2005 J uly Rev B Section 8 QuickSheets 8 5 10 Error 05 039 Unable to Reach Low Watermark LOCAL PANEL Message Log Message DICOM Message None No alarm Low Watermark Not Reached NORMAL 3 Notify Summary The Storage Subsystem recovery software is not able to reclai
242. ce Manual 7 2 1 Setting Active Controls Before you use the Service Tool you must make the following configuration settings in Internet E xplorer on yourLAPTOP COMPUTER 1 2 3 4 5 7 6 On your COMPUTER open Intenet Explorer S elect Tools Internet O ptions from the Main Menu bar Select the Security tab Select the Local Internet icon and then press the Custom Level button Under Active X Controls and Plug Ins a Set Download signed Active X controls to Enable b Set Download unsigned Active X controls to P rompt Set Initialize and script Active X controls not marked as safe to Prompt d Set Run Active X controls and plug ins to Enable e Set Script Active X controls marked safe for scripting to Enable Under Cookies Note On Internet E xplorer 6 select the Privacy tab there is no Cookies section a Set Allow cookies that are stored on your computer to Enable b Set Allow per session cookies not stored to Enable Under Miscellaneous set User data persistence to Enable 7F3318 2005 J uly Rev B Section 7 Troubleshooting 7 2 2 Network Settings for Service WebLink If your computer is unable to connect to the IMAGER try the following net work settings 1 From your Desktop right click on Network Neighborhood and select Properties 2 From the Adapters tab select your NETWORK ADAPTER 3 With the NETWORK ADAPTER Selected click Properties and select the Advanced tab a In the Prop
243. ch laser attenuation is required to achieve the desired exposure intensity The data used is a DLogE curve generated by the density values measured over the 19 steps of the gray scale step wedge A sample DLogE curve is shown in Figure 6 15 D LogE Curve from Calibration 4 00 3 50 3 00 2 50 2 00 Density 1 50 1 00 Film Speed ae Spec Width 0 00 0 00 0 50 1 00 1 50 2 00 2 50 3 00 3 50 Exposure LogE Speed Point 8100 150A Figure 6 15 Sample Calibration DLogE Curve 2005 J uly 7F3318 6 25 Service Manual 6 4 4 4 Densitometer Control Functions The MCS software that controls densitometer functions implements the following commands Reset Densitometer Module This command reinitializes the A D converter and resets its counters and flags Arm for Dpatch This command Monitors the Exit Sensor to detect the leading and trailing edges of the film e Calculates the average density from the raw readings and reports the results to MPC and Gray Scale Manager GSM logs Report Dpatch Value This command reports the calculated average density value Arm for Step Wedge This command Monitors the Exit Sensor to detect the leading and trailing edges of the film e Calculates the average density from the raw readings Report Step Wedge Value This command reports the calculated average density of the step Execute Diagnostics This command
244. cles E very 20 000 cycles the LOCAL PANEL displays a message prompting the user to schedule preventive maintenance The procedures listed in the 20 000 cycle checklist should be performed as soon as possible after the 20 000 cycle PM prompt To remove the message prompting the user to schedule preventive maintenance and reset the cycle count to 20 000 1 Select Prints to PM on the LOCAL PANEL 2 Press Test Print Enter 5 4 2 Supplies Required for PM The expendable CLEANING SUPPLIES and replacement parts required for a single 20 000 cycle PM are listed below 20 000 Cycle PM Supplies 1 3M Auto Pak TACK CLOTH 1 BAG 96 0000 0118 8 2 BAG with TIE WRAP 1 78 9998 2868 0 3 DEVELOPER DRUM STAND 34 7041 8939 7 4 CHARCOAL FILTER KIT 74 0401 8966 9 5 INSULATED RUBBER GLOVES 77 8007 2908 7 Wear these GLOVES during procedures that require handling chemicals 6 FRONT DOOR AIR FILTER 96 0000 2755 5 7 ISOPROPYL ALCOHOL 8 LINT FREE CLOTHS TEXWIPES 78 8005 3779 3 9 SAFETY GLASSES with SIDE SHIELDS 787 ANSI approved 10 LOW LINT ALCOHOL SATURATED WIPES TEXWIPES 1065 1 8287 11 PROCESSOR GASKET 96 0000 5351 0 2005 July Rev B 7F3318 5 3 Service Manual 5 4 3 EM Call Checklist If the number of MACHINE cycles since the last PM is more than 17 500 use the 20 000 Cycle PM Checklist instead of the EM Call Checklist L 1 Repair MACHINE problem that caused the EM call L 2 Open the UPPER HOOD open the
245. code e Enter the combination of words and numbers you want to locate the Find what window Click Find to search the log 5 Save Click Save to save a log to a folder on your LAPTOP Saveas 21 xl Save in amp LOCALDISK C e amp rt graphics SourceSafe DATA kP Cl SourceSafe Old History Demo4_1_04 5 svcPlat_vi_0_b6 Demo4 7 04 C3 Log Files Ga Temp desktop ileaf J 1500 WINNT Desktop Documents and Settings Newer 150Demo 22 Documentum Program Files ej xxx xml Eklog Programs My Documents MEE 1 5 5 My Computer File name m Save Save as type XML Files xml Cancel PA My Network e Use the cursor to select the area of the log you wish to save Select the folder on the LAPTOP for example Log Files Entera File name and click Save gt Note Your LAPTOP must have Local Log Viewer software to view the logs 6 Display Filter Click Display Filter to display a screen that will allow you to filter the log to decrease the quantity of log data for analysis The next paragraph describes how to use this feature 2005 July Rev B 7 3318 7 75 Service Manual 7 10 2 3 Using filtering This paragraph explains how to use the filtering function to simplify searches in the Application Log Assume the following IMAGER problem Modalities are not able to target the IMAGER because the cur
246. con is printed on the film See Figure 2 2 For Always Apply select NO To scale is to de magnify or scale Some SCUs have the ability to in down the image if the requested image dicate type of resizing and should size is too large for the film When this be allowed to override the default occurs the scale icon is printed on the value set the IMAGER film See Figure 2 2 To crop is to remove the edges of the image so it fits on the film The uncropped part of the image will remain true size When this occurs the crop icon is printed on the film See Figure 2 2 Text Box Location This parameter applies only to 1 up images Check with user for desired loca on 14 x 17 in film when crop has been se tion Select NONE if cropping is lected for image resizing Text Box Location notused indicates the location on the page for the an notation box The box can be cut and pasted on the cropped image atthe TOP or BOT TOM ofthe film Source ID This is the source name used for logging DI Selecta short name for the SCU COM communications from this SCU It also identifies the SCU in the SERVICE TOOL print statistics Minify Icon Scale Icon Crop Icon Figure 2 2 Cropping Icons 2320 7338 2005July Rev B Section 2 Installation 2 6 7 Configuring the IMAGER to be a Destination 1 From main menu of the SERVICE TOOL select Configuration gt Destination Printer Configuration
247. cs Film Pickup Assembly Figure 9 6 Rollback i i Assembly Poue p e Transport Assembly Figure 9 9 Feed Roller Assembly Figure 9 7 Elevator Assembly Figure 9 10 Imaging Exposure Assembly Figure 9 13 DICOM Raster Engine DRE Figure 9 11 Power Assembly 2005 J uly Rev B 7F3318 9 1 Service Manual Figure 9 1 CABINETRY WITH LOCAL PANEL N Ms i v ho N AS Lm 7F3318 2005 J uly Rev B Section 9 Illustrated Parts Breakdown Figure 9 1 CABINETRY WITH LOCAL PANEL 2005 J uly 7F3318 Item No Part Number Description Qty Tile NotAvailable HOOD ASSEMBLY Includes items 2 3 1 2 SP7F1046 LOCAL PANEL ASSEMBLY 1 NotAvailable HINGE gta bet At gain 1 aA tice ses NotAvailable PLATEN ACCESS DOOR ASSEMBLY 1 SP96 0000 2906 4 LATCH AND SOLENOID ASSEMBLY 1 5 7 1015 FRONT DOOR ASSEMBLY Includes items 7 though 9 1 uocis SP96 0000 2755 5 FILTER DOOF ied dev ER MP ERN ub 1 B pr vus NotAvailable
248. ct the surface of the DRUM Do not touch the silicone surface 7 Grasp the PULLEY on one end of the DRUM Then grasp the END CAP on the other end and remove the DRUM Caution To avoid damage do not lay the DRUM on its silicone surface Clamp Drum 7 Stand 8100 1844 Figure 5 8 Removing the PROCESSOR DRUM 8 Place the DRUM ona DRUM STAND 9 Examine the surface of the DRUM for damage in the FILM path area Look for cuts and gouges gt Note If the DRUM is damaged replace the DRUM 5 12 7F3318 2005 J uly Rev B Section 5 Tools Preventive Maintenance Cleaning 5 4 9 Cleaning the DRUM HEAT SHIELD and PROCESSOR ROLLERS Supplies Required LOW LINT ALCOHOL SATURATED WIPES LINT FREE CLOTHS ISOPROPYL ALCOHOL DRUM STAND INSULATED RUBBER GLOVES SAFETY GLASSES with SIDE SHIELDS Caution e Read the MSDS statements for all cleaning products before doing this procedure Wear appropriate personal protective equipment protective GLOVES and SAFETY GLASSES with SIDE SHIELDS to avoid contact of cleaning agents and or FAZ with the skin and eyes ISOPROPYL ALCOHOL is highly flammable Follow the manufacturer s instructions for safe use and handling e Check that there are no ignition sources within at least 3 5 feet of the DRUM This includes but is not limited to cigarettes SWITCHES ELECTRICAL OUTLETS LIG
249. cted to the IMAGER You must do Image Optimization and Other Options for each SCU in the dropdown list 2 Check each default parameter on the Image Optimization screen 3 Do the following to determine whether a change to a default parameter is necessary a Check the DICOM log for details relating to the print job sent down from the MODALITY The parameter values on the Image Optimization screen should match any values sent from the MODALITY b See Table 2 1 for descriptions of the parameters and recommended settings c Refer to paragraph 2 12 at the end of this section for recommended settings by type of MODALITY for the following parameters TFT Set Name Contrast Smoothing Type and Image Dmax d Check the quality of printed images sent from the MODALITY Table 2 1 Selecting the Image Optimization Parameters Recommended Setting Negotiate Pre Some SCUs can apply standard PLUT parame YES forthose SCUs with PLUT sentation PLUT ters that provide improved tone scaling of imag capability es The SCP must agree to negotiate this P LUT Negotiate Color Determines if the SCP will negotiate the Color Print Print Service if requested by the SCU of a particular set of 15 TFT curves Each See paragraph 2 12 curve in the set is identified by a corresponding For Always Apply select NO user selectable contrast number 1 15 Contrast The number selected determines which table See p
250. cure the PLATEN SUPPORT ASSEMBLY to the VIBRATION MOUNTS with the 8 HEX NUTS Reattach the GROUND STRAP 4 56 7F 3318 2005 J uly Rev B Section 4 Disassembly Reassembl Isolator Bracket 2 Note Ground strap not shown Vibration Mount 4 each side Platen Support Assembly 2 each side 8 4 each side Figure 4 49 Replacing the VIBRATION MOUNTS 2005 July Rev 7F3318 Service Manual 4 11 11 OPTICS MODULE Preliminary 1 Remove the SUPPLY CARTRIDGE A Warning Dangerous Voltage 2 De energize the LASER IMAGER and unplug the POWER CORD 3 Remove the IMAGING ASSEMBLY See procedure 4 11 1 Disassembly FLAT LATCH 3 SCREWS E E A PLATE io 48 OPT CS 2 ADJ USTMENT SCREW MODULE SCREWS 1 Place a sheet of film on the bottom of the IMAGING ASSEMBLY 2 Disconnect e FLAT CABLE from OPTICS MODULE LATCH 3 Hold the OPTICS MODULE with 1 hand and remove 2ADJUSTMENT SCREWS SCREW gt Note Ifa WASHER is used with 1 of the SCREWS note the position for installation 4 Lower OPTICS MODULE to the bottom of the IMAGING ASSEMBLY 4 58 7F3318 2005 J uly Rev B Section 4 Disassembly Reassembl 5 Remove e 3SCREWS PLATE FLAT 2screws CABLE 1 T PLATE 2 SCREWS 2 BLOCKS TRANSLATION ASSEMBLY FLYWHEEL END CABLE SENSOR
251. d elsewhere in the IMAGER For example film skew that originates in the FILM PICKUP MODULE orthe FEED ROLLER MODULE can result in a jam in the PLATEN MODULE the VERTICAL TRANSPORT or even the FILM PROCESSOR Thus when you are analyzing a film transport problem do not immediately assume that the ASSEMBLY where the jam occurred is the cause of the jam Table 7 4 Film Feed Errors Error Generated By MACHINE MACHINE Problem 21 116 Pickup Mechanical or SENSOR failure in ee FILM PICKUP MODULE or Failure Area 1 FILM PICKUP or ROLLBACK ROLLBACK MODULE MODULE 21 119 Feed Err Film did not reach FILM PLATEN Defective FILM PICKUP MODULE FEED Area 2 SENSOR S6 ROLLER MODULE or SENSOR S6 26 164 J am Film jammed at entrance to Film skew PLATEN DRIVE ROLLER Area 3 PLATEN BEARING BLOCKS not installed correctly PLATEN FILM CENTERING PIN out of position faulty SENSOR S6 26 165 J Film jammed between PLATEN Film skew faulty SENSOR S6 or VERTICAL Area 3 and PROCESSOR in TRANSPORT SENSOR S8 VERTICAL TRANSPORT 26 169 J Film jammed exiting PLATEN Film skew faulty SENSOR 56 Area 3 21 176 Crtg Open IMAGER could not open Defective ROLLBACK MODULE Err CARTRIDGE 21 177 Crtg Close 1 could not close Defective ROLLBACK MODULE Err CARTRIDGE 26 542 Jam Film jammed on PROCESSOR Film skew or faulty VERTICAL TRANSPORT Area 4 DRUM SENSOR S8 26 543 Film jammed between Film skew faulty DENSITOME
252. d Dmin 3 The laser beam reflects off mirror Facet 1 and onto the film surface 4 The laser beam if allowed reflects off the other end of the mirror scattering light Laser Dead Time Laser dead time is the period when the laser is turned off to avoid the scattering of light off the mirror ends described in the preceding paragraph phases 2 and 4 The laser is turned back on before the next polygon facet causes the laser beam to cross the SOS detector on the Optics Module Control Board The length of the dead time is controlled by the Pixel Clock Generator FPGA on the MCS Board The LASER OFF line from the Pixel Clock Generator turns off the drive circuit from the DAC to the laser for a period determined by a CPU controlled register in the Pixel Clock Generator Pixel Stretch Correction The two sided mirror rotates on a motor shaft If the motor shaft is precisely the same distance from both mirror surfaces the linear velocity of beams deflected from each mirror will be identical Since itis impossible to achieve identical distances for the two mirror facets the laser beams will move at slightly different velocities and unless corrected the scan lines from one facet will be longer or shorter than those from the other The solution to this problem is to stretch one of the lines to make it longer The line is stretched by occasionally stretching a pixel so that the resulting line is equal in length to the line from the other facet This stretch
253. d Initial Setup Opening the Shipping Crate Completing the Uncrating 2 3 1 2 3 2 2 3 3 ablOTL o rese put Gr boe po D Uode Removing the LASER IMAGER from the PALLET 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 3 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 3 2 5 Service Manual 2 4 2 5 2 6 2 7 2 8 2 9 2 10 2 11 2 3 4 Checking the Accessory Materials 2 3 5 Moving the IMAGER to the Installation Site 2 3 6 Checking Site Readiness 2 3 7 Required Configuration Information Hostetter Bae uti 2 4 1 Removing the Packing Materials from the Back of the IMAGER 2 4 2 Removing the Packing Materials from the Front of the IMAGER 2 4 3 Installing the CHARCOAL FILTER 2 4 4 Checking that Unpacking is Complete Connecting to Electrical Power and the Network 2 5 1 Electrical Power Setup 2 5 2 Connecting to External AC Power 2 5 3 Connecting the IMAGER to the 2 5 4 Securing the IMAGER in its Operating Position 2 5 5 Applying Power Configuring the IMAGER 2 6 1 Setting
254. d be notified of e 3 Notify An event has occurred but the system has automatically recovered 2005 J uly Rev B 7 3318 8 3 Service Manual 8 5 Error Code QuickSheets 8 5 1 Error 00 099 through 00 530 Error Notification in General PACS Subsystem LOCAL PANEL Message Log Message DICOM Message None No alarm General Subsystem Error NORMAL 3 Notify Summary All of these error codes indicate a software error in the General Subsystem The cause of the error can be such things as object creation failure a system call failure or an incorrect license key Reeult of Error None The system will function normally User Action None F E Action None 8 4 7F 3318 2005 J uly Rev B Section 8 QuickSheets 8 5 2 Error 01 001 through 01 910 Error Notification in Service Subsystem LOCAL PANEL Message Log Message DICOM Message None No alarm Service Subsystem Error NORMAL 3 Notify Summary All of these error codes indicate a software error in the Service Subsystem The cause of the error can be such things as object creation failure a system call failure a logging error a socket creation failure a bind failure an invalid parameter or inability to find a restore file Result of Error None The system will function normally User Action None FE Action None 2005 J uly 7F3318 8 5 Service Manual 8 5 3 Error 03 111 Rendering Error in Delivery Subsystem LOCAL PANEL Message Log Message DICOM Me
255. d to detect film leading edge Summary Film has jammed exiting the exposure PLATEN area As the PLATEN ROLLERS drive film out of the PLATEN after exposure the film enters PLATEN SENSOR S6 and the SENSOR turns on indicating to the SYSTEM software that the film is moving out of the PLATEN If SENSOR S6 does not turn on within 2 seconds after the beginning of film drive this jam error is declared Result of Error The IMAGER is unable to print Otherwise it can operate as normal acquiring queueing prints completing processing etc New print jobs will not be initiated Films downstream from the PLATEN will be completed All other films will be reprinted Removing the jam clears the error when the FRONT DOOR is closed User Action 1 Open the FRONT DOOR 2 Remove jammed film 3 Close the FRONT DOOR FE Action Normally this message simply indicates that a jam has occurred and the error will be cleared when the user removes the jam and closes the FRONT DOOR However the error can also be caused by problems with PLATEN ROLLER MOTOR Step2 or PLATEN FILM SENSOR S6 Check the MCS Log for 26 169 and check PLATEN FILM SENSOR S6 Make sure that the SWITCH turns ON and OFF 2005 J uly Rev 7F3318 8 69 Service Manual 8 5 61 26 542 Jam at PROCESSOR LOCAL PANEL Message Log Message DICOM Message Film J am in Area 4 Film J am in Processor Vertical FILM JAM 1 Alert Processor Alarm sounds Transport Sensor S8 failed to
256. d tone contrast or slope but have a wide variety of brightnesses with contrast value 1 the darkest image and contrast value 15 the brightest 4000 3500 3000 2500 2000 1500 1000 500 60 Input SFH301A4 Composed of 15 non S curves designed specifically for the Siemens Fluorospot H SYSTEM The plots on the chart below indicate a shape that is approximately linear in brightness with the different minimum t values corresponding to the different selectable Dmax values 4000 Excz xcd 3500 EE 3000 2500 2000 1500 1000 500 Input 55 2005 July 7 3318 2 61 Service Manual SIECT87 A SET in which all 15 curves are very close to a single Siemens defined curve for CT The following plots of this TFT SET indicate a shape which is close to a linear in brightness shape and is similar to the slightly S shaped middle TFTs of the VER693CO0 TFT SET But unlike the VER693CO SET this TFT SET is not designed to provide a significant range of variability to the user but rather a small range of variability to allow a single predefined table to be matched as closely as possible 4000 a SD 3500 4 3000 2500 SS acp pu 2000 1000 500 Input SIECT87B A slight modification to the SIECT87 TFT SET designed to match as closely as possible the Siemens requirements for CT 4000 3500 3000 2500 2000 1500
257. de Customize Links Free HotMail Internet Start Microsoft ProductNews Find West Stop Options Load Save Eind Bl as text contains assoc El Displayed 1688 of 4276 records Subsystem DIAG 71 7 2003 16 20 05 408 scp 80 destination ae title ps12 MIM Network DIAG 7 7 2003 16 20 05 408 scp 0 destination name ps12 MIM Network DIAG 7 7 2003 16 20 05 408 scp 0 the default printer is 8900 MIM Network DIAG 7 7 2003 16 20 05 418 scp assoc 0 no perfect name match for ps1 2 MIM Network DIAG 7 7 2003 16 20 05 418 scp assocH printer name match for ae psi 2 MIM Network DIAG 7 7 2003 16 20 05 418 scp assoc 0 no printer name match for ps12 MIM Network DIAG 7 7 2003 16 20 05 418 scp assacH r using the default printer for destination ps1 2 MIM Network DIAG 7 7 2003 16 20 05 426 scp assacH r the printer being used for this session is 8300 MIM Network DIAG 7 7 2003 16 20 05 426 scp assocHO the destination ae being used for connectdb is MIM Network DIAG 7 2 2003 16 20 05 738 cp assocHO get sourceid from connectiondb MIM Network DIAG 7 2 2003 16 20 05 738 scp assocHO set new sourceid to diN00 MIM Network DIAG 7 2 2003 16 20 05 778 assocHO scu modallty ae title leonardo MIM Network DIAG 7 7 2003 16 20 05 778 scp assoacHO scu host ip address 152 3 48 205 MIM Network DIAG 7 7 2003 16 20 05 88 scp assocHO scu implement version name siemens leovb2Da MIM
258. dissipative work surface GROUND CORD 2 sizes of WRIST BANDS and an ALLIGATOR CLIP 10 CHEMICAL CLEANING KIT SP7F 6028 2005 July Rev B 7F3318 5 1 Service Manual 5 2 TEMPERATURE METER and PROBE Calibration The TEMPERATURE METER and bar type PROBE must be calibrated together as a pair at least once a year Send the METER PROBE and calibration form to National Calibration and Testing 6960 Madison Avenue West Minneapolis MN 55427 The calibration process takes about one week 5 3 Serial Number Location The LABEL with the serial number is located on the PROCESSOR FRAME inside the upper HOOD of the LASER IMAGER Use this serial number to report all service activity Instruct customers to provide the model and serial number when requesting service Kodak m WE mover 8150 427 MFG DATE isnuary 2008 HAS SIN 5001 E 8 VOLTS 10071207230 a TES PIN 7r1000 AMPS 1210 7 25949 carn 6551261 J ME FREQ achester New York 14859 Made in Crna Le RR HO MT EHS 08 asus comes Qu Dus CE us 4 SAGs AMAR TF3116A Figure 5 1 Location of LABEL for Serial Number 5 2 7F3318 2005 J uly Rev B Section 5 Tools Preventive Maintenance Cleaning 5 4 Preventive Maintenance 5 4 1 PM Intervals To consistently produce high quality images the IMAGER must receive periodic routine maintenance Perform PM procedures Every EM call e Every 20 000 MACHINE cy
259. dynamic range beam power Is ratio within set limits 27 604 Read optics parameter values from NOVRAM on OMCB Are parameters readable 2 7 44 End of Diagnostics Figure 7 9 OPTICS AIQC Calibration and Testing 8100 232A 7F3318 2005 J uly Rev B Section 7 Troubleshootin 7 4 Functions of System SENSORS The system includes 2 kinds of SENSORS OPTICAL SWITCHES flag type and U type All the flag type SENSORS are identical except for CARTRIDGE PRESENT SENSOR 51 and PLATEN FILM SENSOR S6 and all the U type SENSORS are identical except for OPTICS HOME SENSOR S7 as indicated in the table below SENSOR functions are described in Table 7 3 Table 7 3 SENSOR Functions SENSOR Description ASSEMBLY SENSOR Output 51 CARTRIDGE ROLLBACK Flag High ON when CARTRIDGE is PRESENCE loaded ROLLBACK HOME ROLLBACK Low OFF when CARTRIDGE LID is closed S3 PICKUP POSITION PICKUP U type High ON with pickup assy in feed position Low when pickup assy is at top High ON when flag contacts fim S5 Low OFF when film is out Sort High ON when film contacts flag srt Low OFF when SCANNER is home S8 VERTICAL VERT Flag High ON when flag contacts flag TRANSPORT TRANSPORT DENSITOMETER DENSITOMETER High ON when film contacts flag EXIT S10 CUPS ENGAGED PICKUP U type Low OFF when cups are squashed S11 FEED ROLLER OPEN FEED ROLLER U type
260. e MIS is a standalone COM server whose clients include MIM Delivery Interface the LOCAL PANEL the SERVICE TOOL and the MCS It includes the following software components the MCS Image Server and PCIO Driver the MCS Command Server and Service Providers The MIS in general Handles all datapath commands from the MIM Delivery Interface and makes sure that the MIM Delivery Interface has the correct AIQC information for page rendering Delivers rendered images through the PCIO BOARD to the MCS e Performs error and activity logging for the MCS and includes a power on self test that automatically runs diagnostics at system startup Provides the main access point for diagnostics executed through the SERVICE TOOL It supports a complete set of calls for the diagnostics available on each subsystem of the MCS 6 3 4 2 MCS Image Server The MCS Image Server which coordinates all image transfers to the MCS includes the software driver for the PCIO BOARD The MCS Image Server accepts a rendered image from the MIM Delivery Interface prepares the PCIO BOARD for DMA transfer of the image and controls the transfer Its tasks include Managing 2 page buffers for rendered images e Initializing a page buffer for DMA transfer to the MCS via the PCIO BOARD Starting the DMA transfer when commanded by the MIS Handling status and errors for the PCIO BOARD L gt Note The page buffers managed by the MCS Image Server are located in physica
261. e an error detectable by the CPU 11 Generate a dc SOS Start of Scan detection level settable by the CPU to trigger the SOS detector for the portion of the scan rotation where the laser beam crosses the SOS detector 12 Allow access to the Media LUT by the CPU 6 4 3 Laser Optics Subsystem 6 4 3 1 General The IMAGER laser optics subsystem includes the following major components e A cylindrical platen on which the film is held motionless during image scanning e An optics module which delivers a scanning laser beam across the surface of the film An optics translation assembly which translates the laser beam perpendicularly to move down the film scan line by scan line A simplified schematic diagram of the optics is shown in Figure 6 8 The optics module contains a 50 mW solid state laser diode with an emission wavelength of 810 nm These specifications match the spectral sensitivity of the film used in the IMAGER The laser beam is modulated by varying its drive current The laser beam is shaped by collimation and by passing it through a set of three lenses not shown in diagram to focus the beam atthe film plane The laser path also contains a beam power attenuator which controls maximum exposure on the film surface Basic scanning specifications are as follows Pixel matrix 4620 by 5596 e Spatial resolution 12 8 lines per mm Laserspotsize 40 um by 60 um e Power at film 23 4 mW maximum Exposure time 35 seconds
262. e cycle countto 20 000 1 Onthe LOCAL PANEL touch Menu 2 Touch Service 3 Touch PM 4 Touch Yes 5 Enter the Customer First passcode cfirst on the keypad that appears The message PM recorded will appear 6 Touch OK 7 Verify that the Prints to PM count has been reset a Touch the Back arrow to return to the Main Menu screen b Touch System Information c Touch Print Counts The Prints to PM count should now be 20 000 2005 J uly Rev 7F3318 5 19 Service Manual 5 5 Cleaning the OPTICS MODULE L gt Note This procedure is not part of preventive maintenance Do this procedure only if customer complaints about image quality indicate that dust is lodged on flexible LENS L3 in the OPTICS MODULE Service Engineering recommends that you have a replacement OPTICS MODULE available when you respond to an optics related service call If cleaning does not eliminate the problem you will have to replace the OPTICS MODULE Symptom Light density streak across the 14 inch dimension of the FILM Use the Optics Troubleshooting Training Guide in the CHEMICAL CLEANING KIT to help determine corrective actions Required Tools CHEMICAL CLEANING KIT SP7F6028 This kit includes The CHEMICAL CLEANING KIT includes BOTTLE SWABS ACD containing Training Video mpeg file Video Transcript doc file Troubleshooting Guide Locally Obtained Supplies e Non powdered lat
263. e error when the TOP HOOD is closed Films will be cleared automatically at this point User Action 1 Open TOP HOOD 2 Open the PROCESSOR COVER 3 Remove jammed film 4 Close the PROCESSOR COVER and TOP HOOD FE Action Normally this message simply indicates that a jam has occurred and the error will be cleared when the jam has been removed and the TOP HOOD closed However the error could be generated by hangup of the flag of DENSITOMETER EXIT SENSOR 59 8 72 7F 3318 2005 J uly Rev B Section 8 QuickSheets 8 5 64 Error 27 121 ATTENUATOR Error LOCAL PANEL Message Log Message DICOM Message Internal Hardware Failure Attenuator Home Sensor failed to ELEC DOWN 0 Fatal Alarm sounds detect Attenuator Motor movement Summary The IMAGER was unable to move the ATTENUATOR to the requested position after multiple attempts The OPTICS ATTENUATOR MOTOR Step 3 under control of the MCS BOARD is stepped to setthe ATTENUATOR atthe position that will provide the desired image density The MOTOR can step the ATTENUATOR to 650 different positions from home zero to 650 Result of Error The IMAGER is unable to print film It can accept and queue new jobs but it will not initiate new films Films downstream from the PLATEN will be completed All other films will be reprinted User Action 1 Restart the IMAGER 2 Ifthe error persists call Service FE Action 1 Check the MCS Log to try to determine the point at
264. e in bold in the list below The others contain data that is useful only to software design To decrease the size of the log for viewing these columns should be removed from the viewed log by means of the Options function described in the preceding paragraph The columns from left to right include 1 Event Type This column provides the same information as the Level column It indicates the level of log detail provided for the event The levels from most detailed to lowest are TRACE Level 6 DEBUG 5 DIAG 4 INFO 3 WARNING 2 ERROR 1 and FATAL ERROR 0 Refer to paragraph 7 10 2 5 2 Time Provides the time of the event down to 1 100th of a second The time is useful mainly for locating events in the log Code Code for a particular event Normally an error code 4 Text This column describes the event 5 App The software application in which the event occurred There are 3 applications MIM DV8150 and WebLink gt Note The MIM application includes all software in the DRE that is common to other MIM systems The DV8150 application includes the software that is specific to the MCS but also DRE software such as the MCS Interface Server which was created specifically for the 8150 IMAGER and is not used in other MIM systems The WebLink application is the service platform software 2005 July Rev B 7 3318 7 79 Service Manual 6 Subsystem The software subsystem within the application These include subsystems o
265. e information that the SERVICE TOOL or LOCAL PANEL might need to access or display The Data Formatters decouple the presentation and delivery of data from the collection management and formatting of the data and they filter and format the data if necessary 2005 J uly Rev B 7F3318 6 11 Service Manual 6 4 Machine Control System MCS The MCS controls the operations involved in handling film and exposing processing and controlling quality of the image on the film The MCS includes the following major components e MCS Board This board contains the Master CPU and auxiliary circuits that control operation of all MCS components It communicates on a MicroComm Bus with slave micro subsystems located on several peripheral boards that are part of the MCS These boards are described below Other functions of the MCS Board are as follows a Itreceives the rasterized image data from the DRE passes it through AIQC circuits and converts itto an analog signal which drives the laser diode b Itreceives power from a DC Power Supply and distributes itto the components of the laser imager C Itinterfaces with system interlocks and a service switch that are available to control power in potentially hazardous situations d It contains circuits that directly drive several dc and stepper motors and receive inputs from several sensors See sheet 2 of the 8150 Functional Diagrams Functional Diagrams are on the Kodak Health Imaging Digital Outp
266. e level the motor is off The polarity of the signals applied to the 2 control lines determines the direction of travel Stepper Motor Drive The drive circuits for the 2 stepper motors are identical to the stepper drive circuits on the MCS Board for the Film Centering and Platen Motor Stepper Motors Each driver requires from the CPU an enable signal and 2 phase signals square waves spaced 90 degrees apart The lead lag relationship of the phase signals determines the direction of current flow through the motor windings and thus the direction of motor rotation To start a motor the Slave CPU configures the phasing channels for the appropriate direction and sends the required enabling signal NIP PHASE ON or ELEVATOR PHASE ON active low To stop the motor the enabling signal is driven high It is not necessary to stop the phasing signals to stop the motor The Elevator Stepper Motor is driven at 12 volts dc and the Feed Roller Stepper is driven at 24 volts dc 6 28 7F3318 2005 J uly Rev B Section 6 Theory of Operation 6 4 6 2 Sensor Control The Feeder Control Board receives status from the following 8 sensors Pickup Position Sensor which indicates that the pickup arm is in its home top position Film Surface Sensor which signals that the pickup arm has moved to the position where the sensor contacts the film surface Film OutSensor which indicates after the pickup arm has moved down whether the cartridge is out of f
267. e paragraph 7 5 6 2 8 34 7F3318 2005 J uly Rev B Section 8 QuickSheets 8 5 32 Error 21 117 FILM FEED ROLLERS Failed to Close LOCAL PANEL Message Log Message DICOM Message Film J am in Area 1 Film Feed Roller Position Sensor S11 FILM JAM 1 Alert Pickup Alarm sounds failed to indicate feed rollers have closed Summary This error occurs if FEED ROLLER OPEN SENSOR S11 fails to indicate movement of the FEED ROLLERS from the open home position to the closed position The SENSOR must sequence from Unblocked to Blocked to Unblocked Result of Error The system is unable to print Otherwise it can operate as normal acquiring queueing prints completing processing etc User Action 1 Touch the Video button to view the error video 2 Touch the Door button to open the FRONT DOOR 3 Clear any jammed film 4 Close the CARTRIDGE manually 5 Close the FRONT DOOR 6 Run test prints to clear fogged film from the IMAGER FE Action Use the SERVICE TOOL to check FEED ROLLER OPEN SENSOR S11 2005 J uly Rev B 7F3318 8 35 Service Manual 8 5 33 Error 21 118 Pickup Failed to go Home LOCAL PANEL Message Log Message DICOM Message Internal Hardware Failure Film Film Position Sensor 5 3 failed to FILM TRANSP Pickup Alarm sounds sense pickup assembly at Home ERROR position Unblocked Summary The PICKUP ASSEMBLY failed to return to the home position at the end of a pickup cycle as indicated
268. e power and disconnect the POWER CORD A Warning When the POWER CORD is plugged in hazardous voltages are present in some areas of the IMAGER These voltages can cause severe injury or death 2 Open the UPPER HOOD and allow the PROCESSOR to cool before proceeding Hot Surface Ay When the IMAGER is initially powered down the PROCESSOR DRUM and ROLLERS are hot Take care when removing the ROLLERS 3 Release the 2 CLAMPS and open the PROCESSOR COVER 4 To remove the ROLLERS simply lifteach ROLLER from the RETAINER CLIPS at each end Figure 4 4 gt Note The BEARINGS on the ends of each ROLLER are loose Take care not to lose the BEARINGS or the SPRINGS that they mount on in the RETAINER CLIPS Reassembly 1 Installa BEARING on each end of the ROLLER and make sure each RETAINER CLIP includes a SPRING 2 Insert the BEARINGS with ROLLER into the RETAINER CLIPS as shown in the inset in Figure 4 4 Check that a each ROLLER rotates freely b each BEARING is free to slide against the SPRING in the RETAINER and c the SPRINGS are not bent Roller _ 2 o x Bearing Retainer 8100 624 Figure 4 4 Removing the PROCESSOR ROLLERS 4 6 7F 3318 2005 J uly Rev B Section 4 Disassembly Reassembl 4 2 4 Processor Motor 1 Open the FRONT DOOR to close the FILM CARTRIDGE Then remove power and disconnect the POWER CORD A Warning When the POWER CORD is plugged in hazardous voltag
269. e they are further processed and rasterized for scan line by scan line transfer to the PCIO BOARD and the MCS e PCIO BOARD This BOARD which plugs into the PCI Bus of the MOTHERBOARD accepts the formatted and rendered images from the PCI Bus and sends them to the MCS ona parallel interface See paragraph 6 2 2 for more details The BOARD is identical to that used in the 8100 and 8200 IMAGERS e PCI 10 100 Base T Ethernet CARD This BOARD provides access to the DRE for the LAPTOP COMPUTER of the FE e AGP LOCAL PANEL TRANSMITTER BOARD This color graphics BOARD drives the LCD CONTROLLER in the LOCAL PANEL HARD DISK DRIVE This 80 GB IDE DRIVE contains the software that controls image processing It also provides storage for acquired images before they are sent to MAIN MEMORY for final processing immediately before printing CD ROM DRIVE This DRIVE has a capacity of 650 MB and an IDE interface It is used to upgrade system software e FLOPPY DRIVE This 3 5 inch 1 44 MB FLOPPY DRIVE is used to back up and restore the system configuration and to download files for service examination DCPOWER SUPPLY This SUPPLY receives 120 VAC input power from the MCS POWER MODULE and provides the following DC outputs for operation of the DRE and LOCAL PANEL 43 3 5 and 12 VDC 6 2 1 2 LOCAL PANEL The LOCAL PANEL which connects by cable to the LOCAL PANEL TRANSMITTER BOARD in the DRE contains AnLCD DISPLAY ATOUCH SCREEN
270. eMe Dv8150Em 5 8 2004 14 42 18 17147 SQL Server terminating because of system shutdown MSSOLSERVE Dv8150Em 5 8 2004 14 44 41 Kodak SecureLink Server Service has started Kodak Dv8150Em 5 8 2004 14 44 50 17052 Microsoft SQL Server 2000 8 000 760 Intel X85 Dec 17 2002 MSSQLSERVE Dv8150Em 5 8 2004 14 44 50 17104 Server Process ID is 596 MSSQLSERVE Dv8150Em 6 8 2004 14 44 50 This instance of SQL Server last reported using a process id af 592 at MSS LSERVE Dv8150Em 5 8 2004 14 44 50 17162 SQL Server is starting at priority class normal 1 CPU detected MSSQLSERVE Dv8150Em 5 8 2004 14 44 51 17124 SQL Server configured for thread mode processing MSSGLSERVE Dv8150Em 6 8 2004 14 44 51 17125 Using dynamic lock allocation 500 Lock Blocks 1000 Lock Owner MSSOLSERVE Dv8150Em 5 8 2004 14 44 53 The description for Event ID 0 Source ST Service cannot be found The STService Dy8150Em 5 8 2004 14 44 54 The description for Event ID 0 in Source STService cannot be found The STService Dyv 150Em 6 8 2004 14 44 55 17834 Using SSNE TLIB DLL version 9 0 760 MSSOQLSERVE Dv815 Em 6 8 2004 14 44 55 19013 SQL server listening on 149 98 199 120 1433 MSSQLSERVE Dv8150Em 6 8 2004 14 44 55 19013 SQL server listening on 192 168 0 1 1433 MSSQLSERVE Dv8150Em 5 8 2004 14 44 55 19013 SQL server listening on 127 0 0 1 1433 MSSQLSERVE Dv8150Em 5 8 2004 14 44 57 Kodak Service Access Run Service has started Kodak Dv 15
271. ea Adjacent to the FILM DIVERTER ASSEMBLY Clean the SIDEPLATES ofthe PROCESSOR and the MOUNTING BRACKET forthe DIVERTER ASSEMBLY see Figure 5 10 View A by scraping away the residue with a knife or straight blade After scraping thoroughly vacuum the area Also vacuum the HOOD if debris is present Wipe clean the SIDEPLATES and MOUNTING BRACKET with ALCOHOL SATURATED WIPES Installing a New FILM DIVERTER ASSEMBLY Replace the DIVERTER ASSEMBLY only if itis damaged Remove 2 SCREWS and WASHERS see Figure 5 10 View B and remove and discard the used FILM DIVERTER ASSEMBLY with FELT PAD Clean adjacent area as described in subparagraph C above Mount the new FILM DIVERTER ASSEMBLY but do not tighten the 2 ATTACHING SCREWS with WASHERS 2005 J uly Rev 7F3318 5 15 Service Manual L gt Note The position of the FILM DIVERTER ASSEMBLY must be adjusted after the DRUM is replaced See paragraph 5 4 12 Clean SIDE PLATE bot sides DIVERTER BLADE View A Cleaning Attaching SCREW and WASHER for DIVERTER ASSEMBLY One Set Each Side Attaching NUT and WASHER for FELT PAD One Set Each Side FELT PAD DIVERTER View B Replacement Figure 5 10 Cleaning the FILM DIVERTER ASSEMBLY 5 16 7F 3318 2005 J uly Rev Section 5 Tools Preventive Maintenance Cleaning 5 4 11 Replace the PROCESSOR GASKET Supplies Required New PROCESSOR GASKET Procedure 1 Pull off the old G
272. ection 5 Tools Preventive Maintenance Cleanin 5 4 10 Cleaning the FILM DIVERTER ASSEMBLY Supplies Required LOW LINT ALCOHOL SATURATED WIPES SAFETY GLASSES with SIDE SHIELDS Tools Required No 2 5 ALLEN WRENCH Caution pr uw To avoid damage do not use a sharp instrument for cleaning and do not attempt to scrape the top of the BLADE orthe FELT PAD Wear appropriate personal protective equipment protective GLOVES and SAFETY GLASSES with SIDE SHIELDS to avoid contact of cleaning agents and or FAZ with the skin and eyes ISOPROPYL ALCOHOL is highly flammable Check that there are no ignition sources within at least 3 5 feet of the DRUM This includes but is not limited to cigarettes SWITCHES ELECTRICAL OUTLETS LIGHT BULBS and flames After cleaning place used ALCOHOL SATURATED WIPES in BAG 78 9998 2868 0 TIE WRAP the BAG and dispose of properly Inspectthe FILM DIVERTER ASSEMBLY Inspect the DIVERTER ASSEMBLY for damage Replace only if itis not in good condition or cannot be cleaned See Installing a New FILM DIVERTER ASSEMBLY below Cleaning the FILM DIVERTER ASSEMBLY With the FILM DIVERTER ASSEMBLY in place in the IMAGER clean the bottom only of the BLADE by scraping the residue from it with a straight edge See Figure 5 10 View A After scraping wipe both sides of the DIVERTER BLADE with ALCOHOL SATURATED WIPES If you are unable to clean the FILM DIVERTER ASSEMBLY replace it Cleaning the Ar
273. ectrical Power and the Network 2 5 l Electrical Power Setup 1 Use a VOLTMETER to measure the AC voltage at the wall outlet that will be used by the IMAGER 2 From the bag of 5 VOLTAGE SELECTION PLUGS supplied in the ACCESSORIES PACKAGE select the PLUG that matches the measured wall voltage For Measured Voltage of Select PLUG with 30 105 V AC 106 130 V AC 180 710V AC 211 230V AC 231 250V AC 2005 J uly Rev B 7F3318 2 17 Service Manual 3 Insert the correct VOLTAGE SELECTION PLUG into the POWER SUPPLY The VOLTAGE SELECTION PLUG is keyed so that it can only be inserted one way Do not force the PLUG When oriented correctly it will insert easily H200_0030BAA 4 Discard the remaining VOLTAGE SELECTION PLUGS 5 Replace the REAR PANEL a Engage the bottom tabs and rotate the top into position b Install the 9 SCREWS QN SCREWS 9 BACKPANEL Bottom Tabs 3 H200 0016AAA TF3318 2005July Rev B Section 2 Installation 2 5 2 Connecting to External AC Power LAAACATALE ORRERI Ha ERA ERAMIGEE H200_0024BAA 1 Remove and discard the CAUTION LABEL from the REAR PANEL 2 Selecta POWER CORD appropriate to this site from the 3 CORDS supplied in the ACCESSORIES PACKAGE L gt Note If neither whole CORD can be used you will have to obtain and attach a suitable PLUG to the universal POWER CORD A Warning Dangerous Voltage 0
274. em by checking the sequence of events leading up to the error A typical troubleshooting sequence might involve Connecting your LAPTOP to the IMAGER and using SecureLink to access the SERVICE TOOL Searching the Error Tally to determine how many times the error has occurred Opening the NT Event System Log to determine the time at which the last error occurred Searching the Application Log or a subsystem log for data atthe time of the error Examining the data in the log that precedes the error e If necessary saving the log and sending it to the TSC or Service Engineering 2005 J uly Rev 7F3318 7 71 Service Manual Techniques for searching the Application Log are described in the following procedures 1 To access the Application Log select Logs gt Application Log from the main menu of the SERVICE TOOL A blank log screen with a log retrieval window will appear logRetrieval esate The current server time is 2004 06 03 17 27 00 Find Find Next El The server time zone Central Daylight Time View Log with time range StartTime 2004 06 03 16 27 00 EndTime 2004 06 03 17 27 00 View ActiveLog 000 events Cancel 2 Use the Log Retrieval window to locate the log data you wish to view e If you know the approximate time when the event you wish to view occurred select View Log with time range and enter a Start and End Time e Ifyou wish to view
275. embly 3 Check that the Cup Plate rotates freely It will pivot on the shoulder screws The small roller should move up and down in the slot as you pivot the assembly NOTE If it does rotate freely stop here This is not a problem on your machine Refer to the Service Manual for additional troubleshooting 4 If it does not rotate freely loosen the shoulder screws on each side of the Heal Pad do not remove the screws and check to see if it rotates freely now 5 With the shoulder screws loose if it rotates freely bend the Heal Pad tabs this is whatthe shoulder screws screw into slightly outward on the Heal Pad Assembly This can be done by using a flat blade screwdriver between the tab and the Heal Pad They should be justa litle past 90 degrees 6 Tighten the shoulder screws When tightened properly the shoulder screw should be next to the Cup Plate and the washer on the inside should be next to the Heal P ad tab 7 Check thatthe Cup Plate Assembly still rotates freely If it does rotate freely stop here this is not a problem on your machine Refer to the Service Manual for additional troubleshooting 7 4 7F3318 2005 J uly Rev B Section 7 Troubleshooting at Transport Error The Platen Sensor S6 changes Check and reform or replace Platen 26 165 Film feeds part State as the film enters the platen sensor 56 Check that the Platen way into the platen and Because the film is still partial
276. er failed from PCIO Card to ELEC DOWN 0 Fatal Failure Optics Alarm Optics sounds Summary The MCS has detected that either an incomplete image underrun or too much image data overrun has been transferred to the optics The error occurred either in the DRE or MCS If the error occurred in the DRE the DRE will immediately try to reprint and a clear vertical stripe about 1 mm wide will be printed across the 17 inch dimension of the film each time the error occurs Result of Error This error can be generated either by software or hardware problems User Action The error sometimes spontaneously clears itself If it does not the operator should restart the IMAGER If this does not clear the error a service call is required FE Action e Ifthe error occurred in the MCS the film will not be reprinted Search the mcs log for over underrun or 20 913 Ifthe error occurred in the DRE the film will be reprinted up to 5 tries Search the log for over underrun or 20 913 You should also see retrying or failed in the log On failure retries the MCS optics will repeat the same vertical line of data to the right of the clear stripe e The error can occur in the optics Search the MCS log for Optics NVRAM The optics Serial Number SOS Delay and Stretch parameter values should be non zero The StretchID parameter can be zero If Optics NVRAM problems occur the SCANNER MODULE must be replaced 2005 J uly Rev B 7F
277. er similar values 6 in this example could give optimal results from a user perspective See the following table of nominal contrast values Nominal Contrast Values Dmin Dmax 3 0 Dmax 3 2 Dmax 3 4 Dmax 3 6 Dmax 3 8 0 05 1 C 2 C 23 C 24 5 0 12 26 CHT 8 C 9 10 0 20 11 C 12 C 13 14 215 For various original film density ranges 2005 July 7F3318 2 59 Service Manual 4 3 7 anyjen values within the PMSV3K TFT SET so that the densities print as correctly as possible the PMSB Developed as a modification to the PMSV3K TFT SET that was previously developed for Philips latest target densities requested by Philips MEDICAL SYSTEMS All 15 of these tables have the same MEDICAL SYSTEMS This SET was made by adjusting the t when using Contrast 9 of the PMSB TFT SET match mid tone contrast or slope but have a wide variety of brightnesses with contrast value 1 the darkest image and contrast value 15 the brightest 4000 RR Input 7 3318 2005 J uly Rev B 2 60 Section 2 Installation PMSV3K A SET of non S curve TFTs with mid tone density gradually decreasing as the TFT number or contrast value is increased This SET was originally requested by Philips MEDICAL SYSTEMS who preferred saggy curve shapes to the S shaped curves of VER693C0 and VER713CO All 15 of these tables have the same mi
278. eral purpose TFT SET of S shaped curves widely used for CT MR and certain other MODALITIES Curve 6 of this SET is designed to be linear in perceived brightness Contrast values below 6 give increased contrast or slope next to the end points and decreased mid tone contrast near 5096 of digital input Contrast values above 6 give decreased contrast near the end points and increased mid tone contrast The following plots of this TFT SET indicate that all 15 of the tables have the same mid tone brightness with varying degrees of an S shape contribution which gives the strongest end points contrast or slope to Table 1 and the strongest mid tone contrast or slope to Table 15 2005 July 7F3318 2 67 Service Manual 4000 3500 3000 2500 2000 1500 MTT TTT TTT TTT TE E 1000 d 500 TTT TTT RS Beaks as or a E OEF EO ED EE ED EES E CE CES ee Ip s pese pepe es pp opem eee p a 20 40 80 100 120 Input VER703CO Created to provide a SET of S shaped curve choices that are intermediate in perceived brightness between those of VER693C0 TFT SET and those of VER713C0 TFT SET All 15 of these tables have the same mid tone brightness which is slightly brighter than the mid tone brightness of the VER693CO tables and slightly darker than the mid tone brightness of the VER713C0 TFT SET As with the VER693C0 and VER713CO TFT SETS there
279. erty window select Line Mode In the Value drop down list select Half Duplex In the Property window select Line Spec In the Value drop down list select 10 MBS and click OK Click OK again From the Start menu select Shut Down and then Restart 5 Connect your computer to the IMAGER SERVICE PORT with a straight through PATCH CABLE Shut down and then restart the IMAGER o c 2005 J uly 7F3318 7 7 Service Manual 7 2 3 Accessing the SERVICE TOOL 1 Use a straight through Ethernet PATCH CABLE to connect your LAPTOP COMPUTER to the SERVICE PORT on the IMAGER 2 Change the IP Address on yourLAPTOP COMPUTER to 192 168 0 2 The IP Address of the IMAGER SERVICE PORT is 192 168 0 1 Ethernet PATCH CABLE SERVICE PORT Figure 7 1 Connecting the LAPTOP COMPUTER to the IMAGER Energize the LAPTOP COMPUTER 4 Use SecureLink to connect to the IMAGER Start gt Programs gt Kodak gt SecureLink 5 Launch Service WebLink Start gt Programs gt Kodak gt Service WebLink to display the main menu of the SERVICE TOOL 6 Expand the Diagnostic menu items to display the diagnostic options Diagnostics mcs Densitometer FRU Diagnostics Mechanical Diagnostics Optics Sensor State i 505 Cartridge Info DP atch Film Calibration Test Prints Diag Summary Image Viewer Local Panel Diagnostic Network Network Monitor Processor Temperature Scripts 7 8 7F3318 2005 J uly Rev B
280. es 3 Reports status to the MCS Diagnostics The diagnostics for the pickup and feed functions exercize essentially all the commands described above 6 4 6 4 Cartridge Elevator Functions The MCS software uses the following commands to control cartridge elevation Raise Cartridge This command 1 Checks the following before moving the elevator via the Elevator Motor The pickup arm is home Pickup Position Sensor Thecartridge is closed Rollback Home Sensor if a cartridge is loaded 6 30 7F3318 2005 J uly Rev B Section 6 Theory of Operation 2 Starts the Elevator Motor moving the cartridge up for a preset time then stops the motor 3 Reports status to the MCS Lower Cartridge This command 1 Rotates the rollback mechanism Rollback Motor 360 degrees or until the Rollback Home Sensor activates 2 Starts the Elevator Motor moving the cartridge down for a preset time then stops the motor The Elevator Home Sensor is checked to see if the elevator lowered to the proper position 3 Reports status to the MCS Stop Elevator This command stops the Elevator Motor and reports status to the MCS Diagnostics The elevator diagnostics move the elevator off the home position if it is home return it home and then report status to the MCS 6 4 6 5 Cartridge Rollback Functions The MCS software uses the following cartridge rollback commands Open Cartridge This command 1 Checks the following before starting the R
281. es anyway With light Densitometer source off read Y Turn on light source and read Densitometer Y Compare dark and light offset values Difference within limits between values XT TS Difference must not be too small NS 29 924 Figure 7 7 DENSITOMETER MODULE Diagnostics 8100 230A 7F3318 2005 J uly Rev B Section 7 Troubleshootin Optics Module Test This routine begins about 66 Contact seconds after power on It checks operation of the optics Optics Module attenuator and translation subsystem components and micro system ensures that both the attenuator and optics are in the home position Micro respond Turn on Step 3 to move Attenuator off home position Optics Attenuator Motor Attenuator Home Sensor turn on unblocked Run Step 3 to return Attenuator home Attenuator Home Sensor turn off 27 923 2 57 turn off within 25 sec Is S7 4 N blocked off 55 to move optics home Yes Optics D gt Home Sensor Yes Optics at home No Turn on Step 4 Optics to move optics _______ 1 away from nz iesu home No 27 640 A Yes Run Step 4 to move optics home Optics translation is home 8100 231A Figure 7 8 OPTICS MODU
282. es are present in some areas of the IMAGER These voltages can cause severe injury or death 2 Open the UPPER HOOD and remove the REAR PANEL 3 Liftthe BELT TENSIONER Figure 4 5 to provide slack in the BELT and remove the BELT from the MOTOR PULLEY 4 Remove 4SCREWS and remove the PROCESSOR MOTOR from the BRACKET 5 Remove 4SCREWS and remove the COVER L gt Note The cover is difficult to remove b j ZIJI z m 5 n 5 a N am N A m Figure 4 5 Removing the PROCESSOR MOTOR Continue on next page 2005 July Rev 7F3318 4 7 Service Manual 6 Remove the STRAIN RELIEF BLOCK 2 SCREWS 7 Cutthe CABLE TIE 8 Remove the spiral CABLE WRAP around the cable harness not shown 9 Follow the MOTOR CABLE down to the MCS BOARD 10 Remove the MOTOR PLUG from CONNECTOR J 10 on the MCS BOARD 11 Remove MOTOR and CABLE Connector 10 Figure 4 6 Removing the PROCESSOR MOTOR 4 8 7F 3318 2005 J uly Rev Section 4 Disassembly Reassembl 4 2 5 Kicker Motor 1 Open the FRONT DOOR to close the FILM CARTRIDGE Then remove power and disconnect the POWER CORD A Warning When the POWER CORD is plugged in hazardous voltages are present in some areas of the IMAGER These voltages can cause severe injury or death 2 Open the UP
283. es are within the range of the required Dmax and Dmin If Reverse Polarity is requested the LUT is reversed The MIM Delivery Interface applies the Media LUT to the rendered image pixels to convert the T values to laser values which are sent to the MCS Interface Server All images are in 12 bit pixels If the images input from PACSLink MIM are 8 or 10 bit they are scaled to 12 bit 2005 J uly Rev B 7 3318 6 9 Service Manual 6 3 3 2 DICOM Modality Preferences Database MPDB The MPDB newly implemented with the 8150 IMAGER is a repository of SCP Services parameters for all MODALITIES that have been qualified to work with the IMAGER These parameters are keyed to the unique DICOM Implementation UID and version name of each MODALITY These DICOM attributes are made available to the IMAGER during the establishment of the DICOM association that occurs when the MODALITY sends an image to the IMAGER When the association is established the default SCP Services parameters that are appropriate to the type of MODALITY are selected and applied from the MPDB As new MODALITIES are qualified the MPDB can be updated in IMAGERS in the field with the appropriate parameters for the new MODALITIES 6 3 4 MCS Interface Server MIS 6 3 4 1 General MIS coordinates transfer of rendered image data from the MIM Delivery Interface to the MCS and handles all command diagnostic and asynchronous event communication between the DRE and MCS Th
284. es sent to the MCS Interface Server are not T Values but LASER DIODE values that will require no additional processing 3 MIM Delivery Interface renders the Print ob into one or more images and transfers the Image s to the MCS Interface Server 4 Page Status from the MCS Interface Server is used to track the success or failure of jobs delivered to the MIM Delivery Interface 5 Printer Status from the MCS Interface Server is sent back to the SCU It also triggers starting or stopping of image rendering in the MIM Delivery Interface MIM Delivery interface formats the page for image size and feed orientation DICOM format and orientation and positioning of the Dpatch if used and the clear leading edge It renders the image by mapping image data to T Values using the following information e User requested data that is received with the print job from the PACS Link software This includes a TFT set a contrast table number Dmax Dmin and P olarity Film cartridge data received from the MCS through the MCS Interface Server This includes TimageMin TimageMax and Media LUT A contrast table is selected from the TFT set and changed as follows TFT data values are adjusted first based on the user Dmax or the TimageMax value whichever is lower and user Dmin or TimageMin whichever value is higher The changed values are then interpolated into a Contrast Lookup Table LUT with 4096 entries 0 4095 checking that the output T valu
285. estart the IMAGER 2 Ifthe error persists call Service FE Action 2005 J uly Rev 7F3318 8 15 Service Manual 8 5 13 Error 10 003 Image Datapath Error in Delivery Server Subsystem LOCAL PANEL Message Log Message DICOM Message Delivery Server Image Datapath Delivery Server Internal Error PRINTER DOWN 0 F atal Error Alarm sounds Summary The image datapath software of the Delivery Server Subsystem has failed The error can be caused by a number of problems such as failure to create and initialize the MCSDIS software failure of the PCIO BOARD or driver to initialize or a read write failure on the PCIO BOARD Result of Error The DRE is not functional User Action 1 Restart the IMAGER 2 Ifthe error persists call Service FE Action 8 16 7F 3318 2005 J uly Rev B Section 8 QuickS heets 8 5 14 10 910 No Communication with the MCS LOCAL PANEL Message Log Message DICOM Message Severity MCS Communication MCS Communication ELEC DOWN 0 Fatal Down Alarm sounds Summary This error declared by the DRE occurs when the MCS fails to respond to the DRE or communications between the two is interrupted The most common cause of this error is disconnection of the flat cable between the DRE and the MCS BOARD in the MCS This cable connects to another cable on the back of the DRE which connects to the PCIO BOARD All communications between the MCS and DRE occur on these cables which both transfer
286. et time If itis not error 28 509 is declared Result of Error The IMAGER is unable to print film It can accept and queue new jobs but it will not initiate new films All films in the IMAGER will be reprinted The error can be cleared by only by restarting the IMAGER User Action 1 Restart the IMAGER 2 Ifthe error persists call Service FE Action 1 Is the DRUM warm at all If not turn off IMAGER power open the UPPER HOOD and a Remove the 3 SCREWS from the END CAP of the HEATER Or remove 2 SCREWS and pivot the END CAP out of the way b Check the THERMAL BREAKER BUTTON inside the DRUM If it has popped out pop it in with a SCREWDRIVER c Apply power and check if the BREAKER BUTTON pops back out If it does there is probably a short in the HEATER wiring and the DRUM should be replaced Otherwise go to step 2 2 Power off and check resistance of the HEATER element through the SLIP RINGS Resistance should be about 30 ohms If the HEATER elementis open replace the DRUM 3 Check that the RTD CABLE is plugged into the MCS BOARD 17 2005 J uly 7F3318 8 91 Service Manual 4 Check for other possible problems in the following order Loss of 120 vac Check at CONNECTOR J 1 of the PIB Pins 1 and 4 are Line Pins 3 and 6 are Neutral Low ac voltage i e 120 vac is below spec Check thatthe POWER TRANSFORMER is properly tapped see paragraph 2 2 4 Defective TOP HOOD INTE
287. ex GLOVES e METHANOL preferred or ISOPROPYL ALCOHOL These solvents are not included in the kit and must be obtained locally Follow the safety regulations in your region when carrying and using these chemicals Procedure 1 Study the video on the CD The video is in MPEG format If you cannot view the video read the transcript of the video that is also on the CD You can view the transcript with a word processor such as Microsoft Word 2 Perform the cleaning procedure as described in the video 3 If chemical cleaning does not solve the problem replace the OPTICS MODULE 5 20 7F3318 2005 J uly Rev B Section 6 Theory of Operation Section 6 Theory of Operation 6 1 General This section describes operation of the primary components of the IMAGER and provides information on hardware and software features that affect image quality control It includes descriptions of the following See Figure 6 1 The DICOM RASTER ENGINE DRE See paragraphs 6 2 and 6 3 The Machine Control System MCS See paragraph 6 4 e Automatic Image Quality Control AIQC and Gray Scale Manager GSM See paragraph 6 5 Detailed functions of the DRE and MCS are illustrated on the system block wiring diagrams in Section 10 Sheet 1 of the diagrams shows the DRE and sheet 2 shows the MCS Temp Control FILM RF TAG READER DENSITOMETER PROCESSOR MicroComm Bus ER IMA PICKUP
288. f the MIM DV8150 and Service WebLink described in the tables below Subsystems for the MIM include MIM Subsystem Network DICOM This subsystem negotiates with the SCU for delivery on the network of a job from the SCU It then creates a Film Session sets up the Film Box and Image Box es These activities will appear in the first few pages of the Application Log Import This subsystem takes the images received from the network and processes them for storage on the HARD DISK Storage This subsystem handles temporary storage of images on the HARD DISK and in MAIN MEMORY Delivery This subsystem takes the image data from storage and renders it into pages for delivery through the MCS Interface Server to the MCS General This subsystem handles general overhead software messages Subsystems for the DV8150 include 078150 Subsystem This subsystem involves all AIQC functions whether in the MCS or DRE MCS This subsystem handles all MCS hardware and software functions LOCAL PANEL Controls all LOCAL PANEL functions MCS Interface Server This subsystem delivers rendered images to the MCS and handles all commu nication between the MCS and DRE Subsystems for the Service WebLink include WebLInK Subsystem This subsystem controls all SERVICE TOOL functions T Module The software module within the subsystem File The file within the software module Line Line number of the file 10 Level The level of detail u
289. f the serial number is below the above check the Film Pickup Assembly whenever you are installing a new machine or a new part You should also check the Film Pickup Assembly on your next call to make sure that your machine does not have this problem see the following Problem Film may not feed on top of the Feeder Roller or there is a loud noise when the Film P ickup is loading Film into the Feeder Assembly Cause The Cup Plate Assembly does not rotate freely because the metal plate that holds the Cups is too long 8 64 7F3318 2005 J uly Rev B Section 8 QuickSheets Solution Manufacturing addressed this problem starting with Film Pickup Assembly serial number PUA01943 In the field try the following 1 Remove the Film Pickup Assembly from the machine 2 Move the Motor away from the Gear Rack and extend the Film Pickup Assembly 3 Check that the Cup Plate rotates freely and pivots on the Shoulder Screws The small Roller should move up and down in the slot as you pivot the assembly Note If the Cup Plate does rotate freely stop here This is nota problem on your machine Refer to the Service Manual for additional troubleshooting 4 Ifitdoes not rotate freely loosen the Shoulder Screws on each side of the Heel Pad do not remove the Screws and check to see if it rotates freely now 5 With the Shoulder Screws loose if it rotates freely bend the Heel Pad tabs into which the Shoulder Screws are screwed slightly outward
290. fthe error persists call Service FE Action Check the MCS Log to attempt to isolate the problem This error can be generated by any of the following problems 1 A failed FRONT DOOR or REAR PANEL INTERLOCK or INTERLOCK wiring which indicates to the SYSTEM software an erroneous DOOR Status i e information that the DOOR is already open In this case the MCS BOARD will not deliver an Open Door command to the DOOR RELEASE SOLENOID 2 Afailed DOOR RELEASE SOLENOID orFET DRIVER forthe SOLENOID located on the MCS BOARD In this case the MCS BOARD sends the Door Open signal but the SOLENOID cannot respond L gt Note The DOOR RELEASE SOLENOID can fail in either an open or shorted state If the SOLENOID is shorted you will not be able to close the FRONT DOOR If a SOLENOID fails it will probably damage the FET DRIVER on the MCS BOARD so both the SOLENOID and MCS BOARD will have to be replaced 8 28 7F3318 2005 J uly Rev B Section 8 QuickSheets 8 5 26 20 550 Preventive Maintenance is Recommended LOCAL PANEL Message Log Message DICOM Message Severity No error screen Message Preventive Maintenance Required NORMAL 3 Notify PM due Call Service displays Summary The film sheet count indicates that preventive maintenance is required Result of Error None The system will function normally User Action Either a customer technician or a Kodak field engineer should perform periodic maintenance as described
291. g These are events involving any of the micro subsystems on the MCS MicroComm bus The MCS notifies the MIM DRE of the subsystem operation over the serial link between the MCS and the DRE Subsystem 6 8 2004 14 46 04 666 Densitometer diag passed Dv8150 MCS 6 6 2004 14 46 04 776 Start mul ptics diagnostics D 8150 MCS 6 8 2004 14 46 04 906 genericGetStatus Optics showed RESET COMPLETE DV8150 MCS 6 8 2004 14 46 05 006 mu ptics diag rcode 60000 0 8150 MCS 6 6 2004 14 46 05 106 Exposer diag passed 08150 MCS 6 8 2004 14 46 05 247 Don t do optics diagnostics until calibrated Dv8150 MCS 6 8 2004 14 46 05 427 Processor warm time 2 0 8150 MCS 5 8 2004 14 46 05 547 OpticsCalib laserSetAttenOpen 3659 0 8150 MCS 6 8 2004 14 46 05 657 OpticsCalib powerM onitarMin 2432 DV8150 MCS 6 8 2004 14 46 05 867 powerMonitorOffset 18 Dv8150 MCS 6 8 2004 14 46 06 098 powerMonitor amp ttenDpen 3706 DV8150 MCS 6 8 2004 14 46 06 298 pm ttenC alib 0 3704 0 8150 MCS 6 8 2004 14 46 06 488 pm ttenC alib 33 3702 0 8150 MCS 6 8 2004 14 46 06 609 Processor warm time 0 DV8150 MCS 6 8 2004 14 46 06 809 pm ttenC alib 65 3651 0 8150 MCS 6 8 2004 14 46 06 999 pm ttenC alib 98 3487 0 8150 MCS 6 8 2004 14 46 07 099 pmAttenCalib 130 3202 09150 MCS 6 8 2004 14 46 07 279 pm ttenC alib 163 2845 0 8150 MCS 6 8 2004 14 46 07 003 pm ttenC alib 195 2479 0 8150 MCS 6 8 2004 14 46 07 004 pmAttenCalib 228 2099 09150 MCS 6 8 2004 14 46 07 051 pm ttenC alib 260 1786
292. g the FILM DIVERTER BLADE GAP 2005 July Rev B 7F3318 3 5 Service Manual 3 4 Optics Translation Speed and SOP Delay This adjustment must be performed if any of the following is replaced the TRANSLATION MOTOR the FILM CENTERING MOTOR the OPTICS HOME SENSOR or the OPTICS MODULE If translation speed is too fast the image may appear stretched If Start of Page SOP is out of adjustment the image will be shifted right or left on the page Specification Image height should measure 334 8 mm for 14x14 inch film or 346 7 mm for 14x17 inch film e Left and right margins on the page must be equal approximately 4 mm each No clear margins should show on the sides of the film Special Tools LAPTOP COMPUTER with Microsoft INTERNET EXPLORER 5 5 SERVICE TOOL Ethernet PATCH CABLE Metric ruler with millimeter units Measurement 1 Load a cartridge of film in the IMAGER Use 14x14 or 14x17 inch film 2 Use a PATCH CABLE to connect your LAPTOP COMPUTER to the Service Port under the HOOD 3 Energize the LAPTOP COMPUTER 4 Connectto the SERVICE TOOL through SecureLink 5 Access the SERVICE TOOL main menu through the WebLink 6 Select Configuration MCS Optics Optics Configuration ance Modify SOVE Status Re ady 7 Click Test Print to run a test print for examination Select test image SMPTE1K and Contrast 1 3 6 7F3318 2005 J uly Rev B Section 3 Adjustments 8 Measure the height
293. g the HARD DRIVE Disconnect the POWER CABLE Disconnectthe SIGNAL CABLE LOOSEN 4 spring loaded SCREWS Remove the HARD DRIVE Check that the J UMPER on the new HARD DRIVE is setatthe Cable Select position Assembly is the reverse of disassembly When installing the 4 SCREWS lift the HARD DRIVE slightly to align the SCREWS with the holes in the DRIVE 10 After installing a new HARD DRIVE and completing reassembly Energize the IMAGER and check the version of software on the DRIVE via the LOCAL PANEL 11 If the software is not up to date load re ghost the current version of software onto the HARD DRIVE See procedure 7 2 20 in Troubleshooting TOAT OO eb OY E m 4 72 7F3318 2005 J uly Rev B Section 4 Disassembly Reassembl 12 After ghosting upload the system configuration file from FLOPPY DRIVE to the HARD DRIVE Removing the CD ROM Drive 2 Spring loaded SCREWS 4 SCREWS Kr PT SIGNAL EH CABLES AN a MERE URN a FLOPPY CD ROM is HARD CABLES nd DRIVE DRIVE DRIVE Figure 4 57 Removing the CD ROM DRIVE 1 Disconnect the POWER CABLE and SIGNAL CABLE from the HARD DRIVE see Figure 4 55 2 Disconnectthe POWER CABLE from the CD ROM DRIVE 3 Loosen 2 spring loaded SCREWS Caution Take not to damage CONNECTORS of the CABLES that are still attached during the removal 4 Slide the
294. gainst the FEED ROLLER 3 Check the components of the FEED ROLLER MODULE as follows see Figure 7 20 Note Rollers must have no end to end gap when closed Idler Roller Drive Roller Sensor Vane Feed Roller Open Sensor Figure 7 20 FEED ROLLER MODULE a Are the 2 ROLLERS tight on both ends Film skewing will occur unless the ROLLERS are parallel and even with no gap from end to end If the ROLLERS are open on 1 end you can attempt to twist the FEED ROLLER MODULE frame to close the gap If you cannot close the gap you must replace the MODULE 1 b Is the FEED ROLLER OPEN SENSOR securely mounted with the snap legs protruding through the metal mounting BASE If the snap legs are broken replace the SENSOR C Use the 9 volt BATTERY to open the ROLLERS Does the SENSOR vane strike the sides of the FEED ROLLER OPEN SENSOR 1 d Examine the torsion SPRINGS at the pivots for the IDLER ROLLER Are the ends of the SPRINGS seated properly 2005 J uly Rev 7F3318 7 61 Service Manual 7 5 6 4 Removing and Inspecting the FILM PLATEN MODULE 1 Remove the MODULE as instructed in procedure 4 11 1 in this manual 2 The primary cause of jams as the film enters the PLATEN is The PLATEN ROLLER BEARING BLOCKS are mispositioned so at entry the film strikes the support TABS just under the ROLLERS See Figure 7 21 Check as follows Are the 2 BEARING BLOCKS pushed all the way forward against the imaging cylinder
295. gned to match as closely as possible the Siemens requirements for Fluorospot TOP SYSTEMS 4000 3500 3000 2500 a HE 2000 6 Tap ag i y d i L 1 9 1500 1000 500 TAN p 1G aM Sti pcm FEE PEZ xz EE EX T Input 55 2 64 a F3318 2005July Rev B Section 2 Installation SIEMR87 A SET in which all 15 curves are very close to a single Siemens defined curve for MR The t value plots in the chart below indicate a shape which is like a linear in brightness shape but with more undulations than the slightly S shaped middle TFTs of the VER693CO TFT SET As with the SIECT87 TFT SET the SIEMR87 TFT SET is not designed to provide a significant range of variability to the user but rather a small range of variability to allow a single predefined table to be matched as closely as possible 4000 3500 3000 2500 Z 1500 1000 a 500 Input 55 SIEMR87B A slight modification to the SIEMR87 TFT SET designed to match as closely as possible the Siemens requirements for MR 4000 3500 3000 2500 2000 1500 1000 SES oem ENH pe qnm E Emm m ge pli p Em 0 SS ee po pm p ee ee psg ee ee Input 2005 July 7F3318 2 65 Service Manual SIEPOLY Equivalent to the PMSV3K
296. he CARTRIDGE If alignment is not correct check that a The CARTRIDGE is inserted correctly b The LID of the CARTRIDGE is not bent or deformed 8 46 7F 3318 2005 J uly Rev B Section 8 QuickSheets 8 5 44 21 176 Supply CARTRIDGE Could Not Be Fully Opened LOCAL PANEL Message Log Message DICOM Message Severity Film Cartridge Failed to Cartridge Open Sensor 513 in Tray BAD SUPPLY 1 Alert Open Alarm sounds failed to activate in specified time MGZ Summary The IMAGER could not open the CARTRIDGE LID so that film could be picked up The ROLLBACK ROLLER left the home position as indicated by ROLLBACK HOME SENSOR S2 but did not reach the the open position indicated by ROLLBACK COMPLETE SENSOR S13 The problem cold be a faulty S13 or possibly the operator inserted the FILM CARTRIDGE backward Result of Error The IMAGER is unable to print It is still able to accept and queue print jobs User Action l Trya new film CARTRIDGE 2 Ifthe error persists call Service FE Action 1 Check the Application Log to try to determine the point at which the error occurred This may help isolate the problem 2 Use the SERVICE TOOL to check ROLLBACK COMPLETE SENSOR S13 2005 J uly Rev B 7F3318 8 47 Service Manual 8 5 45 21 177 Supply CARTRIDGE Could Not Be Closed LOCAL PANEL Message Log Message DICOM Message Severity Film Cartridge Failed to Rollback Home Sensor S2 in Drawer BAD SUPPLY 1 Alert
297. he HARD DRIVE into a full page edge to edge raster image After rendering it passes the page to the MCS Interface Server MIS software for transfer to the MCS MIM Delivery Interface supports the following functions Full page rendering of all supported film sizes including implementation of image rotation magnification border time stamp Dpatch and annotation e Image processing to create T values that use the following variables TimageMin Timage Max Dmax Dmin TFT Contrast and Polarity then conversion of these T Values into laser values Figure 6 6 shows the main functions used in rendering the page 6 8 7F3318 2005 J uly Rev B Section 6 Theory of Operation TFT User Contrast Timagemax Dmax Dmin Timagemin Polarity Media LUT Serial Parameters Film Tray Status Info MIM Delivery Page Status in i i Interface PACSLink Print Jobs Sover Jobs from MODALITY MIM Renders Rendered Images Te edo Status to Image MODALITY Printer Status Printer Status Figure 6 6 Functions of the MIM Delivery Interface 1 MIM Delivery Interface receives Film Tray Status TimageMin TimageMax and Media LUT values from the MCS 2 Pixel data is converted to 12 bits representing values in the range of 0 4095 based on the TimageMin TimageMax and Media LUT values together with user selected values for the following parameters TFT Set Contrast Dmax Dmin and Polarity The 12 bit valu
298. he PROCESSOR DENSITOMETER Area 1 Close and latch the PROCESSOR COVER 2 Transport another sheet of film 3 As the leading edge of the film arrives at the TRANSPORT ROLLERS just ahead of the DENSITOMETER TURNAROUND use the strip of film to actuate the DENSITOMETER EXIT SENSOR to avoid a film jam error Leave the SENSOR actuated for 10 15 seconds Grasp and remove the film before it enters the TURNAROUND Examine the film If it does not have scratches the problem is in the DENSITOMETER TURNAROUND If it has scratches the problem is ahead of the DENSITOMETER FILM DIVERTER FELT PAD etc Advance to the next step to isolate the problem Liftthe PROCESSOR HEAD SHIELD to expose the FILM DIVERTER and FELT PAD 7 Asthe film enters the PROCESSOR use the strip of film to actuate the DENSITOMETER EXIT SENSOR Caution The film is hot after it passes over the heated DRUM Use gloves while grasping and handling it 8 Grasp and remove the film just after it passes the FILM DIVERTER DO NOT allow itto touch the FELT PAD 9 Examine the film If it has scratches the FILM DIVERTER is the problem If it does not have scratches the problem is the FELT PAD orthe COOLING PLATE 10 See paragraph 7 6 5 for recommendations for removing the cause of film scratches 7 66 7F 3318 2005 J uly Rev Section 7 Troubleshooting 7 6 4 Locating the Cause of Scratching in the FILM PLATEN 1 Remove the IMAGING MODULE paragraph 4 11 1 2
299. he problem recurs with the new CARTRIDGE a service call should be placed The operator can choose to run the SYSTEM in manual mode until service corrects the problem FE Action The Field Engineer should check for defective film and check PROCESSOR temperature 2005 J uly Rev 7F3318 8 53 Service Manual 8 5 51 21 632 Dmax Not Met LOCAL PANEL Message Log Message DICOM Message Calibration Failed Film Drawer Calibration Failed Dmax not CALIBRATION Dmax Outside Target met ERR Alarm sounds Summary The Dmax requirement was not met on a calibration print The error is detected when the Gray Scale Manager software receives the DENSITOMETER readings from a calibration sheet that has just been processed An error is declared if the calibration sheet does not have a wedge with the required Dmax value The most likely cause is old film or too low PROCESSOR temperature Result of Error The user can still acquire normally but new print jobs will not be initiated unless the SYSTEM is set into manual mode no AIQC User Action The operator should try a different FILM CARTRIDGE If the problem recurs with the new CARTRIDGE a service call should be placed The operator can choose to run the SYSTEM in manual mode until service corrects the problem FE Action 1 Check the GSM log for Step Wedge values See the sample log of normal values below 2 Check for defective film and check PROCESSOR temperature 8 54 7F3318 2005 J ul
300. he transfer counter reached zero indicating that all the pixels expected to be transferred were actually transferred 6 2 2 2 UART Circuit for Serial Communication with MCS One channel of a DUART on the PCIO BOARD is used for serial communication with the MCS The serial lines to and from the MCS connect with the UART in the MASTER CPU on the MCS BOARD On the PCIO side of the UART communication is implemented on the pass through bus of the PCI Interface Controller Data is passed to and from the UART on the PCIO side as 8 bit data When serial data is received by the UART from the MCS the UART generates an interrupt that is sentto the PCIO Interface FPGA which controls activity on the Add on Bus ofthe PCIO BOARD 6 3 DRE Software The DRE COMPUTER is responsible for acquiring queueing and controlling DICOM Basic Grayscale Print Class jobs received from up to12 SCUs processing the images and sending them to the MCS for printing It functions as a MIM PRINT SERVER The DRE also runs a Web Server that communicates with the LOCAL PANEL and the SERVICE TOOL to allow users and Field Engineers to monitor and control the system 6 3 1 General Software Functions A typical film session might use the following negotiations between a MODALITY SCU and the DRE serving as a MIM 1 The SCU establishes an association with the DRE and negotiates the Basic Grayscale Print Class service 2 The SCU queries status of the IMAGER 3 The DRE resp
301. his indicates to the software that the ELEVATOR is rising Before a CARTRIDGE is opened the ELEVATOR is lowered When the hub ACTUATOR reaches home it interrupts SENSOR 512 and the SENSOR turns off indicating to the software that the ELEVATOR is home If 12 does notturn on or off as required the error is declared P robable causes of the error include a defective SENSOR or ELEVATOR MOTOR Result of Error The printer is unable to print Otherwise it can operate as normal acquiring queueing prints completing processing etc User Action 1 Restart the IMAGER 2 Ifthe error persists call Service FE Action 1 Use the SERVICE TOOL check the ELEVATOR HOME SENSOR paragraph 7 4 1 1 2 Check that the ELEVATOR MOTOR operates as follows a Press the Door Open key to close the FILM CARTRIDGE b Remove the REAR PANEL and set the SERVICE OVERRIDE SWITCH in the Service position c Power cycle the IMAGER and observe that the ELEVATOR STEPPER MOTOR cycles 3 Ifthe ELEVATOR STEPPER MOTOR does not operate check for Hazard 12 vdc at the test point on the MCS BOARD Refer to sheet 2 of the SYSTEM functional diagrams If Hazard 12 volt power is not there suspect the REAR PANEL INTERLOCK or RELAY K1 on the MCS BOARD If Hazard 12 volt power is present check the power CABLE between J 15 on the MCS BOARD and J on the FEEDER BOARD Also check wiring to the MOTOR If power is present and the wiring between components appears to be
302. ia the ROLLBACK KNOB 7 5 4 Preliminary Visual Inspection 7 5 4 1 Preparation 1 Remove the customer s FILM CARTRIDGE from the IMAGER and load a CARTRIDGE of transport film 2 Open the FRONT DOOR de energize the IMAGER and remove the REAR PANEL 3 Manually turn the ROLLBACK KNOB clockwise to roll back the foil on the CARTRIDGE COVER 2005 J uly Rev B 7F3318 7 51 Service Manual 7 5 4 2 Checking the ROLLBACK MODULE for Problems 1 1 Inspect the FILM GUARD see Figure 7 13 Is the entire top surface flat or has the CAM ARM been bent upward 2 Inspect the SEPARATOR TABS Are they bent down L 3 Manually turn ROLLBACK ROLLER toward the SEPARATOR TABS until they begin to lift see Figure 7 14 Check the clearance between the ROLLBACK ROLLER and the SEPARATOR TABS It must be at least 5 to 10 mm 4 If your inspection reveals problems advance to paragraph 7 5 6 1 to Remove and Inspect the ROLLBACK MODULE Half Shears EH LS 4 2 Separator Tabs Cam Arm must lie flat and Film Guards must be perpendicular Figure 7 13 ROLLBACK MODULE COMPONENTS 5 to 10 mm gap between Separator Tab and Rollback Roller Gap must be equal on both ends Knob just touching cam arm Figure 7 14 Spacing between SEPARATOR TABS and ROLLBACK ROLLER 7F 3318 2005 J uly Rev B Section 7 Troubleshooting 7 5 4 3 Checking the FILM PICKUP MODULE for Problems 1 Check that
303. ic of a linear in density behavior until maximum brightness is approached at which point the curves become flat 4000 3500 aaa 3000 SSS SSS 2500 2000 1500 1000 500 Eb s c ee m 8 ns e ee oes T 0 20 40 60 80 100 Input 2005 July 7F3318 2 55 Service Manual GEHYBO1 A hybrid TFT SET that supports the various imaging MODALITIES which might be connected toa GE AMBER WORKSTATION These MODALITIES include Fuji COMPUTED RADIOGRAPHY CR CT MR Ultrasound and any MODALITY that expects a linear in density PRINTER The following table defines how the 15 TFTs can best be applied to the various MODALITIES supported by this TFT SET Contrast Value Application TFT No Fuji CR with Dmax 2 6 Fuji CR with Dmax 2 7 Fuji CR with Dmax 2 8 Fuji CR with Dmax 2 9 Fuji CR with Dmax 3 0 Linear in Density Dmax 2 6 Linear in Density Dmax 2 6 Linear in Density Dmax 2 6 Linear in Density Dmax 2 6 10 Linear in Density Dmax 2 6 11 Ultrasound highest mid tone brightness 12 Ultrasound moderate mid tone brightness 13 Ultrasound CT or MR 14 CT or MR 15 CT or MR Ui gt UJ NJ rH 4000 ET ped eni Fus Aeg Ed po Be ees db 3500 A 5 3000 1 pum zs 2500 1 2000 4 SI Sai 1500 1000 500 7338 2005 4 Rev B Section 2 Installation GSDFO A TFT SET in which all 15 curves
304. ick Options to display a screen showing the column heads of the log You can use this screen to decrease the width of the log 7 72 7 3318 2005 J uly Rev B Section 7 Troubleshooting Options x Check only the columns that you want to display in the Log Viewer then click OK to continue App Classld Code EventType File Instanceld Level Line Module Sewerity Source Iv Subsystem Text Time Version Other Fields DK 5 To decrease the log to a usable width uncheck the column heads in the Display field that are of no use The items checked above are the most useful for troubleshooting in the field The others are for software design use L gt Note You can also decrease or expand column width in the log by selecting the lines between the column heads and moving the column left or right 6 Click OK 7 Scroll the log as necessary See Sample Logs 1 and 2 at the end of this section for detailed examples of Application Logs gt Note Use of the function keys at the top of the log screen are described in Log Keying Functions in the next paragraph 7 10 2 2 Log Keying Functions 1 Start Click Start at any time to specify parameters for retrieving a new log The Log Retrieval screen will display 2005 J uly Rev 7F3318 7 73 Service Manual Log Retrieval a x The current server time is 2004 06 08 15 2
305. ickup Motor DCM2 Close Feed Rollers DCM4 Start Pickup Motor Up Film Jam in Area 1 Film Pickup No Feeder EEDER CYCLE TIMEOUT Yes Local Panel 21 117 Film Jam in Area 1 Film Pickup Feeder Feeder Pickup at Home Position VACUUM_RELEASE S3 UB _TIMEOUT Vacuum has been released Yes Feeder Yes Stop Pickup Motor DCM2 Local Panel 21 118 Internal Hardware Pickup Complete Failure Film Pickup Continue with Pickup 10 Pickup 3 Legend Sn UB Sensor is Unblocked on 1 Sn Sensor is Blocked off 0 Sn B gt UB gt B Sensor N starts Blocked then goes to Unblocked then Blocked again Figure 6 17 Pickup Operation Sheet 3 of 3 6 36 7F3318 2005 uly Rev B Section 6 Theory of Operation Load Platen from Tray Sheet 1 of 2 Waiting until previous film clears Platen see Unload Platen MCS Platen Film Sensor All film MCS cleared Wait x Seconds Platen S6 On MCS No Feed Film Mes Start Feed Roller Start Platen Roller Motor Step1 Motor Step2 Load Direction MCS Wait x Seconds Platen Film Yes Film at Sensor Continue with laten Load Platen P S6 On Feeder No MCS e Turnoff Feed Motor Feed Complete Open Feed Rollers Prestage pickup MCS Stop Platen Roller Motor Step2 Assumptions Yes Film is in Low er Feed Rollers is empty LocalPane
306. ies for the subsystem to be retrieved and logs to be written sorted and retrieved by use of the ID Each subsystem is assigned a range of error codes which if possible are the same error codes used in earlier IMAGERS for similar problems Errors within the IMAGER are identified by a sequence of 5 digits consisting of the subsystem ID and the error code for example 28 509 The first 2 digits in the example identify the PROCESSOR as the subsystem and the following 3 digits identify the type of error the PROCESSOR failed to warm up in time The following table identifies the subsystems and their ID numbers Subsystem ID Subsystem Name Error Code Structure PACSLink Software General PACSLink Service Interface mport Delivery Network Storage 0 1 2 3 XXX 4 5 XXX wj N MCS Interface Server 0 elivery Interface ocal Panel ervice Tool m J m 1 In 2XXX Un m 3 XXX zt eneral MCS ILM PICKUP AND FEED F TAG ILM TRANSPORT PTICS ROCESSOR ENSITOMETER U N N N N NI N N olej J 8 4 2 Error Severity Levels e 0 Fatal An error has occurred that cannot be reversed The system will have to be restarted The user will be notified e 1 Alert A temporary problem has occurred which can be corrected by the user e 2 Warning An event occurred which the user shoul
307. if the IMAGER is installed in a different time zone When the Time Zone setting is changed the Time and Date should display correctly 2 To correct the Time Zone setting a Click Modify b Select the correct Time Zone from the Time Zone dropdown menu c Click Save 3 Ifthe Time value is incorrect a Click Modify b Select a field in the Time window and use the Arrows to increase or decrease the time c Click Save d Notify Service Engineering that the time was incorrect and had to be changed L gt Note The Date can be changed only by Level 5 personnel If necessary you can obtain 24 hours Level 5 access to the IMAGER from TSC 4 Ifthe Date display is not correct a Obtain Level 5 access to the the IMAGER from the TSC b Click Modify 2 34 a F3318 2005July Rev B Section 2 Installation c Use the Date dropdown calendar or select fields in the Date window to change the date d Click Save 5 If daylight saving time applies in the area of the installation a Click Modify b Place a check in the Automatically adjust clock for daylight savings time check box c Click Save 2 6 4 Checking the Values for DICOM Source Communications 1 From the main menu of the SERVICE TOOL select Configuration gt DICOM SCP Communications DICOM Source Communications DICOM Source Communications Port Number 5040 m Association Limit 12 3 Source Name
308. igure 4 12 3 Loosen the SCREW on the left side of the SENSOR COVER BOX and pivot the COVER BOX over and to the left to expose the SENSOR 4 Disconnectthe PLUG from the SENSOR CONNECTOR Caution If the SENSOR is to be replaced be very careful not to damage the clips during removal Also be careful not to damage the fragile ACTUATOR of the SENSOR during disassembly and reassembly 5 Gently rock the SENSOR back and forth to disengage its CLIPS from the CHASSIS 8100 71L Figure 4 12 Removing the DENSITOMETER EXIT SENSOR 2005 J uly Rev 7F3318 4 15 Service Manual 4 4 3 DENSITOMETER LIGHT SOURCE ASSEMBLY Caution Any CIRCUIT BOARD that is replaced in the IMAGER must be returned to Kodak for rework or disposed of properly PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS contain lead 1 De energize the IMAGER and remove the DENSITOMETER MODULE 4 4 1 A Warning When the POWER CORD is plugged in hazardous voltages are present in some areas of the IMAGER These voltages can cause severe injury or death 2 Disconnect the 2 ELECTRICAL PLUGS from the BOARD Figure 4 13 Remove 2 ATTACHING SCREWS and remove the LIGHT SOURCE BOARD 4 After reassembly and reinstallation of the DENSITOMETER MODULE adjust the light source reference level as described in paragraph 3 5 in Adjustments 8100 72L Figure 4 13 Removing the LIGHT SOURCE BOARD 7F 3318 2005 J
309. iled 3 Check the RJ 45 CONNECTORS and the cabling between the MCS BOARD and DENSITOMETER BOARD 4 Swap RJ 45 CONNECTORS on the MCS BOARD as follows a Power off b Swap the 45 forthe DENSITOMETER with the RJ 45 CONNECTOR for any of the other MicroComm peripherals c Power up d Check whether the other MicroComm peripheral failed If it did the RJ 45 or cabling is bad 5 Ifthe RJ 45 CONNECTORS and cabling are OK very likely either DENSITOMETER BOARD or its LIGHT SOURCE BOARD is defective 2005 J uly Rev 7F3318 8 97 Service Manual From RF Tag Module Test 4 Densitometer Module Tests This routine begins about 63 seconds after power on It checks outputs of the Densitometer with the light source off Contact then on and confirms that the difference in outputs is within established limits Densitometer micro system Note Test failure can be the result of open imager door or rear panel If an error occurs repeat power on self test with the door closed and the rear panel installed Micro respond With light source off read Densitometer Y Turn on light source and read Densitometer Y Compare dark and light offset values Difference must not be too small No 29 924 Difference between values within limits To Optics Module Diagnostics 8100 230A Figure 8 4 DENSITOMETER Module Diagnostics
310. ilm Cups Engaged Sensor which indicates that the suction cups have rotated down to engage the film Feed Roller Open Sensor which indicates whether the feed rollers are open or closed e Cartridge Present Sensor which indicates that a film cartridge is loaded e Rollback Home Sensor which indicates that the film cartridge is closed Elevator Home Sensor which indicates that the elevator is in the home lowered position All 8 sensors are identical electronically and have the same pinout configuration Since the sensors are the infrared type and thus have the potential of exposing film the Slave CPU switches them off and on as needed by means of the SENSOR CONTROL line When this line is low the sensors are off To read sensor status the CPU sets the line high providing a ground for the sensor circuits through Q1 All the sensors operate with the same sense When a sensor is blocked i e no light is reaching the detector side the output of the sensor is a logic 0 low As shown on sheet 2 of the 8150 Functional Diagrams the Feeder Control Board contains 2 jumper plugs for use by a service technician Functional Diagrams are on the Kodak Health Imaging Digital Output Service Collection CD set The jumper on plug J P3 will provide a full time ground for the sensor circuits if placed in the SENSORS ON position bypassing CPU control Also the jumper on plug J P2 can be used to activate the 8 LEDs on the board for trouble
311. ilm or did not complete the second film separation movement down to up Sequence of Events The IMAGER is unable to pick up film and print It can still accept and queue new jobs Phone Fix Operator Correctable 1 Restart the IMAGER 2 Ifthe error persists call Service On Site Technician Correctable 1 Check the Application Log to isolate the problem 2 Use the SERVICE TOOL to check the CUPS ENGAGED SENSOR 3 Remove the REAR PANEL 4 Check whether film has been pushed forward onto the adhesive on the CARTRIDGE This can be caused by A film separation problem perhaps caused by sticky film preceding film still remaining in the FEED ROLLERS 5 Checkthe VACUUM CUPS They must be clean and undamaged They must be screwed on snugly and not overtightened 8 38 7F3318 2005 J uly Rev B Section 8 QuickSheets 8 5 36 Error 21 131 ELEVATOR Failure LOCAL PANEL Message Log Message DICOM Message Tray Elevator J ammed The elevator did not return to the BAD SUPPLY 1 Alert Alarm sounds home position down when the door MGZ was closed or failed to raise tray before door opened Summary The ELEVATOR did not return to the home position after the DOOR was closed or failed to raise the ELEVATOR before the DOOR was opened After a FILM CARTRIDGE is closed the ELEVATOR MOTOR is turned on to raise the CARTRIDGE As the ELEVATOR rises its hub ACTUATOR lifts from ELEVATOR HOME SENSOR S12 and the SENSOR turns on T
312. image data and provide the serial link between the two The only way to Clear the error is to re establish communications Result of Error The IMAGER is unable to print films and films in progress will not be completed The IMAGER can accept new jobs but new films will not be initiated User Action 1 Restart the IMAGER 2 Ifthe error persists call Service FE Action Suspect components in most likely order software in MCS MICROS no compatible with DRE software corrupt DRE software bad PCIO BOARD bad CABLES or connections bad HARD DRIVE There are 3 basic causes of the communication link failure that generates error 10 910 1 The DRE failed to boot 2 The MCS software is not compatible with the DRE software 3 The DRE booted successfully but a hardware failure occurred such as in likely order the PCIO BOARD in the DRE failed or the ribbon CABLE between the DRE and MCS is defective or has a bad connection 8 5 15 10 x x x Problem For this type of problem do the following 1 Load the ppp ip change vbs script onto your laptop 2 Connect to the machine WebLink 3 Select Diagnostics gt Scripts 4 Using the script from Step 1 press the Local button and load the script If you were not able to find the script copy paste or type these lines into the script window dim oShell oExec sLine sNewIP sP rompt addArray addStr sVar sPrompt Make sure the IP Address is unique and is in the x x x x subnet
313. it will display 2005 J uly Rev B 7 3318 Service Manual 2 If you wish to abort a current test click Stop 3 To display the results of a completed diagnostic select Test Results Current Status Test Results Test Results Diagnostic MCSDensitometerDiagnostics RunDiag View Save Summary Final Results Test RunDiag executed at 2004 24 05T12 14 55 Status Pass Density Offset 4096 Density Reference 1976863100 4 From the Diagnostic dropdown menu select the name of the desired test 5 To display a summary of the test results click View 6 To save the summary to the HARD DRIVE of your LAPTOP COMPUTER click Save 7 Store the file in a folder on your LAPTOP COMPUTER 7 24 7 3318 2005 J uly Rev B Section 7 Troubleshooting 7 2 16 Testing Communication on the Network The network communications tests include a Ping and a DICOM Echo test 1 From the main menu of the SERVICE TOOL select Diagnostics gt Network Ping DICOM Echo Ping This test will ping another device across the network IP Address 149 98 199 151 2 Count E Time Out ooo ms r status Complete Pass Summary Final Results Test Ping executed at 2004 24 05T13 47 15 Status Pass Ping Result Reply received from 149 968 199 151 time 30ms 2 Ping test to check that the IMAGER can contact other devices on the network a
314. ith another and translates data if the networks have different communication formats GSM Grayscale Manager HPT Host Protocol Translator HTML HyperText Markup Language The source language used for documents on the web It embeds commands that determine formatting along with the text to be displayed HTTP Hypertext Transport Protocol The protocol used to transport a page from one host to another on the web H W Hardware Hypertext A set of documents in which the documents contain embedded references to other documents in their text Image Profile A term categorizing a subset of video parameters that describe the image content of the video signal I O Input O utput IP Address Internet Protocol Address The numeric address of a site on the network e g 163 228 42 82 An IP address is actually a 32 bit binary number For convenience the number is expressed in dotted decimal notation which expresses each 8 bit section of the 32 bit number as a decimal value and uses periods to separate the four sections For example 10000001 00110100 00000110 00000000 binary is expressed in dotted decimal as 129 52 6 0 LCD Liquid Crystal Display LED Light Emitting Diode LUT Lookup Table MCS Machine Control System The subsystem in the IMAGER that controls the printing process MPC Maintenance Personal Computer OMBC Optics Module Control Board PAL Programmable Array Logic PCI Peripheral Component Interconnect 1 4 3318 2005 uly REV
315. ize the IMAGER and disconnect the POWER CORD Remove the REAR PANEL Remove the 2 ATTACHING SCREWS from the POWER SUPPLY BASE Figure 4 50 Open the FRONT DOOR and remove 2 ATTACHING SCREWS from the other end of the POWER SUPPLY 6 Pullthe POWER SUPPLY out the back of the IMAGER far enough to expose the CABLE connections atthe center of the ASSEMBLY 7 Disconnectthe AC POWER CABLE Figure 4 50 8 Disconnectthe 2 DC CABLE CONNECTORS from the POWER SUPPLY BOARD 9 Carefully pull the POWER SUPPLY from the IMAGER 10 If you are installing a new POWER ASSEMBLY remove the VOLTAGE SELECTION PLUG and install itin the new ASSEMBLY OY a eS U s x LAS Top View of POWER ASSEMBLY Figure 4 50 Removing the POWER ASSEMBLY 2005 J uly Rev B 7F3318 4 63 Service Manual 4 13 MCS ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS This procedure removes the INTERLOCKS CIRCUIT BOARDS SERVICE OVERRIDE SWITCH etc Caution To avoid damage to sensitive ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS always wear an ANTI STATIC WRIST STRAP when handling CIRCUIT BOARDS CIRCUIT BOARDS contain lead and replaced BOARDS must be returned to Kodak for rework or disposed of properly Preliminary Do the Preliminary procedure before doing any disassembly procedures 1 Remove the SUPPLY CARTRIDGE A Warning When the POWER CORD is plugged in hazardous voltages are present in some areas of the IMAGER These voltages can cau
316. ize the IMAGER and disconnect the POWER CORD Remove the FILM PICKUP MODULE 4 6 1 and set it on a stable work surface 4 Carefully peel off the PAD that covers the FILM PICKUP HEEL taking care not to damage the 2 SENSOR ACTUATORS that extend through the HEEL see Figure 4 18 Caution ISOPROPYL ALCOHOL is highly flammable Follow the manufacturer s instructions for safe use and handling 5 Use alcohol wipes to clean off the adhesive remaining on the HEEL after the PAD is removed Make Sure all the adhesive is removed L gt Note Make sure all the old adhesive is removed from the HEEL Check the edges of the HEEL If the new HEEL PAD does not adhere properly it could hang up and cause problems 6 Installa NEW PAD as follows a Peel off the protective layer from the adhesive surface inside of the PAD b Apply 1 edge of the PAD to the heel and gradually press the adhesive surface of the PAD to the HEEL working from 1 side toward the other side of the HEEL Make sure you do not leave any air bubbles between the PAD and the HEEL Heel Sensor 2 8100 80C Figure 4 18 Replacing the PAD on the FILM PICKUP HEEL 2005 July Rev 7F3318 4 21 Service Manual 4 6 4 FILM PICKUP OPTICAL SENSORS 53 S4 S5 510 1 Remove the SUPPLY CARTRIDGE A Warning When the POWER CORD is plugged in hazardous voltages are present in some areas of the IMAGER These voltages can cause severe injury or death De energize the I
317. k that the RTD is not open Resistance across the RTD should be 1k to 1 7K If the RTD circuit is open replace the DRUM ASSEMBLY 8 90 7F 3318 2005 J uly Rev B Section 8 QuickSheets 8 5 77 28 509 PROCESSOR Warmup Failure LOCAL PANEL Message Log Message DICOM Message Severity Processor Warm up Failure Processor failed to warm up in the PROC DOWN 0 Fatal Alarm sounds specified time Summary The PROCESSOR failed to warm up in the programmed time Refer to sheet 2 of the SYSTEM Functional Block Wiring Diagram When power is applied to the IMAGER the PROCESSOR DRUM turns on controlled by the SSR DRUM PROC signal from the MCS BOARD This pulse width modulated signal remains low active until the PROCESSOR DRUM RTD indicates that the DRUM is at operating temperature See 28 506 for a description of RTD functions The normal warmup process takes from 18 20 minutes As long as the SSR DRUM PROC signal is low the K1 SOLID STATE RELAY on the PROCESSOR INTERFACE BOARD PIB routes 120 vac to the DRUM HEATER Note that the DRUM HEATER element circuit includes a resettable THERMAL BREAKER The 120 vac is applied through RELAY K2 on PIB The ac power should be present at 1 of the PIB as long as the TOP HOOD INTERLOCK is closed HOOD down The program generates the error as follows Given the current sensed DRUM temperature the program estimates that with heat turned on the desired temperature level should be reached within a s
318. l 2 CABLE Sensor Feed 5 1 MOTOR DC Feed Rollers 1 1 CAM Driver Feed RONG ori Rx ERR Rx ER vedios kiaro sr 1 7F3318 2005 J uly Rev B Section 9 Illustrated Parts Breakdown Figure 9 10 IMAGING EXPOSURE ASSEMBLY 9 15 2005 J uly Rev 7F3318 Service Manual Figure 9 10 IMAGING EXPOSURE ASSEMBLY Item No Part Number Ios Notavailable 2 Notavailable 2d vss SP 8E7337 pit S P96 0000 5458 3 Ad es cm S P96 0000 0850 6 Bots dus S P96 0000 2577 3 B ura SP96 0000 2573 2 noc SP26 1003 7485 4 SP96 0000 2864 5 SP74 0500 5708 7 10 sa SP26 1003 7119 9 DL ovs SP8F0272 L2 4 SP 70 0701 4483 0 I3 22v SP96 0000 4200 0 14 vais 5 7 118 15 205 SP7F1018 16 SP7F1019 If 5 80 9550 2862 8 225 SP 96 0000 0383 8 I9 ss SP96 0000 2624 3 P SP12 7996 2818 0 215 SP96 0000 4167 1 22 nita 5 7 1057 23 2x3 5 7 1185 2 SP7F1025 25 SP26 1003 7119 9 20 unis SP96 0000 1325 8 SP 26 1011 6195 3 SP8E8757 2164 9 16 Description IMAGING EXPOSURE ASSEMBLY SCANNER MODULE KIT Includes Optics Module Optics Translation Module and items 3 through 7 OPTIGS FRU VERS STEPPER MOTOR MOUNTING ASSY Optics T
319. l No EF 26 164 Retry Picku Film Jam in Area 1 gt d Override Front Door Note film may prevent cartridge from closing ID Platen4 Figure 6 18 Load Platen Operation Sheet 1 of 2 2005 July Rev B 7F3318 6 37 Service Manual Load Platen from Tray Sheet 2 of 2 MCS Count Sheets NCS cum sm No Feed until leading edge is atgravity cars Switch Speed to 8 ips Film all the way onto Sensor Platen S6 Off Turn off Feed Motor mcs Yes Open Feed Rollers Feed Complete Prestage pickup MCS Set Platen Roller Motor Step2 to slow speed 0 5 ips MCS Start Optics Translate Motor Step 4 Scan Direction Center Film Move Film Centering Motor on Platen Step7 to center then to home MCS Stop Paten Roller Motor Step2 Go to Expose Operation 21 134 Cartridge Empty No Im Paten Fi mE PLATEN LOAD timeout Yes oca Pane Locg 26 164 Film Jam in Area 2 Film Jamin Exposure Area Override Front Door Note Film may prevent cartridge from closing ID LoadPlaten2 Figure 6 18 Load Platen Operation Sheet 2 of 2 7F3318 2005 uly Rev B Expose Operation MCS Wait for Start of Page MCS Start Exposing Optics Exposure Done Interrupt Is exposure done Yes MCS m Stop Exposing LLLI Optics MCS Hardware Detected xposure Errors No Loca Panel Log Error 20 91
320. l and serial numbers of the IMAGER Print count e MCS FIRMWARE version number 6 26 7F 3318 2005 J uly Rev B Section 6 Theory of Operation e Film size type and grade Date the information from the iMAGER was communicated Calibration information including source of calibration request and laser dynamic range Error information 6 4 5 1 RF TAG SUBSYSTEM COMPONENTS The RF TAG SUBSYSTEM includes the following components see illustration below L gt Note Fora more detailed illustration of the RF TAG SUBSYSTEMS see sheet 2 of the 8150 Functional Diagrams Functional Diagrams are on the Kodak Health Imaging Digital Output S ervice Collection CD set RF TAG INTERFACE BOARD This BOARD contains a micro which communicates at 512 baud with the MCS on the MicroComm serial channel The micro builds commands which can be recognized by the RF READER BOARD and sends these through a circuit which converts the VCC or TTL levels to 8 volt RS 232 levels The commands are sent at 67 4 baud to the READER BOARD Data received from the READER BOARD goes through a reverse conversion process before being input to the micro The RF TAG INTERFACE BOARD contains a pair of DIP SWITCHES The left SWITCH which is normally open down can be closed to test the ROLLBACK OPEN SENSOR The right SWITCH which is normally down in the 8150 IMAGER is used in 8200 IMAGERS to identify the position of the ROLLBACK MODULE as upper or lower
321. l down to the bottom of the screen and click Download to place the file in the ES repository When the File Download window indicates that the file download has been submitted click OK Under Summary click View to verify that the file is in the ES repository Check that the Pending Messages File Repository box contains a date and time EST for the generated file Change the refresh interval to 5 seconds and click Start Auto Refresh After the file has been downloaded the Pending Messages box will indicate that there are no pending messages S elect Administration gt S ystem tabs and click System Log to display error messages If there is a downloading error contact RMS Support or wait and try again S elect Applications Diagnostics tabs Under Properties click Get Values In the Readable Properties window check the Property box Click Request Change the refresh interval to 5 seconds and click Start Auto Refresh Under Remote Access click Connect to Device The Remote Access screen appears Wait for Status column entries to display Completed Click Connect SecureLink Click OK no user name or password is needed The Secure Link P assword screen appears Enter the Secure Link password Enter the IP Address 127 0 0 1 in the IP Address box of the Secure Link screen Enter the port number displayed on the Remote Access Session screen 5959 into the Port box of the Secure Link screen Click Connect to connect Secure Link to the
322. l memory in the DRE in S DRAM which is reserved for page buffer use by means of the MAXMEM parameter in the BOOT INI file of Windows 2000 The PCIO Driver maps this physical memory which cannot be used by Windows 2000 for other purposes for use as a page buffer This technique is required to meet specific data transfer timing requirements of the PCIO BOARD 6 10 7F3318 2005 J uly Rev B Section 6 Theory of Operation 6 3 4 3 MCS MIS Command Server The MCS MIS Command Server handles all command messages between the DRE and the MCS The communication link between the DRE and the MASTER CPU of the MCS is over a serial channel This channel requires a different communication protocol from the interfaces used for the other software components in the DRE which use Microsoft COM Component Object Model The Command Server uses the SNMP v1 protocol to couple the DRE and the MCS in a reliable way that tolerates lost or damaged packets MCS Command Client converts the command requests from DRE clients to the SNMP protocol to communicate with the MASTER CPU on the MCS BOARD 6 3 4 4 Service Providers The Service Providers are COM interfaces that provide access to software components of the DRE and to the MCS subsystems through the MCS Interface Server to allow the SERVICE TOOL to perform configuration and diagnostics 6 3 5 MCS Database Server This database stores information that is specific to the MCS rather than the DRE It includes e Er
323. le the LEDs 6 Setthe JUMPER SENSORS to short pins 1 and 2 This will enable the SENSORS 7 Energize the IMAGER and allow it to warm up Testing 1 Testthe S1 CARTRIDGE PRESENCE S2 ROLLBACK HOME or S12 ELEVATOR HOME SENSOR as follows a Check the state of the SENSOR LED1 CARTRIDGE PRESENCE should be on LED2 ROLLBACK HOME on and LED3 ELEVATOR HOME off b Load a CARTRIDGE of transport waste film Setthe SERVICE OVERRIDE SWITCH to the Normal position then back to the Service position Allow time for the CARTRIDGE to close Check that the LED has changed state 2 Testthe PICKUP POSITION S3 FILM SURFACE S4 CUPS ENGAGED S10 or FEED ROLLER OPEN S11 SENSOR as follows a Check the current state of LED4 for 3 LED5 for S4 LED7 for 10 or LE D8 for S11 b Run a print sequence and check that the LED toggles during the sequence 3 After completing the test reset UMPERS JP2 and in their normal positions 2 3 Remove the transport FILM CARTRIDGE and restore the IMAGER to normal operating state unless you are going to test SENSORS S6 through S9 L gt Note To test FILM OUT SENSOR S5 via LED6 you will have to manually toggle the SENSOR 7 4 1 2 Testing ROLLBACK COMPLETE SENSOR S13 with LEDs 1 Check thatthe IMAGER is in the Preliminary state see paragraph 7 4 1 1 except ignore the settings of the JUMPERS FILM CARTRIDGE should be removed FRONT DOOR open and IM
324. lly shows the number of times an error has occurred since the last time the count was reset Select any error counts to be reset and select Reset Only the Current values may be reset Dry iew 8150 810000000 Application Error Code Count Last Cleared Select 298150 0 1 Never DV 8150 10910 400 Never 98150 12003 117 Never 98150 13001 100 Never 298150 21115 1 Never 08150 26163 1 Newer MIM 165 49 Never MIM 250 1 Never MIM 300 45 Never MIM 1503 2 Never MIM 1505 2 Never m 1441 Newer L gt Note The error codes in the tally are grouped by application DV8150 MIM or Service P latform For descriptions of error codes see the Quicksheets in this manual a To reset the count for any error to 0 click Select for that error and then click Reset at the bottom of the screen b If you wish to reset the count for all errors in the list click Select All and then Reset 2005 July Rev B 7F3318 7 83 Service Manual 2 To access the Lifetime Tally select Lifetime Note that this screen does not include the Reset function Current Lifetime r LifeTime The lifetime error tally shows the number of times an error has occurred since product installation Serial Number 810000000 Application Error Code Count Last Occurred 018150 0 1 2004 05 21 28150 10910 400 2004 06 08 298150 12003 117 2004 06 08 DV 8150 13001 100 2004 06 08 DV8150 21115 1 2004 05 21 DV8150 26163 1 2004 05
325. lm from the film cartridge and feeding it to the platen The board contains in addition to a slave CPU drive circuits for three dc motors and two stepper motors The Slave CPU receives inputs from eight optical sensors that provide position information relating to mechanical components that handle film Timing for all feeder control functions is controlled by the Slave CPU 6 4 6 1 Motor Control The Feeder Control Board controls the following 5 motors The Elevator Stepper motor which raises and lowers the film cartridge in the rollback tray The Rollback DC Motor which rolls the cartridge lid open or closed The Pickup DC Motor which moves the pickup cups up and down The Feed Roller Open DC Motor which opens and closes the film feed rollers to capture the film positioned by the pickup cups TheFeed Roller Stepper Motor which drives the film from the cartridge to the platen rollers DC Motor Drive The 3 identical bidirectional dc motors operate on 12 volts dc The drivers for the motors do not provide current limiting When the motors are turned on they are essentially placed across the 12 volt dc supply The only control applied to the motors aside from turning them off and on is in the direction of current flow through the motor windings Each motor driver has 2 control lines coming to it from the Slave CPU When these lines are at opposite digital levels the motor is energized When the lines are at the sam
326. ly Rev B Section 6 Theory of Operation 6 4 4 Densitometer Module The purpose of the Densitometer Module is to read and report film density values from Each step wedge in a calibration film The Dpatch if used The Densitometer Module includes the following components Densitometer Exit Sensor This sensor is used to detect the leading and trailing edges of the film to control the timing of density readings It is used also to detect film jams atthe exit of the film processor The sensor is located about 1 inch ahead of the densitometer emitter and detector in the film path e Light Source This is an LED circuit that is positioned on the opposite side of the film path from a detector on the Densitometer Board The light from the LED passing through the film is detected to provide an indication of the relative density of the image on the film The LED is turned on when required by the Slave Micro on the Densitometer Board Densitometer Board This board contains a Slave Micro that communicates with the Master Micro on the MCS Board to control density measurement and reporting In addition to the Slave Micro it contains a photodetector that reads the light passing through the film an A D Converter that converts the analog signal from the detector to digital data and a PAL that performs timing and logic functions 6 4 4 1 Step Wedge Calibration To perform a test calibration the imager prints a test film that has 19 stri
327. ly in roller bearings are pushed all the errors when trying to exit the entrance chute a jam occurs way into the platen and the the Platen assembly when trying to exit securing screws are tight Processor Drum The screws that hold the gear driven Check for loose screws and tighten Temperature Error 28 551 end of the drum have loosened The as necessary Check Voltage to amp 28 554 Drum Voltage to Frequency Converter Frequency Converter adjustment temperature does not adjustment 100KHz on the MCS 3 2 Processor Drum RTD reach the proper board is out of adjustment temperature in time or exceeds the temperature 7 2 Using the Service Tool Service WebLink The SERVICE TOOL Service WebLink provides the following functions e Configuration Includes tools for configuring the IMAGER Diagnostics Includes tools for testing components of the IMAGER Logs Provides access to logs of events that occur in the IMAGER Statistics Displays total numbers of images printed on all film sizes System Information Provides information about the IMAGER the service user and software versions Upgrade Provides ability to upgrade the DRE software and the MICROCONTROLLER applications of the MCS Utilities Includes such functions as Logoff Restart Shutdown Backup and Restore and image file transfer Control Panel Displays status of DRE MCS and SERVICE TOOL 2005 J uly Rev B 7 3318 7 5 Servi
328. m the CHASSIS RETAINER to release tension Figure 4 36 5 Foreach TORSION SPRING a Remove the SCREW securing the SPRING and pivot to the FEED ROLLER BRACKET b Slide the SPRING pivot free of the BRACKET c Remove the SPRING L gt Note In reassembly make sure the FLANGES of the PIVOTS Figure 4 32 for the TORSION SPRINGS are seated flat against the FEED ROLLER BRACKET Chassis Retainer Figure 4 36 Removing the Feed Roller Torsion Springs 2005 J uly Rev 7F3318 4 41 Service Manual 4 10 VERTICAL TRANSPORT ASSEMBLY 4 10 1 VERTICAL TRANSPORT MODULE Disassembly 1 Remove the SUPPLY CARTRIDGE A Warning When the POWER CORD is plugged in hazardous voltages are present in some areas of the IMAGER These voltages can cause severe injury or death De energize the IMAGER and disconnect the POWER CORD Open the FRONT DOOR Remove the REAR PANEL of the IMAGER At the rear of the IMAGER disconnect 2 ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS SENSOR and MOTOR See the Rear View in Figure 4 37 At the rear of the IMAGER remove 2 SCREWS Rear View 7 Atthe front of the IMAGER remove 2 SCREWS Front View 8 From the front of the IMAGER carefully slide the MODULE out oT e Front View Rear View Figure 4 37 Removing the VERTICAL TRANSPORT MODULE 4 42 7F3318 2005 J uly Rev B Section 4 Disassembly Reassembl 4 10 2 VERTICAL TRANSPORT SENSOR S8 1 Remove the SUPPLY CARTRIDGE
329. m the optimal amount of storage defined by the Low Watermark This is probably because there is a large number of jobs in the Pending or Undelivered Queues There will be other messages to clean up the queues such as e Alarms for jobs in the Pending Queue e MCS Communications errors that result in jobs being sent to the Undelivered Queue Jobs being rejected because their space requirements exceed the disk space available Result of Error None The system will function normally User Action None FE Action None 2005 J uly Rev 7F3318 8 13 Service Manual 8 5 11 Error 05 044 Low Watermark Has Been Reached LOCAL PANEL Message Log Message DICOM Message None No alarm Error in Storage Subsystem NORMAL 3 Notify Summary The low watermark has been reached in the Storage Subsystem Result of Error None The system will function normally User Action None FE Action None 8 14 7F 3318 2005 J uly Rev B Section 8 QuickSheets 8 5 12 Error 10 001 Delivery Subsystem Internal Software Error LOCAL PANEL Message Log Message DICOM Message Delivery Server Internal Delivery Server Internal Error PRINTER DOWN 0 F atal Error Alarm sounds Summary The internal software of the Delivery Server Subsystem has a problem The error can be caused by a number of problems such as persistent memory failures an object creation failure or a system call failure Result of Error The DRE is not functional User Action 1 R
330. mages on the page the sum of all Image Widths plus the separations between images cannot exceed the Image Width pixel value 4 Fromthe Printer Configuration screen select Page Formatting r Page Formatting r Capabilities IV Aspect Ratio Mix on Page Aspect Ratio Mix Row Image Size Mix in Standard Format Image Size Mix Row DICOM Annotation Box IV Requested Image Size Iv Requested Size Scale Iv Requested Size Mix on Page Requested Size Mix in Row IV Trim IV True Landscape IV Rotation IV Minify Crop Iv Tonescaling On Image Basis 5 Do not disable any of the Page Formatting Capabilities of the IMAGER unless instructed to by the customer 6 Check the Ranges on the lower part of the screen TF3318 2005July Rev B Section 2 Installation formatting ranges Maximum Images Per Band Maximum Bands Per Page Maximum Image Columns Maximum Image Rows Pixel Pitch Minimum Horizontal Separation Minimum Vertical Separation Trim Width Enabled Trim Width Disabled Maximum Modify Save Cancel Reset L gt Note You must check with the user before changing any of the Ranges values 7 If itis necessary to change any value on the Page Formatting screen a Click Modify b Enter the new value c Click Save 2005 July 7F3318 2 35 Service Manual 2 6 8 Configuring the LOCAL PANEL 1 From the
331. main menu of the SERVICE TOOL select Configuration gt MCS gt LP Display language Select the language to be displayed on the Local Panel If you change selected language you have to restart system for the change to take effect Language English 2 Timeout Set Local Panel Timeout If you change Timeout you have to restart system for the change to take effect Key Access Timeout 120 id r Key Operator Passcodes Set Passcodes exactly 6 numbers If you change any passcode you have to restart system for the change to take effect Key Op 1 Key Op 2 Key Op 3 Key Op 4 5 Key Op 6 KeyOp7 Keyvops Key Op 9 Key 10 First Callogg 2 Checkthe Display language window 3 If you need to change the language that will be used on the LOCAL PANEL a Click Modify b Selectthe desired language from the Language dropdown menu c Click Save gt Note Key Access Timeout is the number of seconds that passcode protected screens on the LOCAL PANEL will remain on before automatically closing and returning to the Status screen The timeout can be set from 30 to 300 seconds 4 f you wish to change the default timeout value a Click Modify b Selectthe desired timeout value 2360 IF 3318 2005July Rev B Section 2 Installation Click Save gt Note The Key Operator Passcodes section of the screen all
332. max and Dmin j Calibration Laser Digital Diode Values Hardware Values Digital Linear Anal Media 09 12 LUT Conv bits bits parity parity DRE MCS Figure 6 26 Image Path through GSM The main components of GSM include e Contrast LUT The image received from the MODALITY into PACS Link MIM is filtered through a Contrast LUT which is created from information from a specific Transfer Function table TFT which is modified by user defined values for Contrast and Dmax and the film Dmax and Dmin for each image on the film that has a unique contrast setting TFT This table selected at installation for the MODALITY defines the relationship between the digital values input form the MODALITY and the desired Transmittance T values output to the Laser Each TFT is a specific table selected from a TFT set of 15 tables Media LUT This LUT is created from the Film Model It contains the output laser diode values necessary for the desired sensitometries Film Model The Film Model defines the print characteristics for a particular lot of film It is created from The Dmin and Dmax constants defined for the film type The density step wedge data read from a calibration print The dynamic range of the Laser gt Note The 3 most recent Film Models are stored in the DRE When a film CARTRIDGE is opened the sensitometry information from the RF TAG is compared to the data in the
333. mmunications see Figure 6 4 A 12 bit plus parity digital output circuit for handling pixel data to be sentto the MCS AUART channel for serial communication with the MCS 6 4 7F3318 2005 J uly Rev B Section 6 Theory of Operation SERIAL COMM CPU FIFO PCIFIFO CPU BUS PCI BUS BRIDGE BRIDGE n CONTROL SDRAM as ae a cs a i a a an as a a a cp a er ee a a a Ss es Figure 6 4 PCIO BOARD Components 6 2 2 1 Digital Output Circuit The purpose of the output circuit is to move data out of the PCI to Add on FIFO as pixels are written to it after an SOL Start of Line signal has been issued by the MCS The data passes through the Digital 1 0 Controller FPGA from the PCI to Add on FIFO The PCIO Interface FPGA arbitrates use of the Add on Data Bus for the passage of data Following is a typical output sequence 1 2 3 4 Reset the output interface Write the number of pixels per line into a transfer counter Configure the PCIO Interface chip for bus mastership and to interrupt upon transfer count completion Issue the print command to the MCS 2005 J uly 7F3318 6 5 Service Manual 5 Wait for the transfer complete interrupt from the P CIO Interface chip 6 Verify that t
334. ms All films in the IMAGER will be reprinted The error can be cleared only by restarting the IMAGER User Action 1 Restart the IMAGER 2 Ifthe error persists call Service FE Action 1 Perform the DENSITOMETER reference level adjustment paragraph 3 5 8 100 7F 3318 2005 J uly Rev B Section 8 QuickSheets 8 5 83 29 932 MCS Cannot Communicate with DENSITOMETER Notification LOCAL PANEL Message Log Message DICOM Message Severity None MCS failed to communicate with NORMAL 3 Notify Densitometer Summary This notification to the Log occurs if the MCS tries to communicate with the DENSITOMETER MICRO but receives no response If 5 failures occur in succession error 29 931 is declared Result of Error None The IMAGER will function normally User Action None FE Action None 2005 J uly Rev 7F3318 8 101 Service Manual BLANK PAGE 8 102 7F 3318 2005 J uly Rev B Section 9 Illustrated Parts Breakdown Section 9 Illustrated Parts Breakdown Figure 9 0 SYSTEM OVERVIEW Figure 9 1 Cabinetry with Local Panel Figure 9 14 Internal Cabling Figure 9 2 Figure 9 3 Film Processor Roller Set Assembly Assemblies Figure 9 4 Densitometer Assembly Figure 9 12 Figure 9 5 Electroni
335. n 9 Illustrated Parts Breakdown Figure 9 8 VERTICAL TRANSPORT ASSEMBLY Figure 9 8 VERTICAL TRANSPORT ASSEMBLY Item No Part Number Description Qty SPS8F0280 VERTICAL TRANSPORT ASSEMBLY Includes items 2 6 1 PE N 5 7 118 STEPPER MOTOR AND SPROCKET ASSY Step 6U 1 Bs wins SP96 0000 4200 0 1 1 SP96 0000 0486 9 SWITCH Optical Flag Upper Vert Transport S8U 1 Did nds SP74 0401 9156 6 CABLE Sensor 2 branes C eke tei EHE VEO x EEG 1 75 SP7F1027 ROLLER ASSEMBLY 1 2005 J uly Rev 7 3318 9 13 Service Manual Figure 9 9 FILM FEED ROLLER ASSEMBLY Figure 9 9 FILM FEED ROLLER ASSEMBLY Item No Part Number C SP8F0277 2 es ees SP 96 0000 1383 7 Diaeta SP96 0000 1384 5 T tss 5 7 118 SP96 0000 0482 8 Ges sews SP7E8007 Tinian SP96 0000 2850 4 SP7F1030 MORE SP96 0000 4200 0 1072565 SP96 0000 4079 8 9 14 Description Qty FILM FEED ROLLER ASSEMBLY 2 SPRING Torsion Left Handed 1 SPRING Torsion Right 1 STEPPER MOTOR AND SPROCKET ASSEMBLY 1 SWITCH Optical Interrupt a Bene REI s 1 BEARING Roller Individua
336. n be used to control attenuation of the laser beam to achieve the desired beam strength during optics calibration Optics Module Control Functions The MCS software implements the following commands to control the optics module Reset Optics Electronics Module This command reinitializes the optics electronics and performs power up tests Turn Spinner Motor On This command turns on the Spinner Motor and controls the rate of rotation precisely Turn Spinner Motor Off This command turns off the Spinner Motor Set Attenuator Position This command moves the attenuator to the position indicated by the position parameter a value between 0 and 650 Display Attenuator Position This command returns a value between 0 and 650 indicating the position of the attenuator Measure Beam Power This command instructs the optics electronics to activate and reset the beam power monitor and to turn on the laser long enough for it to spin the laser beam onto the Start of Scan Detector at least three times before reading beam power from the A D Converter Report Beam Power This command instructs the Optics Module Slave Micro to return measured beam power to the MCS CPU Turn Laser On This command instructs the Optics Module Slave Micro to enable the laser Turn Laser Off This command instructs the Optics Module Slave Micro to disable the laser Execute Diagnostics This command instructs the optics to home the attenuator 6 22 7F 3318 2005 J u
337. n eet ne nenes 4 2 57 Kicker MOF arie AE or PUES ras 4 2 6 Processor Film Diverter Assembly 4 3 lt lt 4 4 Densitometer Assembly vs ee Lee Rte tr aed mde a m Bad 4 4 1 Densitometer Module 4 4 2 Densitometer Exit Sensor 59 4 4 3 Densitometer Light Source Assembly 4 4 4 Densitometer Board 4 5 Local Panel Assembly 4 6 Film Pickup 5 4 6 1 Film Pickup 4 6 2 Film Pickup 4 6 3 Film Pickup Heel Pad 4 6 4 Film Pickup Optical Sensors 53 54 55 10 4 6 5 Film Pickup 2 4 6 6 Film Pickup Vacuum 4 7 Rollback Assembly 4 7 1 Rollback Module 4 7 2 Rollback Motor DCM1 4 7 3 Cartridge P resent Sensor 51 4 7 4 Rollback Home Sensor 52 2005 J uly 7
338. nd Level 5 SE and TSC service personnel can access all machine functions shown in the table via SecureLink e Kodak Level 5 personnel can access IMAGER functions via Remote Management Services 7338 2005 J uly Rev Section 2 Installation 2 10 Editing the Service History Log 1 From the main menu of the SERVICE TOOL select System Information gt Service History Service History Use the lt and gt buttons to navigate through old service entries elect the Modify button to add new record DateTime 2004 06 04T12 29 00 ServiceCode 7653 15 of 15 ActivityGode 2 Problem O M Cause O M Solution OO M Parts DOO M Notes UserName Edward Pulju Save Cancel Download B B 2 Click Modify L gt Note The following fields on the screen are filled in automatically DateTime Service Code and your Secure Tunnel UserlD and UserName 3 Enter data relating to the installation in the other fields on the screen 4 Click Save 2005 J uly 7F3318 Service Manual 2 11 Guidelines for Selecting the Correct TFT Set and Related Parameters This section provides basic information that will help you to select the proper values for the following Image Quality parameters that must be input during configuration of SCP Services see procedure 2 6 6 TFT SetName Contrast mage Dmax e Smoothing Type 2 11 1 Definitions mm
339. nd queue new jobs but it will not initiate new films Films downstream from the PLATEN will be completed All other films will be reprinted The error can be cleared only by restarting the IMAGER User Action 1 Restart the IMAGER 2 Ifthe error persists call Service FE Action 1 The SPINNER MOTOR should be rotating if a print has been requested in the last half hour Listen for the sound of the MOTOR If the MOTOR is not spinning the SCANNER MODULE will have to be replaced If itis spinning assume that the speed of rotation is out of spec 2 The problem may be a noisy or out of spec 5 VDC SUPPLY possibly affecting operation of the SHAFT INDEX SENSOR For consistent monitoring of SPINNER speed the supply voltage must not be lower than 4 9 VDC as measured on the MCS BOARD Use VCC1 test point with ground at GND1 3 Ifthe DC SUPPLY is OK suspect one of the following components SHAFT INDEX SENSOR OPTICS SPINNER MOTOR or OPTICS MODULE CONTROL BOARD Since all these components are contained within the SCANNER MODULE if one of them fails the SCANNER MODULE must be replaced L gt Note If the SCANNER is not used for 30 minutes the SPINNER MOTOR is turned off Low volume sites have had some problems with the motor sticking because of infrequent use If this occurs the SCANNER MODULE must be replaced 8 74 7F 3318 2005 J uly Rev B Section 8 QuickSheets 8 5 66 27 602 Invalid POWER MONITOR Range with ATTEN
340. nd uses an object s name URL to determine which application should be used to access the object Carrier P rofile A term categorizing a subset of video parameters that describe the video signal itself as opposed to the image content carried on the video signal CGI Common Gateway Interface COM Communications P ort CPU Central Processing Unit The microprocessing chip in a computer DAC Digital to Analog Converter DICOM Digital Imaging and Communications in Medicine DLogE Density versus the Log of Exposure DMA Direct Memory Access Dmax Maximum Density Greatest possible image density i e the density of the black step of the gray scale Dmin Minimum Density The measured density of film base plus fog Can be referenced either to the film or the image Dpatch Density patch A patch of density 1 0 on the top border of the film DRE DICOM Raster Engine DUART Dual Universal Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter ECC Error Correction Code EPROM Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory EMC Electromagnetic Compatibility EOM End of Message EOT End of Transmission EU European Union FIFO First In First Out 2005 J uly Rev B 7 3318 1 3 Service Manual FPGA Field Programmable Gate Array FRDONE FIFO Read Done FREAD FIFO Read FRGNT FIFO Read Grant FRR FIFO Read Request FTP File Transfer Protocol FWDONE FIFO Write Done FWGNT FIFO Write Grant FWR FIFO Write Request Gateway A hardware device that links one network w
341. ns to drive out of the PLATEN PLATEN SENSOR S6 turns on As film drives up through the vertical transport area VERTICAL TRANSPORT SENSOR S8 should detect the leading edge of the film and turn on SENSOR S6 should turn off after 5 8 turns on indicating that the film has passed out of the exposure area If S8 does not turn on or S6 does not turn off as expected a jam has occurred the VERTICAL TRANSPORT Result or Error The IMAGER is unable to print Otherwise it can operate as normal acquiring queueing prints completing processing etc Films downstream from the PLATEN will be completed All other films will be reprinted Removing the jam clears the error when the FRONT DOOR is closed User Action 1 Open the FRONT DOOR 2 Remove jammed film 3 Close the FRONT DOOR FE Action Normally this message simply indicates that a jam has occurred and the error will be cleared when the user removes the jam and closes the FRONT DOOR However the error can also be caused by problems with either VERTICAL TRANSPORT SENSOR S8 or PLATEN FILM SENSOR S6 Check the MCS Log for 26 165 and trace backwards from the error looking for PLATEN FILM SENSOR S6 and S8 functionality 2005 J uly Rev 7F3318 8 67 Service Manual 8 5 59 Error 26 166 Film J am at VERTICAL TRANSPORT LOCAL PANEL Message Log Message DICOM Message Film J am in Area 4 Transport Film J am at Vertical Transport FILM JAM 1 Alert Alarm sounds Film at Vertical
342. nt select YES Include page num If the user wants the page number sequence Check with user ber in annotation in a multi page study to be annotated on the prints select YES Include hospital If the user wants the hospital name to be an Check with user name in annotation notated on the print select YES This name will be the same as that entered on the Ser vice Tracking screen 2005 J uly Rev B 7 3318 2 31 Service Manual Include modality ID If the user wants the modality ID to be anno Check with user in annotation tated on the print select YES See the item below Modality ID The Modality ID indicated will be printed in Check with user the Annotation Text Box on the print The ID includes the first 8 characters of the SCP node Name plus the 2 last octets of the SCU IP Address Annotation Override If you select YES the values entered forall SelectNO the annotation parameters will override any values sent down from the SCU Density Patch Use of the Density Patch is selectable only Default is YES but check with the for 14 x 17 in film user Image Resizing The 2 options are MINIFY SCALE or CROP Check with the user If MINIFY To minify is to decrease the image by SCALE is selected the IMAGER removing pixel data via a software will determine which type of de algorithm if the raw image is too large for agnification is to be used either the film When this occurs the minify MINIFY or SCALE i
343. ocedure below Reloading Parameters Using Local Scripts At times the Optic parameters will go to zero When this occurs error 27 641 will display on the Local Panel If this occurs do the following 1 Access the Service Tool Diagnostics S cripts 2 Click the REMOTE tab 3 Locate and click on SetF acettoS tretch2 vbs 4 Click RUN 5 Click on the Script RunTime tab and wait for PASS to be displayed 6 Click on Edit Run Script 7 Follow steps 2 thru 6 for the following scripts SetPixelStretch2 vbs b SetSOSDelay2 vbs 8 Click on Diagnostics MCS Optics Display Optics Data 9 Click RUN 10 The Optics values should no longer be zero Note the values established at this point are default values that may not provide a good image for your machine If the image is not acceptable continue with step 11 11 Print an internal SMPTE 8 84 7F3318 2005 J uly Rev B Section 8 QuickSheets 12 Examine the Horizontal bars with an eye loop and look for jagged edges If the edges are jagged you will need to change the Pixel Stretch parameter using the SetPixelStretch2 vbs script 13 Examine the position of the top of the image If the image is too far down or too far up the SOS Delay parameter will have to be changed using the SetSOSDelay2 vbs script 14 If steps 10 and 11 look good but the overall image does not look good the SetFacetToStretch2 vbs script value should be changed This will either be a 1 or 0
344. off Yes Feed Rollers are open Film Feed Roller Tests This routine begins about 36 seconds after power on It tests the Feed Roller Open Sensor and Feed Motor Open Motor and ensures that the film feed rollers are open Feed Roller Open Motor 1 Go back No y to start Run DCM4 Yes in closing direction Film Feed Motor Check This routine starts about 36 seconds after power on It allows the field engineer to observe operation of the Film Feed Motor Pump Vacuum Pump Check This routine starts about 36 seconds after power on It allows the field engineer to observe operation of the Vacuum Pump However this is difficult to observe Elevator Assembly Test This routine starts about 38 seconds after power on It exercises components of the Elevator Assembly and ensures that the elevator is down No Yes Elevator is home Feed Roller ____ Open Sensor Film Turn on Feed Step 1 for Motor 1 second Vacuum Turn on Pump Vacuum Pump Motor for 1 second From Sh Rollback 3 Tests Is 12 blocked off 2 Elevator i Home Sensor Elevator __ Step 8 Motor raise elevator 8 58 Is 12 unblocked on within 15 sec Yes Continue raising elevator for 1 second e Go back to start _ So field engineer can observe Run Step 8 to lowe
345. ollback Motor The pickup arm is home Pickup Position Sensor cartridge is loaded Cartridge Present Sensor The elevator is home Elevator P osition Sensor 2 Starts the Rollback Motor to roll back open the cover for a preset time then stops the motor 3 Reports status to the MCS Close Cartridge This command starts the Rollback Motor to close the cover for a preset time then stops the motor Stop Rollback This command stops the Rollback Motor and reports status to the MCS Diagnostics The rollback diagnostics move the rollback mechanism off home if it is home return it home and then report status to the MCS 6 4 7 Processor Interface Board The Processor Interface Board controls application of 120 volt ac power to the processor heater It is part of a control loop that includes 1 the Processor RTD which senses the current temperature of the processor 2 a Voltage to Frequency Converter which converts the analog signal from the RTD to a digital frequency modulated signal and 3 the Master CPU which calculates the power on duty cycle required to keep the heater at the required temperature The primary components of the P rocessor Interface Board are 2 relays Relay K2 When power is applied to thelMAGER and the top hood is closed this relay is energized and applies the Line hot side of 120 volts ac to the Load 1 terminal of Relay K1 The neutral line of 120 vac is applied directly to one side of the
346. om lens L1 to a photodiode which feeds a circuit that generates an error signal for feedback control of the driver Beam Attenuator A linearly variable neutral density filter is used to attenuate beam power to accommodate for variations in film speed Use of the attenuator allows the laser drive current levels to remain independent of film speed variations 6 4 3 4 Optics Translation Assembly The optics translation assembly see Figure 6 10 moves the optics module in the cross scan direction during exposure Speed and smoothness of motion must be precisely controlled Speed variation during translation will result in vertical bands or streaks of nonuniform density on the film image Also unstable motion during translation can cause inaccurate placement of pixels resulting in a variety of image artifacts Translation Carriage The optics module is mounted on a translation carriage that slides on a pair of cylindrical rails during translation Kinematic support is achieved by a pair of V shaped bearing surfaces and a flat sliding surface built into the carriage When the carriage slides on the rails there is little friction on the carriage in the translation direction while its position is rigidly determined in the other directions The cylindrical rails are precision ground to reduce friction Any marks or scratches on the rails can result in nonuniformity in translation speed Drive Mechanism The carriage is driven by 4 nylon coated steel
347. om the MOUNT 4 Remove 2 SCREWS to free the MOTOR 8100 85C Figure 4 31 Removing the Elevator Motor and Hub Assembly 2005 July Rev 7F3318 Service Manual 4 9 FEED ROLLER ASSEMBLY 4 9 1 FEED ROLLER MODULE 1 Remove the SUPPLY CARTRIDGES A Warning When the POWER CORD is plugged in hazardous voltages are present in some areas of the IMAGER These voltages can cause severe injury or death De energize the IMAGER and disconnect the POWER CORD Open the FRONT DOOR and remove the REAR PANEL Check that the FILM PICKUP MODULE is in the up position see paragraph 4 6 1 step 5 Remove 2 SCREWS from the front see Front View in Figure 4 32 Disconnect 3 ELECTRICAL CABLES see Rear View in Figure 4 32 Remove 2 SCREWS from the back side Rear View while supporting the FEED ROLLER MODULE Carefully lift and remove the MODULE from the machine CO OT deo OY FrontBackUpper FEED ROLLER MODULE Figure 4 32 Removing the FEED ROLLER MODULE 4 36 7F 3318 2005 J uly Rev B Section 4 Disassembly Reassembl 4 9 2 FEED ROLLER OPEN SENSOR 511 Preliminary 1 Remove the SUPPLY CARTRIDGE A Warning When the POWER CORD is plugged in hazardous voltages are present in some areas of the IMAGER
348. ommunicates with the RF Reader Board to either read from or write to the RF tag See paragraph 6 4 5 e Feeder Board Contains a slave micro system that under control of the MCS Master CPU drives the film handling motors and receives status from various film sensors See paragraph 6 4 6 e Processor Interface Board This board contains relays that route 120 vac power to the Processor heater under control of the MCS Board See paragraph 6 4 7 6 12 7F3318 2005 J uly Rev B Section 6 Theory of Operation 6 4 1 Master Slave Micro System 6 4 1 1 Serial Communication Protocol The MCS uses MicroComm Serial Communication Protocol to allow the Master CPU on the MCS Board to communicate with distributed micros on a simple low cost serial interface Slave micros are included on the following circuit boards 1 Optics Module Control Board Slave 1 2 Densitometer Board Slave 2 3 RF Tag Interface Board Slave 3 4 Feeder Control Board Slave 4 6 4 1 2 Physical Interface The physical interface includes only a TXD transmit line an RXD receive line and a Reset line see Figure 6 7 In this configuration the RXD lines of all slaves are tied together and connected to the TXD line of the Master CPU and the slave TXD lines are tied together and connected to the RXD line of the Master CPU FEEDER CONTROL BOARD BOARD L r OPTICS MODULE DENSITOMETER CONTROL BOARD MODUL
349. on 8 QuickSheets 8 5 62 26 543 J am Prior to DENSITOMETER LOCAL PANEL Message Log Message DICOM Message Film J am in Area 5 Film J am Prior to Densitometer FILM JAM 1 Alert Processor Alarm sounds Densitometer E xit Sensor S9 failed to detect film leading edge Summary The film is jammed between the PROCESSOR DRUM and the DENSITOMETER The developed film is driven by TRANSPORT ROLLERS from the DRUM to the DENSITOMETER As it enters the DENSITOMETER it contacts the ACTUATOR of DENSITOMETER EXIT SENSOR 59 turning the SENSOR on If S9 does not turn on within 22 5 to 35 seconds depending on the length of the film after VERTICAL TRANSPORT SENSOR S8 turned off error 26 543 is declared The PROCESSOR stops rotating and turns off heat when the error occurs All films in the IMAGER are marked as bad and will have to be reprinted After the jammed film is removed and the TOP HOOD is closed the error is reset and the PROCESSOR is restarted The PROCESSOR may need to warm up before printing will continue Result of Error The IMAGER is unable to print It can still accept and queue new jobs But new print jobs will not be initiated Removing the jam clears the error when the TOP HOOD is closed Films will be cleared automatically at this point User Action A Warning The PROCESSOR is hot Open the TOP HOOD Open the PROCESSOR COVER Remove jammed film Close the PROCESSOR COVER and HOOD FE Action BOUM Norm
350. on the Heel Pad Assembly They should be just a little past 90 degrees To bend the Heel Pad tabs use a flat blade screwdriver between the tab and the Heel Pads 6 Tighten the Shoulder Screws When tightened properly the Shoulder Screws should be next to the Cup Plate and the Washer on the inside should be next to the Heel Pad tab 7 Checkthatthe Cup Plate Assembly still rotates freely Problem Film may not feed on top of the Feeder Roller Cause 1 The Vacuum Relase Valve is not adjusted properly Solution 1 Adjustthe clearance on the Valve as outlined in the Service Manual Clearance should be 0 030 to 0 070 in Cause 2 The alignment of the Film P ickup Assembly is not square Make sure the large Rollers are not bent They should move Solution 2 Reform the alignment 2005 J uly Rev B 7F3318 8 65 Service Manual 8 5 57 26 164 J am Loading Exposure LOCAL PANEL Message Log Message DICOM Message Film Jam in Area 2 Platen Film Jam Loading Exposure Platen FILM JAM 1 Alert Alarm sounds Platen Film Sensor S6 failed to detect trailing edge Summary Film is jammed at the entrance to the exposure area When the film is picked up from the CARTRIDGE and placed in the FEED ROLLERS itis driven to the PLATEN When it enters the PLATEN it turns on PLATEN FILM SENSOR S6 and the PLATEN FEED ROLLERS drive it down into the exposure position in the PLATEN As the film drives to the exposure position it exits SENSO
351. onality may be affected User Action None FE Action 8 22 7F 3318 2005 J uly Rev B Section 8 QuickSheets 8 5 20 Error 13 001 Error SERVICE TOOL Software LOCAL PANEL Message Log Message DICOM Message Service Tool Internal Error NORMAL 3 Notify Summary An error has been detected in the internal software of the WebLink Subsystem The error can be caused by a number of problems such as persistent memory failures object creation failure a system call failure Common Service Platform framework error Result of Error Service operations may not work correctly The DRE should be functional but may not respond correctly to the service function being run or the service function may fail User Action None FE Action 2005 J uly Rev 7F3318 8 23 Service Manual 8 5 21 Error 13 002 Database Error SERVICE TOOL Software LOCAL PANEL Message Log Message DICOM Message Service Tool Database Error NORMAL 3 Notify Summary An error has been detected in the database software of the WebLink Subsystem The error can be caused by a number of problems such as failures in database read write or update functions Result of Error Service operations may not work correctly especially diagnostic functions The DRE should be functional but may not respond correctly to the service function being run or the service function may fail User Action None FE Action 8 24 7F 3318 2005 J uly Rev B Section 8
352. onds with status busy or ready 4 The SCU instructs the DRE to create a Film Session Film Box es and Image Boxes and to set attributes for these boxes 5 The SCU sends the DRE all the image data necessary for the print job followed by an N ACTION request 6 The DRE sends the rendered image data to the MCS and notifies the SCU when the image is successfully queued 7 The MCS prints the image using the specified attributes see step 4 The DRE communicates with the SCU MODALITY over the DICOM network It communicates with the MCS on several lines in a single cable between the PCIO BOARD in the DRE and the MCS BOARD in the MCS parallel image interface 12 bits plus parity between the PCIO BOARD of the DRE and the IMAGE BUFFER in the MCS BOARD e 2 way serial message lines between the DRE and the MASTER CPU on the MCS BOARD These lines use an SNMP serial protocol to carry the commands that the DRE uses for high level control of the MCS exposure engine ADRE Write Request line to the MCS from the DRE and an SOL Start of Line command from the MCS to the DRE 6 6 7F3318 2005 J uly Rev B Section 6 Theory of Operation 6 3 2 Main DRE Software Components The main DRE software components that control and coordinate print jobs are shown in Figure 6 5 and described in the following paragraphs ERE MC LOCAL PANEL j DISPLAY LOCAL PANEL MCS BROWSER INTERFACE BAS RVE SERVER DATA SE E R COM
353. oot and initialization process on your LAPTOP COMPUTER 1 De energize the IMAGER 2 Connect an MPC CABLE standard DB9 to DB9 from the LAPTOP COMPUTER to the 9 pin CONNECTOR J 24 on the upper left corner of the MCS BOARD 3 Using HyperTerminal P roComm or an equivalent communications application set the following communication parameters Baud rate 9600 Data bits 8 Parity None Stop bits 1 Flow control None 4 To display the Emulation screen select Properties Setting 5 Set Emulation VT 52 or VT 100 Caution While you are in monitoring mode DO NOT type anything This can damage the MCS software 6 In the communications application turn on logging to capture data when the IMAGER is energized 7 Energize the IMAGER and observe the boot up data L gt Note The following sample log of MCS operations at bootup does not include a printout of the operations that occur in the peripheral MICRO SYSTEMS such as the FEEDER BOARD RF TAG BOARD etc with which the MCS BOARD communicates The log does not provide information on detailed operations of the SENSORS and MOTORS controlled by the peripheral MICROS during bootup To be supplied 7 68 7F3318 2005 J uly Rev B Section 7 Troubleshooting 7 8 Using PCAnywhere When using pcAnywhere the password is case sensitive and the username is not 7 8 1 pcAnywhere Level 1 Purpose Used to access the Local Panel Username pcanywhere Password Netware28900
354. or can be cleared by requesting another calibration or by restarting the IMAGER User Action 1 Restart the IMAGER 2 Ifthe error persists call Service FE Action Clean the optics see paragraph 5 5 If this does not fix the problem replace the SCANNER MODULE 8 82 7F 3318 2005 J uly Rev B Section 8 QuickSheets 8 5 71 27 640 Optics Translation Home Failure LOCAL PANEL Message Log Message DICOM Message Severity Internal Hardware Failure Optics Home Sensor S7 failed to ELEC DOWN 0 Fatal Alarm sounds detect Optics Module Summary The SCANNER did not return to the home position after a scan operation The SYSTEM returns the SCANNER to its home position after every scan operation by activating the OPTICS TRANSLATION MOTOR When it reaches the home position OPTICS HOME SENSOR S7 is blocked and turns off indicating to the MASTER CPU on the MCS BOARD thatthe SCANNER is home If SENSOR S7 does not go low the error is declared Possible causes of the error include a DRE boot failure a defective SENSOR S7 ora defective OPTICS TRANSLATION MOTOR Another possible cause is interference from CABLES or other objects which prevents the OPTICS MODULE from reaching the home position properly Result of Error The IMAGER is unable to print film It can accept and queue new jobs but it will not initiate new films Films downstream from the PLATEN will be completed All other films will be reprinted The error can be Cleared
355. osi Petes M1 27 0 0 1 423 moin irit DISP INET STATUS Success Heal Minas Online Last Registration Update Time 57 50 1064 24 38 Last Registration Status Agent Remote Desktop Agent ONLIME Administration lana Registration P dun Profi Connectivity States rah bs xj 4 i Dore B ap Aster 3 B3Agent Console Micro 214 iss Verify that the registration was successful and both Agents are online Click Auto Grouping S elect the appropriate group L gt Note 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 This is the group you set up earlier Click submit If successful close Internet E xplorer Click the SEND Ctrl Alt Del to Host button Click Log Off Click Shutdown Choose Shutdown from the pull down window Click OK This will shut down the IMAGER Turn Off the POWER SWITCH on the back of the IMAGER Turn the POWER SWITCH On The IMAGER will start up To verify that the grouping did occur log on to the Enterprise Server and check for your Imager under the group that you selected Check off Mod 1 on the Field Change Record label and report M01 2 7 Checking Image Quality 1 2 3 Ask the customer to send images from a MODALITY to the IMAGER Check the quality of the images If necessary modify the configuration parameters 2005 J uly Rev B 7F3318 2 43 Servic 2 8 e Manual Backing up the
356. osition Failed OPTICS MODULE Loss of 12 vdc power Failed MCS BOARD controls OPTICS MODULE circuits Miswired or damaged SERVICE SWITCH This problem is rare but can occur in the field if a SWITCH is replaced Suspect it if the error occurs immediately after replacing the SERVICE SWITCH 1 Check the MCS and GSM logs for indications of the error 2 The acceptable range for the powerMonitorAttenopen value is 2492 to 3950 A value outside this range will generate 27 602 a If the value is grossly outside the acceptable range suspect INTERLOCK problem To confirm this check the MCS log for indications of Door open without CARTRIDGE closed b If the value is barely outside the range suspectthe OPTICS MODULE Examples of problems that have resulted in this error are COLLIMATOR LENS adhesive failure and L2 LENS failure Check the Optics Laser Adjustment P rocedure 3 7 3 POWER SUPPLY problems can also cause a failure Check for 12 vdc on the pads on the left center of the MCS BOARD just above the VCC1 test points For ground use GND1 2005 J uly Rev 7F3318 8 75 Service Manual Caution Do not attempt to take measurements directly on the J23 CONNECTOR pins on the MCS BOARD Shorting the pins can cause extensive damage in the IMAGER The control circuits for the OPTICS ATTENUATOR MOTOR and the SPINNER MOTOR require 12 vdc Also the driver circuit for the laser requires Laser 12 vdc which i
357. ot Remove any remaining tape before proceeding Tape left on this slot will cause horizontal banding near the edge of the film 11 Close the PLATEN DOOR 2005 July Rev B 7F3318 2 15 Service Manual Installing the CHARCOAL FILTER 1 Liftthe FILTER RETAINING CLIP 2 4 3 2 Pullthe PLASTIC BAG and the CHARCOAL FILTER from the IMAGER 3 Remove and discard the PLASTIC BAG H200_0018AAA Insert the CHARCOAL FILTER into the enclosure 5 Push down the RETAINING CLIP so it locks into place 4 200_0019 6 Close the FRONT DOOR 7 3318 2005 J uly Rev B 2 16 Section 2 Installation 2 4 4 Checking that Unpacking is Complete Caution If all packing materials are not removed from the IMAGER as instructed on the preceding pages the IMAGER will be damaged when power is applied 1 Check that you have removed from the back of the IMAGER 2PLASTIC TUBES from the bottom of the PLATEN AY see page 2 12 TAPE and FOAM from the top of the PLATEN AY see page 2 12 One CABLE TIE and TAG from the TRANSLATION MOTOR see page 2 12 2CABLE TIES and TAGS from the FILM PICKUP AY see page 2 12 2 Check that you have removed from the front of the IMAGER 2SCREWS and TAGS from the PLATEN AY see page 2 14 RUBBER STRIP from the slot in the OPTICS MODULE see page 2 15 PLASTIC BAG from the CHARCOAL FILTER see page 2 16 3 Close the FRONT DOOR Discard the packing materials 2 5 Connecting to El
358. ot attempt the procedure while the IMAGER is in a print cycle 1 Use a straight through PATCH CABLE to connect your LAPTOP COMPUTER to the IMAGER Service P ort Energize the IMAGER Use SecureLink to connect to the IMAGER Use WebLink to display the main menu of the SERVICE TOOL S elect Diagnostics gt MCS gt Densitometer Sr oce Densitometer Self Test rDensitometer Microcontroller Diagnostic Select Run to initiate test and display test results Density Offset 4096 Pass Fail Count Repeat Count Density Reference 197663 Pass Current Diagnostic Data 3 2 El Fal Export Data a m 01 2 Ready 6 Click Run to start the test of the DENSITOMETER 3 8 7F 3318 2005 J uly Rev B Section 3 Adjustments 7 Check that The vertical reference bar on the colored gauge is within the yellow or green area The Density Offset and Reference values are within S pecification Adjustment l Liftthe UPPER HOOD 2 Remove four SCREWS attaching the DENSITOMETER MODULE and slide the MODULE out about 3 inches to access the LIGHT SOURCE BOARD see Figure 3 5 TEE Le _ RO R 3 g Light gt Remove 2 screws from each side to pull assembly out 8100 164L Figure 3 5 Adjusting Reference Level for the DENSITOMETER 3 Change
359. ou slide the ROLLBACK MODULE out The TENSION SPRINGS on the front and back of the MODULE may catch wiring if you are not careful 13 Carefully slide the ROLLBACK MODULE out the front of the IMAGER and set it on a work surface Reassembly Reassembly is essentially the reverse of disassembly Make sure when you install the ROLLBACK MODULE that the bottom left of the assembly slides in along the SLIDE TRACK on the BASE Front View Caution Do not to damage wiring when you slide the ROLLBACK MODULE in Make sure all CABLES are routed properly after reassembly 7F 3318 2005 J uly Rev B Section 4 Disassembly Reassembl 4 7 2 ROLLBACK MOTOR DCM1 1 Remove the SUPPLY CARTRIDGE de energize the IMAGER and remove the ROLLBACK MODULE 4 7 1 A Warning When the POWER CORD is plugged in hazardous voltages are present in some areas of the IMAGER These voltages can cause severe injury or death 2 Turn the ROLLBACK KNOB to position the ROLLBACK MOTOR for easy access to its ATTACHING SCREWS 3 Remove 3 SCREWS to free the ROLLBACK MOTOR from its COUPLER BRACKET Figure 4 23 L gt Note To access the BOTTOM SCREW you will have to lift up the ROLLBACK ROLLER 4 Remove the COUPLER VANE from the BRACKET 5 Reassembly is essentially the reverse of disassembly Caution Do not damage wiring when you install the ROLLBACK MODULE in the IMAGER Make sure all CABLES are routed properly after reassembly Figure 4 23
360. ows you to set passcodes that allow operators to access the service functions of the LOCAL PANEL You can also change the Service passcode labeled First Call 99 on this screen e These passcodes can also be set directly from the LOCAL PANEL See the User Guide for instructions You can set the passcodes either now or during Operator Training 5 Ask the operators to create the passcodes they wish to use They must be 6 digits numeric only 6 If you wish to enter the passcodes at this time a Click Modify b Type each 6 digit passcode c Click Save 7 Change the Service Passcode The Service passcode is 123456 when the IMAGER leaves the factory At this time change this passcode to a new passcode that you choose The Service Passcode must be 6 digits numeric only a Click Modify b Type the new Service Passcode opposite First Call 99 c Click Save 8 If you modified any entry on the Local Panel Configuration screen restart the system from the LOCAL PANEL for the new value to take effect 2005 J uly 7F3318 2 37 Service Manual 2 6 9 Selecting the Type of Film 1 From the main menu of the SERVICE TOOL select Configuration gt MCS gt Film Type MCS Configuration Film Type Select Film Type to be used by Printer Required CE mark 2 7 Film Type Modify Save 2 If only CE marked film is to be used by the IMAGER a Click Modify b Place a check in the Req
361. p E et 2000 1500 1000 500 Input 25 TF3318 2005July Rev B Section 2 Installation MAXXUS Created specifically for use with the YMS SPECT to match Konica film All 15 curves are very Close to a single curve The MAXXUS TFT SET provides a SET of tables suitable for certain nuclear medicine applications specifically to provide a flat low contrast curve shape in the brightest portions of an image This minimizes the visibility of soft tissue in a bone nuclear medicine image in which bone is printed black on a white background This is a tight TFT SET offering limited variation with contrast value 4000 oq sce BS Ba ha bh mm ha asa 2500 1 FREE emi Em Enn umm eum a 1500 1000 pus Ip EE Pe TN Input 25 MSFDUP1 Designed to meet the density printing requirements of a TFT based LASER IMAGER for Kodak that is used as the PRINTER in a Kodak DUPLICATOR equipped with a MULTI SHEET FEEDER The 15 individual TFTs of this TFT SET are designed to map 15 different Dmin and Dmax nominal input ranges original film into the full density range of the IMAGER approximately 0 2 to 3 1 for blue film Example If the original film is a blue based film from a LASER IMAGER with a film Dmin of about 0 2 and a printed Dmax of about 3 0 a reasonable contrast value for duplicating this film would be 11 Since these input density ranges are approximate oth
362. pe located in Drawer is not BAD SUPPLY 1 Alert Alarm sounds Supported MGZ Summary The RF TAG information indicates that the size of the media in the CARTRIDGE is incompatible with the IMAGER Whenever a new CARTRIDGE is loaded or when power is turned on the software reads the RF TAG on the bottom of the CARTRIDGE to identify the media type size etc Result of Error The IMAGER is unable to print It can still accept and queue print jobs User Action 1 Try anew film CARTRIDGE 2 Ifthe error persists call Service FE Action This is an informational message only 2005 J uly Rev 7F3318 8 45 Service Manual 8 5 43 21 175 ROLLBACK Failed to Engage CARTRIDGE LOCAL PANEL Message Log Message DICOM Message Severity Rollback Failed to Engage Rollback failed to engage cartridge BAD SUPPLY 1 Alert Cartridge Alarm sounds MGZ Summary The ROLLBACK MOTOR DCM 1 activated with the ROLLBACK HOME SENSOR S2 on but S2 did not turn off The most likely cause is a misinserted CARTRIDGE The error is cleared when the FRONT DOOR is closed Result of Error The IMAGER is unable to print It can still accept and queue print jobs User Action 1 Try anew film CARTRIDGE 2 Ifthe error persists call Service FE Action 1 Open the FRONT DOOR 2 Check the GEARS on the ROLLBACK MOTOR and the ROLLER 3 Replace GEARS as necessary 4 Using the KNOB to slowly rotate the ROLLER observe engagement of the teeth with the LID of t
363. ply CARTRIDGE is out of film When this occurs the MCS immediately indicates a media out condition to the DRE and begins to close the CARTRIDGE When the PICKUP CARRIAGE is driven down by the PICKUP MOTOR to contact the film the following sequence occurs FILM SURFACE SENSOR S4 contacts the bottom of the CARRIAGE if itis empty of film and turns on but FILM OUT SENSOR S5 does not actuate because of the hole in the bottom of the empty CARTRIDGE This sequence signals to the MCS an out of film condition The MCS stops the PICKUP MOTOR then returns the PICKUP CARRIAGE to home Result of Error The IMAGER is unable to print Otherwise it can operate as normal acquiring queueing prints completing processing etc Phone Fix Operator Correctable The operator must open the FRONT DOOR remove the CARTRIDGE and install a new CARTRIDGE The error will clear automatically On Site Technician Correctable This is an informational message only 2005 J uly Rev 7F3318 8 41 Service Manual 8 5 39 21 138 User Intervention Required to Open DOOR LOCAL PANEL Message Log Message DICOM Message Severity Override Door Open Alarm Operator action required to open door BAD SUPPLY 1 Alert sounds with cartridge stuck open MGZ Summary The IMAGER is unable to open the FRONT DOOR because the supply CARTRIDGE would not close When the user keys in the command to open the FRONT DOOR the SYSTEM software attempts to close the CARTR
364. pplies to all power on diagnostics Is film cleared from imager Yes Contact Feeder Module micro system Micro respond Go back to start Go back to start o5 turn off within 5 sec S4 turn off within 5 sec Turn on DCM2 to raise pickup Is S4 unblocked on 2 2 mechanism Film Surface Sensor zl Yes oe Pickup Pickup dod Motor Position Sensor y Is 53 Turn on 2 S3 Y unblocked on Ne to raise pickup turn off within 95 i mechanism 1 5 sec Pickup Position 7 _ Sensor Yes Pickup Assy is either home or at feed roller transfer position Turn on 2 Pickup l to lower pickup dn 21 921 Motor for 0 375 seconds _ Pickup was at feed m transfer position 1 1 S3 turn on within S3 turn off within Y Turn on DCM2 Yes Yes Is S3 unblocked on to raise pickup mechanism d uo Ne i No Pickup was home TunonDCM24 Pickup to raise pickup Motor S3 turn on within 1 5 sec Go back to start Yes Pickup is home Turn off DCM 2 8100 226A Figure 8 1 Film Feeder Module Diagnostics Sheet 1 2005 J uly 7F3318 8 57 Service Manual Is 11 blocked
365. ps or steps of increasing optical density See Figures 6 11 through 6 13 for configurations of the calibration sheets for the three sizes of film used in the imager The densitometer measures the density of each step and uses the data as feedback to the Automatic Image Quality Control AIQC system to create a Film Model see paragraph 6 3 4 3 Each gray step is preceded by a fiducial consisting of a thin dark stripe followed by a thin light stripe These are used to locate the start of the next gray step 3 75 mm Clear Border Final Fiducial T 48 pixels 3 75 mm Step 19 plus Fiducial Step 18 plus Fiducial 168 pixels 13 125 mm Step 17 plus Fiducial 3 75 mm 9 375 mm 13 125 mm 120 pixels 11 X 14 Film Size 1 I 12 pixels 96 pixels 278 6 mm T 3240 pixels 253 125 mm Step 2 plus Fiducial Step 1 plus Fiducial Clear Border Figure 6 11 11 by 14 Inch Calibration Sheet 2005 J uly Rev 7F3318 6 23 6 24 Service Manual 431 0mm 354 8 mm 89 15 Clear Border 46 pixeis 3 75 mm Step 19 plus Fiducial Step 18 plus Fiducial Step 17 plus Fiducial 188 pixels 13 125 mm 14 x 14 Film Size 3240 pixels 253 125 mm Step 2 plus Fiducial Step 1 plus Fiducial Clear Border 73 75 mm 3 375 mm 4 375mm 13 125 120 pixels 12 21 12 pixels F38 paels Figure 6 12 14 by 14 Inch Calibration sheet 1651
366. pyLPVideo vbs used to reload the Local Panel videos after ghosting new software 7 9 2 Local Scripts SetFacettoStretch2 vbs allows setting the value different from the factory setting Selection will be either 0 or 1 This changes the scanner mirror the machine will use and would affect the overall image SetPixelStretch2 vbs allows setting the value different from the factory setting Selection values up to 61556 When viewing an image on the light box if this parameter were incorrect you would see a slight shifting of the image jagged edge on horizontal bars on the top part of the film SetSOSDelay2 vbs allows setting the value different from the factory setting Selection values are from 0 to 255 This parameter will affect the top to bottom position of the image on the film ppp_ip_change vbs allows changing the DV8150 internal IP address that is used to communicate between the DRE and MCS This script is used when a customer s LAN IP address is 10 X X X 7 70 7F 3318 2005 J uly Rev B Section 7 Troubleshooting 7 10 Using the Logs 7 10 1 Types of Log The SERVICE TOOL includes 9 logs Ga Logs Application Log DICOM Log Error Tally IIS Log Local Panel Log MCS Log NT Event Log App NT Event Log System Print Delivery Lag Application Log This log records the events controlled and monitored by all system software applications and subsystems e DICOM Log This is a log of Network DICOM Subsystem events
367. r elevator Is 12 blocked off within 15 sec Yes Continue lowering to bottom Then stop Step 8 Go back 21 921 to start 8100 227A Figure 8 1 Film Feeder Module Diagnostics Sheet 2 7F 3318 2005 J uly Rev B Is 12 blocked off Go to Elevator Diagnostics on Section 8 QuickSheets Rollback Assembly Test This routine begins about 40 seconds after power on It exercises components of the Rollback Sheet 2 Assembly and ensures that the cartridge is E o NE closed and the rollback mechanism is at home Sensor Yes Elevator must be home before Rollback Diagnostics begin Is Is S2 Run DCM1 TM blocked off in closing Sc direction 556 Rollback 2 A Sensor Yes Run DCM1 i one revolution _________ Rollback in closing Motor direction Is S2 off within 6 75 sec Rollback _______ is home Stop DCM1 Run DCN2 to Cups Engaged Sensor Test This routine begins Pickup _ move pickup about 50 seconds after power on It runs the pickup Motor down almost assembly all the way down to the film to check operation to film of the Cups Engaged Sensor Is 10 blocked 21 921 Go back off to start Cups Sensor Yes Run to return pickup to home position No Pickup Position
368. r occurred in the DRE Gray Scale Manager software The Linear LUT output values follow the video level conventions established for earlier laser systems a digital value of 0 produces a black spot on the film high laser power To produce clear areas on the film large digital values must be presented to the DAC by the LUT since data inversion occurs at the DAC The data sense through the system is 0 black high laser power The data from the LUT is fed to a DAC that converts the 16 bit data to analog to drive the laser diode 6 4 2 5 Laser Scanning Characteristics Before describing the circuits on the MCS Board that transfer the image pixels to the laser assembly for printing it is necessary to briefly consider certain characteristics of the scanning process Double Scanning The laser scanner uses a polygon mirror with two facets During exposure each revolution of the polygon causes both Facet 0 and Facet 1 to deflect the laser beam onto the film plane The DryView 8100 exposure engine uses double scanning Identical pixel data is scanned onto the film from both Facets 0 and 1 Each revolution of the polygon includes four phases 1 The laser beam reflects off mirror Facet 0 and onto the film surface 2 The laser beam if allowed reflects off the end of the mirror as it turns scattering light As explained in the next paragraph the potential scattering of light must be cancelled out to avoid generation of image artifacts or increase
369. r quest using device was disconnected Remote amp cc 5 8 2004 14 42 19 The Event log service was stopped EventLog 6 8 2004 14 44 09 The description for Event ID 18 Source PCIOcom cannot be found The local computer PCl cam 5 8 2004 14 44 38 Microsoft Windows 2000 5 0 2195 Service Pack 4 Uniprocessor Free EventLog 5 8 2004 14 44 38 The Event log service was started EventLog 6 8 2004 14 44 53 The User Mode Process Dump Driver service failed to start due to the following 27222 Service 5 8 2004 14 44 53 The User Mode Process Dump service depends on the User Mode Process Dump Driver Service 5 8 2004 14 45 21 Instance 1 has invalid binding descriptor 0 For additional information specific to this message W3SYC 6 8 2004 14 45 21 The service could not bind instance 1 The data is the error code For additional information W3SvC 5 8 2004 14 45 54 The user guest successfully established a connection to MCS1 using the device COM3 Remote amp cc 2005 July Rev B 7 3318 7 89 Service Manual 7 10 10 Print Delivery Log This is a Subsystem log that includes all Delivery and SDS Server Subsystem events pulled from an Application Log Note that the Subsystem column includes only these subsystems Subsystem 6 8 2004 16 09 12 918 Entering CreateOneShotR outing Delivery 6 6 2004 16 09 12 939 RoutingContext ctor Delivery 6 8 2004 16 09 13 449 context State EXECUTING Delivery 6 8 2004 16
370. ragraph 3 4 gt In og 8100 102C Mod Figure 4 44 Removing the OPTICS TRANSLATION MOTOR and CAPSTAN 4 50 7F3318 2005 J uly Rev B Section 4 Disassembly Reassembl 4 11 6 FILM CENTERING ASSEMBLY and CENTERING MOTOR Step 7 A Warning When the POWER CORD is plugged in hazardous voltages are present in some areas of the IMAGER These voltages can cause severe injury or death Remove the SUPPLY CARTRIDGE De energize the IMAGER and disconnect the POWER CORD Remove the REAR PANEL Disconnect the MOTOR ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR from the CHASSIS Figure 4 45 Cut the TIE WRAP to free the ELECTRICAL CABLE to the MOTOR Inserta PHILLPS SCREWDRIVER through the small access holes in the end of the IMAGING MODULE and remove 2 SCREWS Carefully rotate the CENTERING ASSEMBLY and remove it 8 To remove the CENTERING MOTOR a Remove the E RING b Remove 2 SCREWS to free the MOTOR SHAFT and END PLATE c Remove 2 SCREWS to free the MOTOR from the END PLATE d Remove the SHAFT from the MOTOR OD AT ueste Es Di 9 Reassemble in the reverse order of dis
371. ransfer Count Error Detected 8 1 8 1 8 3 8 3 8 3 8 4 8 4 8 5 8 6 8 7 8 8 Xi Service Manual 8 5 29 8 5 30 8 5 31 8 5 32 8 5 33 8 5 34 8 5 35 8 5 36 8 5 37 8 5 38 8 5 39 8 5 40 8 5 41 8 5 42 8 5 43 8 5 44 8 5 45 8 5 46 8 5 47 8 5 48 8 5 49 8 5 50 8 5 51 8 5 52 8 5 53 8 5 54 8 5 55 8 5 56 8 5 57 8 5 58 8 5 59 8 5 60 8 5 61 8 5 62 8 5 63 8 5 64 8 5 65 8 5 66 8 5 67 8 5 68 Xii Error 21 114 Film P ickup Failure before Opening or Closing CARTRIDGE e i bes Etica et eee x euet Error 21 115 Film Pickup Retry Notification Error 21 116 Film Pickup Failure Error 21 117 FILM FEED ROLLERS Failed to Close Error 21 118 Pickup Failed to go Home Error 21 119 Pickup Did Not Contact Film Error 21 120 VACUUM CUPS Did NotEngageFilm Error 21 131 ELEVATOR Failure 21 132 No Supply CARTRIDGE 21 134 Supply CARTRIDGE Empty 21 138 User Intervention Required to Open DOOR 21 139 Bad CARTRIDGE ID son certs 21 145 Unsupported Media Type 21 146 Wrong Media 21 175 ROLLBACK Failed to Engage CARTRIDGE 21 176 Supply CARTRIDGE Could NotBe Fully Opened 21 177 Supply CARTRIDGE Could NotBe Closed
372. ranslation Step 4 1 SWITCH Optical Flag Optics Home S 7 1 COMPRESSION SPRING Stepper Motor 1 NUT Hex Metric M6 x 1 0 o v op dt e eur a ue d 1 SCREW Pan Sems MA 7X 16 ex E ewe Beebe bangs wae bs 3 CABLE Ribbon Optics Module 1 CABLE Ground Strap AES Ie Ex 1 SCREW Pan Sems 4 7 06_ 2 PLATEN ASSEMBLY Includes items 12 through 27 1 SWITCH Optical Flag Platen Film 6 1 BELT t E 1 STEPPER MOTOR ASSEMBLY Platen Roller Step 2 1 ROLLER Drive Platen ee me Ee er a 1 ROLLER Idler Platen 1 BEARING BLOCK Base 2 BEARING BLOCK Slides cos uires ente Paci rela s eas aes 2 SPRING Extemal 2 xu ces Via ee A 2 E RING 1 4 in ertt PUE rr eig 1 SPROCKET 32dp 098 40 Tooth 1 PLATEN CENTERING ASSY Film Centering Step 7 1 Motor Stepper Linear 1 GRAVITY CAR ASSEMBLY pelts 2 SCREW Sems 4 7 06_ 6 SCREW Shoulder Platen 4 MOUNT Vibration Con
373. rent number of SCP associations has reached and remains at the limit 12 You can use the filtering function to search for key words and numbers in the log to locate the information you need to solve the problem See the following example search 1 Access the Application Log and use the Log Retrieval window to select the time range within which the IMAGER problem occurred 2 Click OK to capture the log data 3 Select Display Filter IT ze Basic Advanced Enable Basic Filter Log Start Time 2003708 701 08 43 01 Log End Time 2003 08 01 09 43 01 Event Type Diagnostic 4 or higher Subsystem Application 7 Text contains m assod 4 Under the Basic tab check Enable Basic Filter and Test contains 5 Type into the Text contains box the words and numbers that you wish to search on In this example we have chosen scp assoc as words that will show up in the events in the log that we wish to examine 6 Click OK to search the log for the selected text 7F 3318 2005 J uly Rev B Section 7 Troubleshootin c Local Log Yiewer C Documents and Settings 487050 Desktop DukeAssocLog xml Microsoft Internet Explorer provided by Ea File Edit View Favorites Tools Help 4m Back mp A Dy Search Favorites EM Address E C Program FilesykodakiwebLinklLocal Log Viewer hkm Links JBest of the Web JChannel Gui
374. rg 1 lf SP74 0401 8217 7 FILM DIVERTER W o Kapton 1 18 SP96 0000 3975 8 THERMAL SHIELD ASSEMBLY 1 18a 96 0000 5351 0 GASKET Hi TEMP SILICONE SPONGE PROCESSOR GASKET 1 19 SP96 0000 0406 7 RETAINER PROCESSOR PRESSURE ROLLER 2 20 SP7F1226 sts MOTOR EXIT STEPPER deseo ies Ya DG t e e 1 2E to SP96 0000 42000 BELT EXIT feck ie hed minh hee e esc ti t at e EE on 1 2251 SP96 0000 1354 8 DUCT FLEXIBLE PROCESSOR FILTER 1 2005 J uly Rev B 7 3318 9 5 Service Manual Figure 9 3 ROLLER SET ASSEMBLIES Figure 9 3 ROLLER SET ASSEMBLIES Item No Part Number Description Qty SP7F1006 ROLLER SET ASSEMBLY Includes items 4 1 SP7F1008 ROLLER SET EXIT ASSEMBLY Includes items 3 and 4 1 C EE NotAvailable SPRING External SST 75 Long 2 per roller set 6 Aus SP96 0000 1324 1 PULLEY 40dp 40 Tooth 1 3 Dudes SP7F1007 31 23 ROLLER SET ASSEMBLY POST PROCESSOR Includes items 3 ate ware Mn eave te et 1 9 6 7F 3318 2005 J Rev Section 9 Figure 9 4 DENSITOMETER ASSEMBLY Item No Part Number Li SP96 0000 0486 9 5 96 0000 1357 1 SP96 0000 1307 6 Box Sois SP96 0000 38
375. rnal to the OPTICS MODULE the ATTENUATOR MOTOR the ATTENUATOR HOME SENSOR or electronics on the OPTICS MODULE CONTROL BOARD To fix the problem either the optics CABLE or SCANNER MODULE must be replaced 8 86 7F3318 2005 J uly Rev B Section 8 QuickSheets From Densitometer Module Test Optics Module Test This routine begins about 66 Contact seconds after power on It checks operation of the optics Optics Module attenuator and translation subsystem components and micro system ensures that both the attenuator and optics are in the home position Micro respond 27 923 Yes aues ds eue AR A Attenuator off home position Attenuator Home Sensor turn on unblocked 21 923 Run Step 3 to return Attenuator home Attenuator Home Sensor turn off 21 923 Is S7 Run Step 4 57 blocked off to move optics turn off within Nes home 25 sec Optics P H Yes Optics at home Turn on Step 4 Optics to move optics _______ away from lt raion home No 27 640 Yes Run Step 4 to move optics home Optics translation is home Stop Step 4 To Optics AIQC Calibration and Testing 8100 231A Figure 8 3 OPTICS MODULE Diagnostics 2005 J uly Rev 7F3318 8 87 Service Manual 8 5 74 27 9
376. rned to Kodak for rework or disposed of properly CIRCUIT BOARDS contain lead 4 2 1 PROCESSOR INTERFACE BOARD 1 Onthe LOCAL PANEL press FILM Supply Open Door to close the FILM CARTRIDGE 2 De energize the IMAGER and disconnect the POWER CORD A Warning When the POWER CORD is plugged in hazardous voltages are present in some areas of the IMAGER These voltages can cause severe injury or death 3 Open the UPPER HOOD and remove the REAR PANEL 4 Disconnect the DRUM CABLE Figure 4 2 5 Remove 4 ATTACHING SCREWS from the COVER BOX 6 Liftthe COVER BOX free from the PROCESSOR INTERFACE BOARD L gt Note The cover is difficult to remove 7 Remove 4 ATTACHING SCREWS from the corners of the BOARD and remove the BOARD Cover Box Figure 4 2 Removing the PROCESSOR INTERFACE BOARD 2005 July 7F3318 4 3 Service Manual 4 2 2 PROCESSOR DRUM Disassembly 1 De energize the IMAGER and disconnect the POWER CORD A Warning When the POWER CORD is plugged in hazardous voltages are present in some areas of the IMAGER These voltages can cause severe injury or death Open the UPPER HOOD Remove the REAR PANEL Disconnect the 2 CABLES extending from the DRUM See View A in Figure 4 3 Lift the BELT TENSIONE
377. rocessing Unit channels The integral UARTs allow the CPU to communicate directly with peripherals saving the expense of an external UART chip The current configuration of the MCS employs only one TPU UART which is used to communicate with the IMS The CPU works with an Address Decoder FPGA to route Chip Select control and addressing signals to other components on the MCS Board This FPGA extends the CPU s ability to address and control the other components of the MCS CPU I O Port Functions CPU input and output port functions are defined as follows CPU Inputs Optics Home Sensor Low when optics is in or past the home position e Platen Sensor High when film is actuating the sensor Transport Sensor High when film is actuating the sensor e Processor Temp Frequency In This is a frequency input that is proportional to the processor temperature It is used to monitor temperature Expose Done A high pulse at the end of each print CPU Outputs e Platen On When low enables operation of the Platen Nip Stepper Motor e Platen Phase 1 and Phase 2 These two channels control direction of the Platen Nip Motor by generating two square waves that are 90 degrees out of phase Direction depends on which signal leads the other If Phase 1 leads the motor turns in the load direction If Phase 2 leads the direction is opposite unload e Centering On When low turns on the Centering Stepper Motor e Centering Phase 1 and Phase
378. ror IDs tallies and histories Service history Diagnostic results and data temporary Cartridge information status and history Statistics prints film size prints since last PM Localization tables and configuration data 6 3 6 Web Server The Web Server is vendor purchased Microsoft Personal Web Server v4 0 which is supported by the Microsoft WINDOWS 2000 O S It is the access point for both the SERVICE LAPTOP and the LOCAL PANEL The Web Server uses a combination of web technologies HTTP XML Active Server Pages SOAP to allow the user and FE to communicate with and control the functions of the DRE 6 3 7 Browsers for SERVICE LAPTOP and LOCAL PANEL The browser used by both the SERVICE LAPTOP running on the LAPTOP and the LOCAL PANEL running on the DRE COMPUTER is Microsoft INTERNET EXPLORER v5 x The browser for each component must support the following software Active X controls SOAP protocol and XML data parsing 6 3 7 1 Active Server Pages ASP for SERVICE LAPTOP and LOCAL PANEL These components represent ASPs that run within the Web Server Process and create pages to support the LAPTOP and the LOCAL PANEL These pages can access COM software components to obtain dynamic data The SERVICE TOOL ASP supports display of diagnostic data 6 3 7 2 Data Formatters for Service Tool and LOCAL PANEL These components provide business logic that communicates with other software components to maintain up to dat
379. rough hole gt an in base ie mi Lc Disconnect cable plug from this side Figure 4 28 Removing the RF ANTENNA BOARD 7F 3318 2005 J uly Rev B Section 4 Disassembly Reassembly 4 8 ELEVATOR ASSEMBLY 4 8 1 ELEVATOR MODULE Preliminary 1 Remove the SUPPLY CARTRIDGE 2 De energize the IMAGER but do not disconnect the POWER CORD yet 3 Actuate the SERVICE SWITCH by unscrewing the ACTUATOR SCREW 4 Open the FRONT DOOR Energize the IMAGER while observing the ELEVATOR from the front of the IMAGER The ELEVATOR will begin moving to its down position A Warning When the POWER CORD is plugged in hazardous voltages are present in some areas of the IMAGER These voltages can cause severe injury or death 5 When the ELEVATOR is all the way down de energize the IMAGER and disconnect the POWER CORD Disassembly 1 Disconnect the CABLE PLUG from the ELEVATOR CHASSIS Figure 4 29 2 Disconnect the PLUG INSERT from the ELEVATOR HOME SENSOR and pull the WIRES out through the side of the ELEVATOR CHASSIS Remove 2 ATTACHING SCREWS 4 Pull the PIN and pivot the MOTOR forward so the threaded ELEVATOR SHAFT clears the MOUNTING BASE forthe ELEVATOR Then remove the ELEVATOR MODULE from the IMAGER 8100 108A Figure 4 29 Removing the ELEVATOR MODULE 2005 J uly Rev 7F3318 4 33 Service Manual 4 8 2 ELEVATOR
380. rt Stepper and Kicker Stepper The drivers for these 4 motors have microcontrollers that include micro stepping data tables The optics translation stepper micro receives input control signals for on off direction and fast or slow speed as well as clock pulses TRANSLATE CLK The other 3 stepper micros have only an on off control signal in addition to its clock input since these 3 motors have only a single direction and speed Each Clock pulse from the CPU to a micro results in one micro step The micros have different code sets for controlling motor speed nthe optics translation code set there are 16 microsteps per one major step at scanning speed slow This corresponds to 3200 microsteps per revolution on a 200 step per revolution motor Running at high speed there are approximately 12 microsteps per major step 2005 J uly Rev B 7F3318 6 15 Service Manual e Inthe code sets for the other drivers there are 32 microsteps per major step corresponding to 6400 microsteps per revolution on a 200 step per revolution motor 6 4 2 4 Media Lookup Table Linear LUT All pixel data passes through this LUT including the SOS level value from the Pixel Control Register that is applied to the laser during the part of scan rotation just before the laser beam crosses over the SOS Detector The main function of this LUT is to convert the 12 bit image data to 14 bits The conversion of digital image data to the output values required by the lase
381. rt the IMAGER L gt Note After running a test select Click to show Result Data to display the test data 7 10 7F3318 2005 J uly Rev B Section 7 Troubleshooting 7 2 6 Running the Mechanical Diagnostics These diagnostics include tests for DOOR SOLENOID 5011 and all MOTORS in the IMAGER except the VACUUM PUMP and the following MOTORS that run continuously the PROCESSOR MOTOR and the OPTICS SPINNER MOTOR The diagnostics simply turn on the device selected for a short period then turn it off and report Pass or gt Note Descriptive data for all MOTORS is provided in Table 7 2 and locations of the MOTORS are shown in Figure 7 2 1 Setthe SERVICE SWITCH in the Service position 2 From the main menu of the SERVICE TOOL select Diagnostics gt MCS gt Mechanical Diagnostics Mechanical Diagnostics This page provides tests of various mechanical devices Make sure printer is in Service Mode Select Device Door Solenaid 22 Select Operation none Pass 0 Fail 0 Stap Pun Status Ready Click to show Result Data 3 From the Select Device dropdown menu select the device to be tested These include e Door Solenoid Kicker Motor e Vertical Transport Motor e Optics Motors e Platen Motors Tray Motors 4 From the Select Operation dropdown menu select the type of test or a specific MOTOR if the device selected includes more than one MOTOR Devices which include more than one M
382. s 2 Warning Record warnings and all errors 3 Information Record key events 4 Diagnostic Provide a level of information useful for field troubleshooting 5 Debug Provide a level of information useful for software debugging e 6 Trace 2005 July Rev B 7 3318 7 81 Service Manual L gt Note Levels of detail higher than the recommended defaults can slow down the system If you change a level to help diagnose a problem be sure to return the level to the default value after completing troubleshooting 7 10 3 DICOM Log This is a subsystem log that includes all MIM Network events pulled from the Application Log Note that the Subsystem column includes only Network Subsystem 5 8 2004 16 09 14 017 SCP Assac 1 Film Session Creation is Complete MIM Network 6 6 2004 16 09 14 025 SCP 1 Create Film FB N CREATE Indication Received MIM Network 6 8 2004 16 09 14 027 SCP 1 Creating Film Box H CREATE Network 6 8 2004 16 09 14 029 SCP 1 FB get FilmSize from DB 141N 1 FIN Network 6 6 2004 16 09 14 029 SCP 1 FB FilmSize 14INX17IN from SCU MIM Network 6 8 2004 16 09 14 003 SCP 1 FB Using FilmSize 141N54171M from SCU Network 5 8 2004 16 09 14 003 SCP 1 FB Checking 14191 7114 BLUE FILM MIM Network 5 8 2004 16 09 14 341 SCP Assacttl FB using 14INX17IN BLUE FILM MIM Network 6 8 2004 16 09 14 351 SCP
383. s that the film feed rollers are open Feed Roller Open Motor 1 1 Is 11 DCM4 blocked off in closing Feed direction Roller ____ Open Sensor Yes Feed Rollers are open Film as 9n Film Feed Motor Check This routine starts about 36 seconds after power on Feed Step 1 for Motor 4 second It allows the field engineer to observe operation of the Film Feed Motor Pump Vacuum Turn on Vacuum Pump Check This routine starts about 36 seconds after power on Pump Vacuum Pump It allows the field engineer to observe operation of the Vacuum Pump However Motor for 1 second this is difficult to observe From Sh ee 3 Elevator Assembly Test This routine starts about 38 seconds after power on It exercises components of the Elevator Assembly and ensures that the elevator is down No Is 12 blocked off Elevator Home Sensor Yes Elevator is home Elevator Run Step 8 Motor to raise elevator Is 12 unblocked on within 15 sec Yes Continue raising elevator amp for 1 second Run Step 8 to lower elevator _ So field engineer can observe Is 12 blocked off within 15 sec Yes Continue lowering to bottom Then stop Step 8 8100 227A Figure 7 5 FILM FEEDER MODULE Diagnostics Sheet 2
384. s routed through RELAY K2 on the MCS BOARD when the SERVICE OVERRIDE SWITCH is in the user position Thus loss of 12 volt power either by failure of the DC POWER SUPPLY oras a result of an open or failed INTERLOCK will deactivate the OPTICS MODULE 8 76 7F 3318 2005 J uly Rev B Section 8 QuickSheets 8 5 67 27 603 Invalid ATTENUATOR Optical Density Range LOCAL PANEL Message Log Message DICOM Message Calibration Failed Optics Optics calibration failed ELEC DOWN 0 Fatal Alarm sounds Attenuator Optical Density value outside valid range Summary Optics calibration and diagnostics detected that the calculated ATTENUATOR optical density range was outside the predefined valid range Optics calibration and diagnostics are performed at power up and before every calibration print During this process the ATTENUATOR is calibrated and laser power is checked and calibrated Atthe beginning of the sequence POWER MONITOR offset is measured and BEAM POWER MONITOR range is checked Then the ATTENUATOR is calibrated After this a range of density is checked as a function of ATTENUATOR setting If this range is out of specification error 27 603 is declared Result of Error The IMAGER is unable to print film It can accept and queue new jobs but it will not initiate new films Films downstream from the PLATEN will be completed All other films will be reprinted The error can be cleared by requesting another calibration or by restarting
385. same SENSOR is to be replaced be careful notto damage the MOUNTING CLIPS during removal 5 Gently rock the SENSOR back and forth to disengage the MOUNTING CLIPS Reassembly 6 When replacing a SENSOR make sure that the MOUNTING CLIPS are securely seated in the sheet metal 7 Checkthatthe SENSOR ACTUATOR ARM operates freely in its SLOT 8100 216C Figure 4 42 Replacing the PLATEN FILM SENSOR S4 4 48 7F 3318 2005 J uly Rev B Section 4 Disassembly Reassembl 4 11 4 OPTICS HOME SENSOR S7 1 Remove the SUPPLY CARTRIDGE A Warning When the POWER CORD is plugged in hazardous voltages are present in some areas of the IMAGER These voltages can cause Severe injury or death De energize the IMAGER and disconnect the POWER CORD 2 3 Remove the IMAGING MODULE from the IMAGER 4 11 1 4 Remove the ELECTRICAL PLUG from the OPTICS HOME SENSOR see Figure 4 43 5 Remove the ATTACHING SCREW and remove the SENSOR 6 After reassembl
386. se severe injury or death 2 De energize the IMAGER and disconnect the POWER CORD POWER SWITCH Figure 4 51 Front View 1 Liftthe TOP HOOD 2 Loosen 2 7 mm NUTS attaching the COVER for the TOP HOOD INTERLOCK and POWER SWITCH 3 Slip down the COVER slotted to expose the POWER SWITCH 4 Disconnect the WIRES and remove the POWER SWITCH TOP HOOD INTERLOCK see Figure 4 51 Front View 1 Liftthe TOP HOOD 2 Loosen 2 7 mm NUTS attaching the COVER for the TOP HOOD INTERLOCK and POWER SWITCH 3 Slip down the COVER slotted to expose the INTERLOCK 4 Remove 2 ATTACHING SCREWS and disconnect the WIRES to free the INTERLOCK FRONT DOOR INTERLOCK Switch Figure 4 51 Front View 1 Open the FRONT DOOR and remove the REAR PANEL 2 Loosen the 4 SCREWS 2 each end securing the IMAGING MODULE and slide the MODULE out the back of the IMAGER about 6 inches 3 Open the PLATEN door from the front of the IMAGER Reach in through PLATEN doorway to remove 2 SCREWS securing the INTERLOCK switch Then disconnect the ELECTRICAL PLUG to remove the SWITCH Do not remove the whole INTERLOCK ASSEMBLY DOOR RELEASE SOLENOID Figure 4 51 Front View 1 Open the FRONT DOOR 2 Remove 4SCREWS and disconnect the ELECTRICAL PLUG to remove the SOLENOID REAR PANEL INTERLOCK Figure 4 51 Rear View 1 Remove the REAR PANEL 4 64 7F 3318 2005 J uly Rev B Section 4 Disassembly Reassembly 2 Remove the COVER BOX for the PROCESSOR
387. sed to describe the event See Event Type above See Log Levels in the next paragraph for information on changing the level for a subsystem 11 16 Class ID Name Source Usn Instance Id and Version These are software items of use only to the software designer 7 80 7F3318 2005 J uly Rev B Section 7 Troubleshooting 7 10 2 5 Log Levels The level of detail recorded in the logs for each Subsystem can be changed if necessary for troubleshooting purposes To change a log level 1 From the SERVICE TOOL menu select Configuration gt System gt Log Level Subsystem Log Levels The lag levels for the product define how much data is written to the logs The levels may be ed for each subsystem to increase or decrease the amount of data being lagged for a subsystem Increasing the log level to a high setting may impact product performance AIQC 4 Diagnostic Ej Delivery 4 Diagnostic General 4 Diagnostic mi Import 4 Diagnostic Keypad 4 Diagnostic ml LocalPanel 4 Diagnostic aj MICS 4 Diagnostic E Network 4 Diagnostic i21 SDSServer 4 Diagnostic Service 4 Diagnostic Storage 4 Diagnostic 2 Click Modify 3 From dropdown menu for the subsystem select the Log Level you want and click Save L gt Note The selectable log levels from lowest detail to highest are e 0 Fatal Error Record only fatal errors 1 Error Record all error
388. ser entry 99 08150 LocalPanel 6 8 2004 16 38 00 342 User entry 887654 DY8150 LocalPanel 6 8 2004 16 38 00 863 Local Panel Presentation Error Exception Catastrophic failure 0 8150 LocalPanel 5 8 2004 16 38 00 943 Local Panel Presentation Error Exception Catastrophic failure 08150 LocalPanel 6 8 2004 16 38 01 644 Local Panel Presentation Error Exception Catastrophic failure 0 8150 LocalPanel 6 8 2004 16 38 02 626 Local Panel Presentation Error Exception Catastrophic failure 0 8150 LocalPanel 6 8 2004 16 38 02 906 User pressed FrmModalityList btnB ack DV8150 LocalPanel 6 8 2004 16 38 04 218 User pressed FrmSetuplmager btnB ack 0 8150 LocalPanel 6 8 2004 16 38 05 029 User pressed F rmMain btnHorne 0 8150 LocalPanel 6 8 2004 16 38 08 304 User pressed FrmStatus btnFilmT ray 08150 LocalPanel 5 8 2004 16 38 09 666 User pressed FrmFilmSupply btnRunDensityT est DV8150 LocalPanel 5 8 2004 16 38 13 782 User selected listPrintFilm Print film 0 8150 LocalPanel 6 8 2004 16 38 16 496 User answered DK to ConfirmPrintRequested DV8150 LocalPanel 5 8 2004 16 38 19 072 User pressed FrmDensityT estList btnBack D 8150 LocalPanel 6 8 2004 16 40 19 933 Backlight Timeout occurred Screen set to idle intensity 0 8150 LocalPanel 6 8 2004 16 40 19 933 Screen Timeout occurred DV8150 LocalPanel 7 86 7 3318 2005 J Rev B Section 7 Troubleshooting 7 10 7 MCS Log This is a subsystem log that includes all MCS events pulled from an Application Lo
389. shooting purposes Each sensor input line to the CPU includes an LED When a particular sensor is blocked not conducting its corresponding LED will turn on if jumper J is in the SENSORS ON position L gt Note Following service use the jumpers must be removed from the service position and stored in the normal position on the jumper plugs for normal machine operation 6 4 6 3 Film Pickup and Feed Functions The MCS software that controls film pickup and feed through the MicroComm interface implements the following commands Start Pickup This command initiates the following sequence 1 Check the following items before moving the pickup arm The pickup arm is home Pickup Position Sensor e Pickup and feed diagnostics have passed e No other operations are in process A film cartridge is present Cartridge Present Sensor Thecartridge has been rolled back Rollback Home Sensor Thecartridge elevator is lowered Elevator Home Sensor 2005 J uly Rev 7F3318 6 29 Service Manual 2 Lower the pickup arm until it contacts the film Film Surface Sensor 3 Determine whether film is present in the cartridge Film Out Sensor If itis not recheck twice to confirm then return the pickup arm home and report the error L gt Note If an error occurs at any point during the pickup sequence the pickup arm is stopped and returned home Then the error is reported to the MCS 4 If film is present continue moving
390. sired for mid brain gray white matter and or abdominal soft tissue 3500 3000 2500 2000 1500 1000 LE LZE ZZ 500 Input 2005 July 7F3318 2 69 Service Manual WRKSTN2A Designed for post processing IMAGING WORKSTATIONS in which curves 1 through 8 are designed to produce linear in optical density results on film for density values of 3 2 through 1 8 respectively Curves 9 through 11 are the same as VER693CO curves 6 through 8 Curves 12 through 14 are designed for film DIGITIZER applications Curve 15 is the same as curve 9 4000 3500 3000 2500 2000 1500 1000 500 E re ge Input 95 7F3318 2005 uly Rev B Section 2 Installation BLANK PAGE 2005 J uly 7F3318 2 71 Section 3 Adjustments Section 3 Adjustments 3 1 Setting Temperature of the PROCESSOR DRUM This procedure must be performed whenever the PROCESSOR ASSEMBLY or PROCESSOR DRUM is replaced whenever the MCS BOARD is replaced or if DRUM temperatures are suspected of causing image quality problems Specification The temperature measured at the PROCESSOR DRUM must be in the range 123 5 124 5 C 254 3 256 F Special Tools TEMPERATURE METER with PROBE TL5574 BLOCK FOR PROBE KIT SP7F3477 LAPTOP COMPUTER with Microsoft INTERNET EXPLORER 5 5 SERVICE TOOL Ethernet PATCH CABLE straight through TL5576 L gt Note A TEMPERATURE METER and P
391. ssage Severity Undelivered J ob due to Rendering ob Rendering Error NORMAL 1 Alert Error Alarm sounds Summary There is a rendering error in the Delivery Subsystem caused by bad image data This job will not be retried The problem is in the data sent down from the MODALITY Result of Error The DRE is functional but this job will fail User Action Delete the job from the Undelivered Queue FE Action None 8 6 7F 3318 2005 J uly Rev B Section 8 QuickSheets 8 5 4 Error 03 381 through 03 912 Error Notification in Routing Delivery Subsystem LOCAL PANEL Message Log Message DICOM Message None No alarm Routing Delivery Subsystem Error NORMAL 3 Notify L gt Note For Error Code 03 650 see the following QuickS heet paragraph 8 5 5 Summary All of these error codes indicate a software error in the Routing Delivery Subsystem The cause of the error can be such things as object creation failure a system call failure a bad format bad image processing values delivery problems to the back end and lost or irrecoverable image data Result of Error The DRE should be functional but the job may be sent to the Undelivered Queue User Action None FE Action None 2005 J uly 7F3318 8 7 Service Manual 8 5 5 Error 03 650 Delivery Error Notification in Routing Delivery Subsystem LOCAL PANEL Message Log Message DICOM Message Severity None No alarm Routing Delivery Subsystem J ob NORMAL
392. stem Micro respond S3 turn off within 5 sec S4 turn off within 5 sec Turn on DCM2 Is S4 to raise pickup unblocked on Yes mechanism Film Surface Sensor il Yes Wssyis Pickup Pickup deum Motor Position Sensor y Is 53 Turn on 2 S3 21 Y unblocked on No to raise pickup turn off within es gt mechanism 1 5 sec Pickup 2 Position 7 Sensor Yes Pickup Assy is either home or at feed roller transfer position Turn 2 Pickup __ to lower pickup 21 921 Motor for 0 375 _ Pickup was at feed seconds Rus transfer position 1 1 S3 turn on within 3 5 sec S3 turn off within 3 5 sec Y Turn on DCM2 Yes Yes a to raise pickup mechanism Is 53 unblocked on No Pickup was home 1 1 Turn on 2 4 to raise pickup 3 turn on within 1 5 sec Yes Pickup is home Turn off DCM 2 8100 226A Figure 7 5 FILM FEEDER MODULE Diagnostics Sheet 1 7 38 7F 3318 2005 J uly Rev B Section 7 Troubleshootin Film Feed Roller Tests This routine begins about 36 seconds after power on It tests the Feed Roller Open Sensor and Feed Motor Open Motor and ensure
393. t RIBBON CABLE travels smoothly and does not touch OPTICS MODULE or ATTACHMENT PLATE as it moves Replace the STEPPER MOTOR MOUNTING ASSEMBLY 96 0000 5438 3 Dust on FLEX LENS L3 in the Remove the dust See paragraph OPTICS MODULE 5 5 Intermittent black film or Alignment problems in FRONT Re align black film with white streaks DOOR INTERLOCK 7F 3318 2005 J uly Rev B Section 7 Troubleshooting Repeated film jams Mechanical or electronic failure ina See paragraph 7 5 FILM TRANSPORT MODULE ROLLBACK FILM PICKUP FEED ROLLER PLATEN VERTICAL TRANSPORT or in the FILM PROCESSOR MODULE Blank Films OPTICS RUBBER SLIT COVER not Remove COVER from optics slit removed at installation Fuzzy prints at end of film Tape blocking optics slit Remove SCANNER UNIT and remove tape Horizontal band near top Double back tape used to hold Remove tape or bottom of film rubber slit cover stuck to optics FRU 2005 J uly Rev B 7 3318 7 3 Service Manual Loading Exposure The Cup Plate Assembly does not Manufacturing is addressing this Platen Error 26 163 Film rotate freely due to the metal plate problem In the field try the may not feed on top of the that holds the cups being too long following Feeder Roller or loud noise 1 Remove the Film Pickup when Film Pickup is Assembly from the machine loading film into the Feeder 2 Move the motor away from the Assembly gear rack and extend the pickup ass
394. tart Home Sensors S2 On is KJ Feeder MES Return Bevator Home cc EO Hone Close Sensor S12 Status Sensor S12 Status Cartridge Is Cartridge closed Feeder Is Elevator Home Sensor No home i S12 On Cartridge Did Elevator i Move Up at All i Home Sensor Release Door Feeder Yes L I Raise Cartridge H ba MCS Raise Hevator No Success Yes wes 21 131 Release Front Wait for Elevator to Tray elevator jammed Door Raise E Turn on Door Release E Solenoid SOL1 Open door with Elevator MCS in down position Wait 1 second Did Door Front Door No release Interlock I1 Open Yes X MCS 20 208 ssumptions Turn off Door Release Door Open Failure User request to open the Front Door SOL1 ID DoorOpen1 Mana Figure 6 22 Front Door Open Operation Sheet 1 of 2 2005 July Rev B 7 3318 6 43 Service Manual Close Front Door Open Cartridge Sheet 2 of 2 Display message until film clears bottom TETTETETT 20 137 Wait for Door Open Any film in bottom of imager BILL Rollback ROLLBACK Home Sensor CLOSE TIMEOUT 52 On Timeout Rollback Success Did Cartridge close 21 177 Film Cartridge Failed Override Front Door to
395. te Film Model If it finds the Film Model the Media LUT is created go to step 7 If a Film Model has not yet been created for this sensi data or if the Film Model is older than 1 week no calibration for over a week a calibration print is scheduled step 5 5 Create and Read a Calibration P rint The calibration print creates the Film Model and the resulting Media LUT A calibration print is requested in any of the following circumstances ACARTRIDGE is loaded with an emulsion number jumbo band and type that are not defined in the Film Model Acalibration request is issued from the LOCAL PANEL Thetarget Dpatch does not equal the Dpatch moving average see step 9 below e More than 1 week has elapsed since the last calibration print for the current CURRENT 6 Create a New Film Model The Film Model is built from the sensi data read from the RF TAG the time stamp date of the last calibration Dmin and Dmax values established in calibration calculated film speed and Dpatch data 7 Create a Media LUT and Setthe ATTENUATOR The data from the Film Model is used to create an LUT that interpolates required laser diode intensity values into the pixel array passing through the LUT Then the Laser Attenuator is set to obtain the required densities on film 8 Printthe Film The film is printed using the Media LUT and ATTENUATOR setting established by the Film Model from calibration data 9 Read the Dpatch when Film is Printed
396. the DRIVER ASSEMBLY as follows see Figure 7 18 L gt Note To allow moving the DRIVER ASSEMBLY back and forth in the following checks disengage the plastic PINION of the PICKUP MOTOR from the rack and wedge something between the MOTOR FRAME and PICKUP ASSEMBLY FRAME to keep the rack and PINION disengaged a Slide the driver ASSEMBLY and the HEEL ASSEMBLY all the way up to the top of the FRAME Check that the HEEL and DRIVER are parallel to each other and to the FRAME If they are not film will be skewed in the pickup process The assemblies must be realigned on their SLIDES orthe PICKUP MODULE must be replaced b Slide the DRIVER ASSEMBLY all the way down in the opposite direction so it is fully extended Rock the DRIVER back and forth to check for play in the SLIDES If there is excessive play replace the PICKUP MODULE Slide the DRIVER ASSEMBLY back up toward the top of the FRAME until the edge of the metal frame tab ACTUATOR is exactly half way lined up with the SENSOR notch into the PICKUP POSITION SENSOR seeFigure 7 19 Use a FEELER GAUGE to check the gap between the stem of the VACUUM RELEASE VALVE and the spring loaded PLUNGER The gap should be 0 030 to 0 070 inch 1 3 to 1 8 mm If the gap is too large vacuum will be released too late and the film will pull back from the FEED ROLLERS resulting in a skewed feed If the gap is too small vacuum release will be premature and the film will drop before the FEED ROLLE
397. the HOOD grasp the HOOD only in the area of the recessed slot below the LOCAL PANEL to avoid the possibility of pinching your fingers Close the HOOD carefully Releasing and dropping the HOOD could damage the IMAGER 1 Grasp the HOOD in the recessed area below the LOCAL PANEL Raise the HOOD until the SUPPORT ROD locks into place 3 Inserta small diameter SCREWDRIVER or similar item in the slot at an angle pointing toward the rear of the IMAGER Press down to unlatch the FRONT DOOR The DOOR will unlock and open 4 Close the HOOD 5 Unlatch and open the PLATEN DOOR 2005 July Rev B 7F3318 2 13 Service Manual 22 12 a p fj fo N LES o Mu m ae ASS PREASA T nF r 9 Ft ue Wr Section 2 Installation 7 Reach through the PLATEN opening and slowly and steadily push the OPTICS MODULE back about 10 cm 4 inches the OPTICS MODULE moves on RAILS 200_0044 8 Reach in through the PLATEN opening and remove the RUBBER STRIP from the slot in the bottom of the OPTICS MODULE Grasp the tab on either end of the RUBBER STRIP and peel the strip off 9 Check that the double back tape used to secure the RUBBER STRIP is still attched to the strip If not go to step 10 otherwise step 11 10 With your fingers check both ends of the slot to make sure that TAPE remains over the sl
398. the IMAGER User Action 1 Restart the IMAGER 2 Ifthe error persists call Service FE Action This error can be the result of any of the following problems listed in most likely order of occurrence Open or failed INTERLOCK or SERVICE OVERRIDE SWITCH set in Service position Failed OPTICS MODULE Loss of 12 vdc power Failed MCS BOARD controls OPTICS MODULE circuits 1 Check the MCS and GSM logs for indications of the error Sample logs are shown on the next page The ATTENUATOR optical density range must be from 0 to atleast 1 0 Thus as shown In the sample logs the last 21st value in the range must be at least 1 0 Also it cannot be higher than 1 3 2 Check the MCS log for indications of Door open without CARTRIDGE closed Possible INTERLOCK problem 3 POWER SUPPLY problems can also cause a failure Check for 12 vdc on the pads on the left center of the MCS BOARD just above the VCC1 test points For ground use GND1 Caution Do not attempt to take the measurements directly on the CONNECTOR pins Shorting the pins can cause extensive damage in the IMAGER The control circuits for the OPTICS ATTENUATOR MOTOR and the SPINNER MOTOR require 12 vdc Also the driver circuit for the laser requires Laser 12 vdc which is routed through RELAY K2 on the MCS BOARD when the SERVICE OVERRIDE SWITCH is in the user position Thus loss of 2005 J uly Rev B 7F3318 8 77 Service Manual 12 volt power
399. the pickup arm until the pickup suction cups contact the film Cups Engaged Sensor Then apply suction cup vacuum 5 Reverse pickup arm direction and move the pickup arm to the film separation tabs position timed function 6 Pause 1 second Then pat down the film by lowering the pickup arm to the film surface After patdown return the pickup arm to the separation tabs position and pause for 1 second 7 Move the pickup arm up to the feed nip roller position Pickup Position Sensor and stop 8 Close the feed nip rollers onto the film 9 Release the suction cup vacuum and return the pickup arm to the home position Pickup Position Sensor 10 Report to the MCS that film is ready to feed Stop Pickup This command stops the Pickup Motor and reports status to the MCS Start Feed This command starts the Feed Roller Motor and reports status to the MCS Stop Feed This command stops the Feed Roller Motor returns the feed nip roller to the open position and reports status to the MCS Home the Pickup Arm This command 1 Moves the pickup arm off the home position if itis home 2 Moves the pickup arm back home P ickup Position Sensor 3 Reports status to the MCS Home the Feed Nip Rollers This command 1 Moves the feed nip rollers toward the closed position until the Feed Roller Open Sensor is activated or until a preset timeout 2 Moves the rollers toward the home position until the Feed Roller Open Sensor deactivat
400. they are closed It should extend 2 to 4 mm over the small diameter DRIVE ROLLER and skew from end to end should be less than 1 mm If the film is skewed check alignment of components in the PICKUP MODULE S ee paragraph 7 5 6 2 4 6 Afterthe film is initially clamped by the FEED ROLLERS is it pulled back by the PICKUP ASSEMBLY when the PICKUP homes itself There should be less than 1 mm of film pullback If pullback is excessive pickup vacuum is being released too late See paragraph 7 5 6 2 4 1 7 If any of the above problems is noted advance to paragraph 7 5 6 2 to remove and inspect the FILM PICKUP MODULE 7 54 7F3318 2005 J uly Rev B Section 7 Troubleshooting 7 5 5 4 Checking the FEED ROLLER MODULE Start film cycling see paragraph 7 5 5 1 above 1 1 When the IDLER ROLLER clamps down on the FEED ROLLER is 1 side of the ROLLERS clamped while there is a noticeable gap on the other side If the ROLLERS are not aligned with one another film skew will result See paragraph 7 5 6 3 3 2 Observe the POST PICKUP FILM GUIDE as the film feeds toward the PLATEN The film should not track to either side more than 1 to 2 mm If it does PLATEN centering may not work properly The film could enter the PLATEN outside of the working range of the film CENTERING PIN 3 If either of the above problems is apparent advance to paragraph 7 5 6 3 to remove and inspect the FEED ROLLER MODULE 7 5 5 5 Checking the PLATEN MODULE
401. tion Do not damage the wiring when you install the ROLLBACK MODULE in the IMAGER Make sure all CABLES are routed properly after reassembly Figure 4 26 Removing the ROLLBACK OPEN SENSOR 4 30 7F3318 2005 J uly Rev B Section 4 Disassembly Reassembl 4 7 6 RF TAG ASSEMBLY RF TAG INTERFACE BOARD and RF READER BOARD Normally the RF TAG INTERFACE BOARD and the RF Reader Board are replaced as an assembly Caution To avoid damaging sensitive electronic components always wear a static strap when handling CIRCUIT BOARDS Any CIRCUIT BOARD that is removed from the IMAGER must be returned to Kodak for rework or disposed of properly PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS contain lead 1 Remove the SUPPLY CARTRIDGE de energize the IMAGER and remove the ROLLBACK MODULE 4 7 1 A Warning When the POWER CORD is plugged in hazardous voltages are present in some areas of the IMAGER These voltages can cause severe injury or death Carefully turn the ROLLBACK MODULE upside down Disconnect the 3 ELECTRICAL PLUGS from the RF TAG ASSEMBLY Figure 4 25 Remove 4 SCREWS and remove the RF TAG ASSEMBLY After installing the RF TAG ASSEMBLY and installing the ROLLBACK MODULE in the IMAGER make sure that both SWITCHES on the RF TAG INTERFACE BOARD are setto the down position oa ES 3 Disconnect three plugs from assembly Figure 4 27 Removing the RF TAG ASSEMBLY 2005July Rev 7F3318 4 31 Service Manual 4 7 7 RF ANTE
402. to 61556 L gt Note You can use the SERVICE TOOL to display the EEPROM data Diagnostics gt MCS gt Optics gt Display Optics Data Spinner Motor Control The Spinner Motor scans the laser across the film as itis reflected successively from the two mirror facets in the double scan process Turn on and speed of the motor are controlled by the slave micro on the Optics Module Control Board The speed control signal SERIAL CLK from the slave micro is fed to a DAC The analog output of the DAC is amplified and used as a drive signal for the Spinner Motor SOS Detector During each revolution of the scanner a photodetector on the Optics Module Control Board is activated by the laser beam reflecting off a spot on the scanner adjacent to mirror Facet 0 Thus Facet 0 is used as the reference for Start of Scan The SOS signal from the detector shaped and amplified is sent to the Pixel Clock Generator on the MCS Board to be used as a timing reference SOS RAW for pixel flow control The detected SOS signal is also used by the Beam Power Monitor on the Optics Module Control Board as described in the next paragraph 2005 J uly Rev 7F3318 6 21 Service Manual Beam Power Monitor The Beam P ower Monitor consists of an amplifier and a peak detector that monitor the SOS photodetector The beam power indication from the peak detector is fed to an AD Converter The digitized beam power signal is then passed to the slave micro so the information ca
403. triggered to look for the file The script TriggerMP DB vbs can be executed using the Remote Script function For DRE version 1 0 2 b04 this is no longer needed The MPDB file loaded from REMOTE MANAGEMENT SERVICES should update properly without the trigger script Is REMOTE MANAGEMENT SERVICES Running When you press the Start Service button during the setup for REMOTE MANAGEMENT SERVICES you did not know if the service had started unless you used pcAnywhere Software to check it The status of REMOTE MANAGEMENT SERVICES can now be checked by running the ListR MSS ervices vbs script from the Remote Script function To view what the script has done click on the Script RunTime tab You Ghosted the 8150 LASER IMAGER and you don t have Videos on the LOCAL PANEL Load the Video CD SP 7F6699 into the 8150 LASER IMAGER CD drive and run the CopyLP Video vbs script using the Remote Script function 8 18 7F3318 2005 J uly Rev B Section 8 QuickSheets 8 5 16 Error 12 001 Software Error in LOCAL PANEL LOCAL PANEL Message Log Message DICOM Message Local Panel System Error NORMAL 3 Notify Summary The software of the LOCAL PANEL has a problem The error can be caused by a number of problems such as initialization register unregister observers or registry access failures Result of Error The DRE is not functional User Action None FE Action 2005 J uly Rev 7F3318 8 19 Service Manual 8 5 17 Error 12 002 Database
404. trol 8 TRANSLATOR ASSEMBLY includes items 3 6 1 7F 3318 2005 J uly Rev B Section 9 Illustrated Parts Breakdown Figure 9 11 POWER ASSEMBLY Figure 9 11 POWER ASSEMBLY Description Qty 5 96 0000 3705 9 CIRCUIT BREAKER CBS Item No Part Number 1 2 Oa baie 4 5 c Y c ce POWER MODULE KIT Includes items 2 through 5 SP96 0000 3703 4 FAN Power Module SP96 0000 2174 9 SEAL Power Module notshown 5 96 0000 3709 1 POWER SUPPLY SP8F2394 aaa 9 17 2005 J uly Rev 7F3318 Service Manual Figure 9 12 ELECTRONICS FrontBackF ull FRONT REAR Figure 9 12 ELECTRONICS Item No Part Number Description Qty SP5E5849 SWITCH POWBF sii serer e dice GaN OIM ed i a epee Oi kA 1 ME SP26 1011 0202 7 SWITCH Hood aer err ar Each ar 4 SERA pa dus a es 1 weis SP8E9983 BOARD WCS ua xus dba
405. ts flag 57 OPTICS HOME IMAGING U type LED2 On when SCANNER is home S8 VERTICAL VERT Flag LED4 Off when film contacts flag TRANSPORT TRANSPORT DENSITOMETER EXIT DENSITOMETER LED2 Off when film contacts flag sw4 FPGA CONFIG 16 wn amma B tine x lololo joJo oJoJo e J 10 o E I LASER MCS BOARD pa e 22 e a MCS_BoardSensors Figure 7 12 SENSORS S6 through S9 and LEDs 2005 J uly Rev 7F3318 7 49 Service Manual 7 5 Troubleshooting Film Transport Problems 7 5 1 Troubleshooting Basics The table below lists the error messages that can occur as a result of mechanical or SENSOR problems in the ASSEMBLIES that transport film through the IMAGER SYSTEM Intermittent film jam problems are frequently misdiagnosed in the field The error messages may indicate accurately the area in the IMAGER where the error code was generated but the real cause of the problem can sometimes be locate
406. uide Customize Links JFreeHotMsil Internet Start G Microsoft Product Nev Start Stop e Load Save Find d Find Next Subsystem INFO 7 7 2003 16 20 05 808 scp assocH up for 8900 from modality leonardo MIM Network INFO 7 7 2003 16 20 39 356 scp assocH1 up for 8900 from modality x mr3c_dep MIM Network INFO 7 7 2003 16 21 16 046 scp assoc 2 up for 8900 from modality Ix mr2c_dep MIM Network INFO 77712003 16 22 21 683 scp assocH3 up for 8900 from modality Ix mrlc_dep MIM Network INFO 7 7 2003 16 23 00 099 scp assocH4 up for 8900 from modality Ix lenox_dep MIM Network INFO 7 7 2003 16 25 35 512 scp assocH5 up for 8900 from modality leonardo MIM Network INFO 7 7 2003 16 31 05 437 scp assoc 6 up for 8900 from modality leonardo MIM Network 7 7 2003 16 33 06 033 scp assoc up for 8300 from modality lx mr3c_dcp 7 7 2003 16 33 42 432 scp assocH8 up for 8900 from modality Ix mr2c_dcp Network Network 11 Note that this search retrieved only 9 records indicating that 9 associations were up during the time searched 12 P erform another advanced search for scp associations that went down during the selected time Basic Advanced Enable Advanced filter Field 1 tet Field zje ha afe zm Field a tet 7 than Jl fica seme Field bae z than J Field zes hee of J
407. uired CE mark check box c Click Save Select Any from the Film Type dropdown menu Click Save 7338 2005 July Rev Section 2 Installation 2 6 10 Setting up Remote Monitoring RMS RMS uses the K Number Serial Number Service Code and Country to create the appropriate file names Accuracy in this area is important The other data entered helps to create a profile on the Enterprise server Before setting up RMS contact TSC or xxxx to set up a group name under the appropriate region If this IMAGER is to be monitored remotely configure it for remote servicing as follows 1 From the main menu of the SERVICE TOOL select Configuration gt S ystem gt Remote Monitoring Remote Monitoring Configuration Set Printer Configuration parameters far Remote Monitoring hi Twin Cities 2 Department Health Imaging m cation Wer room E Location Type Froduction 08 E mote Lee i ns Mnpsdfqss rd kadak com 443 itus Link kodak com 443 2 Click Modify 3 Enter into the appropriate windows the geographical and descriptive information that identifies this IMAGER 4 From the Proxy Type dropdown menu select the type of proxy server at this location No Proxy the default Standard Proxy 2005 July 7 3318 2 39 Service Manual e NTLM Proxy gt Note A Proxy is a server that stands between a machine e g
408. unnel 1 From the main menu of the SERVICE TOOL select Configuration gt S ystem gt S ecureLink SecureLink Server Configuration Network Settings The Secure Tunnel network settings configure the product s connection to the site LAN The system must be restarted for these changes to take effect Port 443 21 Modify Cancel Note Items marked with an asterisk require a machine restart when changed 2 Check that the Port setting is 443 L gt Note If the Port setting is not 443 you will not be able to back up the configuration 3 Ifthe Port setting is not 443 a Click Modify b Type 443 c Click Save d Restart the IMAGER from the LOCAL PANEL 2005 July 7F3318 Service Manual 2 6 3 Setting the System Clock 1 From the main menu of the SERVICE TOOL select Configuration gt System gt C lock Clock Configuration rSystem Clock Settings The System Clock Settings allow the date and time to be configured for the device CAUTION Please verify the Time Zone field is correctly saved before making any changes to the Date Time fields Current time zone Central Daylight Time Date Time 1 16002 p Time Zone GMT 06 0 I Central Time amp Canada E MW Automatically adjust clock for daylight savings time 3 Modify L gt Note The system clock is set in manufacturing At installation the Time Zone setting has to be changed
409. urs see the QuickSheet for 27 602 in Section 8 2005 July 7F3318 3 13 Service Manual BLANK PAGE 7F 3318 2005 J uly Rev Section 4 Disassembly Reassembly Section 4 Disassembly Reassembly 4 1 FRONT DOOR and REAR PANEL ASSEMBLIES 4 1 1 FRONT DOOR FILTER For the procedure to remove and replace the FRONT DOOR FILTER and align the FRONT DOOR refer to procedure 5 4 6 in section 5 of this manual 2005 J uly Rev 7F3318 4 1 Service Manual 4 1 2 REAR PANEL 1 On LOCAL PANEL press FILM Supply Open Door to close the FILM CARTRIDGE 2 Remove 9 ATTACHING SCREWS from the REAR PANEL Figure 4 1 A Warning When the REAR PANEL is removed all MOTORS and the LASER are disabled However power remains applied to the IMAGER If you need to activate the MOTORS actuate the SERVICE SWITCH Be aware that hazardous voltages are present in some areas of the IMAGER These voltages can cause severe injury or death 3 Pull the top of the REAR PANEL BACK and lift up to remove the PANEL FEET from the SLOTS in the MACHINE BASE 4 Setthe REAR PANEL aside L gt Note During reassembly ensure that the INTERLOCK on the REAR COVER is engaged before tightening the SCREWS 8100 77L Figure 4 1 Removing the REAR PANEL 4 2 7F 3318 2005 J uly Rev B Section 4 Disassembly Reassembl 4 2 FILM PROCESSOR ASSEMBLY Caution Any CIRCUIT BOARD that is replaced in the IMAGER must be retu
410. ut Service Collection CD set gt Note The MCS micro slave master system is described paragraph 6 4 1 and functions of the MCS Board are described in more detail in paragraph 6 4 2 Laser Optics Subsystem and Optics Module Control Board The laser optics control scanning and exposure of the film The Optics Module Control Board contains a slave micro system that controls the Optics Spinner Motor and Attenuator Motor and receives sense inputs from the Attenuator Home Sensor and Shaft Index Sensor This board also houses the laser SOS Start of Scan Detector that synchronizes image scanning and the Laser Beam Power Monitor Laser power 12 vdc and the image drive signals analog are routed from the MCS Board through this board to the laser See paragraph 6 4 3 e Densitometer Board Contains a slave micro A D converter and PAL that measure film density and report it to the Master CPU Two density measurements are made during normal imager operation 1 The Dpatch on the trailing edge of each sheet of film is checked and 2 Step wedges are measured on test calibration film See paragraph 6 4 4 e RF Tag Subsystem This subsystem includes three boards An RF Tag Interface Board an RF Reader Transceiver Board and an RF Antenna Board The RF Tag Interface Board contains a slave micro system that controls reading and reporting of the data on the film cartridge RF tag The slave micro receives commands from the MCS and c
411. ve the TOP HOOKS from the ROD Then tip the FILM PICKUP ASSEMBLY slightly to the left and lower it to remove it Caution Be careful in reassembly to avoid damaging WIRES and CONNECTORS Do not damage fragile actuators of Film Out and Film Surface Sensors Front View Rear View 8100 798 Figure 4 16 Removing the FILM PICKUP ASSEMBLY 2005 J uly Rev 7F3318 4 19 Service Manual 4 6 2 FILM PICKUP CUPS 1 Remove the SUPPLY CARTRIDGE A Warning When the POWER CORD is plugged in hazardous voltages are present in some areas of the IMAGER These voltages can cause severe injury or death 2 Remove power and disconnect the POWER CORD 3 Remove each FILM PICKUP CUP as follows a Inserta small flat blade screwdriver into the SLOT at the center of each CUP and turn counterclockwise to remove the CUP and HUB Figure 4 17 b Use the FLAT BLADE SCREWDRIVER to pry the HUB from the CUP 4 When reassembling the CUPS do not overtighten the HUBS Vacuum Hose 8100 751 Figure 4 17 Replacing the PICKUP CUPS 7F 3318 2005 J uly Rev B Section 4 Disassembly Reassembl 4 6 3 FILM PICKUP HEEL PAD 1 Remove the SUPPLY CARTRIDGE A Warning When the POWER CORD is plugged in hazardous voltages are present in some areas of the IMAGER These voltages can cause severe injury or death 2 DE energ
412. ventRe The IMAGER can automatically send YES unless the user does not ports changes in its status to the SCU when the want the reports sent Such re changes occur ports can cause problems in some SCUs For Always Apply select NO Send Warnings The IMAGER can also send non fatal warn YES unless the user does not ing messages to the SCU when problems oc want the messages sent cur film jams etc Print Priority The order of printing from the SCUs can be Check with the user for the print prioritized by selecting LOW NORMAL or priority for this SCU STAT High priority for particular SCUs For Always Apply select NO 2mm Border Selects 2mm border for non requested The default is NO image size jobs Film Clip Border Enbles use of clipping border of 22 1 mm for The default is NO jobs that have more than one image with a requested image size that does not resize images Film Base BLUE FILM or CLEAR FILM If the SCU does not send film base type Select the correct type For Always Apply select YES Film Size 3 sizes are available 14 x 17 in 11 x 14 in Selectthe correct size and 14 x 14 in For Always Apply select NO Include print date in If the user wants the date of image acquisi Check with user annotation tion to be annotated on the print select YES Include print time in If the user wants the time of printing to be an Check with user annotation notated on the pri
413. wer table numbers have less mid tone contrast Higher numbers have more Alternative 1 Table number choices vary with manufacturer and radiologist Higher table numbers have in PMSV3K 7 10 13 Alternative 2 creased brightness Note The number in bold should be the first choice when you are selecting parameter values VER693C0 Siemens Host Control WRKSTN2A 15 Typically the density is or WORKSTATION set to 2 8 by the Sie mens host control soft ware Table 4 must be chosen for linear grayscale translation 2005 J uly Rev B 7F3318 2 51 Service Manual Table 2 5 GSDFO Dmax Setting vs Table Number Contrast Setting Density Dmax Table No Contrast 1 1 1 2 2 NA NA NTN gt 7 7 8 0 1 NA N N N N Density and Table No must be chosen in the pairs shown 1 2 3 5 7 10 11 12 13 14 15 w w N ej O 7338 2005 July Rev Section 2 Installation 2 11 5 TFT Set Descriptions AIRIS2A Designed to meet Hitachi requirements for a TFT SET that when used for printing on Kodak DryView FILMS can perceptually match films printed on a 969 HQ wet LASER IMAGER when TFT SET VER693CO with Contrast 6 and Dmax 3 0 is used in the HQ To do this the AIRIS2A TFT SET is designed for overall similarity to the VER693CO TFT SET but provides lower measured densities in the darker part of the density range In the AIRIS2A SET Contrast
414. y Click to show Result Data b Set the Copies window at 1 c Click Run 6 As the leading edge of the film comes up into the PROCESSOR a Insert a small strip of film under the COVER for the DENSITOMETER EXIT SENSOR Figure 7 23 to lift the ACTUATOR of the SENSOR This will prevent a J am in Area 5 error Leave the SENSOR actuated for 10 15 seconds b Grasp and remove the film before it contacts the DRUM see Figure 7 24 7 Examine the film for scratches Ifthe film does not have scratches the problem is on the exit side of the PROCESSOR FILM DIVERTER FELT PAD COOLING PLATE or DENSITOMETER turnaround See paragraph 7 6 3 the film does have scratches they are occurring the FILM PLATEN or FILM TRANSPORT See paragraph 7 6 4 m W Insert film strip to lift ACTUA TOR of DENSITOMETER EXIT SENSOR Pods SE Remove 2 screws from each side to pull ASSEMBLY out 8100 220L Figure 7 23 Actuating the DENSITOMETER EXIT SENSOR 2005 J uly Rev 7F3318 Service Manual FILM 7 DIVERTER Remove film here FELT PAD Area to isolate problem to either PROCESSOR DENSITOMETER area or FILM PLATEN area DENSITOMETER Turnaround Area Figure 7 24 Locating the Source of Film Scratching 7 6 3 Locating the Cause of Scratching t
415. y do the Optics Translation Speed and SOP Adjustment paragraph 3 4 H l 4 74 lt l e mm Fd Ta UT amp A m umm v eL n fi 8100 101C Figure 4 43 Replacing the OPTICS HOME SENSOR S7 2005 J uly Rev B 7F3318 4 49 Service Manual 4 11 5 OPTICS TRANSLATION MOTOR Step 4 and CAPSTAN 1 Remove the SUPPLY CARTRIDGE A Warning When the POWER CORD is plugged in hazardous voltages are present in some areas of the IMAGER These voltages can cause severe injury or death 2 De energize the IMAGER and disconnect the POWER CORD 3 Do steps 3 through 7 of paragraph 4 11 1 to expose the OPTICS TRANSLATION MOTOR It is not necessary to completely remove the IMAGING MODULE from the IMAGER Remove the MOTOR CONNECTOR from the CHASSIS Figure 4 44 Remove 1 nut M6 and COMPRESSION SPRING L gt Note Remove CABLE TIES as necessary 6 Remove the MOTOR and CAPSTAN along with the BRACKET ASSEMBLY L gt Note During reassembly after installing the NUT M6 and COMPRESSION SPRING tighten the NUT so itis flush with the end of the BOLT 7 After reassembly do the Optics Translation Speed and SOP Delay Adjustment pa
416. y Rev B Section 8 QuickSheets 8 5 52 21 921 FEEDER Diagnostics Failure LOCAL PANEL Message Log Message DICOM Message Severity Feeder Diagnostics Failure Feeder Board diagnostics failure ELEC DOWN 0 F atal Alarm sounds Summary A component in the FEEDER MODULE has failed the power up self test At power up the FEEDER BOARD tests its circuits and all the MOTORS SENSORS and mechanics that compose the FILM FEED SYSTEM If a test failure occurs after 3 tries this error is declared A problem with any of the FEEDER MODULE components will generate the same error code 21 921 Result of Error The IMAGER is unable to print Otherwise it can operate as normal queuing prints completing processing etc User Action The operator can try to clear the error by cycling power However the error will likely require a Service call FE Action Suspect Components in most likely order SENSORS CABLES MOTORS mechanical parts FEEDER BOARD See the drawing on the next page for locations of motors and sensors 1 Check the MCS Log for the message 21 921 Printer Error 2 Use the power on self test troubleshooting procedure in paragraph 7 3 to attempt to isolate the error to a particular faulty component SENSOR MOTOR CABLE etc This procedure instructs you to cycle power and observe the power on Self test process L gt Note The flow charts on the following pages Figure 8 1 Sheets 1 3 show the complete sequence of
417. y are alibrate Failure reprinted after calibration Calibrate optics Print calibration and define step film wedge laser values DOOR OPEN Figure 6 27 Sequence of AIQC and GSM Functions 6 50 7F3318 2005 uly Rev B Section 7 Troubleshooting Section 7 Troubleshooting 7 1 General Troubleshooting Table Table 7 1 contains a list of IMAGER problems along with causes and recommended remedies Table 7 1 General Problem Analysis Error code on LOCAL MACHINE problem See Section 8 PANEL IMAGER hangs up during Failed SENSOR See paragraph 7 2 8 a functional sequence Failed MOTOR See paragraph 7 2 6 Error code indicates a suspect SENSOR or MOTOR SYSTEM will not Possibilities are See 10 910 QuickS heetin S ection 8 communicate DRE to Network 10 x xx MCS Error 10 910 Software compatibility problem Corrupt DRE software Bad HARD DRIVE Bad PCIO BOARD Bad CABLE or connection MCS BOARD problem Scratches on film Dirt or foreign matter in film path See paragraph 7 6 Image stretched or OPTICS translation speed off or Adjust See paragraph 3 4 shortened SOP delay incorrect Clear margin on side of OPTICS translation speed off or Adjust See paragraph 3 4 film SOP delay incorrect Left and right margins of OPTICS translation speed off or Adjust See paragraph 3 4 film are not equal at about SOP delay incorrect 4 mm If position varies it may be caused Clean SCANNER RAILS with b
418. y translation interference dirty CLEANING PAD and ISOPROPYL PLATEN or HARNESS catching ALCOHOL Also clean CABLE and FLYWHEEL Check for interference with HARNESS Banding on film May be caused by PROCESSOR Replace ROLLERS as necessary ROLLERS White streaks on film Parity error or data underrun If there See QuickSheet for Error Code are a number of streaks could bea 20 912 bad CABLE connection Sharply defined clear Debris from rubber PLATEN Clean the PLATEN paragraph specks on film usually in ROLLERS is deposited on film 5 4 5 lower left area of film during film centering Clear specks appear on film in areas where debris contacts film during exposure 2005 J uly Rev B 7F3318 7 1 Service Manual Intermittent vertical bands with the lines alternating light and dark The lines are about 0 5 mm wide These vibration bands occur more often in mobile An external motion affects the IMAGER during exposure This can be from a DOOR closing MOBILE LIFT operating vibration of an AIR CONDITIONER a person touching the IMAGER or even a person vans but can also occur at walking in the area fixed sites Vertical bands similar to vibration bands except the bands are narrower usually less than 0 5 mm wide Clear broad vertical lines repeated in the same area but intermittent Vertical line down the film usually not completely down the full length of the film Vertical bands repeated

Warning

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents